BK 2250 2270 Uputstvo

USER MANUAL
Hand-held Analyzer
Types 2250 and 2270
With Sound Level Meter Software BZ-7222,
Frequency Analysis Software BZ-7223,
Logging Software BZ-7224,
Enhanced Logging Software BZ -7225,
Signal Recording Option BZ-7226,
Reverberation Time Software BZ-7227,
2-channel Option BZ-7229
Tone Assessment Option BZ-7231 and
Enhanced Vibration and Low Frequency Option BZ-7234
BE 1713 – 34
English
BE 1713 – 34
ËBE-1713---|Î
www.bksv.com © Brüel & Kjær. All rights reserved.

Hand-held Analyzer
Types 2250 and 2270
with
Sound Level Meter Software BZ-7222,
Enhanced Logging Software BZ-7225,
2-channel Option BZ-7229,
User Manual
Valid for all hardware versions and from software version 4.7
BE 1713−34
November 2016 www.bksv.com
Health and Safety Considerations Electrical Hazards
This apparatus has been designed and tested in accordance Warning: Any adjustment, maintenance and
with IEC/EN 61010 – 1 and ANSI/UL 61010 – 1 Safety repair of the open apparatus under voltage must
Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement, be avoided as far as possible and, if unavoidable,
Control and Laboratory Use . This manual contains must be carried out only by trained service
information and warnings which must be followed to ensure
safe operation and to retain the apparatus in safe condition. Caution: Switch off all power to equipment before
connecting or disconnecting their digital
interface. Failure to do so could damage the
Safety Symbols and Signal Words Used equipment
The apparatus will be marked with this symbol
when it is important that you refer to the Mechanical Hazards
associated danger or warning statement given in Caution: Whenever it is likely that the correct function or
this manual operating safety of the apparatus has been
impaired, it must be made inoperative and be
The manual uses this symbol when a danger or secured against unintended operation
warning statement is applicable
Hazardous Voltage/Electricity. Both the apparatus Waste Handling
and manual use this symbol when there is a risk for Brüel & Kjær complies with the EU’s Waste Electrical
shock or electrocution and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Directive, which issues
Hot Surface. This manual will use this symbol when the following waste handling instructions:
there is a risk for burning or scolding • Do not dispose of electronic equipment or
batteries as unsorted municipal waste
Earth (Ground) Terminal. The apparatus will be • It is your responsibility to contribute to a clean
marked with this symbol when applicable and healthy environment by using the
Protective Conductor Terminal. The apparatus will appropriate local return and collection systems
be marked with this symbol when applicable • Hazardous substances in electronic equipment or
batteries may have detrimental effects on the
Alternating Current. The apparatus will be marked environment and human health
with this symbol when applicable • The symbol shown to the left indicates that
Danger Signals an imminent hazardous situation, which, if separate collection systems must be used for any
not avoided, will result in death or serious injury discarded equipment or batteries marked with
that symbol
Warning Signals a possibly hazardous situation, which, if • Waste electrical and electronic equipment or
not avoided, will result in death or serious injury batteries may be returned to your local
Caution Signals a hazardous situation, which, if not Brüel & Kjær representative or to Brüel & Kjær
avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury Headquarters for disposal
or damage to the apparatus
Notice Signals a situation or practice that requires
attention, but does not directly result in personal
injury if ignored
Risks and Hazards
Explosion Hazards
Danger: The apparatus is not designed to be used
in potentially explosive environments. It should
not be operated in the presence of flammable
liquids or gases
Brüel & Kjær has made every effort to ensure the accuracy of Brüel & Kjær and all other trademarks, service marks, trade
the information contained in this document. No responsibility names, logos and product names are the property of
is accepted for any errors or omissions herein. It is the Brüel & Kjær or a third-party company. Nothing in this
responsibility of the user to ensure compliance with any legal document may be construed as granting, by implication, or
or statutory requirements in the country of use. Data may otherwise any license or right to use any of the trademarks
change, as well as legislation, therefore you are advised to without a prior written permission of Brüel & Kjær or the owner
obtain copies of the most recently issued applicable of such trademark.
regulations, standards and guidelines.
© Brüel & Kjær. All rights reserved.
All descriptions, illustrations and any other information relating
to the product are made by way of general description, are Brüel & Kjær Sound & Vibration Measurement A/S
approximate only and for the general guidance and information DK-2850 Nærum · Denmark
of the user. They cannot be construed to imply representation or
warranty as to their accuracy, currency or completeness and are For service and support, contact your nearest Brüel & Kjær
not intended to form the basis of any contract. Customer Care support team:
Headquarters: info@bksv.com, +45 7741 2400
The information in this document does not constitute a China (Beijing): +86 10 59935811
warranty, representation or guarantee concerning the France: service.fr@bksv.com, +33 1 69 90 71 02
suitability or performance of the product. Germany: bkservice.de@bksv.com, +49 421 17 87 0
Italy: it.info@bksv.com, +39 02 5768061
Brüel & Kjær shall not be liable for any loss whether direct, Japan: info_jp@bksv.com, +81 3 6810 3500
indirect, incidental or consequential arising from the use of or North & South America: bkservice@bksv.com,
reliance upon any of the content of this document, regardless +1 770 209 6907
of whether such content has been accurate or complete. Spain: servicio.tecnico@bksv.com, +34 91 659 08 20
Brüel & Kjær will not pay any damages whether for loss or UK & Ireland: ukservice@bksv.com, +44 1223 389800
injury, punitive or otherwise, because of use of or reliance upon Go to www.bksv.com/contact for contact information to our
any of the content in this document. other global offices.
Contents
CHAPTER 1
Introduction............................................................................................................................. 1
1.1 How to Use this Manual ........................................................................................................... 1
Conventions Used in this Manual ............................................................................................. 1
Beginners .................................................................................................................................. 2
Experienced Users of Acoustic Measurement Equipment ....................................................... 2
CHAPTER 2
Assembling your Analyzer ....................................................................................................... 3
2.1 Determining Your Hardware Version........................................................................................ 3
What is Different with G4 Hardware? ...................................................................................... 3
2.2 Analyzer Components............................................................................................................... 4
2.3 Analyzer Inputs/Outputs........................................................................................................... 7
Hardware Versions 1 – 3 (G1 – 3): ............................................................................................ 7
Hardware Version 4 (G4): ......................................................................................................... 8
Description of Inputs and Outputs ........................................................................................... 9
2.4 Hardware Setup ...................................................................................................................... 13
2.5 Assembling the Analyzer......................................................................................................... 14
Charging the Battery for the First Time .................................................................................. 14
Making Good Measurements ................................................................................................. 14
Alternative Measurement Method (Extended Microphone) ................................................. 15
Measuring for Convenience.................................................................................................... 17
Measuring Using Accelerometers........................................................................................... 17
CHAPTER 3
Making your First Measurement ............................................................................................ 19
3.1 Point and Shoot ...................................................................................................................... 19
3.2 Making a Measurement.......................................................................................................... 20
Switching On ........................................................................................................................... 20
Select Template and Measure ................................................................................................ 20
3.3 Save your Measurement......................................................................................................... 24
Viewing the Saved Measurement........................................................................................... 25
3.4 Document your Measurement ............................................................................................... 26
Annotation Tutorial ................................................................................................................ 30
3.5 Switching Off........................................................................................................................... 30
vi Hand-held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 – User Manual
CHAPTER 4
Getting to Know Your Analyzer.............................................................................................. 31
4.1 What is a Sound Level Meter?................................................................................................ 31
4.2 What is the Hand-held Analyzer?........................................................................................... 32
Sound Level Meter Software Module BZ-7222 ...................................................................... 32
Frequency Analysis Software Module BZ-7223...................................................................... 34
Logging Software Module BZ-7224 ........................................................................................ 34
Enhanced Logging Software Module BZ-7225........................................................................ 34
Signal Recording Option BZ-7226 ........................................................................................... 34
Reverberation Time Software BZ-7227 .................................................................................. 35
2-channel Option BZ-7229 (Type 2270 only).......................................................................... 35
Tone Assessment Option BZ-7231.......................................................................................... 35
Enhanced Vibration and Low Frequency Option BZ-7234...................................................... 35
4.3 Built-in Help............................................................................................................................ 36
Software and Hardware Versions........................................................................................... 36
4.4 What is Measurement Partner Suite BZ-5503?...................................................................... 36
4.5 Basic Principles when using the Analyzer............................................................................... 37
Navigation Principles – ‘Star’ Navigation Concept ................................................................. 37
The Display Screen ................................................................................................................. 40
Use of Pushbuttons for Controlling Measurements............................................................... 43
On-screen Feedback and Traffic Light .................................................................................... 44
Use of Stylus and Navigation Pushbuttons............................................................................. 44
How to Change Parameter Values.......................................................................................... 45
How to Personalize your Setup .............................................................................................. 47
How to Manage the Project Templates.................................................................................. 48
Locking the Pushbuttons and Display..................................................................................... 50
CHAPTER 5
Calibration............................................................................................................................. 51
5.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................ 51
5.2 Calibration Types.................................................................................................................... 51
5.3 Sound Level Calibration.......................................................................................................... 52
Standard Calibration............................................................................................................... 52
Calibration Settings ................................................................................................................ 54
5.4 Calibration History.................................................................................................................. 55
5.5 Transducer Database.............................................................................................................. 55
5.6 Calibration Reminder ............................................................................................................. 57
5.7 Charge Injection Calibration................................................................................................... 58
Theory of Charge Injection Calibration................................................................................... 58
Performing a Manual CIC with your Type 2250/2270 ............................................................ 59
5.8 Vibration Calibration .............................................................................................................. 60
CHAPTER 6
Data Management................................................................................................................. 61
6.1 Organizing Measurements ..................................................................................................... 61
vii
Description of Jobs and Projects............................................................................................. 61

Navigating in Jobs ................................................................................................................... 62
6.2 Selecting Default Measurement Job/Path.............................................................................. 63
6.3 Recalling Measurements ........................................................................................................ 64
Viewing Data and Reusing Setups from Projects .................................................................... 64
Viewing or Listening to Annotations and Metadata ............................................................... 64
6.4 Measurement Partner Cloud .................................................................................................. 65
Connecting the Analyzer to MP Cloud .................................................................................... 66
Managing MP Cloud on the Analyzer ..................................................................................... 67
CHAPTER 7
Connection to PC or Smartphone or Measurement Partner Field App .................................... 69
7.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................ 69
7.2 Transferring Measurement Data to Your PC .......................................................................... 70
Connect to Your PC ................................................................................................................. 71
Post-processing and Reporting ............................................................................................... 71
7.3 Measurement Partner (MP) Field App.................................................................................... 72
Annotations ............................................................................................................................ 73
Connect the Analyzer to MP Field App ................................................................................... 73
7.4 Internet Browser for Online Display and Control of the Analyzer .......................................... 74
CHAPTER 8
Advanced Use of the Analyzer – Tips and Tricks ..................................................................... 79
8.1 Setting your Preferences on the Analyzer .............................................................................. 79
Display..................................................................................................................................... 79
Power...................................................................................................................................... 80
Regional .................................................................................................................................. 82
Users and Projects .................................................................................................................. 83
Headphone Settings................................................................................................................ 85
Printers ................................................................................................................................... 86
8.2 Modem/DynDNS Settings ....................................................................................................... 86
Connection to the Network using a LAN Modem ................................................................... 87
Connection to Network using GPRS/EDGE/HSPA Modem...................................................... 87
DynDNS ................................................................................................................................... 88
8.3 Network Settings .................................................................................................................... 89
Connecting to the Analyzer .................................................................................................... 90
Parameters in Network Settings ............................................................................................. 91
8.4 Notifications............................................................................................................................ 93
Alarm Settings......................................................................................................................... 93
Text/SMS Notifications ........................................................................................................... 95
Email Notifications.................................................................................................................. 96
8.5 Web Server ............................................................................................................................. 97
Password Protection............................................................................................................... 97
8.6 Connecting to Weather Stations and GPS Receivers .............................................................. 97
Weather Stations .................................................................................................................... 97
viii Hand-held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 – User Manual
GPS Receivers ......................................................................................................................... 98

8.7 Preparing your Measurements............................................................................................... 99
Metadata ................................................................................................................................ 99
Timers and Automatic Measurements................................................................................. 101
CHAPTER 9
Updating and Upgrading Applications, Maintenance, Calibration and Troubleshooting ....... 103
9.1 How to Install New Applications .......................................................................................... 103
9.2 How to Update/Upgrade Applications and Install New Languages ..................................... 103
Update/Upgrade using BZ-5503........................................................................................... 103
Update through the Internet................................................................................................ 104
Downgrade to an Earlier Version ......................................................................................... 105
9.3 How to Move a License ........................................................................................................ 106
9.4 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................... 106
Measurements ..................................................................................................................... 106
SD/CF Cards and USB Sticks.................................................................................................. 106
Battery Pack and Recalibration of Battery Charge Indicator................................................ 108
Touch Screen ........................................................................................................................ 108
Reset Options ....................................................................................................................... 109
9.5 Care, Cleaning and Storage .................................................................................................. 112
Handling the Analyzer .......................................................................................................... 112
Cleaning the Analyzer........................................................................................................... 112
Storing the Analyzer ............................................................................................................. 112
9.6 Services at Brüel & Kjær for Types 2250 and 2270 .............................................................. 113
Accredited Calibration.......................................................................................................... 113
Initial Calibration .................................................................................................................. 113
Regular Recalibration ........................................................................................................... 113
Filter Calibration................................................................................................................... 113
Service and Repair ................................................................................................................ 113
Hardware Maintenance and Repair ..................................................................................... 114
Rental ................................................................................................................................... 114
Training................................................................................................................................. 114
CHAPTER 10
1/1- or 1/3-octave Frequency Analysis (Optional Module) ................................................... 115
10.1 Setting up the Analyzer ........................................................................................................ 115
10.2 Controlling the Measurement .............................................................................................. 116
10.3 Displaying the Results........................................................................................................... 116
Smileys.................................................................................................................................. 121
10.4 Saving Results ....................................................................................................................... 121
CHAPTER 11
Logging (Optional Module) .................................................................................................. 123
ix
Annotating a Project ............................................................................................................. 127

Recording the Signal ............................................................................................................. 127
11.3 Displaying the Results ........................................................................................................... 127
The Profile Tab...................................................................................................................... 128
Marking Sound Categories.................................................................................................... 131
Editing Markers on Profiles................................................................................................... 132
Annotate Sound Categories .................................................................................................. 133
Editing Annotations on Profiles ............................................................................................ 134
11.4 Saving and Recalling Results ................................................................................................. 134
CHAPTER 12
Enhanced Logging (Optional Module) .................................................................................. 135
12.1 Setting up the Analyzer......................................................................................................... 136
Annotating a Project ............................................................................................................. 138
Recording the Signal ............................................................................................................. 138
12.3 Displaying the Results ........................................................................................................... 138
The Profile Tab...................................................................................................................... 139
Displaying Noise Indicators................................................................................................... 139
Saving and Recalling Results ................................................................................................. 140
CHAPTER 13
Signal Recording Option....................................................................................................... 141
13.1 Sound Level Meter and Frequency Analysis Software.......................................................... 141
Setting up the Analyzer......................................................................................................... 141
Controlling the Recording ..................................................................................................... 143
Playing the Recording ........................................................................................................... 143
13.2 Logging and Enhanced Logging Software ............................................................................. 144
Setting up the Analyzer......................................................................................................... 144
Controlling the Recording ..................................................................................................... 145
Control Recording using the Stylus ....................................................................................... 146
Playing the Recording ........................................................................................................... 147
Signal Recordings on the PC.................................................................................................. 149
CHAPTER 14
Reverberation Time Software (Optional Module) ................................................................ 151
14.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 151
Definition .............................................................................................................................. 151
How Do We Measure Reverberation Time? ......................................................................... 152
14.2 Setting up the Analyzer......................................................................................................... 155
Interrupted Noise Method.................................................................................................... 156
Impulsive Method................................................................................................................. 156
Signal Recording ................................................................................................................... 157
Controlling the Measurement .............................................................................................. 157
Serial Measurements ............................................................................................................ 157
x Hand-held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 – User Manual
Annotating Projects and Positions ....................................................................................... 159

14.3 Displaying the Results........................................................................................................... 159
Overview .............................................................................................................................. 159
Spectrum .............................................................................................................................. 161
Decay .................................................................................................................................... 163
14.4 Measurements with Graphical Position Management......................................................... 165
14.5 Quality Indicators ................................................................................................................. 169
14.6 Saving and Recalling Results................................................................................................. 170
CHAPTER 15
Tone Assessment Option BZ-7231 – 1/3-octave Method ...................................................... 171
15.1 Tone Assessment According to ISO 1996-2, Annex D........................................................... 172
ISO 1996-2, Annex D – Tone Assessment Calculations......................................................... 172
15.2 Tone Assessment According to Italian Law .......................................................................... 174
Selecting the Tone Assessment Option ................................................................................ 175
Setting up a Measurement Manually ................................................................................... 176
Setting up the Measurement using the Default Setup......................................................... 177
Signal Recording ................................................................................................................... 178
15.4 Measuring............................................................................................................................. 179
Result Display ....................................................................................................................... 179
15.5 Logging Software BZ-7224 Template.................................................................................... 180
15.6 Enhanced Logging Software BZ-7225 Template................................................................... 181
15.7 Status Codes (Smileys).......................................................................................................... 181
15.8 Recalling Saved Measurements............................................................................................ 183
CHAPTER 16
2-channel Option BZ-7229 ................................................................................................... 185
16.1 Connecting Transducers ....................................................................................................... 186
16.2 Range Setting........................................................................................................................ 186
Underrange/Overload .......................................................................................................... 187
16.3 Setting Up 2-channel Sound Level Meter............................................................................. 187
Displaying the Results........................................................................................................... 188
Saving Results ....................................................................................................................... 189
16.4 Setting Up 2-channel Frequency Analyzer ........................................................................... 189
Saving Results ....................................................................................................................... 192
16.5 Setting Up 2-channel Logging and Enhanced Logging.......................................................... 192
Saving Results ...................................................................................................................... 193
16.6 Setting Up 2-channel Signal Recording................................................................................. 193
xi
CHAPTER 17
Enhanced Vibration and Low-frequency Option BZ-7234...................................................... 195
17.1 Sound Measurements and G-weighting ............................................................................... 196
Setting up the Analyzer for G-weighting............................................................................... 197
Displaying the Results ........................................................................................................... 198
17.2 General Vibration Measurements ........................................................................................ 199
Setting up the Analyzer for General Vibration Measurements ............................................ 200
17.3 Human Vibration Measurements ......................................................................................... 204
Setting up the Analyzer for Human Vibration Measurements ............................................. 205
17.4 Setting Up the Frequency Analyzer Module for Very Low Frequencies ............................... 207
Saving Results ....................................................................................................................... 208
CHAPTER 18
Specifications....................................................................................................................... 209
APPENDIX A
Setup Parameters ................................................................................................................ 229
A.1 Input...................................................................................................................................... 230
A.2 Frequency Settings ............................................................................................................... 233
A.3 Statistics................................................................................................................................ 237
A.4 Measurement Control – for BZ-7222 to BZ-7225 ................................................................. 238
A.5 Measurement Control – for Reverberation Time Software BZ-7227 ................................... 241
A.6 Logged (10/100 ms) .............................................................................................................. 243
A.7 Logged Broadband................................................................................................................ 243
A.8 Logged Spectrum .................................................................................................................. 246
A.9 Markers................................................................................................................................. 247
A.10 Level Trigger.......................................................................................................................... 248
A.11 Triggers ................................................................................................................................. 251
A.12 Units...................................................................................................................................... 255
A.13 Signal Recording ................................................................................................................... 256
A.14 Output Socket Signal............................................................................................................. 261
A.15 Lden Periods........................................................................................................................... 262
A.16 Occupational Health ............................................................................................................. 263
A.17 Generator ............................................................................................................................. 264
A.18 Post-processing..................................................................................................................... 266
A.19 Tone Assessment .................................................................................................................. 267
A.20 RPM Measurements ............................................................................................................. 269
xii Hand-held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 – User Manual
APPENDIX B
Measurement Parameters ................................................................................................... 271
B.1 Total Measurement (Microphone Input) ............................................................................. 272
For Sound Level Meter Software BZ-7222, Frequency Analysis Software BZ-7223, Logging
Software BZ-7224 and Enhanced Logging Software BZ-7225 272
B.2 Periodic Reports (Microphone Input)................................................................................... 276
For Enhanced Logging Software BZ-7225............................................................................. 276
B.3 Logged Measurement (Microphone Input) .......................................................................... 279
For Logging Software BZ-7224 and Enhanced Logging Software BZ-7225 ........................... 279
B.4 Logged (10/100 ms) Measurement (Microphone Input) ..................................................... 281
For Logging Software BZ-7224 and Enhanced Logging Software BZ-7225 ........................... 281
B.5 Instantaneous Measured Parameters (available at any time; Microphone Input) .............. 282
Processed Parameters for Display Only (Microphone Input) ............................................... 283
B.6 Total Measurement (Accelerometer and Direct Input)........................................................ 284
For Sound Level Meter Software BZ-7222, Frequency Analysis Software BZ-7223, Logging
Software BZ-7224 and Enhanced Logging Software BZ-7225 284
Periodic Reports (Accelerometer or Direct input)................................................................ 285
Logged Measurement (Accelerometer or Direct input) ....................................................... 286
Logged (100 ms) Measurement (Accelerometer or Direct input) ........................................ 288
Instantaneous Measured Parameters (Available at Any Time; Accelerometer or Direct input).
288
Relationship Between Setup and Measurement Parameters .............................................. 289
B.7 Reverberation Time Measurement ...................................................................................... 291
For Reverberation Time Software BZ-7227 .......................................................................... 291
APPENDIX C
Analyzer Parameters............................................................................................................ 293
C.1 Current Transducer .............................................................................................................. 294
C.2 Transducer Database............................................................................................................ 295
Transducer Setup ................................................................................................................. 295
Calibration History................................................................................................................ 297
C.3 Calibration Setup .................................................................................................................. 299
C.4 Type 2250/2270 Microphones ............................................................................................. 300
APPENDIX D
Preferences ......................................................................................................................... 303
D.1 Display Settings .................................................................................................................... 303
D.2 Power Settings...................................................................................................................... 304
D.3 Regional Settings .................................................................................................................. 305
D.4 Users and Projects Settings .................................................................................................. 306
D.5 Headphone Settings ............................................................................................................. 306
D.6 Printer Settings..................................................................................................................... 308
D.7 Modem/DynDNS Settings..................................................................................................... 309
D.8 Network Settings .................................................................................................................. 310
D.9 Measurement Partner Cloud Settings .................................................................................. 312
xiii
D.10 Notification Settings ............................................................................................................. 313

D.11 Remote Access Settings ........................................................................................................ 316
D.12 Image Settings (Type 2270 only)........................................................................................... 317
D.13 NMT Server Settings (Hardware Version 4 only) .................................................................. 317
APPENDIX E
Glossary............................................................................................................................... 319
INDEX........................................................................................................................................................... 333
xiv Hand-held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 – User Manual
1
Introduction
This manual describes Hand-held Analyzer Type 2250 and Hand-held Analyzer Type 2270
platforms, including:
• Sound Level Meter Software BZ-7222
• Frequency Analysis Software BZ-7223
• Logging Software BZ-7224
• Enhanced Logging Software BZ-7225
• Signal Recording Option BZ-7226
• Reverberation Time Software BZ-7227
• 2-channel Option BZ-7229
• Tone Assessment Option BZ-7231
• Enhanced Vibration and Low Frequency Option BZ-7234
The manual explains how to perform a basic sound measurement, which parameters you can
measure and how the hand-held analyzer should be operated. In addition, some practical hints
and guidelines are provided, including all relevant technical specifications. Finally, a glossary is
added to help with specific terminology found in this manual.
This manual is intended for all hardware versions (from 1 to 4). All hardware versions support the
latest application software covered in this manual.
1.1 How to Use this Manual
1.1.1 Conventions Used in this Manual

“Analyzer” refers to Type 2250 or Type 2270 if the description is valid for both types.
Instructions and descriptions that refer to the analyzer pushbuttons are shown with the
pushbutton icons as seen on the analyzer. See Chapter 2 for a list of pushbutton icons and their
functions.
Icons, Buttons and Tabs Used on the Screen

Indicated by bold type face (for example, tap Main Menu icon).
Parameter Values, Text and Variables

Parameter values, instructions, descriptions appearing on the screen and variables are indicated
by italics (for example, Internal Disk).
2 Hand-held Analyzer Types 2250 and 2270 – User Manual
Menu, Parameters and Screen Navigation

Indicated by bold type face (for example, Setup > Frequency Settings > BB Peak).
Keyboard Entries
Keyboard entries and combinations are indicated by bold type face within angle brackets (for
example, <Ctrl+b> means you should press the Ctrl button and b button at the same time).
1.1.2 Beginners
Before you read the rest of this manual, read Brüel & Kjær’s primer on Measuring Sound. This will
give you a basic idea of acoustic measurements. It can be found on the www.bksv.com website,
by typing ‘Primer’ in the search window. The website also contains lots of other information you
might find useful.
Further information is available in the online help installed on the analyzer.
1.1.3 Experienced Users of Acoustic Measurement Equipment

The manual is designed so that you do not have to read all of it to be able to use the analyzer. It
is built around the most frequently used operations, these are as follows:
• Assembling your Analyzer (see Chapter 2)
• Making your First Measurement (see Chapter 3)
• Getting to Know Your Analyzer (see Chapter 4)
• Calibration (see Chapter 5)
• Data Management (see Chapter 6)
• Connection to PC or Smartphone or Measurement Partner Field App (see Chapter 7)
• Advanced Use of the Analyzer – Tips and Tricks (see Chapter 8)
• Updating and Upgrading Applications, Maintenance and Troubleshooting (see Chapter 9)
However, it is recommended that you read the entire manual for appropriate procedures on how
to use the analyzer to obtain accurate sound level measurement results.
3
Chapter 2
Assembling your Analyzer
This chapter describes how to assemble and set up your analyzer, including:
• Necessary information concerning the analyzer’s hardware version
• A diagram and brief description of the analyzer components and various input and output
connections
• An overview of hardware components, showing the main configurations of the analyzer and
its accessories
• Instructions on how to assemble standard and optional hardware components
2.1 Determining Your Hardware Version

Analyzer hardware is periodically updated. The most significant update was to hardware
version 4 (G4) in 2012. To check if your analyzer uses G4 hardware, tap then About. The About
screen will list the hardware and software versions currently installed.
2.1.1 What is Different with G4 Hardware?

The differences in the G4 hardware compared to previous versions include:
• A brighter screen that is easier to view in direct sunlight
• The CF card slot was replaced with a second SD card slot to take advantage of the SD format’s
dominance in the storage and Wi-Fi markets
• The USB connector was changed from USB 1.1 Mini B to USB 2.0 Micro AB. The USB 2.0
connection speeds are faster, and the Micro USB connector is more common
• A second standard USB Type A socket was added for easier connection to USB peripherals
such as Wi-Fi dongles, modems, printers, GPS receivers, and USB to RS–232 adaptors
• A 100 Mbps Local Area Network (LAN) connector is available for both Types 2250 and 2270
2.2 Analyzer Components

An overview of the main analyzer components is provided in Fig.2.1 and the text below.
Fig.2.1 Analyzer components
17
22
3 4
15
5
16
6 7
8 9
19
11
10
20
12
13
24 14
18
21
23
CHAPTER 2
5
1) Measurement Microphone: A Brüel & Kjær Prepolarized Free-field ½″ Microphone. A

robust and reliable microphone with a wide frequency range.
2) Preamplifier: Used to convert the high-impedance output of the microphone to low
impedance, suitable for driving long extension cables. The arrow points to the preamplifier’s
built-in windscreen sensor.
3) (Manual Event Pushbutton): Manually indicate events during a measurement. Using
BZ-7222 and BZ-7223 software you can control signal recording, and using BZ-7224 Logging
Software or BZ-7225 Enhanced Logging Software you can insert an Event Marker and control
recordings. With Type 2270 this button can also be used to capture images.
✐Please note: Signal recording requires a Signal Recording Option BZ-7226 license.
4) (Commentary Pushbutton): Add recorded audio messages to your measurement files.
5) , , , (Navigation Pushbuttons): These move the active screen component (Field
Selector) and navigate the user interface.
6) (Back-erase Pushbutton): Erase the last 5 seconds of measurement data or insert an
Exclude Marker (BZ-7224 Logging Software or BZ-7225 Enhanced Logging Software only).
7) (Accept Pushbutton): Accept changes you make to the analyzer’s setup.
8) (Reset Measurement Pushbutton): Clear the current measurement from the screen.
9) (Start/Pause/Continue Pushbutton): Start, pause or continue with a measurement.
10) (Status Indicator): The red, yellow or green lights, (or LEDs), referred to as the ‘Traffic
Light’ either side of the Start/Pause pushbutton, indicate important states of the analyzer
during operation, that is, measurement stopped, paused or running. See Chapter 4 for further
details.
11) (Save Pushbutton): Save measurement results.
12) Display Screen: A high-contrast, colour, touch-sensitive screen.
13) (Main Menu Icon): Calls up the Main Menu, which allows you to navigate immediately
to all the main functions of the analyzer, such as Setup, Explorer (or Data-browser),
Preferences, and Calibration.
14) (Power-on Pushbutton): Turns the analyzer on and off. If held in for 1 second, the
analyzer goes into standby mode; if held in for more than 4 seconds, it turns the analyzer off.
15) Stylus: Stored in a holder on the side of the analyzer, for use on the touch-sensitive screen.
You can choose to use the stylus or the hardkeys, depending on your preference and the
measurement situation. (Also see section 4.5.5.)
16) Secondary Microphone: Add recorded comments to measurements – positioned on the
underside of the analyzer.
17) Top Socket: The main microphone input socket for the analyzer. The measurement
microphone and preamplifier (items 1 and 2 respectively) are normally connected directly to
this socket. For more details see section 2.3.
18) Tripod Mounting Thread: Mount the analyzer onto the tripod and/or tripod extension.
19) Wrist Strap/Tripod Mounting Thread: Attach a wrist strap to the analyzer for added
security, or use it to mount the analyzer onto the tripod and/or tripod extension using Tripod
Adaptor UA-1673.
20) Internal Battery Pack: Rechargeable, high-capacity Li-Ion battery pack to power the
analyzer.
21) Hinged Cover FB-0679/FB-0699: A removable plastic cover, hinged at the top to provide
protection for the connector panel underneath. To remove, open the cover and pull the hinge
out of the slot at the top of the connector panel. The cover includes a rubber insert printed
with an overview of the main connectors and reset button for easy recognition. Indents are
provided on the inside of the cover (behind the insert) that allow you to drill holes in the
plastic cover, giving access to the main connectors underneath, so you can use the cover
while power or other cables are connected.
22) Camera (Type 2270 only): Add images to measurements. Protected and positioned on the
underside at 45 degrees, the camera is designed to allow simultaneous image capture and
noise measurement without the need to reposition the analyzer for each task.
23) High Speed USB and LAN Interfaces:
– Hardware versions 1 – 3 (G1 – 3): Available in Type 2270 only
– Hardware version 4 (G4): Available in both Types 2250 and 2270
Fast, seamless transfer of data, recordings and photographs back to the office. Both high-
speed interfaces, USB or LAN, can be used when the analyzer is located in close proximity to
the PC. However, if the analyzer is remote from the host PC, the LAN interface has the further
advantage of data download from anywhere within the same LAN network. Both interfaces
are not just used for data download, but also for remote monitoring and remote control.
24) G4 Mark: Indicates that the hardware is version 4. Without this mark, your hardware is an
earlier version.
CHAPTER 2
7
2.3 Analyzer Inputs/Outputs
2.3.1 Hardware Versions 1 – 3 (G1 – 3):

Fig.2.2 Connector panel of Type 2270 G1 – 3
8 2 3 4 11 5 6
1 12 9 10 7
1) Mini USB Interface Socket: Use the supplied Mini USB Cable AO-1476 to connect.
2) Earphone Socket: Use the supplied Earphones HT-0015 to connect.
3) Output Socket: A triaxial LEMO connector – use LEMO to BNC cable AO-0440-D-015 to
connect.
4) Trigger and Tacho Input Socket: A triaxial LEMO connector – use LEMO to BNC cable
AO-0440-D-015 to connect. For tacho probe connection, other cables may be used – see
section 2.3.3 for more information.
5) Input Socket (or for Type 2270 only, Input Ch.2 Socket): A triaxial LEMO connector
–depending on the transducer used, a number of cables are available for connection. See
6) External Power Socket: Use Mains Power Supply ZG-0426 to connect and charge batteries.
7) Battery Charge Indicator: An LED that indicates when the battery pack is being charged
from external power. See section 2.3.3 for more information on the LED colour codes.
8) Reset Button: Press to reset the analyzer if you have problems.

9) Compact Flash Card Slot: Insert a CF memory card to save data or connect a modem (either
a CompactFlash® modem or using an CF to Serial converter).
10) Secure Digital Card Slot: Insert a SD or SDHC memory card to save data.
11) (Type 2270 only) Input Ch.1 Socket: A triaxial LEMO connector – depending on the
transducer used, a number of cables are available for connection. See section 2.3.3 for more
information.
12) (Type 2270 only) LAN Socket: Connect a LAN cable to synchronize measurement and setup
data with a host PC over a LAN.
2.3.2 Hardware Version 4 (G4):

Fig.2.3 Connector panel of Type 2270 for G4 hardware
8 2 3 4 12 5 6
1 10 11 9 7
1) Micro USB Interface Socket: Use the supplied Micro USB Cable AO-1494 to connect.
2) Earphone Socket: Use the supplied Earphones HT-0015 to connect.
3) Output Socket: A triaxial LEMO connector – use LEMO to BNC cable AO-0440-D-015 to
connect.
CHAPTER 2
9
4) Trigger and Tacho Input Socket: A triaxial LEMO connector – use LEMO to BNC cable
AO-0440-D-015 to connect. For tacho probe connection, other cables may be used. See
Trigger Input Socket in section 2.3.3 for more information.
5) Input Socket (or for Type 2270 only: Input Ch.2 Socket): A triaxial LEMO connector –
depending on the transducer used, a number of cables are available for connection. See
6) External Power Socket: Use Mains Power Supply ZG-0426 to connect and charge batteries.
7) Battery Charge Indicator: An LED that indicates when the battery pack is being charged
from external power. See Battery Charge Indicator in section 2.3.3 for more information on
the LED colour codes.
8) Reset Button: Press to reset the analyzer if you have problems.
9) Secure Digital Card Slots Insert an SD or SDHC memory card to save data.
10) LAN Socket: Connect a LAN cable to synchronize measurement and setup data with a host
PC over a LAN.
11) USB A Socket: Connect to Wi-Fi Dongle UL-1050, printers or other external USB devices.
12) (Type 2270 only) Input Ch.1 Socket: A triaxial LEMO connector – depending on the
transducer used, a number of cables are available for connection. See section 2.3.3 for more
information.
2.3.3 Description of Inputs and Outputs
Top Socket
See item 17 in Fig.2.1.
This 10-pin LEMO connector is the main microphone input for the analyzer. The microphone
(including Preamplifier ZC-0032) is normally connected directly to this connector. If required,
however, one of two microphone extension cables (AO-0697-D-030, 3 m, or AO-0697-D-100,
10 m), can be fitted between the input stage and the main microphone input socket to extend the
distance to the desired length.
For Type 2270, the microphone is connected to input Channel 1. In addition, you can use the Dual
10-pole Adaptor JP-1041 for accessing both input Channel 1 and input Channel 2.
USB Interface
See item 1 in Fig.2.2 (G1 – 3 analyzers) or items 1 and 11 in Fig.2.3 (G4 analyzers).
The USB Interface provides high-speed direct communication with your PC’s USB port to
synchronize measurement and setup data:
• G1 – 3 analyzers: Use the supplied Mini USB Cable AO-1476
• G4 analyzers: Use the supplied Micro USB Cable AO-1494
Connect to a Wi-Fi Network via USB (G4 Only)

Insert Wi-Fi dongle (UL-1050) into the standard USB Type A socket (item 13, Fig.2.3) on the
analyzer to connect to Wi-Fi network.
See section 8.3.1 for more information.
Connect to a Printer via USB

For G1 – 3 analyzers, use the supplied Adaptor AO-0657 to connect to a printer that supports
PCL® language via the USB socket.
For G4 analyzers, use the standard USB Type A socket (item 13, Fig.2.3) on the analyzer to connect
to printers or other external USB devices.
See section 8.1.6 for more information printer setup.
Earphone Socket
See item 2 in Fig.2.2 (G1 – 3 analyzers) or Fig.2.3 (G4 analyzers).
Connect a set of headphones/earphones using a 3.5 mm minijack earphone socket for reviewing
recorded comments or for monitoring the measured sound. Use the supplied earphones,
HT-0015.
Output
This triaxial LEMO connector is used to output the conditioned input signal, for monitoring
purposes, or to output the generator signal. Use cable AO-0440-D-015 (LEMO to BNC).
Trigger and Tacho Input

See item 4 Fig.2.2 (G1 – 3 analyzers) or Fig.2.3 (G4 analyzers).
This triaxial LEMO connector is used for the external trigger input, or start/stop signals to the
analyzer, or for monitoring an external voltage. Using BZ-7222, BZ-7223, BZ-7224 or BZ-7225
software you can control signal recording (this requires a license for the BZ-7226 option). If you
want to start and stop the recording using an external device, connect it to this input. See details in
Appendix A.
This triaxial LEMO connector can also be used for speed measurements with Tacho Probe
MM-0360/2981 or other external tachometer signal. To connect a tacho probe, use one of the
following cables:
• AO-0440-D-015: LEMO to BNC plug, 1.5 m
• AO-0727-D-010: LEMO to BNC jack, 1.0 m
• AO-0726-D-030: LEMO to SMB, 3.0 m (recommended with MM-0360/2981)
CHAPTER 2
11
Input 1 or Rear Socket Channel 1 (Type 2270 only)

This triaxial LEMO connector is used for AC or CCLD inputs to Channel 1. It can be used when
analysing electrical signals, from (for example) transducers or signal recordings. Use one of the
following cables:
• AO-0440-D-015: LEMO to BNC plug, 1.5 m
• AO-0727-D-010: LEMO to BNC jack, 1.0 m
• AO-0701-D-030: Accelerometer cable, LEMO to M3, 3.0 m
• AO-0702-D-030: Accelerometer cable, LEMO to 10–32 UNF, 3.0 m
• AO-0722-D-050: Accelerometer cable, LEMO to MIL-C-5015, 5.0 m
Input (Input Ch.2 or Rear Socket Channel 2 for Type 2270)

This triaxial LEMO connector is used for AC or CCLD inputs to Type 2250 or to Channel 2 of
Type 2270. It can be used when analysing electrical signals, from (for example) transducers or
signal recordings. Use one of the cables listed under Input 1.
External Power
The analyzer is powered by an internal rechargeable battery pack. An indication of available
charge is shown by the battery icon at the bottom of the screen. If the charge remaining is
low or empty, the batteries can be recharged by connecting Mains Power Supply ZG-0426 to the
Ext. Power socket. When the power supply lead is connected, the icon will be displayed
in place of the battery icon.
⚠ WARNING: Do not disassemble or expose battery pack to fire or water.
CAUTION: Use specified battery charger only.
Charging below 0 °C (32 °F) is not recommended. If you charge the battery pack below
0 °C, the lifetime of the batteries will be reduced.
Do not charge battery pack in temperatures above 60 °C.
Battery Charge Indicator

A battery charge light (LED) indicates when the battery pack is being charged from external
power:
• With G1 – 3 analyzers: The LED is a steady green light when external power is applied (and the
battery is charging), and a flashing green light when charging has finished
• With G4 analyzers: The LED is red when external power is applied (and the battery is charging);
green when the battery is completely charged; and blue to indicate that the unit is in stand-
by and battery powered
Reset Button
Located above the USB connector, it is used to reset the analyzer if you have problems with the
analyzer and cannot get it to operate. To reset, press the button with the point of the stylus (see
chapter 9 for troubleshooting).
Slot for CompactFlash (CF) Cards (Hardware versions 1 – 3 only)

See item 9 in Fig.2.2.
This slot accepts CF sized cards and can be used for memory or, for example, a modem.
Slot for Secure Digital (SD) Cards

See item 10 in Fig.2.2 (G1 – 3 analyzers) or items 9 and 10 in Fig.2.3 (G4 analyzers).
The SD slots accept SD and SDHC (Secure Digital High Capacity) memory cards, and are typically
used to save measurement data. Capacities upto 32 gigabytes are acceptable.
✐Please note: G1 – 3 analyzers have only one SD Card slot. G4 analyzers have two slots.
LAN Socket
See item 12 in Fig. 2.2 (G1 – 3 analyzers) or Fig. 2.3 (G4 analyzers).
All G4 hardware has one LAN socket with 100 Mbit connection. With G1 – 3 analyzers, only
Type 2270 is equipped with a 10 Mbit LAN connection.
The LAN Socket provides high-speed direct communication with a LAN. It is used to synchronize
measurement and setup data with a host PC. The yellow LED on the right is on when there is a link.
The green LED on the left blinks when there is activity on the LAN connection.
CHAPTER 2
13
2.4 Hardware Setup

Fig.2.4 Type 2250/2270 – Hardware Overview
UA-1404
Outdoor
UA -1650
Microphone Kit
90 mm Windscreen
with AutoDetect
4231
4189/4190/4966 Microphone Sound
Calibrator
ZC -0032 Microphone
Preamplifier
AO -0697-D-100 KE -0441
Microphone JP-1041 Protective
Ext. Cable, 10 m Dual 10-pole Cover
AO -0697-D-030
Adaptor
Microphone UA -1654
Ext. Cable, 3 m 5 extra Styli
UA -1317
Microphone UA -1673
UL -1050 Adaptor for
Holder
Wi-Fi Dongle for Standard
Hand-held Analyzer Tripod Mount
UA -0801
Small Tripod UL -1009
(or UA -0587) Industrial Grade SD
Memory Card for
Hand-held Analyzer DH -0696
Wrist Strap
BZ -5298
2250/2270 Environmental KE -0440
Hand-held Software CD incl. Travel Bag
Analyzer Utility software for 2250/2270
QB -0061 and
Rechargeable Accessories
Battery Pack
FB -0699
ZG -0444
Hinged Cover
Battery
UA -1651 for Hand-held
Charger
Tripod Analyzer
for QB-0061
Extension
for Hand-held
Analyzer Interface cables AO -0646 Interface Cables:
(see list) Sound Cable,
1.5 m AO-1449-D-010
UA -0587 LAN Cross-over Cable, 1 m
Tripod AO-1450
(or UA -0801) LAN Cable, 1.5 m
AO -1476
ZG -0426 USB Cable, 1.8 m
Mains Power Supply for hardware v. 1 – 3
A O -1494
HT-0015 AO -0440-D-015 USB Cable, 1.8 m
Earphones Input Cable, for hardware v. 4
AO -0440-D-015 AO-0440-D-015 1.5 m
Output Cable, Trigger Input Cable,
1.5 m 1.5 m 040031/10
2.5 Assembling the Analyzer
2.5.1 Charging the Battery for the First Time

Battery Pack QB-0061 comes charged to approximately half capacity on initial delivery. Fully
charge the battery pack before assembling the analyzer for the first time. Connect Mains Power
Supply ZG-0426 to the external power socket. It should take 8 to 10 hours.
On G1 – 3 analyzers, the battery charge indicator shows a steady green light when external power
is applied (and the battery is charging), and a flashing green light when charging has finished.
On G4 hardware, the light is red when the battery is charging and green when charging is finished.
You can leave the analyzer with external power on, even when the battery is fully charged. See
2.5.2 Making Good Measurements

Using your Type 2250 or Type 2270, which fully complies with the IEC 61672–1 standard, ensures
you always make good measurements. The analyzer should be set up using the following
recommended assembly instructions. This is to minimize the influence of acoustical reflections
during measurements. All components described below are shown in Fig.2.1 and Fig.2.4.
Another set of instructions is provided in section 2.5.3, for situations where you need to position
the microphone at a distance from the analyzer, while still complying with the standard.
Placing the Measurement Microphone

The measurement microphone must be placed away from shielding, reflecting, or absorbing
objects. In a diffuse sound field, absorbing objects will reduce the measured sound levels. In a free
sound field, reflecting objects can change the measured sound levels. Typically, the sound level
0.5 m from a plane reflecting wall is 3 dB higher than if there was no wall.
The operator of the system may be personally shielding, absorbing, and reflecting, and can be an
additional noise source. Measure downwind in dry conditions with a wind speed less than 5 m/s.
The optimum position for the microphone is best found by trying different positions and observing
the resulting sound levels.
Mounting the Measurement Microphone

CAUTION: Before mounting the measurement microphone, note the following precautions:
• When screwing the microphone on, do it gently to avoid damaging threads
• Keep dust and foreign matter off the microphone diaphragm
• Do not touch the diaphragm with anything – it is very delicate
CHAPTER 2
15
✔Best Practice: Once the measurement microphone and preamplifier have been assembled and
connected to your analyzer, they should normally be left connected to the analyzer.
To Connect:
1) Gently screw the microphone onto Preamplifier ZC-0032, see items 1 and 2 in Fig.2.1.
2) Insert the male plug of the preamplifier into the top socket of the analyzer (see item 17 in
Fig.2.1) and push gently until it snaps into position.
To Disconnect:
To disconnect the preamplifier and microphone from the analyzer, grip the locking collar firmly
and slide back to remove the preamplifier and microphone combination.
Mounting the Windscreen

For short outdoor noise measurements (or indoor measurements exposed to air movement)
mount Windscreen UA-1650 onto the microphone and preamplifier combination, making sure
it snaps into place over the windscreen sensor. The sensor is built into the preamplifier, see item
2 in Fig.2.1. Icons in the status field on the screen indicate whether the windscreen is detected or
not. For longer-term outdoor measurements, see Mounting the Outdoor Microphone Kit below.
Mounting the Analyzer onto the Tripod Extension Stem and Tripod
To mount the analyzer onto the Tripod Extension Stem UA-1651 and Small Tripod UA-0801:
1) Screw Tripod Extension Stem UA-1651 onto the threaded stud of the ball-joint on Small
Tripod UA-0801. Secure the ball-joint roughly in a vertical position (that is, in line with the
tripod) until ready to follow the instruction in step 4.
2) Screw the Extension Stem UA-1651 into the analyzer, using the threaded socket at the lower
back of the analyzer (see item 18 in Fig.2.1).
3) Set Small Tripod UA-0801 (including the analyzer) in the required position, and adjust it to the
required height. Ensure that one of the three legs is pointing roughly in the same direction
as your analyzer needs to point (referred to as the front leg).
4) Position the extension stem at an angle of 45° to the horizontal and vertically in line with the
front leg of the tripod to ensure the whole setup is stable.
✐Please note: The procedure is the same if Tripod UA-0587 is used instead of Small Tripod UA-0801.
You are ready to start measuring, see Chapter 3.
2.5.3 Alternative Measurement Method (Extended Microphone)

The measurement microphone can be placed a distance from the analyzer by connecting an
extension cable and fitting the microphone to a microphone holder or to Outdoor Microphone
Kit UA-1404. The analyzer should be set up using the following assembly instructions. This is to
ensure that the accessories have limited acoustical influence on the analyzer during
measurement. All the components described below are shown in Fig.2.1 and Fig.2.4.
Mounting the Outdoor Microphone Kit

For long-term outdoor measurements, Outdoor Microphone Kit UA-1404 will be required as an
alternative to the windscreen. If this is the case, mount the kit onto the microphone and
preamplifier combination according to assembly and mounting instructions in the User Manual
for the Outdoor Microphone Kit, BE 1077.
Connecting a Microphone Extension Cable

The optional extension cables that are recommended for use with Type 2250/2270 are:
• AO-0697-D-030 – 3 m long
• AO-0697-D-100 – 10 m long
✐Please note: Connecting a recommended microphone extension cable has no acoustical effect on the
analyzer’s measurement and has no effect on calibration. However, although it is not
essential to re-calibrate, it is good measurement practice to calibrate the whole
measurement chain (including microphone extension cable) before starting a
measurement.
To connect a microphone using an extension cable:

1) Gently screw the microphone onto Preamplifier ZC-0032, see items 1 and 2 in Fig.2.1.
2) Insert the preamplifier into the female plug of the extension cable and push gently until it
snaps into position.
3) Insert the male plug of the extension cable into the top socket of the hand-held analyzer (see
item 17 in Fig.2.1) and push gently until it snaps into position.
CHAPTER 2
17
Connecting Two Microphones (Type 2270 only)

To connect two microphones to a Type 2270:
✐Please note: You will need Dual 10-pole Adaptor JP-1041, two extension cables (AO-0697-D-030 3 m long
or AO-0697-D-100 10 m long) and two Preamplifiers and two Microphones.
1) Gently screw the Microphones onto Preamplifiers ZC-0032, see items 1 and 2 in Analyzer
Components (Fig.2.1).
2) Insert the preamplifiers into the female plugs of the extension cables and push gently until
into position.
3) Insert the male plugs of the extension cables into the female plugs of the dual 10-pole
adaptor and push gently until they snap into position.
✐Please note: Channel 1 is tagged CH 1 and Channel 2 is tagged CH 2 on the dual 10-pole adaptor.
4) Insert the male plug of the dual 10-pole adaptor into the top socket of Type 2270 (see item
17 in Fig.2.1) and push gently until it snaps into position.
Mounting the Measurement Microphone on the Microphone Holder and Tripod

To mount the microphone and preamplifier combination onto Microphone Holder UA-1317 and
Small Tripod UA-0801:
1) Set Small Tripod UA-0801 in the required position, and adjust to the required height.
2) Screw Microphone Holder UA-1317 onto the threaded stud on the tripod ball-joint, and
position the holder as required.
3) Push the microphone and preamplifier combination carefully into the microphone holder,
so that it grips onto the body of the microphone and preamplifier. Ensure that the
microphone cable sits properly in the plastic guide.
You are ready to start measuring, see Chapter 3.
2.5.4 Measuring for Convenience

Measurements that need to be done at short notice, with no particular accuracy can be carried
out by simply holding the analyzer or using any combination of hardware components and
accessories shown in Fig.2.4.
2.5.5 Measuring Using Accelerometers

For vibration measurements you need an accelerometer as the measurement transducer. The
accelerometer is connected to the rear socket of the analyzer.
Please refer to Chapter 3 of FFT Analysis Software User Manual BE 1778 for detailed information
about selecting the right accelerometer and how to mount it correctly.
19
Chapter 3
Making your First Measurement
This chapter describes:

• Point and shoot measurements
• Basic measurements
• Saving your data
• Documenting the results
It assumes you have just received your analyzer and are turning it on for the first time.
If the analyzer has been used before, and the previous user has initiated the multi-user facility,
then the screens that are displayed may not follow the sequence described below. If this is the
case, please refer to section 8.1.4.
✐Please note: A stylus is stored in a holder on the side of the analyzer, see item 15 in Fig.2.1. This can be
used on the touch-sensitive screen to select icons and functions during the procedures
that follow. Alternatively, you can use the various pushbuttons, see items 3 to 11 in Fig.2.1.
The following procedures assume that the measurement microphone and preamplifier have
been mounted as described in Chapter 2 and the analyzer has a fully charged battery, see section
2.5.1.
3.1 Point and Shoot

Using the following basic procedure you will be able to start using your hand-held analyzer
immediately to make measurements and start the familiarization process:
1) Switch on by pressing and make sure the SOUND LEVEL METER project template is
selected (see section 3.2.2 for instructions).
2) Check that the data path at the top of the screen displays the correct job/project, (that is,
where you want to save the new data). See section 6.1.1.
3) Set Measurement Mode to Manual (and change any Setup parameters) by tapping
> Setup.
4) Press the Start/Pause pushbutton , then monitor the status indicator (traffic light).
5) Use the Start/Pause , Continue , Back-erase and Reset pushbuttons to control the
measurement.
6) When measurement has finished, press the Save pushbutton to save your data.
7) Add any spoken comments to the measurements by pressing the Commentary pushbutton,
and add any written comments by tapping > Add Note to Current Measurement.
8) To view and organize your data, tap > Explorer.
✐Please note: You are not required to set any measurement ranges, the analyzer has a dynamic range of
more than 120 dB, from 140 dB down to the noise floor of the microphone, (if the
microphone has nominal sensitivity).
If you need more help, the following section goes into the measurement process in more detail.
If not, please continue to Chapter 4.
3.2 Making a Measurement
3.2.1 Switching On
Switch on the analyzer by pressing . The start-up time depends on the state the analyzer was
in when last switched off and it may take up to 2 minutes from a cold start, or up to 10 seconds
if the analyzer is already in Standby mode, (that is, from a warm start).
✐Please note: A cold start is a re-boot of the analyzer from ROM. This normally occurs after the analyzer
has been turned off for some time, either by the user or following an automatic power-
down. A warm start takes the analyzer quickly from Standby mode to fully operational without
having to re-boot. (The battery needs to be charged for this to happen, see section 2.5.1.)
3.2.2 Select Template and Measure

After initialization, the screen shown in Fig.3.5 appears:
Fig.3.5
Sound Level Meter
displayed in the
template line
CHAPTER 3
21
1) Check that the SOUND LEVEL METER project template is displayed at the top of the screen
(Fig.3.5). For more information on templates, see What is a Project Template? at the end of
this section.
Fig.3.6
Changing the project
template
2) Tap Measurement Mode in the View Area and set to Manual (Fig.3.7).
✐Please note: The bar graph showing the sound pressure level LAF is now live, but parameters such as
LAeq are not. This is because LAF is an instantaneous value, always available for display,
whereas LAeq is a measured value that needs to be averaged over a period of time.
Therefore, it cannot be displayed before you have started a measurement using the
Start/Pause pushbutton .
Fig.3.7
Setting the
measurement mode
3) Press the Start/Pause pushbutton to start the measurement.

Notice the Running icon on the screen and monitor the red, yellow, green status indicators
around the Start/Pause pushbutton while you are measuring.
The indicators are:

– Yellow status indicator flashing every 5 s before starting the measurement
– Steady green status indicator after pressing the Start/Pause pushbutton and during
the measurement (if everything is OK)
– Short green flash every second means the measurement is waiting for the trigger
– Yellow status indicator flashing every 5 s when you have stopped, saved the
measurement and are ready to do another measurement
– Yellow status indicator flashing slowly (0.5 s on, 0.5 s off) when paused
– Red status indicator flashing rapidly if you encounter an overload condition during the
measurement
4) Use the Start/Pause , Continue , Back-erase and Reset pushbuttons to control the
measurement. The status field at the top of the screen will give short textual feedback on the
pushbutton operation. A visual indication of measurement status is also displayed on the
status line, by way of the Stopped icon , the Running icon and the Paused icon
(Fig.3.8).
Fig.3.8
Measurement
feedback in
the Status
Field
5) Toggle between different display parameters, as required, by tapping on each parameter

field (for example LAF90.0 in Fig.3.8) with the stylus and selecting other parameters from the
drop-down lists that appear.
💡Hint: The tabs at the bottom of the screen allow you to choose different ways of displaying the
measurement results:
– The Broadband tab shows an instantaneous LAF readout, with associated bar graph and
four measurement parameters, followed by two measurement setup parameters. (The
first parameter is displayed in a larger font size for better readability (Fig.3.8))
– The XL View tab increases the size of the first parameter readout to a four-digit, full-screen
display (including decimal point)
CHAPTER 3
23
6) Set Measurement Mode to Automatic and choose a preset time for your measurement. Then
repeat steps 3 and 4. The measurement will automatically pause after the preset time. This
allows you to either save your measurement or continue measuring, as required.
7) Tap > Setup (Fig.3.9).
Fig.3.9
Main Menu options
Change the broadband weighting parameters by tapping on the next to Frequency

Settings, then on the weighting parameter field on the right side of the screen. A weighting
drop-down menu will appear (Fig.3.10). Change the parameters as required.
Fig.3.10
Changing the
broadband frequency
settings
8) Return to the bar graph screen of the SOUND LEVEL METER template by tapping , and you
are ready to make a new measurement.
What is a Project Template?

A project template contains all the common display settings and measurement setups required
to perform a noise measurement. The template does not contain any measurement data – these
data are saved as individual projects, stored in job folders, see section 6.1.1. The project templates
covered by this manual are:
• Sound Level Meter (included in BZ-7222 software)
• Frequency Analysis (included in BZ-7223 software)
• Logging (included in BZ-7224 software)
• Enhanced Logging (included in BZ-7225 software)
• Reverberation Time (included in BZ-7227 software)
✐Please note: • Signal Recording Option BZ-7226 does not contain a specific template – signal
recording options are available in all templates.
• Tone Assessment Option BZ-7231 does not contain a specific template – tone
assessment options are available in all templates included in BZ-7223/24/25/30.
• Enhanced Vibration and Low Frequency Option BZ-7234 works with all the templates
included in BZ-7222/23/24/25
• 2-channel Option BZ-7229 (for Type 2270) enables 2-channel operation for all
2-channel templates included in BZ-7222/23/24/25/28 and for Signal Recording
Option BZ-7226 and Enhanced Vibration and Low Frequency Option BZ-7234.
If you make any changes to the settings in a project template, ‘*’ will appear next to the template
name to indicate that the new settings have not been saved.
To save the template, tap the template name at the top of the display to open the Template
Explorer (or tap Main Menu ) and tap Save .
3.3 Save your Measurement

When you have completed your measurement, you need to save it. By default the analyzer
creates a project called Project 001 . (Subsequent measurements will be labelled Project 002,
Project 003 , etc. This will happen each time you have saved a measurement*.)
Check that the data path at the top of the screen displays Project 001* and save your measurement
by pressing the Save pushbutton . For more details, see section 6.1.
✐Please note: An asterisk will appear alongside the project at the top of the status field as soon as you
start your measurement (Fig.3.11). This signifies that the measurement has not been
saved. It will disappear once you have saved the measurement.
*
If you are using Reverberation Time Software BZ-7227, please note that there are more measurements
stored in Reverberation Time projects than Sound Level Meter, Frequency Analyzer or Logging
projects, which all contain one measurement within each project. See Chapter 14 for more information
on BZ-7727.
CHAPTER 3
25
Fig.3.11
Saving your
measurement
3.3.1 Viewing the Saved Measurement

To view the saved measurement:
1) Tap the project name or > Explorer.
2) Tap the name of your measurement (Project 001 , in this case) and then tap Open (Fig.3.12).
Alternatively, tap the icon to the left of the project name to open and view.
Fig.3.12
Viewing your
measurement in
Explorer
3.4 Document your Measurement
Adding Annotations
Tap (upper right corner of the screen (Fig.3.11)) to open the Annotations screen with metadata
on the Metadata tab and annotations on the Annotations tab (Fig.3.13).
💡Hint: If the icon is not visible, you have no metadata or annotations at all. Move the field selector
into the line using the arrow keys and move it right until the icon is revealed.
Fig.3.13
The Metadata tab of
the Annotations screen
Metadata are text or numbers, which are easily set and changed using the keyboard or selected
from a user-defined picklist. The metadata are stored together with the measurement on the
project. Refer to section 8.7 for a more comprehensive description of using metadata.
If you have defined some metadata on the Metadata tab, you will get a reminder to update that
metadata each time you save a project. Tap the Yes button to open the Metadata tab (you can
also opt to disable the reminder).
Tap to close the Annotations screen.
Spoken Metadata
This is done before, during* or after saving the measurement by pressing and holding down the
Commentary pushbutton, while talking to the analyzer. (The microphone situated on the
underside of the analyzer will pick up your comments.) Recording stops when you release the
pushbutton.
✐Please note: Tap Paperclip to see a list of all annotations in the project and tap Loudspeaker in
the annotation to hear the comment using the earphones plugged into the earphone
socket.
*
For Logging Software BZ-7224 and Enhanced Logging Software BZ-7225, annotations can be added
directly to the measurement profile during the measurement, see section 11.2.
CHAPTER 3
27
Text Metadata
This is done before, during or after saving the measurement by tapping > Add Note to
Current Measurement A blank Notes screen will appear, where you can make written comments
about the measurement, using the standard full character keyboard that appears at the bottom
of the Notes screen. See the example in Fig.3.14.
Tap Paperclip to see a list of all annotations in the project and tap Text in the annotation
to view the comment.
Fig.3.14
Example of a written
annotation that is
attached to a
measurement
GPS Metadata
This can also be done before, during or after saving the measurement by tapping > Add GPS
Note to Cur. Measurement.
If a GPS receiver is connected (via USB) when you press the Save pushbutton, then the GPS
note is automatically created with the position. Remove the GPS receiver after usage to save
power.
Fig.3.15
Example of a GPS note
If you do not have a GPS receiver, but know the position (for example, from your smartphone),
you can manually key in the position in the GPS note.
A GPS note starts with “Position:”, and includes the latitude and longitude. For manual entries,
please enter the latitude and longitude in one of the following formats:
Degrees: DD.ddddddY DD.ddddddX
Example: 55.816730N 12.532855E
Degrees Minutes: DD MM.mmmmY DD MM.mmmmX

Example: 55 49.0038N 12 31.9713E
Degrees Minutes Seconds: DD MM SS.sssY DD MM SS.sssX

Example: 55 49 0.288N 12 31 58.278E
where X = E or W and Y = N or S. If you use degrees only, then you can use +/– instead of N/S and
E/W (example: 43.08011N,79.071007W = 43.08011,–79.071007). You can use “,” instead of
“space” between latitude and longitude
The GPS note can be used by Measurement Partner Suite (MPS) BZ-5503 to locate the
measurement on Google Maps™.
Image Metadata (Type 2270 only)

This can also be done before, during or after saving the measurement by tapping > Add
Image to Current Measurement. The Viewfinder display will then appear showing what is
coming through the camera lens. The camera has fixed focus and automatically adjusts the light
sensitivity; you just have to position the analyzer so that the object you want to capture is visible
in the viewfinder and then press the Manual Event pushbutton or tap the icon to capture
the image – see Fig.3.16.
CHAPTER 3
29
Fig.3.16
Viewfinder
When captured, the image is presented as a still picture and you can save the captured image by
pressing the Save pushbutton (or by closing the Images view), or you can reject the image by
pressing the Back-erase pushbutton.
Fig.3.17
Viewfinder
✐Please note: When finished, tap the icon to return to the Measurement screen. Tap Paperclip to
see a list of all annotations in the project and tap the Camera icon in the annotation to
view the image.
3.4.1 Annotation Tutorial

To become more familiar with this process, try the following:
1) Make a new measurement (see section 3.1, if unsure).
2) Tap Paperclip and define or select metadata.
3) Make a short written comment and attach it to the new measurement (as previously
described).
4) Make a short spoken comment (as previously described).
5) Make an image (as previously described – for Type 2270 only).
6) Tap Paperclip and check that you have three annotations – select one of them to see/hear
the annotation.
3.5 Switching Off

Switch the analyzer off by pressing . If held in for 1 second, the analyzer goes into standby
mode; if held in for more than 4 seconds, it switches the analyzer off.
The analyzer will automatically switch off when it has been in standby mode without external power
for more than 30 hours.
31
Chapter 4
Getting to Know Your Analyzer
This chapter describes the basic features and functions of your analyzer, including:
• What a sound level meter (SLM) is
• What the hand-held analyzer can do
• How to get help
• What is Measurement Partner Suite (MPS)
• How to navigate through the user interface
4.1 What is a Sound Level Meter?

An SLM is an instrument that is designed to measure sound levels in a standardized way. An SLM
comprises a microphone, a preamplifier, a main processor and a read-out unit. The microphone
converts the sound signal into an equivalent electric signal. The electric signal that the
microphone creates is at a very low level, so it is made stronger with the help of a preamplifier
before it is processed by the main processor.
Processing includes applying frequency and time weightings to the signal as specified by
international standards, such as IEC 61672–1, to which the analyzer conforms.
Frequency weighting adjusts how the SLM responds to different sound frequencies. This is
necessary because the human ear’s sensitivity to sound varies according to the sound’s
frequency. The most commonly used frequency weighting is A-weighting, which adjusts a signal
in a way that best resembles the human ear’s response at medium-range levels. A-weighting is
required for nearly all environmental and workplace noise measurements, and is specified in
international and national standards and guidelines. All of the analyzer’s measurement
parameters apply A- or B-weighting and a choice of C- or Z-weighting, except for the
measurement of peak levels where a single weighting (typically ‘C’) is applied. In this case, C-
weighting is used to take into account the energy present at low frequencies even when they are
not particularly annoying.
Time weighting specifies how the SLM reacts to changes in sound pressure. It is an exponential
averaging of the fluctuating signal, providing an easy-to-read value. The analyzer applies Fast,
Slow and Impulse (or ‘F’, ‘S’ and ‘I’) time weightings, which are the required weightings according
to the vast majority of international and national standards and guidelines.
The signal is processed through the weighting filters, and the resulting sound pressure level is
displayed in decibels (dB) referenced to 20 µPa on the analyzer’s screen. The sound pressure level
values are updated at least once per second.
Assessing a fluctuating noise level means getting a value for a level that is, in simple terms, the
average level. The ‘equivalent continuous sound level’, Leq, is known around the world as the
essential averaged parameter. Leq is the level that, had it been a steady level during the
measurement period, would represent the amount of energy present in the measured,
fluctuating sound pressure level. It is a measure of the averaged energy in a varying sound level.
It is not a direct measure of annoyance, though extensive research has shown that Leq correlates
well with annoyance.
Leq is measured directly with any SLM. If an A-weighting filter is used, it is expressed as LAeq: the
measurement of the equivalent continuous sound level using the A-weighted filter network.
A full range of measurement parameters is given in Appendix B.
4.2 What is the Hand-held Analyzer?

The hand-held analyzer is a versatile hardware platform suitable for covering a wide range of
different applications. Together with Sound Level Meter Software BZ-7222, it is a Class 1 modular
precision integrating-averaging sound level analyzer with an easy-to-use interface for quick and
simple measurement setups.
This highly versatile hand-held analyzer platform includes a range of optional software modules,
that are enabled through easily activated software license keys. The combination of software
modules and innovative hardware makes the analyzer a dedicated solution for performing all
your high-precision measurement tasks. The following sections are optional software modules
covered in this manual.
4.2.1 Sound Level Meter Software Module BZ-7222

Sound Level Meter Software BZ-7222 allows you to measure a comprehensive set of
parameters used for rating noise in terms of its impact on the environmental and working
environments and on occupational noise evaluation.
The more commonly used parameters for sound measurements, which cover a large range of
applications, are either instantaneous measured parameters (available at any time) or timed
measured parameters (measured within a controlled time interval):
CHAPTER 4
33
Timed Measured Parameters

• Equivalent Continuous Sound Levels (Leq – example: LAeq)
• Moving (or sliding) Equivalent Continuous Sound Levels (example: LAeq,T,mov and
LAeq,T,mov,max)
• Peak Sound Levels (Lpeak – example: LCpeak)
• Time for Peak Sound Level (example: TCpeak)
• Maximum Time-weighted Sound Levels (Lmax – example: LAFmax)
• Minimum Time-weighted Sound Levels (Lmin – example: LAFmin)
• Percentile Levels (LN – example: LAF90.0)
• Sound Exposure Level (example: LAE)
• Sound Exposure (example: E)
• Daily Noise Exposure Levels (example: Lep,d or LEX,8h)
• Noise Dose (example: based on ISO standards: Dose, based on US standards: DoseS5)
• Number of Peaks (example: #CPeaks(>140 dB))
• Time Weighted Average (example: TWA)
• Level Average with Exchange Rates 4, 5 or 6 (example: LavS5)
• Weather data (requires a weather station connected)
• GPS data (requires a GPS device connected)
Instantaneous Measured Parameters

• Instantaneous Time-weighted Sound Levels (Lp – example: LAF)
• Sound Pressure Levels (max levels once per second – example: LAF(SPL)
• Instantaneous Peak Sound Levels (example: LCpeak,1s)
• Instantaneous Weather data (requires a weather station connected)
• Instantaneous GPS data (requires a GPS device connected)
If you measure the acceleration signal from an accelerometer, then the most common used
parameters are:
Timed Measured Parameters

• Average (example: Linear)
• Peak (example: Peak)
• Time for Peak (example: Tpeak)
• Maximum Time-weighted parameters (example: Fast max)
• Minimum Time-weighted parameters (example: Slow min)
• GPS data (requires a GPS device connected)
Instantaneous Measured Parameters

• Instantaneous Time-weighted parameters (example: Fast Inst)
• Instantaneous GPS data (requires a GPS device connected)
The acceleration parameters can be displayed in either Engineering units (m/s2) or in dB.
✐Please note: See Appendix B for a comprehensive list of all parameters.
Sound Level Meter Software BZ-7222 incorporates a simple user interface that is easy to learn and
uses intuitive data storage and recall. Comprehensive security features mean no loss of data, even
on accidental power-off. Smart features are built-in for field use, for example, allowing you to
personalize your measurements. Sound Level Meter Software BZ-7222 also provides
connectivity between your PC and other sound analysis software.
4.2.2 Frequency Analysis Software Module BZ-7223

This software module allows real-time frequency measurements in 1/1- and 1/3-octave bands,
making it a simple matter to, for example, select suitable hearing protection, qualify noise from
heat and ventilation systems and assess tonality.
4.2.3 Logging Software Module BZ-7224

This software module allows logging of broadband and spectral data* to obtain a time history for
later analysis, for example, for use in environmental noise as well as workplace noise assessment.
It allows free selection of up to 10 parameters to log at periods from 1 s to 24 h. Results are logged
directly to the SD memory card (or CF card if using hardware versions 1 – 3).
4.2.4 Enhanced Logging Software Module BZ-7225

This software module is optimized for long-term monitoring. It has the functionality of the
Logging and Frequency Analysis software, and in addition it can measure continuously, save data
in manageable portions (every 24 hours), make periodic reports (that is, every hour) and measure
Ldn and Lden, etc.
4.2.5 Signal Recording Option BZ-7226

This option allows recording of the input signal (typically sound) in either 16-bit or 24-bit
resolution during measurement. The signal recording can be controlled manually or by using an
external trigger signal. The recording can also be triggered when a measured parameter exceeds
a preset level (BZ-7224 and BZ-7225 only). The recorded signal can be played back and listened
to using the supplied Earphones HT-0015. The signal is recorded directly to the SD memory card
(or CF card if using G1 – 3 analyzers).
* Requires Frequency Analysis Software BZ-7223

CHAPTER 4
35
4.2.6 Reverberation Time Software BZ-7227

This software module allows measurement of reverberation time using Impulsive excitation and
backwards integration of the impulse, or using Interrupted Noise from the built-in noise generator.
Measurements can be made in a number of positions in the room and the average reverberation
time for the room is calculated.
4.2.7 2-channel Option BZ-7229 (Type 2270 only)

This option allows a number of software modules to measure two channels simultaneously:
• Sound Level Meter BZ-7222, Frequency Analysis BZ-7223, Logging BZ-7224, Enhanced
Logging BZ-7225 and Building Acoustics Software BZ-7228 modules
• Signal Recording Option BZ-7226 will be able to record in both channels of a two channel
measurement
4.2.8 Tone Assessment Option BZ-7231

This option allows the assessment of tones on site, according to selected methods. The option
described in this manual is based on the 1/3-octave method. (Please refer to User Manual
BE 1778 for detailed information about tone assessment based on FFT spectra.) When used with
BZ-7223 Frequency Analysis, BZ-7224 Logging and BZ-7225 Enhanced logging, it allows you to
assess tones in a measured 1/3-octave spectrum according to ISO 1996:2007, Annex D, or, assess
tones in a measured 1/3-octave spectrum according to Italian Law, “Ministero dell’ambiente,
Decreto 16 marzo 1998”.
4.2.9 Enhanced Vibration and Low Frequency Option BZ-7234

This option enables:
• Measurements down to 0.4 Hz using Brüel & Kjær low-frequency microphones and adds
G-weighting parameters in accordance with ISO 7196:1995
• Measurements of human vibration parameters using Brüel & Kjær low-level accelerometers
in accordance with ISO 2631–1:1999, ISO 2631–2:2003, ISO 2631–4:2001, ISO 5349–1:2001,
ISO 8041:2005, DIN 45669–1:2010–09 and DIN 4150-2:1999–06
• Measurements of acceleration, velocity and displacement by integrating the time domain
acceleration signal
• Peak-Peak value
• 1/3-octave frequency analysis down to 0.8 Hz (1/1-octave down to 1 Hz)
This option can be used together with Sound Level Meter BZ-7222, Frequency Analyzer BZ-7223,
Logging BZ-7224 and Enhanced Logging BZ-7225 software modules and the 2-channel Option
BZ-7229.
4.3 Built-in Help

If you need more detailed information at any time during operation, tap the Help icon on the
analyzer’s screen. The resulting screen will explain that particular item in much more detail. You
can scroll up and down the explanatory text using either the and pushbuttons, or the scroll
bar on the screen. Return to the normal display screen by tapping .
If you need to view any of the previous 10 screens you have visited in the help system, tap the
icon at the top of the display.
4.3.1 Software and Hardware Versions

Once in the help system, you can access the list of installed software versions and licenses,
together with information about the hardware. This information is always available and is accessed
by selecting About from the top of the display.
4.4 What is Measurement Partner Suite BZ-5503?

Measurement Partner Suite BZ-5503 comes standard with your hand-held analyzer and provides
data archive, preview and export capabilities as well as software maintenance and remote online
display. In addition to the included standard configuration, valuable data analysis and post-
processing functionality is available in an expanding suite of optional application modules.
The software enables you to do the following:
• Setup or control the analyzer from a PC
• Retrieve data from the analyzer
• Manage and archive data from the analyzer
• Manage archives in Measurement Partner (MP) Cloud
• Merge MP Field App annotations with the corresponding analyzer in the project
• View data in archives
• Update the software in the analyzer
• Install licenses for use of software modules in the analyzer
• Remotely view online displays
• Post-process data (optional)
• Export to other post-processing and documentation tools like Evaluator™ Type 7820 or
Microsoft® Excel® or Word
Measurement Partner Suite BZ-5503 is supplied on the Environmental Software DVD (BZ-5298),
which is included with your analyzer.
CHAPTER 4
37
4.5 Basic Principles when using the Analyzer
4.5.1 Navigation Principles – ‘Star’ Navigation Concept

The main principle is that all the main menus are accessible via a single tap of the stylus. The Main
Menu icon forms the centre of the ‘star’ navigation concept (Fig.4.1).
Fig.4.1 The ‘Star’ navigation concept
Shortcut
This configuration gives you immediate access to screens you need most, that is, those you will
need to perform, save and document your measurements. Tapping allows you to navigate to:
• Explorer • Add Note to Current Measurement
• Setup • Add Image to Current Measurement
• Preferences (Type 2270 only)
• Transducers • Template Explorer
• Calibration • Timer Setup
In addition, tapping also allows you to perform the following actions:

• Lock Keys and Screen
• Log Off
Explorer
The Explorer screen is accessed by tapping > Explorer or by tapping the project name and
gives you access to the analyzer’s Data/Project Manager. This allows you to view the overall
project structure, including job folders and projects, and to view all the individual measurements.
When you have finished, tap to return to the Measurement screen.
You can tap any measurement file to open the saved measurement and if there are any voice text
or image annotations attached, these can be viewed by tapping Paperclip , visible next to all
measurement files with attachments. When you have finished reading, listening or viewing the
attachments, tap to return to the Explorer screen.
Setup
Tap > Setup to access the various setup parameters, such as frequency weightings, control
of the measurement, bandwidth, statistics and the type of input currently connected. You can
change these as required, see section 4.5.6.
The Full tab at the bottom of the screen allows you to view the complete list of setup parameters,
while the Quick tab allows you to access the more frequently used parameters defined by
yourself. When you have finished viewing or updating the parameters, tap to return to the
Measurement screen.
Changes made to the setup will only be applied temporarily, that is, until you select another
project template or open another project to reuse the setup from that project. However, to save
setup changes in the current template, tap > Template Explorer then the Save icon .
💡Hint: If you make changes to the setup that you do not want to keep (and you have not yet saved
the template), you can undo them by selecting the template again from the Project
Template Bar at the top of the screen.
Preferences
Tap > Preferences to access the analyzer’s preferences (if Multi User is disabled) or your
own preferences (if Multi User is enabled). These include things such as regional settings,
appearance of the screen, power management, user profiles and language. You can change
CHAPTER 4
39
these as required, see section 4.5.6. For more information, refer to section 8.1. When you have
finished viewing or updating the parameters, tap to return to the Measurement screen.
Transducers
Tap > Transducers to access the Transducers screen. You can view/set which transducer is
connected to the analyzer and add new ones if required. Details can be changed for existing
transducers or entered for new ones, see section 4.5.6. When you have finished viewing or
updating the details, tap to return to the Measurement screen.
When a transducer is selected, you can tap the Calibration History link at the bottom of the
transducer details and open the Calibration History screen (Fig.4.1). This screen includes the
calibration history for the transducer (that is, microphone) that is currently selected. When you
have finished viewing or updating the details, tap to return to the Transducers screen.
Calibration
Tap > Calibration to access the analyzer’s calibration procedure. To calibrate the analyzer,
follow the instructions in the Status Field. For more information refer to section 5.2. When you have
finished calibrating or viewing the details, tap to return to the Measurement screen.
The Calibration tab at the bottom of the Calibration screen allows you to perform and monitor
the calibration, while the Details tab allows you to view the details of the calibration and the
calibrator that are being used to calibrate the analyzer. While you are viewing the Details tab, you
can tap the Calibration History link at the bottom of the calibration details and open the Calibration
History screen (Fig.4.1). This screen includes the calibration history for the currently selected
transducer, tap to return to the Calibration screen.
Add Note to Current Measurement

Tap > Add Note to Current Measurement to access the Notes screen. This screen allows
you to create a text annotation that you can attach to your measurement. Text is inserted using
a character keyboard, similar to the one covered in section 4.5.6. When you have finished, tap
to return to the Measurement screen.
Add Image to Current Measurement (Type 2270 only)

Tap > Add Image to Current Measurement to access the Images screen with a viewfinder.
This screen allows you to capture an image that you can attach to your measurement – see
Chapter 3. When you have finished, tap to return to the Measurement screen.
Template Explorer
Tap > Template Explorer to access the Template Explorer and manage your project
templates. When you have finished, tap to return to the Measurement screen.
Timer Setup
Tap > Timer Setup to set up and control the analyzer via one or more of the analyzer’s
timers. The purpose of a timer is to initiate measurements in the absence of an operator. When
you have finished, tap to return to the Measurement screen.
4.5.2 The Display Screen

During normal operation, you will use the Display screen to view your measurements and carry
out a variety of functions, which are described in the following sections.
CAUTION: The touch-sensitive screen is susceptible to damage from sharp objects, such as pencils,
fingernails, etc. We, therefore, recommend you use the provided stylus. See also section
4.5.5.
A typical screen is shown in Fig.4.2.
Fig.4.2
Project Template Bar
Typical screen when Status Field
making a
measurement
View Area
View tabs
Shortcut Bar with icons
The main areas, starting at the top of the screen, are:

• Project Template Bar
• Status Field
• View Area (with view tabs)
• Shortcut Bar
Project Template Bar

This bar displays the name of the project template, which contains all the screen settings and
measurement setup for the current project. Tap the text to open the Template Explorer screen
containing all the available templates. If you make any changes to the setup in a template, ‘*’ will
appear next to the template name to indicate that the new settings have not been saved. Tap
Save in the Template Explorer to save the settings in the current template.
CHAPTER 4
41
Status Field
The area just below the Project Template Bar is called the Status Field. Depending on the
template, this field displays status information using up to three lines of text, as follows:
First Line
• Path and name of the current project (see section 6.1.1). Tap it to open the Explorer. To
change the path, navigate to the desired job (path) and tap the icon to save this path as
the default measurement path. As in the project template, ‘*’ will appear next to the project
name to indicate that the project has not been saved. Press the Save pushbutton if you
want to save the measurement or changed settings.
• Smiley (if applicable)
• PC – connected to Measurement Partner Suite BZ-5503 via USB or a network connection
• LAN – connected to a network through an Ethernet cable
• Wi-Fi – connected to a network via Wi-Fi. indicates a lost connection
• Commentary – spoken commentary is being recorded, together with an indication of the
available recording time
• Recording – measurement signal is being recorded
• Paperclip – an annotation is attached to the project. Tap the icon to go to the
Annotations screen
Second Line
• Measurement state represented as icons: Stopped , Running and Paused
• Elapsed time of the measurement
• Feedback on the action of pressing the following pushbuttons: Reset , Back-erase ,
Start/Pause and Save
• Indication that the measurement microphone is uncalibrated. In this case the word Uncal.
appears in the Status Field
• Six icons are used to represent whether or not and accelerometer or microphone is used,
weather a windscreen is fitted and whether you are measuring in a free or diffuse field:
For Type 2270, two icons are displayed – one for Ch. 1 and one for Ch. 2. If only one channel
is used, then no icon is displayed for the unused channel
– Accelerometer – an accelerometer is selected as input
– Input Socket – direct input is selected
– – no windscreen fitted, measuring in a free field
– – no windscreen fitted, measuring in a diffuse field
– – windscreen fitted, measuring in a free field
– – windscreen fitted, measuring in a diffuse field
• Immediate textual feedback on overload/underrange situation and latched overload indicated
with Overload
Third Line
• Used for Logging and Enhanced Logging, see section 11.3.1, or used for Reverberation
Time, see section 14.3.1
View Area
The View Area contains the screens required for a particular measurement, such as bar graphs,
result readouts and various frequently used setup parameters (for example, Meas. mode). The
template defines the content of this area. More than one screen can be used for displaying the
information. Select the screen using the view tabs at the bottom of the View Area.
Changes made to the screens will only be applied temporarily, that is, until you select another
project template or open another project to re-use the screen from that project. However, if you
want the screen changes to be saved in the current template, tap the Project Template Bar at the
top of the screen to open the Template Explorer and tap Save .
💡Hint: If you make changes to the screen that you do not want to keep (and you have not yet
saved the template), you can undo them by selecting the template again from the Project
Template Bar at the top of the screen.
Shortcut Bar
The Shortcut Bar, at the bottom of the screen, displays a number of fixed icons that are always
accessible. These include:
• Main Menu – accesses the Main Menu. This allows you to navigate to a specific function,
see description earlier under Navigation Principles
• Backlight – select a backlight level
• Help – get context-sensitive help from any screen by tapping on the icon at the bottom.
Closing the Help screen will return you to the previous screen
• Battery/Power Status – shows the battery condition. All green shows a fully charged
battery, red indicates low power levels. Tap the icon to get more details of the battery
condition. (When the power supply lead is connected, will be displayed in place of
Battery/Power Status .)
• Cloud – displays Cloud connection status: – logged out; – logged in;
– uploading; – upload paused; – not connected. Tap to open the MP Cloud
parameters on the Preferences screen (section 6.4.2)
The clock in the lower right corner displays the current time. Tap the readout to get details of the
time and date, or to set the clock.
CHAPTER 4
43
4.5.3 Use of Pushbuttons for Controlling Measurements

The design of the analyzer is such that the layout of the pushbuttons has been optimized for
single-handed operation.
Reset Measurement Pushbutton

Use the Reset pushbutton to reset a measurement; that is, to reset all detectors, averagers,
maximum and minimum hold, etc. If the measurement is paused (Paused is displayed in the
status field), then the measurement reverts to a stopped state after a reset, (Stopped is
displayed with a zeroed readout). If the measurement is running, then the measurement will be
automatically restarted after the reset.
Start/Pause Pushbutton
Use the Start/Pause pushbutton for controlling the measurement. The function of this key
depends on the current measurement state (Table 4.1).
Table 4.1
Current Function of Next Measurement
Start/Pause
Measurement State Start/Pause Pushbutton State
pushbutton functions
Stopped Start the measurement Running
Running Pause the measurement Paused
Paused Continue the measurement Running
Save Pushbutton
Use the Save pushbutton to save the measurement data together with the current project
template (including all the screen settings and setup information) and the calibration
documentation.
Pressing Save will affect the pause and running states. In both cases the measurement state will
be ‘stopped’ shortly after pressing the pushbutton (Stopped icon displayed).
Back-erase Pushbutton
For BZ-7222 and BZ-7223 Software
Use the Back-erase pushbutton to erase the last 5 seconds completely from the measurement.
(This includes, of course, overload indications you would like to erase.)
If used when the current measurement is running, then the measurement will be paused. The
Status Field displays Pause, Back-erase briefly, and then displays the shortened elapsed time along
with the Paused icon .
For BZ-7224 and BZ-7225 Software
Pressing the Back-erase pushbutton will start drawing an Exclude Marker on the display, see
section 11.3.2. Pressing it again will stop drawing the marker on the display (toggle function).
4.5.4 On-screen Feedback and Traffic Light

Feedback is given on screen in the Status Field (Fig.4.2), and the Traffic Light indicates important
states of the analyzer (Table 4.2).
Table 4.2
State Light Scheme
Traffic Light
Indications During power-on or loading template Nothing
Stopped. Ready to measure Short yellow flash every 5 s
Awaiting trigger, searching for Short green flash every second
calibration signal
Running measurement, Steady green light
everything OK
Paused. Measurement not saved Slow yellow flash on 1/2 s, off 1/2 s
Overload Fast red flash
4.5.5 Use of Stylus and Navigation Pushbuttons

The stylus and navigation pushbuttons are used for setting up the analyzer, navigating through
the screens and managing the results.
A number of items that appear on the screen (parameter values or icons) can be selected, updated
and activated. For instance, a new parameter value can be selected from a drop-down list.
The selection and activation of items on the screen can be done in two ways:
• Tapping once on the item on the screen will select and activate it, or
• Moving the field selector around using the navigation keys until the item you want is
highlighted, then pressing the Accept pushbutton to activate it
You can choose to use the stylus or the pushbuttons, depending on your preference and the
measurement situation. For instance, if the amount of noise generated by the analyzer needs to
be kept to an absolute minimum, consider using the pushbuttons rather than the stylus – this is
because tapping of the stylus on the touch-sensitive screen may create extra noise. However, if
speed is of major importance, the stylus can navigate through the setup and measurement
screens quicker.
Throughout the manual we have described how to perform the measurement procedures using
the stylus only, but you may also use the alternative method (using the Navigation and Accept
pushbuttons) if you prefer.
CHAPTER 4
45
4.5.6 How to Change Parameter Values

Most parameter values are changed by selecting a new value from a drop-down list, which
appears when the parameter field is selected. See the example in Fig.4.3.
Fig.4.3
Changing parameter
values
Stylus Usage
Tap the value you want in the drop-down, or tap outside the list to cancel the selection.
Pushbutton Usage
Use the Navigation pushbuttons (Up Arrow , or Down Arrow ) to select the value you want
and press the Accept pushbutton to activate it. Use the Left Arrow to cancel the selection.
Number Keyboard
When activating a number, a number keyboard appears (Fig.4.4).
Fig.4.4
Number keyboard
Tap the digits or use Up Arrow /Down Arrow to increment/decrement the number. Use
Left Arrow /Right Arrow to select other digits if necessary. Press the Accept pushbutton
or tap on the number keyboard to enter the number for the parameter. Tap on the
number keyboard, or outside the number keyboard to cancel the change of value.
Character Keyboard
When activating a text value, a standard full character keyboard appears on the screen (Fig.4.5).
Fig.4.5
Character keyboard
The character keyboard has all the functionality of a normal keyboard, enter text as required by
tapping the individual keys with the stylus. Tap to accept the changes, or tap outside the
keyboard to cancel.
CHAPTER 4
47
4.5.7 How to Personalize your Setup

Setup contains all the settings for the measurement and some settings for post-processing.
Tap > Setup (Fig.4.6).
Fig.4.6
The Setup screen –
Edit Mode
The Full tab at the bottom of the screen allows you to view the complete list of setup parameters,
while the Quick tab allows you to access the more frequently used parameters defined by
yourself. Tap Edit on top of the screen to enter Edit Mode.
This mode allows you to copy parameters from the Full tab view to the Quick tab simply by
tapping on the parameters in the Full tab – and to remove parameters from the Quick tab by
tapping on the parameters on the Quick tab.
When you have finished, tap the Edit icon again to exit Edit Mode.
Setup settings can be protected from accidental changes by tapping Padlock on the top of the
screen. This will also protect the template from being deleted or renamed.
When locking the template you get the option of password protecting the lock. If you choose this,
then you enter a password (see Fig.4.7).
Fig.4.7
Password protecting a
template
✐Please note: The password is case sensitive and must consist of minimum two characters and/or digits.
To unlock the setup settings and template, tap the padlock icon again. If the lock is password
protected, you must enter the password.
CAUTION: It is important to remember the password; the template cannot be unlocked without the
password.
The only way of overwriting a locked template is to re-install the software using BZ-5503. The
default templates will be overwritten by a standard installation. New or renamed templates can
be deleted from BZ-5503.
4.5.8 How to Manage the Project Templates

The project templates containing all the display and measurement settings required to perform
a measurement are selected in the Project Template Bar at the top of the Display screen (Fig.4.2).
You can save changes to the project template, create new templates, rename templates or delete
templates from the Template Explorer screen. Navigate to the Template Explorer screen (Fig.4.8)
by tapping on the Project Template Bar at the top of the screen or by tapping Main Menu
> Template Explorer.
CHAPTER 4
49
Fig.4.8
Template Explorer
The topmost line in the Status Field (“Sound Level Meter” in Fig.4.8) contains the name of the
current template. If you make any changes to the settings in the current template, an ‘*’ will
appear next to the template name to indicate that the new settings have not been saved.
The next line contains icons for saving the settings. Tap Save to save the settings in the current
template.
Tap Save As to save the settings in a new template. Use the keyboard that pops up to define
the name of the template.
The rest of the screen is used for listing the defined templates with an icon, a template name and
possibly an Annotations icon (paperclip):
1) Tap a template icon to open and use the template.
2) Tap a template name to get a drop-down list with the options:
– Open (open and use the selected template)
– Clone (create a copy of the selected template)
– Delete (delete the selected template)
– Rename (rename the selected template)
– Add Note (or commentary) to the template
– View Annotations on the template
3) Tap Paperclip to get the list of annotations attached to the project.

The Full tab at the bottom of the screen allows you to view the complete list of project templates,
while the Quick tab allows you to access the more frequently used project templates. Tap Edit
on top of the screen to enter Edit Mode.
This mode allows you to copy parameters from the Full tab view to the Quick tab simply by
tapping on the parameters in the Full tab – and to remove parameters from the Quick tab by
tapping on the parameters on the Quick tab.
When you have finished, tap the Edit again to exit Edit Mode.
✐Please note: • Annotations on templates are for describing the template and will not be copied to
the project, when starting or saving a measurement
• If you delete all templates of a certain type (for example, the Frequency Analyzer) and
you want a template of this type again, then you either have to open a project made
with this template and save the template, or you have to use Measurement Partner
Suite BZ-5503 to transfer a template of this type to the analyzer
4.5.9 Locking the Pushbuttons and Display

The pushbuttons and display can be locked to prevent inadvertent operation:
• To Lock: Select the Lock Keys and Screen option from the Main Menu
You now have two options:
• Tap Yes to lock keys and screen: use this to prevent any manual changes or interruptions
to your measurement. The procedure for unlocking the keys and screen is described
below, or you can power-down the instrument
• Tap No to lock the screen only: use this to prevent manual changes to the screen, while
still allowing use of the measurement control keys. You can also still answer pop-ups and
the state is remembered during power-off
• To Unlock: Press the Left Arrow pushbutton , followed by the Right Arrow pushbutton
, then the Accept pushbutton
51
Chapter 5
Calibration
This chapter describes calibration, including:

• Types of calibration
• How to calibrate
• Calibration history
• The transducer database
• How to set up a calibration reminder
• Charge injection calibration (CIC)
• Accelerometer calibration
5.1 Introduction
Calibration is an adjustment of your analyzer to measure and display correct values. The
sensitivity of the transducer as well as the response of the electronic circuitry can vary slightly over
time, or could be affected by environmental conditions such as temperature and humidity. While
you are unlikely to ever experience a large drift or change in sensitivity with the analyzer, it is
nevertheless good practice to perform regular calibrations, normally before and after each set of
measurements. Often calibration is required by measurement standards, such as IEC 61672–1.
5.2 Calibration Types
Acoustic Calibration
Acoustic calibration is the preferred calibration method, particularly when standards and
regulations require calibration before a measurement. The method involves applying an acoustic
signal of known magnitude and frequency to the microphone, which calibrates all the analyzer’s
components (microphone, preamplifier and electrical circuitry).
Electrical Calibration
To calibrate the Direct input use a stable sinusoidal voltage at a frequency between 150 Hz and
10 kHz. The procedure is very similar to the Standard Calibration procedure for sound calibration
described above; however, without the transducer mounting procedure.
Manual Calibration
If no calibrator is available (or a known amplification is introduced, for example, by analysing a
tape recorded signal) then you can type the sensitivity directly into the Sensitivity field. The
analyzer will be regarded as uncalibrated and the text ‘Uncal.’ will appear in the status field.
Charge Injection Calibration

You can check the complete measurement chain during long term measurement using Charge
Injection Calibration. See section 5.7.
Vibration Calibration
You can calibrate accelerometers using Calibration Exciter Type 4294. See section 5.8.
5.3 Sound Level Calibration
5.3.1 Standard Calibration

Use Sound Calibrator Type 4231. It provides a stable sound pressure at 1 kHz and has minimal
susceptibility to environmental factors. The procedure itself is relatively simple, and on the
analyzer the procedure is referred to as the Standard Calibration procedure.
To perform acoustic calibration and to fit the calibrator:
1) Stand away from loud sound sources that may interfere with the calibrator’s signal.
2) Switch on the analyzer: push .
3) Tap > Calibration to open the Calibration screen (Fig.5.1).
Fig.5.1
Calibration screen
CHAPTER 5
53
Calibration
This screen contains a bar graph showing the actual sound pressure level and three
placeholders for displaying information about the last calibration.
4) Following the first part of the instruction in the Status Field, fit Sound Calibrator Type 4231
carefully onto the microphone of the analyzer. (To avoid handling vibrations that disturb the
calibration, rest the assembly in a roughly horizontal position on a table or other flat surface.)
Ensure that the calibrator fits snugly on the microphone.
5) Switch on the calibrator. Wait a few seconds the level to stabilize.
6) Tap to start the calibration.
✐Please note: Detecting level... appears on the screen as feedback.
7) While the analyzer is searching for the calibration signal and the signal level is stabilizing, the
‘traffic light’ indicates a short green flash every second. When the level is stable, the traffic
light indicates a steady green and the signal is measured and used for calibration. Once the
calibration has been completed successfully, the traffic light indicates a short yellow
flash every 5 seconds. The Sensitivity is automatically calculated and displayed in a pop-up
together with the deviation from the last calibration. Tap Yes to accept and use the new
sensitivity and save it in the calibration history. Tap No to disregard the new calibration and
continue with the old calibration.
If the calibration deviates more than ± 1.5 dB from the initial calibration (microphones only),
then the calibration is stopped without changing the calibration of the analyzer. The traffic
light will indicate a fast flashing red and an error description will appear in the status field.
💡Hint: If the microphone is separated from the analyzer using a microphone extension cable then
place the analyzer so it can be seen from the location of the microphone. Start the
calibration process (select the Calibration screen and tap the button on the
screen), then go to the microphone and fit the calibrator onto the microphone, switch on
the calibrator and monitor the traffic light on the analyzer, as discussed previously.
8) Once you have completed the calibration, tap the button and remove the calibrator.
It will automatically switch off after a few seconds.
5.3.2 Calibration Settings

To view the calibration details, select the Details tab on the Calibration screen (Fig.5.2).
Fig.5.2
Calibration details
screen
This screen displays the following information:

• Details of the last calibration: date, sensitivity, deviation from last calibration and deviation
from initial calibration
• The connected transducer: type and serial number
✐Please note: You select a new transducer by tapping > Setup > Input).
• Max. Input Level: The maximum sinusoidal input level to be measured without overload
indication
• A Calibration History link, which is provided to enable you to view a history of transducer and
calibration settings, see below
The calibration settings can be adjusted as follows:
• Calibrator : select between Type 4231 and a custom calibrator
• Calibration Level : Enter the specific level of your custom calibrator. If you are using, Type 4231,
calibrator level is automatically detected (shown as Auto detect )
✐Please note: The Auto detect setting enables the automatic detection of the calibration level. For free-
field microphone types (like Types 4189 and 4190) the calibration level from Sound
Calibrator Type 4231 is either 93.85 dB or 113.85 dB. For diffuse- or pressure-field types,
the calibration level is either 94 dB or 114 dB. The calibration process automatically
determines the correct level
• Calibrator Serial Number : Type in the serial number for your calibrator. The calibrator will be
documented in the calibration history
CHAPTER 5
55
Calibration
5.4 Calibration History

To view calibration history, tap Calibration History > on the Calibration Details screen (Fig.5.2).
The analyzer saves the last 20 calibrations, plus initial calibration, which can be viewed on the
Calibration History screen (Fig.5.3). Tap to return to the calibration details screen; tap again
to return to the Measurement screen.
Fig.5.3
Calibration History
screen
5.5 Transducer Database

The specifications for the microphone (and Preamplifier ZC-0032), which come fitted in the top
socket of the analyzer, are described in a transducer database.
1) To open the Transducer Database screen (Fig.5.4), tap > Transducers.
Fig.5.4
Transducer Database
screen
2) To view the details in the database (Fig.5.5), tap the transducer name/number, or tap Plus
next to the name/number.
Fig.5.5
Details in the
Transducer Database
All the details for the currently selected microphone can be found in the database. You can add
other transducers by tapping on Add New Transducer , selecting Microphone, Accelerometer
or Direct input from the drop-down, and filling in the details of your particular transducer
parameters. See section C.2.1. This is done by selecting the item from the drop-down list that
appears on some parameter fields, or by entering the data via the keyboard that appears on other
parameter fields.
When adding a new microphone, Type 4189 is the default entry. Change Microphone Type to
fit your microphone. For known microphone types, a number of parameters are automatically set.
✐Please note: • If the transducer is a microphone and the microphone type is known to the analyzer
(as in the example in Fig. 5.5, where Type 4189 details are known), then the parameters
Nominal Sensitivity, Polarization Voltage , Free-field , Capacitance and CCLD are set
automatically. See details in Appendix C. The analyzer can then make sound-field
correction and windscreen correction as specified in the setup. To confirm which type
of correction is being applied, an icon is displayed in the measurement Status Field,
as described on section 4.3.2. If the microphone is unknown to the analyzer, no
corrections can be made and no icon appears in the Status Field. The parameters
mentioned above have to be set manually (that is, typed in). We recommend that you
insert the value for Nominal Sensitivity directly from the calibration chart. Nominal
sensitivity is used in the automatic level detection calculations, when calibrating using
Sound Calibrator Type 4231, to determine whether the level is 94 or 114 dB.
• If the transducer is an accelerometer and the accelerometer type is known to the
analyzer, then the parameters Nominal Sensitivity, CCLD and Weight are set
automatically.
In the top line of the Status Field you can select which transducer is currently connected to the
analyzer. This can also be done via the Setup screen by selecting Input, then selecting the
transducer in the Transducer field.
CHAPTER 5
57
Calibration
In the first line of the Status Field you can select whether the transducer is connected to the Top
Socket or the Rear Socket of the analyzer. This can also be done via the Setup screen by selecting
Input , then selecting the socket in the Input: field.
For Type 2270 only: In the second line you also have a Channel Selector.
To change which input the transducer uses to connect to the analyzer, tap > Setup > Input
and tap the required input from the drop-down list: Top Socket or Rear Socket (Rear Socket refers
to the Input socket on the connector panel of the analyzer).
At the bottom of the parameter list you can select the calibration history for the currently selected
transducer by tapping on the Calibration History link. See section 5.4 and Fig.5.2.
You can delete a transducer by tapping Delete Transducer then the transducer to delete from
the drop-down that appears.
✐Please note: Only transducers that are not connected can be deleted. The calibration history will also
be deleted.
Tap to return to the Measurement screen.
5.6 Calibration Reminder

The Calibration screen Reminder tab (Fig.5.6), allows you to keep track of when you need to run
your next Accredited/Traceable calibration, and shows you the date of your last calibration.
Fig.5.6
Calibration Reminder
tab
The automatic calibration reminder facility will pop up a reminder approximately two months
before your next calibration and keep on reminding you every week until you do one of the
following actions:
• Send your analyzer for Accredited/Traceable Calibration and update the Last Calibration date
• Check the Do not ask/remind again checkbox in the reminder pop-up
• Disable the automatic calibration reminder
An example of a reminder pop-up is shown in Fig.5.7:
Fig.5.7
Reminder pop-up
You can set the Calibration Interval parameter to either 12 months or 24 months depending on your
local requirements.
You can disable the facility by selecting the Automatic Calibration Reminder parameter to Off .
5.7 Charge Injection Calibration
5.7.1 Theory of Charge Injection Calibration

If an external sound source is not available, for example during short or long term monitoring, you
can check the calibration of the analyzer using the Charge Injection Calibration (CIC) facility. This
is done automatically during a logging measurement (see section 11.2 and section 12.2). Unlike
an internal calibration, the Brüel & Kjær patented CIC technique enables a complete
measurement chain to be verified, including the microphone, preamplifier, cabling and analyzer.
Each verification measurement is compared to an initial reference measurement.
As the name implies, the CIC method injects an internally generated charge into the microphone
and preamplifier input circuit, and the ratio between the measured signal and the injected signal
is measured (CIC Ratio; Fig.5.8).
CHAPTER 5
59
Calibration
This method is based on the detection of changes in impedance at the input terminal. It was
developed for monitoring of microphone channels and requires a preamplifier with a small,
extremely stable built-in capacitor, which enables the application of an electrical signal to a
preamplifier (and microphone) input terminal.
A stable CIC Ratio means a ‘healthy’ system and assures stable operation of the microphone,
cable, preamplifier and remaining measurement system.
Fig.5.8 Charge Injection Calibration. Low-leakage resistance capacitor Cc is set in parallel with the microphone and
fed with voltage ei. The ratio eo /ei is constant when g, Cc , Cm and Ci are constant. Changes to preamplifier
gain (g), cable parameters, microphone capacitance (Cm ), etc., will change eo /ei and, hence, indicate
probable changes in calibration
Microphone Preamplifier Cable Generator
eo
( Cc
ei = g C + C + C
m i c
)
Cm Cc
g eo
Ci R1
ei
970294/1
5.7.2 Performing a Manual CIC with your Type 2250/2270

CIC is only available for microphones connected to the Top Socket of the Analyzer and with
Logging Software BZ-7224 and Enhanced Logging Software BZ-7225.
Tap > Calibration from the list. Click the CIC tab to view the various CIC parameters that are
available. The available parameters will include the results of the latest manual CIC, together with
the reference (Fig.5.9).
The Status Field at the top of the screen informs you how to perform the CIC.
Press the Start CIC button to start the CIC. After approximately 10 s you will see the result.
Normally, the CIC Reference Ratio is set the very first time a CIC is performed, however, you
should update the CIC Reference Ratio if you change the microphone preamplifier. You do this
by checking the Use as new Reference checkbox.
The CIC Reference Ratio and CIC Ref. Date parameters display the results of the very first
manual CIC, and this will be used as the ‘reference’ for all subsequent CIC Ratio measurements.
✐Please note: Each microphone in the transducer database has a CIC Reference Ratio.
If the CIC Ratio parameter deviates by more than 0.5 dB from the CIC Reference Ratio, there
may be a problem, and it should be investigated.
Fig.5.9
CIC tab
The CIC result consists of four parameters:

• CIC Ratio
• CIC Ratio Date
• Deviation from Reference
• CIC Result
The CIC Result can be Passed , Background noise too high or CIC Ratio deviates from Ref.
5.8 Vibration Calibration

To calibrate an accelerometer use Calibration Exciter Type 4294. It provides a stable acceleration
of 10 m/s2 at 159 Hz. The procedure for mounting the accelerometer to the exciter is described
in the Type 4294 user manual. Otherwise the calibration procedure is very similar to the Standard
Calibration procedure for sound calibration described above. However, if the calibration deviates
more than ±5.5 dB from the nominal sensitivity, the calibration is stopped without changing the
calibration of the analyzer. In this case, check whether the correct accelerometer has been
selected from the transducer database and whether it has the correct nominal sensitivity.
✐Please note: If you use Low Level Accelerometer Type 8344, you need Calibration Exciter
Type 4294-002.
61
Chapter 6
Data Management
This chapter describes data management, including:

• Job and project organization
• Setting the default job folder
• Recalling measurements
• Uploading to Measurement Partner Cloud (MP Cloud)
6.1 Organizing Measurements
6.1.1 Description of Jobs and Projects

When saving a set of measurement results, they are organized together with setup information,
calibration information, annotations and signal recordings in a project.
A project contains the following:
• Measurement results:
– Broadband values (for example, LAeq, LAFmax, LAFmin)
– Frequency spectra (if Frequency Analysis Software BZ-7223 is enabled on your analyzer
and you have selected a FREQUENCY ANALYZER template)
• Weather and GPS data
• Measurement Setup
• Display Setup (parameters you have selected)
• Information on the microphone
• Calibration
• Annotations – Commentary (attached to measurements as required)
• Annotations – Text, notes or GPS notes (attached to measurements as required)
• Annotations – Image (attached to measurements as required) – Type 2270 only
• Signal Recordings (attached to measurements as required)
The project name is automatically created by combining the Project Name Prefix with a number
(starting from 001),that is, Project 001 for the first project, Project 002 for the next, etc.
To rename the Project Name Prefix:

1) Navigate to the project (tap > Explorer).
2) Tap the name of the project (tapping the icon opens the project immediately)
3) Tap Rename and enter the new project name.
Projects are saved in folders, which are called ‘jobs’ on your analyzer. These are similar to folders
in the Microsoft® Windows® filing system.
Jobs can be created:
• In the internal memory
• On a Secure Digital (SD) card
• On a USB memory stick (G4 analyzers only)
• On a CompactFlash (CF) card (G1 – 3 analyzers only)
6.1.2 Navigating in Jobs

A results browser called Explorer is used to navigate through the jobs and projects.
To view all jobs and projects, tap > Explorer or tap the project name on the Measurement
screen. A screen similar to Fig.6.1 will appear.
Fig.6.1
The Explorer screen
The example in Fig.6.1 displays a list of jobs and then some projects that have not been stored
under a job name.
The topmost line in the status area (Internal Disk\ in Fig.6.1) shows the location in the memory.
The next line in the status area contains four icons for navigation.
Tap to go up one level in the job levels. The top level is the Memory level, where physical
memory devices can be selected. You can select:
CHAPTER 6
63
Data Management
• With G1 – 3 analyzers:
– Internal Disk
– SD-Card (if a card is inserted in the SD slot)
– CF-Card (if a card is inserted in the CF slot)
• With G4 analyzers:
– Internal Disk
– SD-Card B (if a card is inserted in the bottom SD slot)
– SD-Card T (if a card is inserted in the top SD slot)
– USB-Mem (if a memory stick is inserted in the USB Standard A socket)
If Multi User is enabled (see section 8.1.4, Multi-user Facility), then each user can access data on
any of the devices. However, a user cannot see or access jobs for other users.
To go down one level (that is, exit the Memory level), tap the job name (Internal Disk in this case)
and select Open from the drop-down list or tap Memory , next to Internal Disk .
Tap to create a new job folder. The first job folder name will be Job 01, subsequent job folders
will be labelled Job 02 , Job 03 , etc. You can rename the job folder name by tapping on the name
and selecting Rename from the drop-down list. Use the keyboard to key in a new name – accept
by tapping Enter .
To go down one level (open a job), tap the job name in the list and select Open from the drop-
down list or tap the job folder icon to the left of the job name.
You can move a job/project (and its content) to another job by tapping the job name/project
name and selecting Cut from the drop-down list. Then navigate to the job you want as the new
holder of the moved job/project and tap Paste , or navigate to the level above, tap the job
name and select Paste from the drop-down list.
In order to copy a job/project, do as described above, but use Copy instead of Cut from the drop-
down list.
Select Delete from the drop-down list in order to delete the job/project and all of its contents.
You can select more than one job/project for Copy, Cut or Delete by tapping and holding the stylus
on a job/project name and then dragging the stylus up or down to select other jobs/projects.
6.2 Selecting Default Measurement Job/Path

Tap to select the current job as the default measurement job, where all projects will be saved
when you press the Save pushbutton. The job name, followed by the current project name, will
appear in the topmost line in the status area to confirm which job you have selected.
6.3 Recalling Measurements

You can recall your measurement results to display the measured results, reuse setups from
previously saved projects or view logged data as a profile. Use the Open command in
Explorer – this will recall the project template (display settings and measurement setup used on
the saved results) along with the results. This will, however, stop and reset the current
measurement.
6.3.1 Viewing Data and Reusing Setups from Projects

From > Explorer, locate the project with the setup you want to reuse, then tap the project
name and select Open from the drop-down that appears. This will stop and reset the current
measurement and load the project including all setups and data. You are now using the same
screens as the ones you were using just before you saved the data. Use the screens to browse the
results. Pressing Start/Pause will start a new measurement using the setups from the project.
You can save the setup information in a template by tapping the Template Bar at the top of the
screen, see section 4.5.8.
6.3.2 Viewing or Listening to Annotations and Metadata

Use Explorer to locate the project with the annotations you want to view/hear, then tap the
project name and select Annotations from the drop-down that appears (or tap Paperclip ) and
select the Annotations tab. This will show all annotations attached to the project (Fig.6.2.)
Fig.6.2
Example of an
annotation attached to
a project
The icon represents a verbal annotation, or commentary. Tap the annotation name and select
Play from the drop-down that appears (or tap the icon) to play the commentary using the
headphone output.
💡Hint: You can also rename, delete, copy or move annotations to and from other projects or jobs.
CHAPTER 6
65
Data Management
The Text icon represents written annotations, or notes. Tap the annotation name and select
Open from the drop-down that appears (or tap the icon) to open the Notes editor. View the
comments and, if required, edit the comments using the simulated keyboard that appears at the
bottom of the screen. Tap the icon to accept the changes and return to the previous screen.
The Image icon represents image annotations. Tap the annotation name and select Open from
the drop-down that appears (or tap the icon) to open the Image viewer. Tap to return to the
previous screen.
Select the Metadata tab to see all metadata attached to the project (Fig.6.3). You can change the
metadata just by tapping on them and entering new values. You can also edit the settings for the
metadata and reuse specific metadata on new projects by tapping on the Edit icon for the specific
metadata (further information in section 8.7).
Fig.6.3
Example of metadata
Inserting Annotations Using Explorer

In addition to inserting commentary, text or image annotations on your current measurement, see
section 3.4, you can insert commentary, text or image annotations on projects or jobs using
Explorer.
Tap a job or project name and select Add note, Add Comment or Add Image (Type 2270 only) from
the drop-down that appears.
6.4 Measurement Partner Cloud

MP Cloud is a service that allows you to securely upload projects, including metadata, to the cloud
for storage, sharing or transfer from the analyzer to PC. Measurement data are uploaded using
an encrypted HTTPS connection and are immediately available for post-processing by
authorized users. For more information on data sharing and post-processing, see Measurement
Partner Suite BZ-5503 Online Help.
6.4.1 Connecting the Analyzer to MP Cloud

In order to be able to connect an analyzer to MP Cloud, you must have:
• An MP Cloud account (cloud.bksv.com)
• An Internet connection (LAN, Wi-Fi, etc.; see Chapter 7)
Connect an Analyzer to MP Cloud

You can connect the analyzer to the cloud directly on the analyzer or set up the connection
remotely using Measurement Partner Suite BZ-5503.
To set up the connection using Measurement Partner Suite, see Measurement Partner Suite
BZ-5503 Online Help.
To connect directly through the analyzer:
1) Connect to the Internet (Chapter 7).
2) Tap Cloud , in the Shortcut bar then MP Cloud.
Fig.6.4
The Cloud icon
You can also navigate to the MP Cloud settings by tapping > Preferences > MP Cloud.
3) Tap Account and select Logged in .
Instructions shown in Fig.6.5 will pop up.
CHAPTER 6
67
Data Management
Fig.6.5
First MP Cloud login
instructions
4) Navigate to cloud.bksv.com using an Internet browser and log in.

5) Click the Devices tile.
6) Click Create new... and enter the analyzer’s serial number (located just above the tripod
mounting thread; see section 2.2).
Also enter a comment (for example, a reference to the analyzer’s primary user or location).
7) Click the Create button.
8) You will be prompted to Confirm device invitation and will be provided with a pin code.
9) On the analyzer, tap OK and enter the pin code when prompted.
10) Tap OK on the analyzer and click Refresh... on the Web browser.
6.4.2 Managing MP Cloud on the Analyzer

When you log in to MP Cloud, a Cloud folder and Uploaded folder will automatically be created
on all attached memory devices (Internal Disk, SD-cards, CF-card and USB memory stick). The
Cloud folder will be Cloud when logged in to an account.
Upload to MP Cloud
To upload data to MP Cloud, move or copy the data into the Cloud folder. All data in the Cloud
folder will automatically be uploaded to MP Cloud when connected to the Internet.
✐Please note: In the event of a lost connection, the upload will resume when the connection is
re-established.
The Cloud Icon:

The icon will change depending on the status of the connection and upload:
• Logged out of MP Cloud
• Logged in, all has been uploaded
• Logged in, upload in progress
• Logged in, upload paused
• Logged in, but not connected to the account

To Resume or Pause Uploading, Check MP Cloud Status or Change Parameters:
Tap the Cloud icon to open a drop-down menu:
• Pause Upload or Resume Upload (depending on the current upload state)
• MP Cloud Status (provides status; see Fig.6.6)
• MP Cloud (a shortcut to MP Cloud parameters)
✐Please note: The first time you connect to MP Cloud and when you are logged out, only MP Cloud will
be available.
Fig.6.6
Example of MP Cloud
Status
To Log in to MP Cloud:
1) Tap Cloud or tap > Preferences > MP Cloud.
2) Tap Account then Logged in .
To set the archive in the cloud to which the data will upload:
1) Tap > Preferences > MP Cloud > Archive and enter the archive name.
✐Please note: If that archive does not exist, it will be created when you tap the Enter key.
To delete a project from the analyzer or move the project to another storage device after a
successful upload to MP Cloud:
1) Tap > Preferences > MP Cloud > Action after upload and select Move project (if you
want to access the data on the analyzer after the measurement) or Delete project (if you want
to clear space on the SD-card after the measurement).
69
Chapter 7
Connection to PC or Smartphone
or Measurement Partner Field App
This chapter describes connecting to your analyzer from a PC or smartphone, including:

• An introduction to connection methods
• Measurement Partner Suite BZ-5503 for full control of the analyzer
• Use an Internet browser for online display and control of the analyzer
• Measurement Partner Field App (MP Field App) for streamlined functional control of the
measurement, data and annotations in the field
7.1 Introduction
Two different methods are available for connecting to the analyzer:
• USB: BZ-5503 connects to the analyzer through a USB cable
• Network: The analyzer is connected to a network (local or Internet) via a modem, LAN cable
or Wi-Fi adaptor. BZ-5503 or an Internet browser and MP Field App (on a smartphone) will
then be able to connect to the analyzer through TCP/IP using the analyzer’s (global) IP
address
In addition to connecting to the analyzer, the analyzer itself can notify you by SMS or email, based
on various conditions. For more information, see section 8.4.
Table 7.1 gives you an overview of the different connection possibilities including links to relevant
chapters with more details.
Table 7.1 Connection overview
Available
Connect From Connection Type Settings in Preferences
Notifications
BZ-5503 USB Modem = Disabled –

see section 8.2
BZ-5503, Internet Network or Modem = GPRS/EDGE/HSPA Email

browser or GPRS/EDGE/HSPA Dialup see section 8.4
smartphone with Modem Possibly settings in
MP Field App Modem/DynDNS
see sections 8.2 and 8.3
BZ-5503, Internet Network Modem = Disabled Email

browser or Ethernet cable Possibly settings in see section 8.4
smartphone with Modem/DynDNS and Network
MP Field App see sections 8.2 and 8.3

browser or CF WLAN (G1 – 3 Possibly settings in see section 8.4
smartphone with analyzers only) Modem/DynDNS and Network
MP Field App Wi-Fi dongle or SD see sections 8.2 and 8.3
WLAN (G4 only)

browser or DSL Modem/Router Possibly settings in see section 8.4
smartphone with Modem/DynDNS and Network
MP Field App see sections 8.2 and 8.3
💡Hint: The online help for BZ-5503 contains additional information on how to connect an
analyzer using the different connection types.
7.2 Transferring Measurement Data to Your PC

Measurement Partner Suite BZ-5503 is used for communication between your PC and the
analyzer. You can use this software to:
• Transfer measurement data and templates from the analyzer to your PC, and vice versa
• View data
• Organize data on the analyzer
• Create users on the analyzer
• Upgrade software on the analyzer
• Install software licenses on the analyzer
CHAPTER 7
71
Connection to PC or Smartphone or Measurement Partner Field App
Using this software, measurements on the analyzer can be controlled from your PC and displayed
online, using the same user interface on the PC as on the analyzer.
Data transferred to the PC are organized in Archives. You can view the measurement data in the
Archives.
7.2.1 Connect to Your PC

Connect the analyzer to your PC using one of the following:
• G1 – 3 analyzers:
– The supplied Mini USB Cable AO-1476
– A modem connection
– A LAN connection using a LAN cable (Type 2270 (G4) only)
– A LAN connection via CF card adaptor
• G4 analyzers:
– The supplied Micro USB Cable AO-1494
– A modem connection
– A LAN connection
The connection can be protected by requiring a login with user name and password – see
settings in section D.11. See Chapter 8 for descriptions on how to set up your preferences,
including PC connections.
7.2.2 Post-processing and Reporting

Use the optional modules of the Measurement Partner Suite for data analysis and post-
processing. For example, data in the archives can be post-processed directly in the Logging
Module BZ-5503-A or Spectrum Module BZ-5503-B. Furthermore, data can be exported to
various post-processing tools like Evaluator™ Type 7820 for assessing environmental noise;
Protector™ Type 7825 for assessing workplace noise; Qualifier™ Light Type 7831 for
documenting reverberation time measurements; or Microsoft® Excel®.
Signal recordings can be imported to Brüel & Kjær’s PULSE™ multi-analyzer platform for further
analysis.
For more information on Measurement Partner Suite BZ-5503 and the PULSE multi-analyzer
platform, see our website at www.bksv.com or contact your local Brüel & Kjær representative.
For further information on post-processing and reporting capabilities, please refer to the online
help included with the relevant PC software. This software is supplied on the Environmental
Software DVD (BZ-5298) included with your analyzer.
7.3 Measurement Partner (MP) Field App

Measurement Partner Field App is the recommended solution for on-site measurement control
and annotation.
MP Field App enables:
• Remote analyzer control
• Remote display
• Remote annotation of measurement data
You can wirelessly connect to your analyzer from a smartphone when the analyzer is connected
to the Internet or to the same network as the smartphone.
The analyzer can be connected through wired LAN, 3G modem or Wi-Fi connection to an access
point or directly to the hotspot of the smartphone.
The Wi-Fi connection can be made using USB Wi-Fi Dongle UL-1050 (preferred) or SD WLAN
Card UL-1025 for G4 or CF WLAN Card UL-1019 for G1 – G3.
Once connection is made to the analyzer, for noise measurements, the instantaneous LAF profile
is displayed and you can start, stop and pause your measurement from a safe distance. For
vibration measurements, the Fast inst. profile is shown.
Fig.7.1
MP Field App showing
the instantaneous LAF
CHAPTER 7
73
7.3.1 Annotations
MP Field App supports the following annotation types:
• Note
• Voice commentary
• Image
• Video
• GPS
All annotations are uploaded to MP Cloud for merging with the project in Measurement Partner
Suite.
It is also possible to annotate your measurements directly on the analyzer using notes, voice
commentaries and images (Type 2270 only). These are transferred to Measurement Partner Suite
along with your measurement data.
7.3.2 Connect the Analyzer to MP Field App
To Connect Using a Smartphone Hotspot

On the smartphone:
1) Create a personal hotspot.
Consult your smartphone help for instructions specific to your device.
On the analyzer:
2) Switch on the analyzer.
3) Plug in Wi-Fi Dongle UL-1050 (preferred) or WLAN SD-card UL-1021 for G4 analyzers or
WLAN CF-card UL-1019 for G1 – 3 analyzer.
✐Please note: The CF-card requires additional input. See section 8.3 for additional information).
4) Tap > Preferences > Network:

– Set IP Address and select Automatically .
– Available Networks and select the hotspot you set up.
Ensure that Preferences > Remote Access > Web Server is set to Enabled .
On the smartphone:
5) Open MP Field App.
6) Tap to open the Instruments screen.
7) Tap your analyzer's serial number to connect.
✐Please note: • For subsequent uses, MP Field App should recognized your analyzer and connect
automatically. However, the smartphone may assign a different IP address to the
analyzer. If so, repeat steps 6 and 7 to connect.
• If the analyzer does not appear on the instrument list, tap the + icon and enter the
analyzer's IP address (which can be found on your analyzer at
> Preferences > Network > IP Address)
To Connect Using an Access Point or Internet Connection

On the analyzer:
1) Switch on the analyzer.
2) Plug in Wi-Fi Dongle UL-1050 (preferred) or WLAN SD-card UL-1021 for G4 analyzers or
WLAN CF-card UL-1019 for G1 – 3 analyzers.
✐Please note: The CF-card requires additional input. See section 8.3 for additional information).
3) Tap > Preferences > Network >

a) IP Address and select Automatically.
b) Available Networks and select the network.
Ensure that Preferences > Remote Access > Web Server is set to Enabled.
On the smartphone:
4) Open MP Field App.
5) Tap to open the Instruments screen.
6) Tap your analyzer's serial number to connect.
✐Please note: For subsequent uses, MP Field App should recognized your analyzer and connect
automatically. However, the smartphone may assign a different IP address to the analyzer.
If so, repeat steps 5 and 6 to connect.
7.4 Internet Browser for Online Display and Control of the Analyzer
When the analyzer is connected to a network (see Fig.7.2) you can connect to the analyzer from
a PC or smartphone using an Internet browser supporting JavaScript™.
Analyzer Settings
You access preferences by tapping on > Preferences (the screen shown in Fig.8.1 will
appear).
CHAPTER 7
75
Tap Remote Access, or select next to Remote Access and set the Web Server parameters to
Enabled . Define sets of User Names and Passwords:
• One set for guest use (view only)
• One set for administrator use of the analyzer (view and full control)
See section 8.5 and section D.11 for more details.
Connect to Analyzer
When you enter the IP address or host name of the analyzer (see sections 8.2. and 8.3) in the address
or location bar of the Internet browser, the following screen appears:
Fig.7.2
Type 2250 home page
Click the Help link to get more detailed help on using the Web page.
Click the Service link for updating the software or for rebooting the analyzer.
Click the View Instrument button to enter the web page for viewing the analyzer only. You might
be prompted for the Guest Username and Guest Password defined for the Web server (see section
8.5).
Click the View and Control Instrument button to enter the web page for full access to the
analyzer. You will be prompted for the User Name and Password defined for the web server.
Fig.7.3
Prompt for username
and password
The View Instrument Web Page

Fig.7.4 shows the View Instrument Web page, where you have an online display of your analyzer.
You can use the online display for monitoring the measurement only, you cannot change the
display, or setup parameters, or start and stop measurements, etc.
Fig.7.4
Online display for
monitoring only
The analyzer can be viewed by several people at the same time, however, the response time will
increase with the number of connected browsers.
CHAPTER 7
77
The View and Control Instrument Web Page

Fig.7.5 shows the View and Control Instrument Web page, where you have an online display
and keyboard for full control of the analyzer. The online display can be used for monitoring the
measurement.
The keyboard on the screen has the same functions as the analyzer’s keyboard. Click on the
display with the cursor to control the analyzer as you do when tapping on the analyzer display.
Fig.7.5
Online display and
keyboard for full
control of the analyzer
79
Chapter 8
Advanced Use of the Analyzer –
Tips and Tricks
8.1 Setting your Preferences on the Analyzer

You can specify a number of parameters controlling display settings, power settings, regional
settings, storage settings and users. These parameters are grouped together under Preferences.
You access preferences by tapping > Preferences. The screen shown in Fig.8.1 will appear.
Fig.8.1
The Preferences screen
8.1.1 Display
Tap Display, or next to Display, to expand the list of available display settings (Fig.8.2). These
parameters allow you to select a suitable display colour scheme. This may vary, depending on the
lighting conditions at the time of the measurement.
Fig.8.2
Display screen
The colour schemes are:

• Indoor scheme – for everyday use
• Alhambra and Arcade schemes – alternative colour schemes for everyday use
• Outdoor scheme – for very bright conditions, where you need as much contrast as possible
• Night scheme – for measuring under very dark conditions, where is needed night vision
For each colour scheme, you can select the optimum choice of brightness for the traffic light (for
example, High for Outdoor in bright light conditions and Low for Night in dark conditions) and
whether to have backlight on the keyboard. In very bright lighting conditions you will not be able
to see the backlight, set it to Off to save some power.
To change the number of decimal places on your dB results readout between 1 and 2 decimal
places, or to change the number of digits on your engineering units readout between 3 to 4 digits,
tap Resolution of Readings and set to Normal or Extended , as required. This setting is for display
only and has no effect on the measurement precision or resolution.
To adjust the touch-sensitive screen. Tap Adjust Touch Screen > and follow the on-screen
instructions. At the end of the adjustment procedure you can save the values or cancel the
adjustment.
Tap Display, or , to collapse the list.
8.1.2 Power
The analyzer has an advanced power management function that takes care of supplying the
different circuits with adequate power and switches off circuits that are not in use. These power
management functions can be changed via Power (Fig.8.3).
CHAPTER 8
81
Advanced Use of the Analyzer – Tips and Tricks
Tap Power, or next to Power, to expand the list of power settings:

• Backlight Dim
• Standby
• Turn off Backlight (only with G1 – 3 analyzers)
• Ext. Power (only with G4 analyzers)
Fig.8.3
Power screen
Left: For G1 – 3
analyzers
Right: For G4 analyzers
The backlight will be switched on as soon as you operate the analyzer, either by using the
keyboard or stylus on the touch-sensitive screen. The backlight brightness will be one of the six
levels set by tapping at the bottom of the screen. Tap Minimum for minimum brightness (and
power consumption), or up to Maximum for maximum brightness (and power consumption). Once
you have chosen the level, tap Close to save the settings.
When the analyzer has been left unused for the time specified in the Backlight Dim parameter, the
backlight level will change to the dim level (Minimum ):
• For G1 – 3 analyzers, this state will hold for the time specified in the Turn off Backlight parameter
(if still left unused). If the analyzer has been left unused for the time specified in the Backlight Dim
parameter plus the Turn off Backlight time period, then the backlight will be switched off
completely (Fig.8.4). Use the keyboard or tap the screen to switch the backlight on again
• For G4 analyzers, the backlight will never be switched off completely because the Minimum
dim level already has the lowest power consumption
Fig.8.4 ‘Standby’ Parameter

Power Settings
overview
‘Backlight Dim’ ‘Turn off Backlight’ Backlight off

Parameter Parameter (hardware v. 1 – 3)
Time
040284/2
If the analyzer is left unused, not measuring and not communicating over the USB interface, it will
go to Standby after the time specified in the Standby parameter. If in Standby mode, you must
press to switch the analyzer on again.
The analyzer will automatically switch off when it has been in Standby mode without external
power for more than 30 hours.
✐Please note: • If the analyzer is powered externally, the Standby After parameters are ignored and
the analyzer will never go to Standby. However, if the analyzer is left unused for more
than Standby After time, the Standby After setting will overrule the Backlight settings
and the backlight will be switched off or dimmed.
• Please use the Display in conjunction with the Power to save power during
measurements and extend the battery operating time.
G4 analyzers have an Ext. Power setting, which determines whether the analyzer automatically
switches on and charges the battery when external power is applied or the battery is just charged.
It is recommended to select the Switch On and Charge setting for unattended measurements, to
ensure measurement will restart in case of power failure.
G1 – 3 analyzers have a similar function. There is a small, manual switch at the back of the
analyzer, under the battery pack. To access the switch, remove the battery.
When you have made your choices, tap Power, or , to collapse the list.
8.1.3 Regional
Tap Regional, or next to Regional, to expand the list of available regional settings (Fig.8.5).
Fig.8.5
Regional screen
Select your preferred settings for Decimal Point and Date Separator and select your preferred
Date Format (date and time) from the six different formats provided in the drop-down. Then
select your Time Zone from the list.
CHAPTER 8
83
A number of different languages are available for your analyzer. Select your preferred Language – if
it is not in the list, then it might be available for installation using BZ-5503 (Harware version 1 – 3
only).
Built-in help is provided in the more commonly used languages – if your particular language is
not covered, English will be chosen automatically.
Select a Keyboard matching the one you prefer when using your PC.
Select the unit system for Wind Speed Unit, Temperature Unit, Dimension Unit and Vibration
Unit, as required:
• Use the SI setting for measurement units in accordance with the SI standard, for example,
measuring wind speed in m/s
• Use the US/UK setting for imperial measurement units, for example, measuring Wind Speed
in mph
When you have made your choices, tap Regional , or , to collapse the list.
8.1.4 Users and Projects
Multi-user Facility
The analyzer can handle more than one user. Each user can have their own set of preferences,
templates and jobs and projects – completely invisible to other users. This can also be very useful
in organising large measurement jobs or cases – you can separate the cases completely from
each other by handling each case as a separate user.
The transducers, the calibration setup and the calibration histories of the transducers are common
to all users, as shown in the overview provided in Fig.8.6.
Fig.8.6 Overview of Multi-user Facility
Instrument
Transducer Calibration History Calibration Setup
User 1 User N
Preferences Preferences
Template Template
Display Param. Display Param.
Setup Setup
Project Project
Template Template
Meas. Data Meas. Data
Annotations Annotations
040105
Tap Users and Projects, or the plus icon , then select Enabled.
The analyzer, when delivered, has one default user called ‘2250’ (for Type 2250) or ‘2270’ (for
Type 2270).
Measurement Partner Suite BZ-5503 (included with the analyzer) is required to set up new users
on the analyzer (see section 7.1).
Project Naming Conventions

Each time you save the results of a measurement, the analyzer suggests a project name and
number for the project. The Project Name Prefix can be generated automatically (from the start
date of the project as Year, Month, Date in the format YYMMDD, for example, 051112 as 2005,
NOVEMBER 12th) or you can specify a Project Name Prefix (max. eight characters), using the
standard, full character keyboard that pops up when you tap the current name set as the Project
Name Prefix (Fig.8.7). (The field where you type in the Project Name Prefix will appear at the top
or bottom of the pop-up keyboard, depending on how many settings you have expanded in the
list.) The project suffix number will be generated automatically.
CHAPTER 8
85
Fig.8.7
Storage Settings screen
8.1.5 Headphone Settings

The Headphones allow you to control the output to the headphone socket on the connector panel.
Commentary annotations on measurements can always be heard on the headphones, regardless
of the options chosen in Headphones.
In addition to the commentary annotations, you can listen to the measured signal for monitoring
purposes. Select between A/B-weighted , C-weighted or Z-weighted . (A/B-weighting is determined by
setting the parameter in Setup > Frequency Settings > Broadband (excl. peak)).
The measured signal covers approximately 120 dB (from approximately 20 dB to 140 dB with a
Type 4189, 4190 or 4966 microphone of nominal sensitivity). The output of the headphone
socket covers approximately 75 dB. Use Gain for Meas. signal to adjust the output level to suit the
listening conditions. If the signal has a very high dynamic range (or the levels are unknown), you
can set Automatic Gain Control to On – this will convert the 120 dB input range to 40 dB output
range enabling you to hear signals of any level clearly.
Individual gain settings are provided for the commentary annotations and the measured signal.
Tap the gain parameter and use the keypad to enter a new setting. Use ‘@’ to assign the new value
for immediate response at the output – or use the up/down navigation keys to
increment/decrement the value.
✐Please note: A 0 dB gain on the measurement signal means you get a 1 V output for a 1 V input (when
the measured signal Automatic Gain Control is set to Off ).
💡Hint: • While playing back an annotation, you can use the up/down navigation keys to
increase/decrease the gain of the annotation.
• If you do not want to listen to the input signal, then set the Listen to Signal parameter
to No , to economize on power.
8.1.6 Printers
You can make screen dumps on a printer connected to the analyzer using a standard USB cable,
or on G1 – 3 analyzers, the supplied Adaptor AO-0657. Use the Printers to select your preferred
printer.
When a printer has been selected under the Printer Used parameter, then the Print Screen
command in the Main Menu list appears. Use this command to print a screen dump of any screen
on the analyzer.
The printer must either be a mobile thermal printer (from AM Tech or Seiko) or accept the PCL®
printer language:
• MPS : Mobile Pro Spectrum – a mobile thermal printer from AM Tech (www.amteq.co.kr)
• PCL : printers accepting PCL printer language
• PCL Inkjet : suitable for Inkjet printers and supports colour printing
• PCL Laser : suitable for laser printers
• Seiko DPU : DPU-S245 or DPU-S445 – mobile thermal printers from Seiko Instruments
(www.seikoinstruments.com)
PCL is the Printer Control Language developed by Hewlett-Packard (see www.hp.com). For PCL
printers, you can use the Top and Left Margin parameters to position the print on the paper, and
use Width and Height parameters to set the size of the print.
8.2 Modem/DynDNS Settings

You can use the analyzer for monitoring in remote places and control it using Measurement
Partner Suite BZ-5503 via a telephone connection – wired or wireless – using suitable modems
or via network connections. See the overview of possibilities in Table 7.1. When you connect via
a modem, or via a network connection, you will see the contents of the analyzer in the Instrument
Task as if you had made the connection via USB. You then have the same possibilities for
transferring data to the Archives and organising data on the analyzer, as if you were connected
via the USB connector.
The analyzer is connected directly to the Internet through a modem. BZ-5503 or an Internet
browser will then be able to connect to the analyzer through TCP/IP using the analyzer’s (global)
IP address. The setup of the modem connected to the analyzer is described in section
8.2.2 – please refer to the BZ-5503 online help for details on how to make a connection.
CHAPTER 8
87
8.2.1 Connection to the Network using a LAN Modem

Using a 3G modem with LAN interface is a simple and very reliable and powerful way of remotely
connecting to the analyzer.
Set up the modem according to its user manual (usually requires connection to a PC) before you
connect the modem to your analyzer. When ready, connect the modem to the analyzer using a
LAN cable. For G1 – 3 analyzers, you will also need the 10/100 Ethernet CF Card UL-1016. (see
Ordering Information on page 226)
The Modem parameter should be set to Off .
The Airlink Raven XE, Intelligent 3G Ethernet Gateway from Sierra Wireless
(www.sierrawireless.com) has been tested.
8.2.2 Connection to Network using GPRS/EDGE/HSPA Modem

✔Best Practice: Turn off the analyzer when connecting the analyzer to a modem.
✐Please note: The SIM card account should include a data subscription and should be usable without a
pincode.
To use the modem you need to set up the parameters in Dialup Networking (listed below) and
set the Modem parameter to GPRS/EDGE/HSPA Dialup .
Parameters in Dialup Networking:
• APN (Access Point Name) is an identifier required by the network operator. Examples are
Internet, public and www.vodaphone.de
• User Name, Password and possibly Domain should be set as required by the network
operator
When the Modem parameter is set to GPRS/EDGE/HSPA Dialup , a connection is made using the
settings in Dialup Networking. The Status parameter reflects the current status of the network
connection – for example, Connected or Disconnected. If the connection fails, then the analyzer will
try to reconnect – until it succeeds, or the Modem parameter is set to Disabled .
If the connection succeeds, then the analyzer will automatically get an IP address, which is
readable (but not accessible) in Network – for more details see section 8.3.
The IP address is the address on the WAN (Wide Area Network) or Internet. Use this address in
BZ-5503 or an Internet browser to connect to the analyzer.
✐Please note: In some cases you might be able to get a static IP address from the network operator,
which means that the analyzer will always have the same IP address when connected to the
network. However, typically the IP address will be renewed each time the analyzer
connects to the network. In order to deal with this, in BZ-5503 or via an Internet browser
you need to use DynDNS – see section 8.2.3.
Modems with USB Interface

The Airlink Fastrack Xtend GPRS, EDGE and HSPA modem from Sierra Wireless
(www.sierrawireless.com) has been tested
Modems with an USB interface can be connected to the USB Type A socket on G4 analyzers.
Modems with RS–232 Serial Interfaces

The following modems have been tested:
• FASTRACK Supreme 10 and 20 GSM/GPRS/EDGE Modem from Wavecom
• Airlink Fastrack Xtend GPRS, EDGE and HSPA from Sierra Wireless (www.sierrawireless.com)
For G4 analyzers, modems with an RS– 232 serial interface can be connected using a USB to serial
converter inserted in the USB Type A socket of the analyzer. The following USB to serial converters
have been tested:
• USB to RS–232 Converter UL-0250 (see Ordering Information on page 226)
• ES-U-1001-R10, ES-U-1001-B10 and ES-U-1001-A from EasySync (www.easysync-ltd.com)
• USB to RS232 Standard, USB to RS232 Professional and USB to RS232 Mini STD from U.S.
Converters (www.usconverters.com)
For G1 – 3 analyzers, use a compact flash-to-serial converter inserted in the compact flash slot of
the analyzer. Serial I/O CF Card – Ruggedized from Socket (www.socketmobile.com) has been
tested.
CompactFlash Modems (for Hardware Versions 1 – 3)

Compact GPRS™ from Pretec (www.pretec.com) has been tested.
Compactflash modems can be inserted directly in the compact flash socket of the analyzer.
8.2.3 DynDNS
If the analyzer is connected to the Internet through a GPRS/EDGE/HSPA modem or a local
network with access to the Internet through a DSL modem/router and you want to connect to the
analyzer from a place outside the local network, then you need to know:
• Global IP address of the analyzer, or
• Global IP address of the DSL modem/router (and ensure that correct port forwarding in has
been set the router – details in the online help for BZ-5503)
In some cases, the global IP address is static and will never change, so you connect to the analyzer
using BZ-5503 or an Internet browser using this IP address.
Normally when you browse to addresses using an Internet browser you do not use the IP address
itself, but a hostname for it (for example, you would use the hostname www.google.com instead
of ‘74.125.77.99’). This requires a DNS (Domain Name System) provider, which is a kind of Internet
phone book that translates hostnames to IP addresses for you.
CHAPTER 8
89
However, for a GPRS/EDGE/HSPA or even a DSL router, often the global IP address is renewed at
each new connection or at certain time intervals (for example, every two weeks). In this case you
will have to change the IP address in BZ-5503 or the Internet browser accordingly. To avoid this,
a service like DDNS (Dynamic Domain Name System) can be used.
DDNS is a network service that provides the capability for a modem/router/computer system to
notify a domain name system provider to change, in real time (ad-hoc), the active DNS
configuration of its configured hostnames and IP addresses. This will ensure that the hostname
you use will always be updated to reflect the correct IP address.
The analyzer supports DDNS provided by the worldwide DDNS service provider ‘DynDNS.com’.
The analyzer can then be configured to notify DynDNS.com each time the global IP address is set
or changed. When BZ-5503 or an Internet browser connects to the analyzer, it then uses a
hostname defined by DynDNS.com. From DynDNS.com it then gets the updated IP address.
You need to make an account at DynDNS.com, specifying a user name and a password for the
account and a hostname (for example, 'MyBK2250.dyndns.org') identifying your analyzer.
In the analyzer you need to specify the Hostname, Username and Password and set Active to Yes in
Preferences, under Modem/DynDNS settings. Each time the analyzer detects a change in the IP
address it notifies DynDNS.com.
✐Please note: To avoid too much traffic at DynDNS.com, the analyzer ensures that this service does not
allow updates of settings more frequently than every 10 minutes. So you may experience
up to a 10 minute wait for DynDNS settings to update.
8.3 Network Settings

The analyzer can be connected to a Local Area Network (LAN) through an Ethernet cable or to a
Wi-Fi network using equipment conforming to the IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n standard. This connection
can be used to synchronize measurement and setup data with a host PC using BZ-5503.
The analyzer supports Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).
This requires the analyzer to have a unique address on the network. This address is called an IP
address and consists of four sets of 3-digit numbers, for example, 010.116.121.016.
The IP address can be obtained in different ways:
• Automatically
• Using DHCP
A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Server on the network assigns automatically
an IP address to the analyzer when connected to the network. This is the most common way
of setting up IP addresses
• Using Link-local
If no address is automatically assigned by the DHCP Server, then after a few seconds the
analyzer will use an address from the Link-local address range 169.254.x.x
This will most likely be the case when connecting the analyzer directly to a PC using an
Ethernet crossover cable
• Manually
You setup the IP address manually
This will typically be the case in a private network without a DHCP Server
8.3.1 Connecting to the Analyzer
Wired LAN Connection

• Use a “straight-through” (standard) Ethernet cable with RJ45 connectors at both ends to
connect the analyzer to the network (via a hub, switch or router)
• Use a “crossover” Ethernet cable with RJ45 connectors at both ends to connect the analyzer
directly to a PC
G4 analyzers have an Auto-MDIX facility, allowing you to use either a straight-through or
crossover cable to connect to a network or PC.
With G1 – 3 analyzers, only Type 2270 has a built-in LAN socket on the connector panel (see
section 2.3).
Wi-Fi Connection
Types 2250 and 2270 provide a wireless LAN option using a Wi-Fi device.
Types 2250 and 2270 with hardware version 4 accept the following:
• USB Wi-Fi Dongle UL-1050 (preferred)
• P322 802.11abg SD WLAN from Socket Mobile (www.socketmobile.com)
Types 2250 and 2270 with hardware versions 1 – 3 accept the following compact flash LAN and
WLAN cards:
• 10/100 Ethernet Ruggedized CF Card from Socket Mobile
(www.socketmobile.com) – Brüel & Kjær order number UL-1016
• Go Wi-Fi!® P500 CF WLAN, rev. B and rev. C from Socket Mobile – Brüel & Kjær order number
UL-1019
CHAPTER 8
91
8.3.2 Parameters in Network Settings
Location
Use the Location parameter to specify a text up to 20-character long, identifying the analyzer
or location of the analyzer. The Location will be displayed on the PC as well as the serial
number of the analyzer when browsing for analyzers in BZ-5503 and when connected using
the online display.
💡Hint: The Location parameter is useful for both USB and LAN connections
Network Connection
• G1 – 3 analyzers:
– Type 2250:
None : (default)
CF Socket : Select this to use an Ethernet CF Card in the Compact Flash socket
– Type 2270:
LAN Socket : (default) Select this to connect via a LAN cable. This is disabled if an Ethernet
CF card is inserted in the Compact Flash socket
CF Socket : Select this to use an Ethernet CF Card in the Compact Flash socket
• G4 analyzers (for all analyzer types):
– LAN Socket : (default) Select this to connect via a LAN cable. LAN settings are hidden if a
Wi-Fi Dongle or an SD WLAN card is inserted
– SD Socket : Automatically set when an SD WLAN card is in the SD card slot
– WiFi Dongle: Automatically set when USB Wi-Fi Dongle UL-1050 is in the USB slot
Set IP Address
This setting is common to LAN and Wi-Fi connections.
Automatically : Obtain an IP address from a DHCP server – if no server available, then a Link-
local address will be set
Manually : You have to set the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway, Preferred DNS
and Alternate DNS (see below)
IP Address
The IP address of the analyzer
Selectable if Set IP Address = Manually
Subnet Mask
The Subnet Mask combined with the IP Address identifies the network segment the
analyzer is on
Default Gateway
Address to a gateway for routing to another network
Preferred DNS
The IP address of the primary DNS server
Alternate DNS
The IP address of the secondary DNS server
MAC Address
The Media Access Control (MAC) address of the network adaptor (LAN or Wi-Fi) in use. The
MAC address is a unique identifier assigned to the network adaptor. This field is for
information only.
Status
The status of the network connection:
• Operational : the network adaptor can be used for a connection
• Non-operational : the network adaptor cannot be used
Parameters for Wi-Fi Only

Name
Name (SSID) of the network you want to connect to. Update the name either by:
• entering a name directly, or
• tapping on Available Networks and selecting a name from the list
✐Please note: G4 analyzers will automatically detect the security needed and prompt you for a password.
Please enter the password for the network. If you already are connected to the network
you can select to forget the network.
Available Networks
Tap the line to get a list of available networks. Tap a name in the list to connect to this network.
The name is inserted in the Name line above this line. Each network name is preceded with
Signal Strength information, ranging from Excellent (displayed as ‘• • • • •’) down to No Signal
(displayed as no dots at all)
Security (G1 – 3 Only)
Select the Security as required by the network: Open , Shared , WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK . Open and
Shared are for Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) Infrastructure mode. WPA PSK is for Wi-Fi
CHAPTER 8
93
Protected Access (WPA) with Pre-shared Key (also called Personal mode). WPA2 is an
enhanced version of WPA
Encryption (G1 – 3 Only)
Select the Encryption as required by the network: None , WEP Enabled, AES Enabled or
TKIP Enabled . None is for Open security. WEP Enabled is for Open and Shared security. AES and
TKIP Enabled are for WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK security
Encryption Key (G1 – 3 Only)

Insert the Encryption Key required by the network. The key will be displayed until you press
Enter, then it will be replaced by ‘ *** ’
8.4 Notifications
The analyzer can send you a daily status or notify you if noise level exceeds a set threshold level,
if disk space is getting low or external power has disappeared, etc. This is done via SMS (text
message) or email, as described in this section. The SMS/email notification contains a short status
report for the analyzer. This facility is especially useful if the analyzer is left for unattended
monitoring.
8.4.1 Alarm Settings

If one or more of the following alarms occur, then a notification will be issued as either an SMS
or an email, depending on your equipment and settings. If the notification fails (for example, the
connection has been lost), then the analyzer will retry to send the notification once more after five
minutes.
Table 8.1 Alarm Settings
Alarm Type Condition Comment
Power On When analyzer is Indicates start from a timer, or a power failure, or

switched on or unexpected behaviour
reboots
Measurement When a measurement Indicates measurement finished – or unexpected

State starts or stops behaviour
CIC When Charge Indicates possible measurement problem

Injection Calibration
fails
Alarm Type Condition Comment
Internal When Internal Battery Indicates internal battery getting low. Internal Battery will
Battery is entering a specified be in one of the states: Full, High, Low, Critical, Charging or
state: High, Low or Unknown. You can set alarm to High , Low or Critical in
Critical. Preferences > Notification Settings > Alarm
Settings > Internal Battery.
✐Please note: The internal battery will typically be in

one of the states Full or Charging if externally powered.
Entering one of the set states might then indicate a power
failure
Trigger Input When voltage at Indicates no external power, or external battery getting
Voltage Trigger Input drops to low.
or below a specified Set Setup > Input > Trigger Type to Voltage for
level Monitoring .
Set the voltage limit in
Preferences > Notifications > Alarm
Settings > Trigger Input Voltage.
Connect the external battery or external power to this
input (in addition to the External Power Socket) to get an
alarm if the voltage drops to or below the specified level
Disk Space When remaining disk Indicates disk space getting low – needs to be swapped
space drops to or with an empty disk. Set the percentage in
below a specified Preferences > Notifications > Alarm Settings > Disk
percentage of the Space
total disk space
Level Trigger When level trigger Indicates sound level exceeds trigger level specified in
conditions are LOGGING or ENH. LOGGING template
fulfilled
Report Level When LAeq of the Indicates that the sound level LAeq for the latest Report
latest Report Period Period exceeds Report Threshold Level.
exceeds Report
Threshold Level ✐Please note: If you specify a very low Report Threshold
Level you will receive a notification at the end of each
Report Period.
Only available when running the Enhanced Logging
template.
For 2-channel Enh. Logging the Report Threshold Level is
used for Ch.1 and Report Threshold Level 2 is used for
Ch.2.
CHAPTER 8
95
Table 8.2 Content of Notification
Information Type Content
Reason for notification Test , Alarm or Status followed by a short description
Time of notification Date and Time
Instrument ID Serial No. and Location
Status of current Disk Free memory / Total memory
Status of Internal Battery Full , High , Low , Critical , Charging or Unknown
Trigger Input Voltage (if The voltage

available)
Measurement Status (if Running , Paused or Stopped

available)
No. of Signal Recordings (if The number of signal recordings made since start of
available) measurement
Latest CIC Result (if available) Passed , Background noise too high , Ratio outside tolerances , Ratio
deviates from Ref. , Undefined Ref. , or Undefined. For 2-channel
measurements: One CIC result per channel
Current value of LAF (if available) The value. For 2-channel measurements: One CIC result per channel
Report Threshold Level The value
Report Level LAeq The value
✐Please note: Some of the information listed above may not be available, depending on the conditions
when the notification was sent, for example, no measurement values will be available
immediately after a power on.
8.4.2 Text/SMS Notifications

Notifications via SMS (text message) can be used if you have connected a
GSM/GPRS/EDGE/HSPA modem to the analyzer (section 8.2.2) and set Modem to Disabled (a text
message cannot be sent if the modem is set to GPRS/EDGE/HSPA Dialup ).
In addition to sending notifications initiated by alarms, you can send an ‘Info’ text to the analyzer
and ask for an SMS notification, after which you will get a notification within 30 seconds.
You must set > Preferences > Notifications > SMS:
• Phone Number to the appropriate number
• Active to Yes
You can also add a Name for the number for easier identification.
You can setup two individual SMS phone numbers for sending the SMS notification to two
recipients.
Set Notification to SMS and a notification will be sent by SMS to the active phone numbers, when
any of the alarm conditions are met, or if the analyzer receives an ‘Info’ SMS.
You can test the system by tapping on > Send Notification via SMS.
✐Please note: • Two to three text messages will be used to send the complete
notification – depending on the content and language settings.
• Text messages cannot be sent or received while the analyzer is connected to BZ-5503
or displayed online.
8.4.3 Email Notifications

Email notifications can be used if the analyzer is connected to a network with access to a mail
server. This can typically be done if the analyzer is connected through LAN or by a
GPRS/EDGE/HSPA modem (see section 8.2.2 and section 8.3).
Go to Preferences > Notifications > E-mail and setup details for the e-mail account under the
To parameter. The details consist of the SMTP server name, the SMTP Port used, whether
SSL/TLS is required or not, the Account, the User Name and Password for the account – please
consult section D.10 (Appendix D) and your email provider for more details.
Set Notification to E-mail and a notification will be sent by email when any of the alarm
conditions are met.
You can test the system by tapping on > Send Notification via E-mail.
Example of email:
Subject: E-mail from 2479719 Abbey Road Test: Manual e-mail
Test: Manual e-mail
29-04-2009 12:51:16
Instrument 2479719 Abbey Road
SD-Card 383 MB / 483 MB
Internal Battery Charging
Trigger Input Voltage 13.5V
Measurement Status Running
No. of Signal Recordings 13
CIC Result Passed
LAF 45.8dB
CHAPTER 8
97
8.5 Web Server

To connect to the analyzer using an Internet browser, the following conditions must be fulfilled:
• The analyzer must be connected to a network as described in sections 8.2.2, 8.2.3 and 8.3
• The Internet browser must support JavaScript™
The Web page of the analyzer has been tested on the following Internet browsers:
• Microsoft® Internet Explorer®, from version 7
• Mozilla® Firefox®, from version 3
• Google Chrome™, from version 2
• Apple® Safari®, from version 4
You may also be able to connect to the analyzer using Internet browsers on smartphones such
as an iPhone®.
8.5.1 Password Protection

Connection to the analyzer is password protected. There are two levels of protection:
• Guest – for viewing only
• Administrator – for viewing and controlling the analyzer
User Name and Password

Under Preferences, set User Name and Password individually for the Guest and for
Administrator accounts.
You need to specify User Name and Password for the Administrator, however, you can specify
whether a guest requires a login or not.
8.6 Connecting to Weather Stations and GPS Receivers
8.6.1 Weather Stations

The analyzer can be connected to the following weather stations:
• Weather Station MM-0316 – for measurement of wind speed and wind direction
• Weather Station MM-0256 – for measurement of wind speed, wind direction, ambient
temperature, ambient pressure, relative humidity and rainfall
A weather station can be connected to the analyzer using USB Adaptor ZH-0698.
For Noise Monitoring Terminal Type 3639-A, B and C details on how to mount and connect the
weather station using Utility Unit ZH-0689 or ZH-0705, please refer to Noise Monitoring Terminal
Type 3639-A, B and C – User Manual BE 1818.
When you have connected the Weather Station, you can verify the connection by displaying the
instantaneous updated parameters Wind Dir. and Wind Speed from the Weather group.
Data from the weather station is automatically obtained during the measurement and saved on
data – see measurement parameters in Appendix B. The measured data can be displayed as
parameters from the Weather group.
Fig.8.8
Data from weather
station obtained during
a measurement and
saved on data
8.6.2 GPS Receivers

The analyzer can be connected to the following GPS receivers:
• GPS Receiver ZZ-0249 – for measurement of latitude, longitude, altitude and position error
For Noise Monitoring Terminal Type 3639-A, B and C details on how to mount and connect
the GPS receiver using Utility Unit ZH-0689 or ZH-0705, please refer to Noise Monitoring
Terminal Type 3639-A, B and C – User Manual BE 1818.
• ND-100S GPS USB Dongle from Globalsat (www.globalsat.com.tw) – for measurement of
latitude, longitude and altitude
• BU-353 Cable GPS with USB Interface from Globalsat – for measurement of latitude,
longitude and altitude
The GPS receivers with USB interface can be connected directly to the USB port on analyzers with
G4 analyzers. On G1 – 3 analyzers, the GPS receivers can be connected using USB Adaptor
AO-0657.
The first time you connect the GPS receiver to the analyzer (or if it has been several days since you
last connected them), be sure to be in an open area with a clear view to the sky (such as a park or
empty field). Wait for GPS initialization to complete. This may take a few minutes depending on
factors such as the distance from the previous coordinates, GPS signal strength and surrounding
terrain (tall trees and buildings can block the satellite signals).
Once the Latitude and Longitude (from the Special parameter group) display data, a fix has been
initialized (the LED on the GlobalSat GPS will also start to flash).
CHAPTER 8
99
In some cases initialization can take up to several minutes depending on the conditions
mentioned above before complete GPS data are displayed on the screen. The GPS may get a
faster fix if connected through a small USB cable (delivered together with the GPS).
If a GPS receiver is connected when data are saved in a project, a GPS note is automatically created
as an annotation with the GPS information.
See more details on GPS notes in section 3.4.
8.7 Preparing your Measurements

You can prepare your measurements in advance by making job folders, setting up the correct
measurement parameters in the templates, defining settings for metadata and by making
checklists (see example in Fig. 8.8) either as memos containing addresses and phone numbers of
relevant people, or notes that have been partly filled-in beforehand, where you just have to fill in
the final information on location. The notes can be attached to jobs as annotations, and can be
copied onto projects, when necessary.
Fig.8.9
Example notes screen
When you have finished typing in your note, tap to accept the changes and save it as a text
annotation. See section 3.4 for more details on annotations.
8.7.1 Metadata
For easy and convenient use of metadata, define settings for any metadata entered and displayed
on the Annotations screen (see section 3.4) in advance.
To define settings for each of the 30 metadata:

✐Please note: Ensure that you do not have any saved data displayed on the screen.
1) Tap Paperclip .
If the Paperclip icon is not visible, you have no metadata or annotations. To access the
Annotations screen, use the navigation pushbuttons ( , , , ) to move the field selector
into the top right corner of the Status Field. Tap Paperclip .
💡Hint: If you do not have any metadata defined, you can create a set of default metadata to have
a convenient starting point for defining your own metadata. Tap and check the Insert
default metadata checkbox and tap OK.
✐Please note: Inserting default metadata will overwrite existing metadata!
2) Tap the Edit icon in front of the metadata you want to edit (Fig.8.10) to define:
– Metadata:
Enabled (visible and editable on the Annotations screen) or
Disabled (invisible on the Enabled (visible and editable on the Annotations screen)
– Name: Insert a name preceding the metadata value when displayed on the Annotations
screen
– Type: Select a type suitable for your metadata. Select between:
Text : The metadata is the text you enter or edit using the alphanumeric keyboard
Pick List : The metadata are selected from a list of up to 30 user-defined texts
Number : The metadata number is entered using the numeric keyboard
Index : The metadata number is automatically incremented after creating the project
Not defined : The metadata are removed from the project. This will be the initial state of
metadata for old projects without metadata.
– Entry No. (for type = Pick List ):
The entry number for the text to be defined in the pick list. Select the required number
and enter text in the Entry Text field
– Entry Text:
For Type = Text: The text
For Type = Pick List : The text for the selected Entry No .
– Current No. : For Type = Number : The number
– Current Index : For Type = Index : The index
– Step (for Type = Index ):
The Current Index is incremented with Step after creation of a project
The index wraps around when exceeding Upper Limit or getting below Lower Limit
✐Please note: Step can be negative
– Upper Limit : For Type = Index : The upper limit of the index
– Lower Limit : For Type = Index : The lower limit of the index
CHAPTER 8
101
At the top of the screen you can set a checkmark to use the settings for this metadata on new
projects when closing the display.
The checkmark is disabled for changes to the definition of the metadata currently in use because
this will always be used for new projects, however, when you are editing or looking at metadata
from a previously saved project you can decide whether to use the settings on new projects too
or keep the changes to the project only.
Fig.8.10
Edit metadata
8.7.2 Timers and Automatic Measurements

Automatic control of the analyzer is available via one or more of the analyzer’s timers (up to ten).
The purpose of a timer is to initiate measurements in the absence of an operator. Basically, a timer
will:
• Switch on the analyzer at a preset time
• Load a preselected template
• Start a measurement as specified in the template
• Stop the measurement after a preset time defined by the Timer Setup
• Save the measurement
• Switch the analyzer off
• Repeat the above a preset number of times at preset intervals
For a timer to work, the analyzer must be in the ‘switched off’ state.
A timer will never interrupt the analyzer if it is already in use manually. If a switch-on time is set
during the time the analyzer is in use, the timer opportunity is lost.
You can control the analyzer during a timer-initiated measurement as long as this does not affect
the measurements. If you try to change any parameters affecting the measurement you will be
warned of this. If you persist, the analyzer will revert to manual control and timer control cannot
be resumed.
The Timer Setup lists the timers that have been defined previously on the analyzer (that is, added
by you or previous users).
Fig.8.11
Example Timer Setup
In the topmost line you can add other timers by tapping on the Add New Timer icon . You can
delete a timer from the list by tapping on the Delete Timer icon . Only timers created by the
current user can be deleted. To delete a timer defined by another user, you have to logon as the
other user and then delete the timer.
For each timer you can specify:
• State : Enable or disable the timer
• Name : Name the timer
• Template : Select the template you want to use for the measurement
✐Please note: Reverberation Time templates are not available for timer control
• Start Time : Set the start time – at least 3 minutes ahead of current time
• Preset Time : Set the preset time for the measurement – regardless of the settings in the
template used by the timer
• Stop Time: The time when the measurement stops – for information only
• No. of Starts : Set to the total number of times you want to start the measurement
• Start Every : The time interval between the start of each successive measurement. This interval
must be greater than Preset Time + 3 minutes
• User : The user who specified the timer. Cannot be changed
✐Please note: When using timers for automatic measurements, ensure the meter is connected to a stable
power supply. It is advised to set the Ext. Power switch to Charge battery only – see
section 8.1.2.
103
Chapter 9
Updating and Upgrading Applications,
Maintenance, Calibration and Troubleshooting
9.1 How to Install New Applications

Sound Level Meter Software BZ-7222, Frequency Analysis Software BZ-7223, Logging Software
BZ-7224, Enhanced Logging Software BZ-7225, Signal Recording Option BZ-7226,
Reverberation Time Software BZ-7227, Building Acoustics Software BZ-7228, FFT Software
BZ-7230, Tone Assessment Option BZ-7231, Noise Monitoring Software BZ-7232 and Enhanced
Vibration and Low Frequency Option BZ-7234 are pre-installed on Types 2250 and 2270. In
addition, 2-channel Option BZ-7229 (and the 2-channel modules for Sound Level Meter,
Frequency Analysis, Logging, Enhanced Logging and Building Acoustics software) and Sound
Intensity Software BZ-7233 are pre-installed on Type 2270. However, a valid license is required
to run the software. If you have purchased the analyzer together with the software
application(s), then the relevant license(s) will come pre-installed on the analyzer.
If you purchase a separate software application for your analyzer, then you have to install the
license onto the analyzer. This is done using Measurement Partner Suite BZ-5503, please consult
the online help included with the BZ-5503 software for instructions on how to install a license.
Tap , on the analyzer’s screen, then About to get a list of installed software and licenses.
9.2 How to Update/Upgrade Applications and Install New Languages

Brüel & Kjær recommends that you always use the most current software available. New versions
of the analyzer software are available for download via the Brüel & Kjær website
(www.bksv.com). To do this, use Measurement Partner Suite BZ-5503, or connect the analyzer
directly to the Internet to download. Some software versions will be free updates, and some will
be upgrades requiring that a new license is purchased.
9.2.1 Update/Upgrade using BZ-5503

BZ-5503 can be used for updating or upgrading new software applications on your analyzer. It
can even downgrade to specific software versions if required by type approval authorities. Using
BZ-5503, you can also install licenses for the specific applications; and, if you have hardware
version 1 – 3, install your preferred language (with G4 hardware, all languages are pre-installed
in the analyzer). Installation requires a USB connection between BZ-5503 and the analyzer.
BZ-5503 software will clearly indicate if the new software version is an update (free of charge) or
an upgrade (license fee). Please consult the on-line help included with BZ-5503 for instructions
on how to install upgrades/updates of the software, together with your preferred language.
9.2.2 Update through the Internet

The analyzer can update software by itself, if it is connected to the Internet – see section 7.1.
This method is particularly useful if the analyzer is used for long-term monitoring, and you do not
want to go to the measurement site for servicing (that is, you want to disturb the measurement
as little as possible).
✐Please note: • The method is used for updating the software with the latest version available from
the Brüel & Kjær website. The languages already installed will be updated at the same
time. If you have G1 – 3 analyzers, you cannot install new languages or licenses – to
do this, you must use BZ-5503.
• This can be done remotely if you connect to the online display using either BZ-5503
or an Internet browser.
To update via the Internet:

1) Tap , on the analyzer’s screen, then About to get a list of installed software and licenses.
2) Scroll down to the bottom of the screen and tap the Check for updates on the web…> link, the
Software Update screen appears – see Fig.9.1and Fig.9.2.
3) Click on the Check for Updates button to check for the latest updates.
This will connect to the Brüel & Kjær update server. If a new software version is available, the
build version will be displayed and you can decline or start the update (you will be warned,
if the new version requires a new license). If the versions that are available are not later than
those already installed you will be told so and the update will be terminated.
4) If you choose to update the analyzer, the software will start downloading to the SD or CF card
(G1 – 3 analyzers) already inserted in the analyzer. You need at least 200 MB of free space on
the memory card. Depending on the speed and quality of the Internet connection, this can
take from a few minutes to several hours. If the connection is lost, then the download will
automatically continue when connection is established again.
✐Please note: The analyzer can continue measuring during the download period.
5) When download is complete, the measurement is paused and normal use of the analyzer is
prevented. Connections to the analyzer are terminated and the upgrade of the analyzer will
start. This will take 10-15 minutes and the analyzer will reboot when finished. Any unsaved
logging data will be saved and the analyzer is ready to use again.
6) Connect to the analyzer again and verify the new software version by tapping , on the
analyzer's screen, then About.
To continue the measurement, press the Start pushbutton.
CHAPTER 9
105
Updating and Upgrading Applications, Maintenance, Calibration and Troubleshooting
✐Please note: If you have set up your analyzer for email notifications (see section 8.4), you will get an
email in step 4) when the analyzer is paused, and you will get a new e-mail in step 5), when
the analyzer has rebooted and is ready for connection again.
Fig.9.1
About screen –
showing the ‘Check for
updates on the Web
link’
Fig.9.2
Software update
screen – showing the
‘Check for updates
button’
9.2.3 Downgrade to an Earlier Version

It is possible to downgrade to an earlier version of the software:
1) Change the latest part of the server address (Fig.9.2) to the requested software package, for
example, SW22.
2) Tap Check for updates.
3) Follow the procedure described in section 9.2.1 or section 9.2.2.
✐Please note: Only software packages equal to or above SW24 can downgrade to another package.
Software packages down to SW21 are available for update through Internet.
9.3 How to Move a License

If you have more than one analyzer, you may want to share application software between the
analyzers. You can do this by moving the license from one analyzer to another by using
Measurement Partner Suite BZ-5503, together with the License Mover VP-0647.
If you lend out your analyzer, you may want to temporarily uninstall applications not needed. This
can be achieved by moving the license of the application to License Mover VP-0647. When needed
again, you move the license back to your analyzer.
Please consult the on-line help included with the BZ-5503 software for instructions on how to
move a license.
9.4 Troubleshooting
9.4.1 Measurements
If your measurement seems to be wrong, then:
• Check the cabling, if any
• Check that the microphone, including preamplifier, is correctly mounted in the top socket (or
correctly connected to the extension cable)
• Check that the Input parameter is set to Top Socket/Rear Socket in agreement with how you
are going to use the input. This is found by tapping > Setup > Input
• Check that the transducer you have mounted on your analyzer is selected as the Transducer
parameter, this is also found on the Setup screen
• Check whether the parameters for the selected transducer (Transducer ) are set correctly,
especially the Microphone Type and Polarization Voltage parameters. These are found by
tapping > Transducers
• Check that the Sound Field and Windscreen Correction parameters have been set correctly
These are found by tapping > Setup > Input
• Check if the calibration is OK (make a new calibration using an external calibrator)
9.4.2 SD/CF Cards and USB Sticks

The Logging, Enhanced Logging and Signal Recording software requires that measurements are
saved on memory cards – SD or (with G1 – 3 analyzers) CF. A USB memory stick can be used from
hardware version 4.
Device Format and Speed

In order to ensure reliable operation with the memory device, the format of the file system and
the speed of the device are tested. Upon insertion, the analyzer verifies the format of the memory
device’s file system. If the file system is not optimal for usage with the analyzer, then you are
prompted to format it. You will be guided through the process.
CHAPTER 9
107
When the format of the file system has been accepted, then the speed of the device is tested. The
test writes data to the device and measures the writing speed. The test takes less than a minute.
If the speed test is successful, then you can proceed using the device, otherwise you should use
another memory device or try reformatting the device (if not done already).
Problems with Storing or Recalling Data

If you experience problems in storing or recalling data on the memory device, you can check and
repair the integrity of the file system on the device or even re-format it, by doing the following:
1) Insert the memory device in the correct slot of the connector panel of the analyzer.
2) You will be notified that a memory device has been inserted – select Yes to change the default
measurement path to it.
3) Tap > Explorer
4) Tap to go up folder levels until you have reached the topmost level with a list of the
available memory devices.
5) Tap the name of the device (not the icon) to get a list of available commands.
6) Select Check and Repair to start the procedure. If any errors are found in the file system, they
are fixed. When finished, you will be informed whether the memory device was OK or that
errors have been fixed.
✐Please note: The checking procedure can take several minutes, depending on the size of the device.
To format a memory device:

CAUTION: • All data on the device will be erased during the formatting process.
• Do not remove the device or switch off the analyzer during the procedure – this might
damage the file system and data and make the device unusable.
7) Select Format to start the formatting procedure.

✐Please note: • The formatting procedure can take several minutes – depending on the size of the
device
• The read/write performance of SD and CF memory cards and USB sticks varies a lot. The
performance depends on the manufacturer of the memory device, the type of device,
the size of the device, how much it has been used, how fragmented the memory is, and
even the day of production of the device. Two ‘identical’ memory devices can have a
different performance because the manufacturer has changed the internal
technology without notice.
• The cards delivered by Brüel & Kjær have all been tested for their read/write
performance in the analyzer and can be used for the applications available in the
analyzer. If you need more (or other) types of memory devices, please consult your
local Brüel & Kjær representative.
💡Hint: In general, you should select devices aimed for the industrial or professional photographer
market.
✔Best Practice: Remember to regularly re-format the device (especially before a long unattended
measurement) – this will ensure the best performance of the device.
8) Select Test Speed, if you want to check the device’s file speed.
9.4.3 Battery Pack and Recalibration of Battery Charge Indicator

The software keeps the capacity of the battery pack updated. Over time the total capacity of the
battery pack decreases. If you find that the ‘Time Remaining’ estimate (tap the Battery icon
to get this information) does not match the real time remaining (for example, the analyzer
switches off automatically because of lack of power while the Time Remaining estimate indicates
at least ½ hour), then you should manually re-calibrate the capacity of the battery pack. This is
done using the following method:
1) Drain all the power from the battery:
a) Switch the analyzer on.
b) Disconnect external power.
c) Disconnect the analyzer from the PC.
d) Set > Preferences > Power > Standby After to Never .
e) To drain the battery faster, set Backlight On to Always (same menu) and select the
maximum level of display backlight (tap Backlight at the bottom of the screen).
f) Leave the analyzer until the analyzer switches itself off
2) Charge the battery fully (at least 10 hours):
a) Connect the Mains Power Supply ZG-0426 to the analyzer.
b) Switch the analyzer on (and leave it on) and remember to reset the Standby After and
Backlight On to your preferred settings.
c) Tap the Battery icon for the battery condition. This will indicate ‘Calibrating
Battery’ initially. Let the battery charge until the battery charge indicator just below the
power socket starts flashing green (hardware versions 1–3) or changes from red to
green (G4 analyzers) and the ‘Calibrating Battery’ indication disappears from the pop-
up window.
9.4.4 Touch Screen

If tapping with the stylus on the screen seems to be getting more inaccurate, you can adjust the
touch sensitive screen, as follows:
1) Tap > Preferences > Display.
2) Tap Adjust Touch Screen and follow the on-screen instructions.
CHAPTER 9
109
9.4.5 Reset Options
Reset Button
CAUTION: Unsaved data or setups will be lost when you reset the analyzer.
If your analyzer stops responding to pushbutton presses, or taps, reset and reboot the analyzer
by pressing the Reset button (located on the connector panel – see section 2.2) with the stylus.
If you still experience problems, try resetting your analyzer as described below.
Analyzer Reset
1) Reset the analyzer to a default/factory installed state:
For G1 – 3 analyzers:
Reset the analyzer to a default state, where the user is set to 2250 (for Type 2250) and 2270 (for
Type 2270) and the project template is set to SOUND LEVEL METER. The existing SOUND
LEVEL METER project template will be overwritten, as will the preferences for user 2250 or
2270. To reset the analyzer to the default state:
a) Press and hold the Power-on pushbutton for at least five seconds (powers off).
b) Press and hold down the Commentary and Save pushbuttons while switching
on the analyzer. The display in Fig.9.3 will be shown.
Fig.9.3
Maintenance Mode
–initial screen for
G1 – 3 analyzers
Within a few seconds the display in Fig.9.4 will be shown.

Fig.9.4
Update 2250 software
screen for G1 – 3
analyzers
c) Cancel the update by pressing any other pushbutton than the Accept pushbutton .
Fig.9.5
Reset to default
settings screen for
G1 – 3 analyzers
d) Press the Accept pushbutton to reset to default settings.

F or G4 analyzers:
The analyzer contains two sets of the firmware/software package and settings. The one
originally delivered with the analyzer and one installed afterwards. To restore the factory
firmware/software package and settings:
a) Press and hold the Power-on pushbutton for at least five seconds (powers off).
b) Press and hold down the Commentary and Save pushbuttons while switching
on the analyzer. The display in Fig.9.6 will be shown.
CHAPTER 9
111
Fig.9.6
Restore factory
firmware and settings
on G4 analyzers
c) Press the Accept pushbutton to restore factory firmware and settings.

If the analyzer now functions normally, you should install the software package of your
preference as described in section 9.2. Brüel & Kjær recommends that you always use
the latest available.
2) (for all hardware versions) If the analyzer now functions normally, define your preferred
settings in the Preferences screen, adjust the touch screen again and make necessary
changes to Setup (all accessed via the Main Menu ).
If you experience problems selecting another template or you login as another user, then note
which step causes the problem. You might need to delete/reconfigure the templates or users.
To delete/reconfigure templates or users, use Measurement Partner Suite BZ-5503 with the
analyzer connected to the PC via Micro USB Cable AO-1494 (G4 hardware) or Mini USB Cable
AO-1476, or a modem/LAN connection. Please consult the on-line help included with the
BZ-5503 software for instructions on how to configure the analyzer.
Re-installing Software (Hardware Versions 1 –3)

If the analyzer still does not work normally after performing the ‘Analyzer Reset’ procedure, then
the software might need to be re-installed. This can be done in two ways:
1) If the connection to Measurement Partner Suite BZ-5503 works with the analyzer connected
to the PC using a USB cable, then the software can be re-installed and re-configured through
the USB cable. Please consult the on-line help included with the BZ-5503 software for
instructions on how to re-install software on the analyzer.
2) If the USB connection to the PC does not work, then you need a Compact Flash card (size at
least 64 Mbytes) and a Compact Flash card reader for the PC. You can then use Measurement
Partner Suite BZ-5503 to update the Compact Flash card with the necessary files. Please
consult the on-line help included with the BZ-5503 software for instructions on how to update
a Compact Flash card with installation files for the analyzer.
Power off the analyzer and insert the compact flash card in the CF slot on the analyzer. Then
press and hold down the Commentary and Save pushbuttons while switching on the
analyzer. The Maintenance Mode initial screen will be displayed, and then within a few
seconds the screen shown in Fig.9.4 will appear.
Press the Accept pushbutton to update the software. This will take approximately 5
minutes.
CAUTION: Do not remove the CF-card while updating the analyzer software!
When the analyzer software has been updated, you will get the option of resetting to the
default settings.
If the problem still persists, then you should contact your local Brüel & Kjær representative.
9.5 Care, Cleaning and Storage

The analyzer is a delicate precision instrument. When handling, storing or cleaning your analyzer,
please take the following precautions.
9.5.1 Handling the Analyzer

• Do not try to remove the microphone grid as you can easily damage the microphone in this
way
• Do not attempt to open the analyzer. There are no user-serviceable parts inside. If you think
your analyzer requires service, please contact your Brüel & Kjær representative
• Do not allow the analyzer to get wet
• Protect the analyzer from impact. Do not drop it. Transport it in the supplied carrying pouch
9.5.2 Cleaning the Analyzer

If the analyzer casing becomes dirty, then wipe it with a lightly dampened cloth. Do not use
abrasive cleansers or solvents. Do not allow moisture to enter the microphone, connectors or casing.
9.5.3 Storing the Analyzer

• Keep the analyzer in a dry place, preferably within its carrying pouch
• For long-term storage, remove the battery pack
• Do not exceed storage temperature limits of –25 to +70 °C (–13 to +158 °F)
CHAPTER 9
113
9.6 Services at Brüel & Kjær for Types 2250 and 2270
9.6.1 Accredited Calibration

For Types 2250 and 2270, you can order accredited calibration and choose between DANAK,
A2LA, UKAS, Eichamt (Austria), RvA, ENAC, NATA and Inmetro.
For Spain, Primitiva is available.
The calibration will be performed in an ISO 17025 certified laboratory.
9.6.2 Initial Calibration

To start the measurement history from day one – if this is required, for example, for measurement
use in public, for customer audit or quality procedures – we recommend you order accredited
calibration together with the new analyzer.
9.6.3 Regular Recalibration

To fulfil requirements for public measurements and to minimize the cost of errors due to faulty
or inaccurate measurements, we can arrange for calibration every year in an ISO 17025 certified
laboratory at Brüel & Kjær. With annual data, you will have an unbroken history to use as
reference, either for internal requirements, for audit required by authorities or at the request of
your customers. And not least, you can follow the history of sensitivity for your analyzers over
time.
9.6.4 Filter Calibration

• You can order calibration of filters. Please specify at the time of ordering
• Calibration of filter response for octave and 1/3-octave filters according to IEC 61260
9.6.5 Service and Repair

The hand-held analyzer is designed and constructed to provide many years of reliable operation.
However, if a fault occurs that impairs the analyzer’s correct function, then remove the battery
pack and disconnect any external power supply to prevent risk of further damage.
For more information about preventing faults or damage to your analyzer, see section 9.5.
9.6.6 Hardware Maintenance and Repair

You can minimize the risk of unexpected costs by purchasing the hardware maintenance with a
five years warranty. Minor repairs, such as those resulting from damage caused by unauthorized
use of the analyzer, can be performed at the same time as the analyzer is being calibrated at
Brüel & Kjær. This will save you time. If any other errors are detected by the technician during
calibration, repair will be performed before returning the analyzer to you.
Repair is available at a fixed price, which includes a Conformance Test Certificate upon the return
of your analyzer (no measurement data included).
9.6.7 Rental
To ensure optimal uptime, you can rent a substitute hand-held analyzer* while yours is being
calibrated. To arrange rental, please contact your local Brüel & Kjær representative.
9.6.8 Training
Basic knowledge on sound and vibration measurement, analyzer training and application
training are a few examples of what local training or consultancy hours* can do for you. To find
out more about training and consultancy hours, please contact your local Brüel & Kjær
representative.
* Providing this service is available from your local Brüel & Kjær office
115
Chapter 10
1/1- or 1/3-octave Frequency Analysis (Optional
Module)
Frequency Analysis Software BZ-7223 enables you to make 1/1-octave or 1/3-octave

measurements and broadband sound level measurements simultaneously.
Check the About screen to see whether you have a license to run this module. (To access the
About screen, tap the Help icon then tap About.) See Chapter 9 for instructions on installing
licenses.
10.1 Setting up the Analyzer

The Frequency Analyzer measures the following spectrum parameters together with full spectral
statistics during timed measurements:
• LXeq
• LXFmax
• LXSmax
• LXFmin
• LXSmin
where X is the frequency weighting A, B, C or Z.
These spectra and the spectral statistics are saved in the project together with the measured
sound level meter (broadband) parameters.
The spectral statistics can be viewed as LXYN percentile spectra, where Y is the time weighting F
or S and N can be one of 7 defined percentiles.
In addition, the instantaneous spectra LXF and LXS are always available.
1) Select the FREQUENCY ANALYZER project template. (See section 3.2.1 for more details on
templates.) The project template is displayed at the top of the screen.
2) Tap > Setup. Set the Broadband and Spectrum parameters to A , B, C or Z , as required.
(A/B-weighting is determined by setting the parameter in > Setup > Frequency
Settings > Broadband (excl. peak).
Set the Bandwidth parameter to 1/1-octave or 1/3-octave before making the measurement.
To exit the screen, tap .
Fig.10.1
Setting the frequency
weighting and
bandwidth parameters
Under the Signal Recording parameters, select the settings for recording the signal while
making the measurement. See Chapter 13 for more information.
Under the Tone Assessment parameters, select the settings for Tone Assessment. See Chapter
15 for more information.
10.2 Controlling the Measurement

The measurement is controlled in the same way you would control a normal Sound Level Meter
measurement, using Start/Pause , Continue , Back-erase and Reset pushbuttons,
see Chapter 3 for more details.
The measurement can control a generator connected to the Output socket on the connector
panel (see Fig.2.2 or Fig.2.3). Enable the generator by setting the Source parameter to Generator
in > Setup > Output Socket Signal, then set up the generator settings in > Setup >
Generator. The generator will be controlled using Escape Time and Build-up Time, as
described in Fig.14.3.
10.3 Displaying the Results

The Frequency Analyzer measurement screen includes three tabs at the bottom: Spectrum tab,
Broadband tab and XL View tab (Extra Large). The tabs allow you to choose different ways of
displaying the measurement results. All but the Spectrum tab have been covered in Chapter 3.
However, a quick recap is provided below.
The Broadband tab shows an instantaneous LAF readout, with associated bar graph and four
measurement parameters, followed by two measurement setup parameters. (The first
measurement parameter is displayed in a larger font size for better readability.)
CHAPTER 10
117
1/1- or 1/3-octave Frequency Analysis (Optional Module)
The XL View tab increases the size of the first parameter readout to a 4 digit, full-screen display
(including decimal point).
The Spectrum tab, (which only appears as a tab if Frequency Analysis Software BZ-7223 is
enabled), shows two different spectra parameters being measured simultaneously. In the example
in Fig.10.2, LZFmax and LZF are being viewed at the same time.
✐Please note: The Reference Spectrum and Main Spectrum icons indicate which spectrum
belongs to which parameter.
1) Select which spectra to view by tapping the parameter fields in the two lines above the
spectrum display.
These lines also include readouts of the spectrum values highlighted by the spectrum cursor.
Tap the spectrum at the frequency of interest – or just tap anywhere in the spectrum area and
then move the cursor to the position of interest using the Left and Right arrow
pushbuttons.
To the right of the spectrum, two broadband bars (of the same parameters) are also
displayed.
Fig.10.2
Displaying the results
–spectrum screen
2) Adjust the X-axis (the horizontal frequency axis below the graphical display) by tapping on
the scale and accessing the drop-down menu (Fig.10.3):
• Use Set Lower Display Limit to set the lower frequency limit of the X-axis
• Use Set Higher Display Limit to set the upper frequency limit of the X-axis
• Use Reset Display Range to display all measured frequency bands
✐Please note: • These settings only affect the frequency range of the display of measured data, not
the frequency range of the measurement itself.
• The Display range automatically resets if you change the filter Bandwidth setup
parameter or change the Low Frequency setup parameter.
Fig.10.3
Adjusting the X-axis
3) Scale the Y-axis (left-hand vertical scale of the graphical display) by tapping on the scale and
accessing the drop-down menu (Fig.10.4).
💡Hint: You can also select the spectrum cursor and press the Accept pushbutton.
Fig.10.4
Scaling the Y-axis on
the Spectrum display
4) Select Auto Zoom to adjust the range of the Y-axis for best fit of the measured spectrum.
5) Select Zoom In/Zoom Out to adjust the zoom.
6) Select Scale Up/Scale Down to adjust the full scale value on the Y-axis – or select Auto Scale
to select the best scaling for viewing the spectra – without adjusting the zoom.
CHAPTER 10
119
7) Spectrum Table shows the displayed part of the spectrum in tabular form – as in Fig.10.5.
Tap Table Format , at the top of the screen, to select between three different viewing
formats:
– Two Parameters : for displaying values from both spectra
– One Parameter : for displaying values from the main spectrum only (available for
Reverberation Time Software only)
– One Parameter (wrap) : for displaying values from the main spectrum only, but with the
columns wrapped on the display to allow as many values as possible on the screen
Fig.10.5
Spectrum table
8) To exit the Spectrum Table, tap the icon.

9) Auto Zoom and Auto Scale automatically close the drop-down menu, otherwise, select Close,
tap outside the drop-down list or use the Left arrow pushbutton to close the menu.
💡Hint: A quick way of auto zooming is to tap anywhere in the spectrum and then press the Accept
pushbutton twice.
✐Please note: Save the template, if you want to use the display settings for other measurements.
Some parameters are calculated based on the spectra:

• SIL, PSIL, SIL3 and LXeq(f1–f2) are calculated during the measurement and saved together
with the other measurement data
• The Noise Parameters NC, NR, RC, NCB, Loudness and Loudness Level are for display only and
calculated based on measured LXeq spectra. This means that whenever you have a LXeq
spectrum you can also calculate and display these parameters
• NC, NR, RC and NCB are defined for 1/1-octave LZeq spectra, however, NC, NR, RC and NCB
are calculated for any frequency weighting and any octave bandwidth. A-, B- and C-weighted
spectra are converted to Z-weighted spectra and 1/3-octave spectra are converted to 1/1-
octave spectra before the calculation
• Loudness and Loudness Level are calculated for 1/3-octave spectra with any frequency
weighting. A, B and C weighted spectra are converted to Z-weighted spectra before the
calculation
If 1/1-octave LZeq spectra have been measured, then you can display a Noise Curve together with
the LZeq spectrum, see example in Fig.10.6.
Fig.10.6
Displaying a Noise
Curve together with
the LZeq spectrum
For RC and NCB you also have the possibility of displaying the limit curves for Rumble and Hiss,
and for Rattle and Vibration together with the 1/1-octave LZeq spectrum.
CHAPTER 10
121
10.3.1 Smileys
A smiley will be shown to the right of the project name if there are any issues with calculating noise
parameters, or displaying noise curves (see the overview in Table 10.1).
Table 10.1 Overview of Smileys
Smiley Explanation Description

No Loudness for 1/1-octaves Select 1/3-octave
No Leq parameter logged Select a Leq spectrum for logging
Sound Field Mismatch for Set the Loudness parameter in Input in accordance
Loudness with the Sound Field Correction
Frequency bands outside Noise Levels are lower or higher than any noise curve band
Curves
Noise Curves require use of Mic. Select a microphone
Display Noise Curve with LZeq Noise parameters are calculated but Noise Curves
can only be displayed together with LZeq
Noise Curve for 1/1-octaves only Noise parameters are calculated but Noise Curves
can only be displayed for 1/1-octaves
10.4 Saving Results

Measurements are saved and can be viewed later, in the same way as described for the Sound
Level Meter project in Chapter 3.
123
Chapter 11
Logging (Optional Module)
Logging Software BZ-7224 enables you to measure and save data periodically on SD or CF cards.
You can also save to a USB memory stick with G4 analyzers. The module is optimized for attended
use, which means that while measuring you can annotate any sound online, as well as ‘mark’ up
to five different sound categories online.
The main benefit is that data is documented on-site and is therefore ready for post-processing and
reporting back at the office using Measurement Partner Suite BZ-5503 or other post-processing
software such as Evaluator Type 7820, Protector Type 7825 or Microsoft® Excel®.
In addition to measuring broadband parameters (see Chapter 3) and spectra* (see Chapter 10),
the Logging module allows you to simultaneously log the following parameters:
• Broadband parameters (including broadband statistics)
• Spectra* every 100 ms (including spectral statistics)
• Broadband parameters every 10/100 ms
• Record the measured signal†
An overview showing the options available during a typical logging task has been provided in
Table 11.1.
Table 11.1 Overview of options available during a typical logging task
Broadband Broadband Spectral Spectral

Selection Period
Parameters Statistics Parameters Statistics
Logged 1 to 10 None 0–3 None
1 s – 24 h
or All (45) or Full or All (5) or Full
Logged None, LAeq, LAF None None, LXeq, None
(100 ms) 100 ms available available
and/or LAS LXF or LXS
Logged None or LAF None None None

(10 ms) 10 ms
available available available
Total Elapsed Time All (58) Full All (5) Full

† Requires Signal Recording Option BZ-7226
licenses.

1) Select the LOGGING project template. (See section 3.2.1 for more details on templates.) The
project template is displayed on the black banner at the top of the screen.
✐Please note: The Logging project template assumes you have a license for the Frequency Analysis
Software. If not, then select the Logging SLM project template instead.
2) Depending on your memory device:

• Insert an SD memory card in a SD card slot at the bottom of the analyzer
• If you have G1 – 3 analyzers, you can insert a CF memory card in the CF card slot at the
bottom of the analyzer
• With G4 analyzers, you can use a USB Type A stick at the bottom of the analyzer
You will be notified that a memory card has been inserted – select Yes to change the default
measurement path to the memory card.
✐Please note: You cannot log data on the internal disk.
3) Tap > Explorer from the list of options. Create a job folder for the measurements and set
the default measurement job/path as described in Chapter 6.
4) Tap > Setup (Fig.11.1). Set the Input, Frequency Settings and Statistics parameters as
required for the Sound Level Meter and Frequency Analyzer measurements, see Chapter 3
and Chapter 10, respectively. These settings are common to both the logging and the total
measurement.
Fig.11.1
The Setup screen
CHAPTER 11
125
5) Under the Measurement Control parameters, set the Measurement Time and Logging
Period as required. Set Synchronize with clock to Yes if you want the logging to synchronize
with whole minutes or hours. For example, if Logging Period is set to 1 minute and you start
the measurement at 8:12:33, then the first logging interval will be from 8:12:33 to 8:12:59 (27
seconds), the second will be from 8:13:00 to 8:13:59 (60 seconds), etc. Set Synchronize with
clock to No if you want every logging interval to be the specified Logging Period exactly. Set
Charge Injection Calibration to On if you want to validate the complete measurement chain
by performing CIC at the start and end of the logging measurement, refer to section 5.7.
6) Under the Logged Broadband parameters, choose which broadband parameters you want
to log in accordance with the Measurement Control parameters. You can choose to log Full
Statistics per Logging Period or not. You can also choose to log All the measured Broadband
Parameters or a Selected number of parameters. If you choose Selected then you can specify
up to 10 parameters.
7) The Logged Spectrum* parameter allows you to choose which spectra to log. You can
specify to log All , None or up to 3 Selected spectra. You can also choose to log Full Spectral
Statistics per Logging Period or not.
8) The Logged (10/100 ms) parameter allows you to log broadband LAeq, with an elapsed time
of 100 ms and a logging period of 100 ms, LAF and/or LAS, with a logging period of 100 ms,
and/or LAF with a logging period of 10 ms, irrespective of the other logging parameters.
In addition to three broadband parameters, you can log the LXeq, LXF or the LXS spectrum with
a logging period of 100 ms, where ‘x’ is the Spectrum Weighting.
✐Please note: LAF with a logging period 10 ms, and the spectrum with a logging period 100 ms, will be
stored on the project, but will not be displayed by the analyzer. Use MPS BZ-5503 to
display the LAF logged every 10 ms and the spectrum logged every 100 ms.
9) Under Markers you can specify the names of the five available markers. The markers are
predefined as follows:
– Marker 1: ‘Exclude’ – can be controlled by pressing the Back-erase pushbutton
– Marker 2: ‘Manual’ – can be controlled by pressing the Manual Event pushbutton
– Marker 3: ‘Level’ – can be controlled by the Level Trigger detection
– Marker 4: ‘Marker 4’
– Marker 5: ‘Marker 5’
– Marker 6: ‘Sound’ – is set when recording signal (typically sound) – requires Signal
Recording Software BZ-7226
All markers can be controlled by the stylus in the Profile display.
You can set a Pre-marker Time between 0 and 5 seconds. This will start markers 1, 2 or 3 the
set number of pre-marker seconds before the point where the Back-erase pushbutton, the
Manual Event pushbutton, or the Level Trigger, respectively, are pressed. See section 11.3.2.

10) Under the Level Trigger parameters, choose the settings for triggering the number 3 marker
‘Level’, for starting a signal recording and for sending an SMS or email – see section 8.4 and
Chapter 12:
– Set Level Trigger Control to On to enable the level trigger facility or Off to disable the
facility
– Set Trigger Parameter to the parameter you want to monitor, for example, LAeq –
see Table A.11 for the total list of parameters
– Set Start Slope to Rising if you want to start when the Trigger Parameter exceeds Start
Level (and stop when it goes below Stop Level) or to Falling if you want to start when the
Trigger Parameter goes below Start Level (and stop when it exceeds Stop Level)
– Set Start Duration for the number of seconds the Trigger Parameter must fulfil the
trigger condition before the trigger point is acknowledged
– Set Stop Duration for the number of seconds the Trigger Parameter doesn’t fulfil the
trigger condition anymore to acknowledge the end point of the trigger (see the
relationship between the trigger parameters in Fig.11.2)
Fig.11.2 Relationship between trigger parameters
LAeq
100 dB
90 dB Trigger Parameter = LAeq

Start Slope = Rising
80 dB
70 dB Start Duration
60 dB Stop Duration
50 dB Start Level = 50 dB
2s
40 dB Stop Level = 40 dB
Trigger Point 3s
30 dB
Trigger Point
20 dB
10 dB
Pre-recording (BZ 7226 only) Post-recording (BZ 7226 only)

0
Time in secs.
050208/1
11) Under the Signal Recording parameters, choose the settings for recording the signal while
making a logging – see Chapter 12.
12) Under Input specify Trigger Input if you want to start the signal recording using an external
trigger signal. See details in Appendix A.
CHAPTER 11
127

If you have set the Charge Injection Calibration parameter to On , then CIC is performed at the
start of the measurement and at the end of the measurement. An Exclude marker is set on the
logging profile at the point where CIC is being performed. The update of the Total parameters
is stopped while CIC is being performed. You can see the results of the CIC under Total
parameters, CIC Result 1 and CIC Result 2.
11.2.1 Annotating a Project

While using the logging software you can annotate measurements using the normal method of
adding annotations to a project, before or after a measurement, or while the measurement is
paused. The annotations can then be viewed by tapping Paperclip or tapping > Explorer
from the list of options. section 3.4.
However, if you choose to annotate the profile during the measurement, the icon will appear
below the profile, not as an icon in the Status Field or attached to a project in Explorer, as
described previously. In this case, you view the annotation using the method described in section
11.3.1.
11.2.2 Recording the Signal

You can record the input signal during the measurement* by pressing the Manual Event
pushbutton (Manual Event marker), the Back-erase pushbutton (Exclude Marker) or when the
level of a specific parameter exceeds a certain level – or you can record the signal through the whole
measurement – depending on the Signal Recording setting on the Setup screen – details in
Chapter 12.

The Logging Measurement screen (or Profile tab) includes three tabs at the bottom: Profile,
Spectrum and Broadband tabs (the Logging SLM includes the tabs: Profile, Broadband and XL
View). The tabs allow you to choose different ways of displaying the measurement results. All but
the Profile tab have been covered previously in Chapters 3 and 10, however a quick recap is
provided below.
The Broadband tab shows an instantaneous LAF readout, with associated bar graph and a
number of measurement parameters. (The first measurement parameter is displayed in a larger
font size for better readability.)
* Requires License for Signal Recording Software BZ-7226

The XL View tab increases the size of the first parameter readout to a 4-digit, full-screen display
(including decimal point).
The Spectrum tab shows two different spectra parameters being measured simultaneously.
11.3.1 The Profile Tab

The Profile tab displays a profile of a logged broadband parameter (dB versus time). This is very
convenient when marking sound categories on-line or annotating the measurement (Fig.11.3).
Fig.11.3
Profile tab (showing
extended Status Field)
Status Field
The Status Field has been extended to include an extra line of information below the two existing
lines of information covered previously in the Sound Level Meter and Frequency Analyzer (see
Fig.11.3).
This extra line of information allows you to:
• Select whether the results of the Total measurement from the Logged measurement, or from
the broadband Logged(100 ms) measurement, are displayed. Select Total to display the
measurement parameters of the Total measurement in all the views – the Broadband and
Spectrum tabs will then display parameters or spectra similar to the Sound Level Meter or
Frequency Analyzer. (The Profile tab will be empty, because the Total measurement contains
only a single set of parameters). Select Logged to display the measurement parameters from
the logging intervals. The cursor in the profile selects which logging interval is displayed in all
the views. Select Logged(100 ms) to display the LAeq, LAF or LAS in the profile from the 100 ms
logging intervals. This setting does not display spectra or parameters in other views
• View the start time of the measurement (for Total) or the start time of the current logging
interval (for Logged or Logged(100 ms) if measuring and the profile is not frozen) or the start
time of the logging interval pointed out by the cursor. Tap the Start Time in any of the tabs to
select data from another logging interval
CHAPTER 11
129
• View whether the display of the profile during the measurement is frozen or not. When the
icon is “animated” the display is being updated with new logged data during the
measurement. You can freeze the display update by tapping on the icon. This also freezes the
icon. Tap the icon again to unfreeze the display
• Step forwards or backwards through the logging intervals on all displays, using the and
icons. (The icons are also connected to the profile cursor, so that any corresponding
movement backwards or forwards through the intervals in one display will be reproduced in
the other)
Some interaction with the display will automatically freeze and unfreeze the display (only while
measuring):
• Tap the stylus on the profile. This will set the profile cursor and freeze the display update of
the profile. You can move the cursor to any point in the profile by using the left and right arrow
pushbuttons. The profile will be scrolled automatically, if necessary. Unfreeze by tapping on the
icon
• Tap and hold the stylus on the profile display and drag it to the left or right. This will freeze
the display and show two cursors. Next, remove the stylus from the display and a drop-down
menu appears with the possibility of setting or editing a marker or annotation (see below).
Select the required function from the drop-down menu. When the function has been carried
out, the profile unfreezes automatically and progresses as it did before you tapped on the
screen
The logged data are displayed as two profiles. The Profile Overview with the entire profile and
the Profile with 100 logging samples.
The Profile Overview

An overview of the entire profile is displayed across the screen on the topmost part of the graph
area.
The overview is based on LXeq,1s (X = A or B, depending on the Frequency
Settings > Broadband (excl. Peak) setting). The Y-axis is auto-zoomed.
When you have logged for more than 4 minutes, then each pixel on the X-axis will cover more
than 1 s. The overview will then display from the minimum LXeq,1s to the maximum LXeq,1s within
the interval covered by the pixels on the X-axis.
Tap in the Profile Overview to select the part of the entire profile to display in the Profile below.
The Profile
The Profile displays a hundred samples of the logged data.
Select which parameter to view by tapping the parameter field in the line above the profile.
Markers are displayed between the profile and the profile parameter. Marker 1 (Exclude) is the
topmost positioned marker. The name of the marker is displayed if the marker overlaps the cursor
position. If a signal has been recorded, then a Sound Marker (Marker 6) is displayed above the
profile – the marker covers exactly the time of the signal recording.
You can browse through markers using the buttons in the profile.
The whole, or any part of the signal recording can be played back, once or repetitively – see
Chapter 12 for details.
To the right of the profile, the broadband parameter LAF is displayed and updated regardless of
the measurement status and the display freeze status.
Annotations are displayed below the profile as icons. To select an annotation, tap and hold the
stylus at one side of the icon, just above it, then drag the stylus to the opposite side of the icon
(so it looks like the example in Fig.11.4) and remove the stylus from the display.
Fig.11.4
Selecting annotations
A drop-down menu appears, select the required function:

• Open note or Play commentary
• Delete annotation
• Move annotation (to the position on the display where the stylus was removed from the display)
Scale the Y-axis (left-hand vertical scale of the graphical display) by tapping on the scale and
accessing the drop-down menu (as in the Spectrum tab):
• Select Auto Zoom to adjust the range of the Y-axis for best fit of the measured spectrum
• Select Zoom In/Zoom Out to adjust the zoom
• Select Scale Up/Scale Down to adjust the full scale value on the Y-axis - or select Auto Scale to
select the best scaling for viewing the spectra – without adjusting the zoom
• Auto Zoom and Auto Scale automatically close the drop-down menu, otherwise, select Close ,
tap outside the drop-down list or use the Left Arrow pushbutton to close the menu
CHAPTER 11
131
11.3.2 Marking Sound Categories

Use this facility to categorize the sound while you are measuring, or while you are observing the
different kinds of sound on the display. This will make it much easier to do the post-processing
and reporting back in the office.
You can mark up to five sound categories on-line. The markers are displayed as horizontal lines
above the sound profile (Fig.11.3). There are two main types of marker:
• An Exclude Marker – this allows you to mark a sound you want to exclude from your
measurement later during post-processing or reporting. (It does not remove any data from
your measurement)
• An Event Marker – this allows you to mark a particular sound of interest during your
measurement
On the analyzer:
• Marker 1 is used as an Exclude Marker
• Markers 2 to 5 are used as Event Markers. All of these event markers can be user-defined.
You can define a marker by tapping > Setup > Markers.
– Marker 2 is set to a Manual Event marker by default – it can be controlled by the Manual
Event pushbutton and the stylus.
– Marker 3 is set to a Level Event marker by default – it can be controlled by the level trigger
facility and the stylus.
• Marker 6 is used as a Sound Marker and shows the size of the signal recording.
The analyzer allows you to view the markers at a later date by recalling the data and viewing the
desired profile. (This can also be done if you have transferred the data to BZ-5503).
If required, Measurement Partner Suite BZ-5503, Evaluator Type 7820 and Protector Type 7825 can
use the markers in their calculations. Marker number 1 (the Exclude Marker) will always be used as
an Exclude Marker, while markers 2 to 5 will be used as defined in Type 7820 Evaluator/Type 7825
Protector software. The marker names, however, will be transferred from the analyzer. Marker 6
will be used as sound marker.
Marking During the Measurement

The measurement parameter is displayed as a progressing profile.
Use of Pushbuttons
Press the Back-erase pushbutton to start an Exclude Marker (marker number 1). The marker
is displayed above the profile. Press the button once more to stop the Exclude Marker.
Press the Manual Event pushbutton to start a Manual Event Marker (marker number 2). The
marker is displayed above the profile. Press the button once more to stop the Manual Event
Marker.
Use of the Stylus

Tap and hold the stylus on the profile display at the position where you want the marker to start.
This will freeze the display and show a cursor at the position of the stylus. Then drag the stylus left
or right to the position where you want the marker to end. This will display a second cursor. Next,
remove the stylus from the display and a drop-down menu appears showing the five markers you
have specified in the setup. Select the marker you require. The marker is displayed above the
profile, the cursors disappear and the profile unfreezes and progresses as it did before you
tapped on the screen.
✐Please note: If you select Sound Marker, then the sound for this part will be recorded – see Chapter 12
for details.
Marking Measurement While it is Paused

The measurement parameter is displayed as a profile while the measurement is paused.
You Can Use the Stylus to Mark the Sound Categories

Tap and hold the stylus in the profile display at the position where you want the marker to start.
This will display a cursor at the position of the stylus. Then drag the stylus left or right to the
position where you want the marker to end. This will display a second cursor. Next, remove the
stylus from the display and a drop-down menu appears showing the five markers you have
specified in the setup. Select the marker you require. The marker is displayed above the profile
and the cursors disappear.
11.3.3 Editing Markers on Profiles

To widen a marker:
1) Tap and hold the stylus on the profile display at a position within the marker range.
2) Drag the stylus left or right to the position where you want the marker to end.
3) Remove the stylus from the display and a drop-down menu appears.
4) Select the marker you want to widen from the drop-down menu.
To narrow a marker:
1) Tap and hold the stylus on the profile display at the position inside the marker range where
you want it to stop.
2) Drag the stylus left or right to a position outside the marker range.
4) Select Delete for the marker you want to narrow from the drop-down menu. The part where
the marker overlaps the gap between the two cursors will be deleted.
CHAPTER 11
133
To delete a marker:
1) Tap and hold the stylus in the profile display at a position to the left of the marker you want
to delete.
2) Drag the stylus to a position to the right of the marker.
4) Select Delete for the marker you want to delete from the drop-down menu.
✐Please note: Sound markers cannot be edited. Marking the whole sound marker (or part of it) and
selecting Delete will delete the whole sound marker and signal recording.
11.3.4 Annotate Sound Categories

You can annotate the measurement online with a spoken comment or a written note or (with
Type 2270 only) an image. The annotation is displayed as an icon below the sound profile.
Annotating During the Measurement

The measurement parameter is displayed as a progressing profile.
Use of Pushbuttons
Press and hold down the Commentary pushbutton and talk to the analyzer to make your
comment. Release the button when finished. This will insert a comment annotation in the profile at
the time when the button was pressed.
Use of Stylus
Tap and hold the stylus in the profile display at the position where you want the annotation to
start. This will freeze the display and display a cursor at the position of the stylus. Then drag the
stylus a little to the left or right and raise it again. A drop-down menu appears and below the five
markers you can select Add Comment or Add Note or Add Image to add a spoken comment or write
a note or capture an image. When finished, the Comment or Note or Image is inserted in the
profile, the cursors disappear and the profile unfreezes and progresses as before tapping on the
screen.
Annotating While the Measurement is Paused

The measurement parameter is displayed as a profile while the measurement is paused.
Use of Stylus to Annotate the Sound

Tap and hold the stylus in the profile display at the position where you want the marker to start.
This will display a cursor at the position of the stylus. Next, drag the stylus a little to the left or right
and remove the stylus from the display. A drop-down menu appears and below the five markers
you can select Add Comment, Add Note or Add Image (Type 2270 only) to add a spoken comment,
write a note or capture an image. When finished the Comment, Note or Image is inserted in the
profile and the cursors disappear.
Use of Pushbuttons
Using the Commentary pushbutton during a pause means that the comment annotation will
be added to the project instead of the profile. (The annotations can be viewed by tapping on the
paperclip icon or tapping the Main Menu and selecting Explorer from the list of options. See
section 3.4.)
11.3.5 Editing Annotations on Profiles

To move an annotation:
1) Tap and hold the stylus on the profile display at a position on one side of the Annotations
icon.
2) Drag the stylus through the Annotations icon to the position where you want the annotation
moved to.
4) Select Move Comment (or Move Note, or Move Image ) from the drop-down menu.
To delete an annotation:
1) Tap and hold the stylus on the profile display at a position to the left of the Annotations icon
you want to delete.
2) Drag the stylus to a position to the right of the annotation.
4) Select Delete for the annotation you want to delete from the drop-down menu.
11.4 Saving and Recalling Results

Level Meter project in Chapter 3 and Chapter 6.
135
Chapter 12
Enhanced Logging (Optional Module)
Enhanced Logging Software BZ-7225 enables you to measure and save data periodically on
memory cards. You can also save to a USB memory stick with G4 analyzers. The module is
optimized for unattended use, which means that the module will measure and save data in an
efficient way, without the requirement for an operator to be present.
In addition to measuring broadband parameters (see Chapter 3) and spectra* (see Chapter 10),
it simultaneously logs the following parameters (see Chapter 11):
• Broadband parameters every 10/100 ms
• Spectra* (including spectral statistics)
• Spectra every 100 ms
• Record the measured signal†
Finally, the Enhanced Logging module can also log with a different period (periodic reports –for
example, every hour) for reporting:
• Spectra* (including spectral statistics)
The Enhanced Logging module can measure continuously, limited only by data memory and
power supply. An overview showing the options available during a typical enhanced logging task
has been provided in Table 12.1.

† Requires Signal Recording Option BZ-7226
Table 12.1 Overview of options available during a typical enhanced logging task
Broadband Broadband Spectral Spectral

Selection Period
Parameters Statistics Parameters Statistics
1 to 10 None 0–3 None

Logged 1 s – 24 h
or All (45) or Full or All (5) or Full
Logged None, LAeq, LAF None None, LXeq, LXF None

100 ms
(100 ms) and/or LAS available or LXS available
Logged None None None

10 ms None or LAF
(10 ms) available available available
Periodic None
1 m – 24 h All (53) Full All (5)
Reports or Full
Elapsed
Total All (67) Full All (5) Full
Time
licenses.

1) Select the ENHANCED LOGGING project template. (section 3.2.1 for more details on
templates.) The project template is displayed on the black banner at the top of the screen.
– Insert an SD memory card in a SD card slot at the bottom of the analyzer
– If you have G1 – 3 analyzers, you can insert a CF memory card in the CF card slot at the
– With G4 analyzers, you can use a USB Type A stick at the bottom of the analyzer
You will be notified that a memory card has been inserted – select Yes to change the default
measurement path to the memory card.
✐Please note: You cannot log data on the internal disk.
3) Tap > Explorer then create a job folder for the measurements and set the default
measurement job/path as described in Chapter 6.
4) Tap > Setup and set up the measurement as described for Logging in Chapter 11, steps
4 – 12.
CHAPTER 12
137
5) Under the Measurement Control parameters:

– Set the Save Project Data at, Continuous Logging and Report Period as required
– Select whether or not you want to save the Full Spectral Statistics for Reports
✐Please note: All other measured broadband and spectral parameters are logged automatically per
report period.
Then you can select:
– Number of CICs
– Desired time periods for calibration
6) Under the Logged Spectrum parameters, you can choose to log Full Spectral Statistics per
Logging Period or not.
✐Please note: Logging the full spectral statistics at a short logging period (for example, every second)
takes up a lot of space on the memory card.
7) Under Triggers, you can specify a Signal Recording Timer for periodically starting a signal
recording (for example, five minutes per hour) and you can specify up to four independent
Level Triggers to be active at four different times during the day. Each level trigger works as
specified in section 11.1. In addition, you can specify a Hold Off period – this means that
during this period, new triggers are inhibited. You also have the ability to trigger LXeq(f1–f2).
✐Please note: You can trigger on a specific frequency band by setting f1 = f2 .
8) Under Lden Periods parameters you can set up the day, evening and night periods and the
penalties in accordance with your local legislation.

However, during the measurement, data are automatically saved in projects, one per day. The
projects are automatically saved at the time specified in the Save Project Data at parameter in
> Setup > Measurement Control. The next project is (automatically) started immediately
after the first one, without any data loss.
✐Please note: When Preset Logging Time has elapsed, or you pause the measurement, then the project
will not be saved automatically. This has to be done manually.
In the case of power failure, or other failures, the software is rebooted automatically. This means
that the measurement data collected up until the time of the reboot is saved in a project and a
new measurement is started. The new measurement is started in a new project.
The projects are named as specified in > Preferences > Users and Projects.
For example, if you select Auto-naming of Projects, and start the measurement on the 13th of
November, then your projects for measuring 48 hours (assuming you have started in the middle
of the day, and have set Save Project Data at parameter to 00:00:00) will be:
• 051113 001 (containing data from the middle of the day November 13th until midnight)
• 051114 001 (containing data for a whole day – November 14th)
• 051115 001 (containing data from midnight to the middle of the day on November 15th)
If you did not select Auto-naming of Projects then you would have the following projects
(assuming the Project Name Prefix parameter was set to Project and no projects had been saved
before in the directory):
• Project 001
• Project 002
• Project 003
If you have set the Charge Injection Calibration parameter to On, then a CIC calibration is
performed at specified times of the day. An Exclude marker is set on the logging profile at the
point where the CIC is being performed. The update of the Total parameters and the Periodic
Reports is stopped while the CIC is being performed. You can see the results of the CIC calibration
under Total parameters, CIC Result 1 to 4 .
The CIC result can be either Passed , Background noise too high or CIC Ratio deviates from Ref. (The Ref.
mentioned here is the reference created by the very first manual CIC, and is the one used as the
reference to all subsequent CIC ratio measurements, see section 5.7.)
✐Please note: If a level trigger is active when the CIC is due to start, then the CIC will not be done.
12.2.1 Annotating a Project

Measurements can be annotated in the same way as you annotate Logging measurements. See
section 11.2.1.
12.2.2 Recording the Signal

Signal recordings can be done in the same way as described under Logging measurements. See
section 11.2.2.

The Enhanced Logging Measurement screen includes three tabs at the bottom: Profile,
Spectrum and Broadband – as the Logging Measurement screen does. You view data in the
same way as in the Logging module. You mark and annotate sound categories and edit markers
and annotations in the same way as in the Logging module – please see Chapter 11.
The Result Selector (first item in the third line of the Status Field) determines whether results from
the Total, Logged, Logged (100 ms) or Report measurement are displayed.
CHAPTER 12
139
If you need to display data from another day of the measurement, then use Explorer to select and
open the project from that day.
12.3.1 The Profile Tab

The Profile tab displays a profile of a logged broadband parameter (dB versus time). See Fig.12.1.
Fig.12.1
Profile view in
Enhanced Logging
12.3.2 Displaying Noise Indicators

The Lden and Ldn parameters are displayed in the Broadband tab when selecting Total in the
Result Selector. Then select the Noise Indicators from the Leq parameter group. See Fig.12.2.
Fig.12.2
Noise Indicators
12.3.3 Saving and Recalling Results

Level Meter Project in Chapter 3 and Chapter 6.
141
Chapter 13
Signal Recording Option
Signal Recording Option BZ-7226 allows you to record the input signal (typically sound) in either
16-bit or 24-bit resolution during measurement (24-bit for BZ-7222/23/24/25/30/33 only). The
signal recording can be controlled manually or by using an external trigger signal. The recording
can also be triggered when a measured parameter exceeds a preset level (BZ-7224 and BZ-7225
only). The recorded sound can be played back and listened to using the supplied Earphones HT-0015.
Sound is recorded directly to a memory card. With G4 analyzers, sound can also be recorded to
a USB memory stick.
The main benefit is that data is documented on-site and is therefore ready for post-processing
and reporting back at the office using Measurement Partner Suite BZ-5503 or other post-
processing software such as Evaluator Type 7820, Protector Type 7825 or Microsoft® Excel®.
licenses.
13.1 Sound Level Meter and Frequency Analysis Software

You can use the Signal Recording facility together with the Sound Level Meter Software and the
Frequency Analysis Software. You can record the sound for the whole measurement period or
you can record sound for controlled parts of the measurement. The recordings are attached to
the project as annotations, named “Soundrec N”, where N is the number of the recording for the
project. (section 3.4 and section 6.3.2 for a description of how to use annotations.)
✐Please note: • Signal recordings can only be done during measurements.
• Signal recordings can only be done on projects saved on memory cards (or with G4
analyzers, on a USB memory stick).
13.1.1 Setting up the Analyzer

1) Select a SOUND LEVEL METER project template or a FREQUENCY ANALYZER project
template (see section 3.2.1 for more details on templates).

✐Please note: You cannot record the signal on the internal disk.
3) Tap > Explorer. Navigate to the memory card, create a job folder for the measurements
and set the default measurement job/path as described in Chapter 6.
4) Tap > Setup. Set all the parameters as required for the Sound Level Meter or Frequency
Analyzer measurement, see Chapter 3 and Chapter 10, respectively.
5) Under Signal Recording you can specify the Recording Control parameters as follows:
– Automatic , if you want to start the recording when you start the measurement and stop
when you pause the measurement, and to limit the recording to Maximum Duration, if
Duration Limit is set to On
– Manual Event , if you want to start and stop the recording using the Manual Event
pushbutton during the measurement and to limit the duration of the recording, if
Duration Limit is set to On . In this case the recording will be at least Minimum Duration
long, but no longer than the Maximum Duration. Use Pre-recording Time and Post-
recording Time to specify how much extra you want to be recorded before and after the
event
– External Event , if you want to start and stop the recording using an external trigger signal,
connected to the Trigger Input. See details in Appendix A
– Image Event (Type 2270 only), if you want to make a short recording together with
capturing an image. The recording will be "Pre-recording Time + Post-recording Time +
1" second long. See details in Table A.13
– Off , if you do not want to record the signal
6) Set Recording Quality to High , Medium , Fair or Low in accordance with your needs.
✐Please note: High quality requires more disk space than low quality – details in Appendix A.
7) Set Recorded Signal to either Input A/B-weighted , Input C-weighted or Input Z-weighted (A/B-
weighting is determined by setting the parameter in > Setup > Frequency
Settings > Broadband (excl. Peak)). Input C-weighted is suitable for recordings used
afterwards to identify the sound source – it contains all the audible content of the signal, but
reduces the low-frequency noise from wind, etc.
8) Set Automatic Gain Control to On – if you just want to listen to the signal afterwards. The full
120 dB dynamic range (from max. input level and down) will be converted to 40 dB and the
signal is stored as a 16-bit WAV file.
Set Automatic Gain Control to Off – if you need to record calibrated signals or need to
analyze the WAV file afterwards on a PC. Set Resolution to 24 bit (recommended) to cover the
CHAPTER 13
143
full 120 dB dynamic range (from max. input level and down) or set Resolution to 16 bit and
specify the Peak Recording Level.
9) Tap > Setup > Input > Trigger Input and select a trigger if you want to start the signal
recording using an external trigger signal. See details in Appendix A.
To exit the screen, tap the icon.
13.1.2 Controlling the Recording

When the measurement signal is being recorded, the Recording icon is displayed in the
Status Field. The recording is attached to the project as an annotation. The annotations icon
is then displayed to indicate that the project has been annotated.
When Recording Control is set to Automatic , the recording will start when the measurement is
started and last for the Maximum Duration or the Elapsed Time, whichever is smallest. If you
continue a paused measurement, then a new recording is started.
When Recording Control is set to Manual Event , the recording will start the first time you press
the Manual Event pushbutton during the measurement, and stop the second time you press it;
if you press it a second time before the Minimum Duration has elapsed, then the recording will
continue until Minimum Duration has elapsed; if you press it a second time after Maximum
Duration has elapsed, then the recording has already been stopped when Maximum Duration
elapsed and the pushbutton will initiate a new recording instead.
When Recording Control is set to External Event, and Trigger Input is set to Voltage Level, then
recording is started when the voltage level is ‘high’ and stopped when voltage level is ‘low’
(details in Appendix A). Duration Limit has no effect on this setting.
When Recording Control is set to Image Event (Type 2270 only), then you will record 1s plus the
Pre- and Post-recording Time.
If Pre-recording Time has been set, then the recording will start this time before you hit the
Manual Event pushbutton. This is possible because the recording is done continuously in an
internal buffer, ready to be saved as a wave file. The Pre-recording Time is limited by this buffer
size and the Recording Quality – details in Appendix A.
✐Please note: Very long signal recordings will be split into wave files containing maximum 10 minutes,
that is, a 35-minute signal recording will consist of 4 wave files, three with 10 minutes of
sound and one with 5 minutes of sound.
13.1.3 Playing the Recording

Signal recordings are attached to the measurement project as annotations. The annotations icon
is displayed in the Status Field to indicate this. Tap the paperclip to open the list of annotations.
Tap the annotation to play it back – details in Chapter 3 and Chapter 6.
13.2 Logging and Enhanced Logging Software

You can use Signal Recording together with the Logging and Enhanced Logging Software. You
can record the sound for the whole measurement period or you can record sound for controlled
parts of the measurement. The recordings are attached to the profile as sound markers. The signal
recordings can be controlled by the Manual Event pushbutton, the Back-erase pushbutton, an
external trigger signal, or by the level of the measured signal. You can also control the signal
recording using the stylus to mark the interesting part on the profile.
✐Please note: • Signal recordings can only be done during measurements.
• Signal recordings can only be done on projects saved on memory cards or, with G4
analyzers, from a USB memory stick.
13.2.1 Setting up the Analyzer

1) Select a Logging, Logging SLM or Enhanced Logging Project Template. (see section 3.2.1 for
more details on templates.)
✐Please note: You cannot record the signal on the internal disk.
3) Tap > Explorer. Navigate to the memory card, create a job folder for the measurements
and set the default measurement job/path as described in Chapter 6.
4) Tap > Setup. Set all the parameters as required for the Logging or Enhanced Logging
measurement, see Chapter 11 or Chapter 12, respectively.
5) Under Signal Recording you can specify the Recording Control parameters as follows:
– Automatic , if you want to start the recording when you start the measurement and stop
when you pause the measurement, and to limit the recording to Maximum Duration, if
Duration Limit is set to On
– Manual Event , if you want to start and stop the recording using the Manual Event
pushbutton during the measurement
– Exclude Event , if you want to start and stop the recording using the Back-erase pushbutton
during the measurement
– External Event, if you want to start and stop the recording using an external trigger signal,
connected to the Trigger Input
– Level Event , if you want to start and stop the recording based on the level trigger settings
during the measurement
– All Events, if you want to start and stop the recording based on any of the events
CHAPTER 13
145
✐Please note: When Recording Control set to any of the events, you can limit the duration of the
recording, if Duration Limit is set to On . In this case the recording will be at least
Minimum Duration long, but no longer than the Maximum Duration. Use Pre-
recording Time and Post-recording Time to specify how much extra you want to be
recorded before and after the event
– Image Event (Type 2270 only), if you want to make a short recording together with
capturing an image. The recording will be "Pre-recording Time + Post-recording Time +
1" seconds long. See details in Appendix A
– Off , if you do not want to record the signal
6) Set Recording Quality to High , Medium , Fair or Low in accordance with your needs.
✐Please note: High quality requires more disk space than low quality – details in Appendix A.
7) Set Recorded Signal to either Input A/B-weighted , Input C-weighted or Input Z-weighted (A/B-
weighting is determined by setting the parameter in Setup > Frequency
Settings > Broadband (excl. Peak)). Input C-weighted is suitable for recordings used
afterwards to identify the sound source – it contains all the audible content of the signal, but
reduces the low-frequency noise from wind, etc.
8) Set Automatic Gain Control to On – if you just want to listen to the signal afterwards. The full
120 dB dynamic range (from max. input level and down) will be converted to 40 dB and the
signal is stored as a 16-bit wav-file.
Set Automatic Gain Control to Off – if you need to record calibrated signals or need to
analyze the wav-file afterwards on a PC. Set Resolution to 24 bit (recommended) to cover the
full 120 dB dynamic range (from max. input level and down) or set Resolution to 16 bit and
specify the Peak Recording Level.
To start the recording using an external trigger signal, tap > Setup > Input and specify
Trigger Input. See details in Appendix A.
To exit the screen, tap the icon.
13.2.2 Controlling the Recording

The measurement is controlled in the same way you would control a normal logging measurement,
using Start/Pause, Continue, Reset and Save pushbuttons, see Chapter 11 for more details.
When the measurement signal is being recorded, then the Recording icon is displayed in the
Status Field. The recording is attached to the profile as a Marker 6 (Sound).
If you set Recording Control to Automatic , the recording will start when the measurement is
started and last for Maximum Duration or Elapsed Time, whichever is smallest. If you continue
a paused measurement, then a new recording is started.
If you set Recording Control to Manual Event , the recording will start the first time you press the
Manual Event pushbutton during the measurement (this starts a Manual Event marker and a
Sound marker), and stop the second time you press it; if you press it a second time before
Minimum Duration has elapsed, then the recording will continue until Minimum Duration has
elapsed; pressing it a second time after Maximum Duration has elapsed will have no effect on
the signal recording (the Manual Event marker, however, will be stopped).
If you set Recording Control to Exclude Event, the recording will start the first time you press the
Back-Erase pushbutton during the measurement (this starts an Exclude Event marker and a
Sound marker), and stop the second time you press it – the behaviour will be similar to control
by the Manual Event pushbutton.
When Recording Control is set to External Event , and Trigger Input is set to Voltage Level, then
recording is started when the voltage level is ‘high’ and stopped when voltage level is ‘low’
(details in Appendix A). Duration Limit has no effect on this setting.
If you set Recording Control to Level Event, the recording will start, controlled by the level
trigger – see Chapter 11 for details.
When Recording Control is set to Image Event (Type 2270 only), then you will record 1s plus the
Pre- and Post-recording Time
If you set Recording Control to All Events , the recording will start when any of the events above
become active, and stop when all events are inactive again.
If Pre-recording Time has been set, then the recording will start this time before the Event
appears. This is possible because the recording is done continuously in an internal buffer, ready
to be saved as a wave file. The Pre-recording Time is limited by this buffer size and the Recording
Quality – details in Appendix A.
✐Please note: Very long signal recordings will be split into wave files containing maximum 10 minutes,
that is, a 35-minute signal recording will consist of 4 wave files, three with 10 minutes of
sound and one with 5 minutes of sound.
13.2.3 Control Recording using the Stylus

If Recording Control is set to any of the events, or to All Events , the recording can also be
controlled using the stylus directly on the profile, in the same way as you mark sound
categories – details in Chapter 11.
CHAPTER 13
147
Fig.13.1
Example Logging
display (showing
internal buffer marker)
The small triangle above the profile indicates the amount of sound you have in the internal
buffer – ready for storage in a wave-file. You will have sound from this triangle to the right-hand
side of the profile. The triangle is updated every second.
To make a signal recording using the stylus, you tap and hold the stylus on the profile display and
drag it to the position where the signal recording should end, then you remove the stylus and get
a drop-down menu with the possibility of setting one of the six markers. If you select Sound, then
a sound marker is made and the sound for the marked interval is stored in a wave file. Only the
portion of the sound available in the internal buffer (to the right of the small triangle) will be
stored and the sound marker will only indicate this part.
✐Please note: When selecting an interval for storing (or setting a marker), the profile display freezes, but
the signal recording is still updated in the internal buffer. The part of the buffer available
on the screen will decrease and you will see the small triangle move to the right. Be sure
not to wait too long in selecting the Sound marker from the drop-down menu – otherwise
the signal recording will disappear from the internal buffer.
13.2.4 Playing the Recording

You playback the sound simply by selecting part of the marker – as described in section
11.3.3 – and choose Play Sound from the resulting drop-down menu. The following drop-down
menu will then appear (Fig.13.2).
Fig.13.2
Playing the
recording – the drop-
down menu
Select one of the four ways of playing a sound: Selection will play the part you have selected; Repeat
Selection will play the selected part until you press Cancel on the pop-up menu; To End will play the
sound from the position you selected the sound marker to the end; and finally All will play the
entire signal recording, regardless of your selection point.
Fig.13.3
Playing the
recording – output
level pop-up
When you have selected the method of play-back, a pop-up appears explaining how to adjust the
output level in the headphone and how to stop the play-back.
Tap the Minimize icon to reduce this to a small blue bar at the top of the screen – allowing you
to watch the profile underneath – you will notice that the profile cursor is updated every second
to the position of the sound that is currently being played.
CHAPTER 13
149
Fig.13.4
Playing the
recording – minimizing
the pop-up
The small blue button bar at the top can be maximized again by tapping , or you can close it
and stop playback by tapping .
13.2.5 Signal Recordings on the PC

When projects including signal recording have been transferred into an Archive on a PC using
BZ-5503, then the recordings can be played back directly from BZ-5503.
Signal Recordings can be input to the Brüel & Kjær PULSE Multi-analyzer platform for further
analysis – please contact your local Brüel & Kjær representative for further information.
✐Please note: When recording signals for further analysis in PULSE, be sure to record the Z-weighted
signal and select Automatic Gain Control to Off under the Signal Recording parameters
and select the Recording Quality to match your needs for frequency content – see details
on sampling frequency in Appendix A.
When Automatic Gain Control is set to Off , then the calibration information is stored in the wave
files – allowing PULSE to analyse the signal recordings, taking the calibration into account.
✐Please note: Other sound players than BZ-5503 might not be able to amplify “24-bit per sample” WAV
files enough to hear weak sounds. If this is needed, then use 16-bits per sample.
151
Chapter 14
Reverberation Time Software
(Optional Module)
14.1 Introduction
Reverberation Time Software BZ-7227 enables you to measure reverberation time in 1/1-octave
or 1/3-octave.
licenses.
14.1.1 Definition
Reverberation Time (RT) is the most important parameter describing the acoustic quality of a
room or space. It is important for sound levels, speech intelligibility and the perception of music.
In addition, it is used to correct for the effects of RT on building acoustics and sound power
measurements.
RT is the decay time for sound in a room after the excitation stops. It is the time for a 60 dB drop
in level, but the decay is usually evaluated over a 10, 20 or 30 dB drop, using the measurements
within these ranges to make a regression line, which is then extrapolated to the 60 dB range
(Fig.14.1).
RT may be labelled EDT, T20 and T30 respectively for those three evaluation ranges. EDT is used
in room acoustics only, while T20 and T30 may be used for Building Acoustics, Sound Power and
Absorption Coefficient measurements as well.
RT is measured in 1/1- or 1/3-octave frequency bands, some of which may be averaged to
provide a single-number result for the most significant bands.
RT may range from 0.1 seconds (or less) in anechoic chambers, to 10 or more seconds in large
public spaces.
Fig.14.1 Definition of Reverberation Time (RT). Evaluation range of 30 dB for calculation of T30 indicated
dB Regression Line
0 dB
Excitation
Level –5 dB
Evaluation Range
–35 dB
Background
Noise Level
–60dB
Time
Reverberation Time
060210
RT varies between positions in a room, so it is usually measured at several positions. The spatial
average (Room average) for all positions gives an overall assessment, and the position results
may be used to indicate the acoustic quality as a function of location.
The Room average can either be made as an average of the RT spectra, or calculated for the
averaged decays (ensemble average), that is: the decays for each frequency band are averaged
over all positions and the RT spectrum is then calculated for the averaged decays.
14.1.2 How Do We Measure Reverberation Time?

RT can be measured using either Interrupted Noise, with the built-in noise generator, or by using
Impulsive Excitation (Schroeder Method), such as from a pistol or balloon burst.
Interrupted Noise Method

When using a power amplifier and loudspeaker sound source (Fig.14.2), the analyzer will turn its
noise generator on and off, then measure and display the RT spectrum and decays.
CHAPTER 14
153
Reverberation Time Software (Optional Module)
Fig.14.2 Typical RT measurement setup using a loudspeaker source
DIRAC
230/115 V AC / 650 W
White Pink -20 -10 0 dB Protect
Power Amplifier Type 2734 Power On
O I
-6 -5 Loudspeaker
Balanced In Generator Level
-9 -4
Fuse
-12 -3
In Remote Out
-18 -2
-24 -1
-30 0 dB
MP3 Player 4292-L

2734
ZE-0948 2250
110009/1
Fig.14.3 Typical RT measurement cycle for the interrupted noise method
dB
Sound Level
Start
Time
Escape Build-up
Time Time About 1s Decay time
Decay measurement
Generator On
060208
Fig.14.3 shows a typical RT measurement cycle automatically performed by the analyzer, where
the different steps are described as follows:
1) After ‘Start’, there is a chosen ‘Escape Time’ which allows for vacating the measurement site.
2) The noise generator is then switched on and waits for the chosen ‘Build-up’ time to allow for
a steady state to be reached.
3) The decay measurement starts. The level for the first second, or so, (labelled ‘About 1s’ on
Fig.14.3) is used to identify the excitation sound level as the 0 dB reference level.
4) The noise generator is switched off and the ‘Decay time’ starts.
5) The decay measurement ends when only the background noise level is measured (automatically
detected by the analyzer).
6) Steps 2 to 5 are automatically repeated a chosen number of times and the measured decays
are averaged together to reduce the uncertainty of the measurement.
7) The reverberation time spectra EDT, T20 and T30 are calculated and displayed on the screen.
The measurement can be in octaves or 1/3-octaves in parallel over a selectable frequency range,
allowing you to focus sound power on the relevant range. In each frequency band, the decay is
sampled 200 times each second, for reverberation times as long as 20 seconds.
You can enhance the signal-to-noise ratio by limiting the frequency range of the noise to cover
just a single frequency band, while keeping the output power constant. First, you make a parallel
measurement, then, if the signal-to-noise ratio is too low in a few bands (typically at low
frequencies) you select these bands for serial measurements. You can redo the measurements
including only these bands and merge the results with the parallel measurement.
Impulsive Excitation Method

With Impulsive Excitation, all you need to carry is Type 2250-F/2270-F, a tripod and a balloon (or
other impulsive source, such as a starting pistol). After you start the analyzer and pop the balloon,
the analyzer will start measuring, analyse the decay and display the RT spectrum and decay.
The single input range means that trial measurements are not necessary when using the impulsive
excitation method.
Fig.14.4 Typical RT measurement cycle for the impulsive excitation method
dB
Sound Level
Trigger Level
Impulse
Start Excitation
Time
Await Level
to exceed
Trigger Level Decay Time
1s
Impulse measurement
060209
Fig.14.4 shows a typical RT measurement cycle performed by the analyzer, where the different
steps are described as follows:
1) After ‘Start’, the analyzer waits for the level to exceed the ‘Trigger Level’ (indicated on the
analyzer in three places by the “traffic light” giving a short green flash every second).
2) The impulse excitation is made, for example, a pistol is fired or a balloon is burst.
CHAPTER 14
155
CAUTION: The use of hearing protection is highly recommended.
3) The impulse measurement is started 1 s before the level exceeds the ‘Trigger Level’.
4) The impulse measurement stops after the analyzer detects the background noise level again
(automatically measured by the analyzer).
5) The analyzer performs backward integration of the impulse measurement.
6) The reverberation time spectra EDT, T20 and T30 are calculated and displayed on the screen.
The measurement can be in octaves or 1/3-octaves in parallel over a selectable frequency range.
In each frequency band, the decay is sampled 200 times each second.
The impulse response is backward integrated (according to the Schroeder method). In theory, the
resulting decay will be equivalent to the average of a large number of decays made with the
interrupted noise method. Therefore, the decays will be smooth using just one single shot.

1) Select the REVERBERATION TIME project template. (see section 3.2.1 for more details on
templates.) The project template is displayed at the top of the screen.
2) Tap > Setup. Set the Bandwidth and Bottom and Top Frequency of the measurement
as required.
3) Set Map Based Measurement = No in the Measurement Control setup – the reverberation
decays will then be numbered from Pos. 1 to N. See how to measure with position
management in section 14.2.1.
4) Set Automatic Save = No , if you want to inspect the reverberation time and decays before
manually saving the measurement – otherwise select Yes to automatically save the decays
after each measurement.
5) Set Measurement Mode to:
– Parallel , for measuring all bands in a spectrum simultaneously
– Serial , for measuring selected bands only (to be saved and merged with a previously
measured Parallel spectrum)
– Combined , for measuring Parallel and then Serial in an automated sequence
When doing the Serial measurement, the bandwidth of the generator will match the selected
band, thus increasing the output power for the band and increasing the signal to noise ratio
for the band.
6) The analyzer automatically detects the decay time and stops the measurement at the end of
the decay – however, under special conditions (for example, when measuring with high
background noise) the decay time cannot be detected and the measurement will run up to
20 s. To minimize the measurement time and memory requirement for the measurement,
you can limit the measurement by setting the Max Decay Time. 3 s is adequate for most
ordinary rooms, but should be increased for larger halls or reverberation rooms.
7) Set Excitation to Impulse if you want to measure using the impulse method (go to step
15) – otherwise select Interrupted Noise .
14.2.1 Interrupted Noise Method

8) Set the number of decays you want to measure per position – the analyzer automatically
controls the generator, measurement of the decays and averaging the decays.
9) Set the Generator as required – set Generator Type to External if you want to control an
external generator (details in Appendix A) – otherwise leave it at Internal to use the internal
generator.
10) Select Noise Type for the internal generator. Pink noise is typically used.
11) Adjust the level of the internal generator output to match the input of the power amplifier
used by setting Level [re. 1 V].
💡Hint: You can manually turn the generator on and off by tapping on the Loudspeaker icon in
the Status Field.
12) Set Escape Time to enable you to leave the room before the generator is turned on during
the measurement – see Fig.14.3.
13) Set Build-up Time to allow the excitation noise to reach a steady level before the
measurement starts. 1 s is adequate in most ordinary rooms, but should be increased for
larger halls or reverberation rooms.
14) Select the Sound Source used to optimize the frequency response of the internal generator
output for either a flat power response or optimum power difference between adjacent
1/1- or 1/3-octave bands – thereby eliminating the need for an equalizer to smooth the
response in most cases. Select a type matching your sound source – select Unknown if you are
using a non-Brüel & Kjær sound source, or do not want to make a correction to the frequency
response. Go to step 16.
14.2.2 Impulsive Method

15) Set Trigger Level low enough to be sure the impulse will be triggered, but high enough to
avoid triggering on the background noise. A level between 80 and 100 dB is normally adequate.
16) If you have set Automatic Save to Yes , then Trigger Repeat can be set to Yes to automatically
start a new measurement when a measurement has been saved. This allows you to go to
another position and make a new impulse, without the need for controlling the analyzer
between the measurements. Observe how the “traffic light” indicates the status of the
measurement (see Table 4.2 and Fig.14.4) making it easy for you to change position and
generate the impulse synchronized with the measurement procedure. Press the Start/Pause
pushbutton to stop the measurement when the last measurement has been saved.
CHAPTER 14
157
14.2.3 Signal Recording

17) Set Recording Control to Automatic if you want to record the signal during the measurement.
The recordings can be played back afterwards for identifying the cause of measurements
differing from each other – or (if Excitation is set to Impulse) for further analysis of the
measured impulse response by post-processing software like DIRAC Room Acoustics
Software Type 7841.
The recordings will contain the signal from when you press the Start pushbutton until the
measurement stops. The recording will be attached to the measurement as an annotation.
✐Please note: Signal Recording requires a license for Signal Recording Option BZ-7226.
To exit the Setup screen, tap the icon.
14.2.4 Controlling the Measurement

Note the following exceptions:
• Pressing Start initiates a measurement cycle slightly more complex than a standard SLM
measurement – see Fig.14.3 and Fig.14.4 for details. The results are the same, however, a set
of measurement data – in this case the reverberation decays at one position
• Creating a new reverberation time project: The measured data is stored at a position – and
you can have several positions in one project. Therefore, starting a complete new project
cannot be done by pressing Reset and then Start (as when measuring using the SLM
template), because this will measure the decays at a single position within the Project – a new
project is initiated by selecting a new project template (or the same again). This will create a
new project
14.2.5 Serial Measurements

If you have made a measurement using the Interrupted Noise method and at some frequencies
you have not been able to get a sufficient signal to noise ratio. This problem may show up at
frequencies where the background noise has been too high. The frequencies will then be marked
with red smileys (see Table 14.1).
To solve this, lower the background noise (which might not be possible) or increase the power of
the loudspeaker in the source room.
If your loudspeaker already produces as much noise as possible, you can limit the frequency
range of the noise to cover just a single frequency band while keeping the output power constant,
thus increasing the noise level in the smaller frequency range. For a 1/3-octave band, this will
increase the noise level at the band by up to 10 dB.
To select the frequency bands to be measured (using noise limited to cover these bands only):
1) Tap > Setup > Measurement Control > Measurement Mode and select Serial .
2) On the Spectrum display, select the bands you want to measure using the cursor and tap on
the x-axis to select the band for serial measurement (Fig.14.5).
Fig.14.5
Selecting the bands for
serial measurements
Left: Selecting the
band for serial
measurement
Right: The arrow is
pointing to the “s”
symbol, which
indicates the selected
frequency band
✐Please note: A small s appears above the selected frequency bands (Fig.14.5).
3) When you have selected the frequency bands you want to re-measure, press the Start/Pause
pushbutton.
The analyzer will then start at the lowest selected frequency band, generate noise at this band,
make the measurement and automatically step to the next selected band. This will continue until
all selected bands have been measured.
4) Press the Save pushbutton to save and merge the bands with the measurement you have
already done (be sure to select the right position before saving).
Combine Parallel and Serial Measurements in an Automated Sequence

You can speed up the measurement process if you start by investigating whether you need to use
serial measurements at certain frequency bands, or not. If you need to measure some bands
serially, > Setup > Measurement Control > Measurement Mode and select Combined.
Then select the bands you want to measure serially (see above).
Press the Start/Pause pushbutton to make a normal parallel measurement and then do the
serial measurements – all in an automated sequence.
CHAPTER 14
159
14.2.6 Annotating Projects and Positions

While using the Reverberation Time Software you can annotate the Reverberation Time project
using the normal method of adding annotations to a project. The annotations can then be viewed
by tapping on the Annotations icon or tapping > Explorer. See section 3.4.
However, your project can contain a lot of measurements, one per position, so you can annotate any
position in the project. Signal recordings are automatically attached as annotations to the positions.
Annotations at positions are managed in the Overview display – described in the next section.

The Reverberation Time Measurement screen includes three tabs at the bottom: Overview,
Spectrum and Decay. The tabs allow you to choose different ways of displaying the
measurement results:
• Overview: Shows the measurement positions in a table – one position per row. Use this to
get an overview of your measurements, to include/exclude positions from the spatial average
of all positions in the room, and to manage annotations/signal recordings at the positions
• Spectrum: Shows the reverberation spectra graphically, or as a table, for one position, or for
the room average. Alternatively, it can show the instantaneous sound pressure level while
measuring
• Decay: Shows the reverberation decay at a single frequency, for one position, or for the room
average
14.3.1 Overview
The Overview tab shows the measurement positions in a table – one position per row.
Fig.14.6
Overview tab
Status Field
The Status Field consists of three lines (see Fig.14.6) – the first two lines of information are
common to the status lines in the Sound Level Meter and Frequency Analyzer (see Chapter 4).
✐Please note: The first line of the Status Field might also contain a smiley, indicating the quality of the
room (the spatial average of all positions). See the description of smileys in the following
paragraph and section 14.5.
The third line of information allows you to:

• Select the measured position. The selected position is the one highlighted in the table. The
selected position will be the one displayed when selecting the Spectrum or Decay tab
• Step forwards or backwards through the positions on all displays, using the and icons
• Get information on the quality of the measurement through a quality indicator (smiley) displayed
as an icon:
: means results should be used with caution
: means results may be suspect or missing
No icon means the analyzer found no measurement quality issues
Tap the smiley to get more detailed information about the quality indication. (See the description
of smileys in section 14.5.)
Table
The header row of the table contains (from left to right):
• The RT selector (EDT, T20 or T30), which determines which RT to display in the table rows
below. It is also linked to the main Spectrum selector and main Decay selector
• The Frequency selector (which includes decrement and increment buttons), determines
the frequency of the readouts in the table rows below. The frequency selector is linked to the
Spectrum cursor and the frequency of the selected Decay
• Readout of the RT value for the current measurement, before it is saved to a position
Each row of the table contains (from left to right):
• A checkmark controlling whether the position is included or excluded from the Room
Average. Tap it to include (check) or exclude (uncheck) the position. All positions are by
default included in the Room Average
• The position. Tap it to get a drop-down with two options, Select and View Annotations . Use
Select to select the position and View Annotations to view the list of annotations for the
position. You can add annotations on the position from this view – as described in Chapter 6
• Possible annotation indicated by . Tap it to view the list of annotations for the position
• The readout of the RT parameter at the frequency determined by the RT selector and Frequency
selector in the table header row. There might be a smiley to the right of the readout warning
about the quality of the readout. Tap the smiley to get more detailed information about the
warning
CHAPTER 14
161
14.3.2 Spectrum
The Spectrum tab shows the reverberation time spectrum from a position, or the room average
reverberation time, or both. The sound level is displayed during measurements.
Fig.14.7
Spectrum tab
Status Field
The Status Field on the Spectrum tab is the same as on the Overview tab.
Spectrum Graph
The Spectrum graph is the same as in the Frequency Analysis software: Two 1/1-octave, or 1/3-
octave spectra, superimposed with cursor readouts. The displayed frequency range is automatically
adjusted for the measured frequency range.
Small smileys are set below each frequency band with a potential problem. The smileys are also
available at the cursor readouts. Tap the smiley at the cursor readout to get detailed information
about the warning.
The Spectrum Parameter selectors above the graph selects which spectra to display. You can
choose to display: T20 @Pos, T30 @Pos, EDT@Pos, T20 , T30 or EDT. If you only want one graph you
can set the other to Off .
In addition to choosing which parameter to display, you can choose to Display Sound Level – this
will display the Z-weighted spectrum LZF together with the A- and C-weighted broadband
levels – see Fig.14.8. When displaying LZF you can tap the LZF selector and select Display
Reverberation Time to display the reverberation time spectra.
When starting a measurement the graph will automatically display the sound level spectrum,
when finished it will display the reverberation time spectrum.
Fig.14.8
Spectrum view when
measuring
The Main Spectrum graph on the display (the one with bars) is selected using the parameter
selector on the second line of the two shown above the graph (LZF in Fig.14.8). The smileys below
the spectra (if there are any) belong to the Main Spectrum. The parameter selector for the Main
Spectrum is linked to the selector on the Overview tab and the parameter selector for the main
decay on the Decay tab.
The reference spectrum on the display (the one displayed as small lines above the bars in Fig.14.7)
is selected using the parameter selector on the first line of the two shown above the graph (T30
in Fig.14.7). The parameter selector for the reference spectrum is linked to the parameter selector
for the reference decay curve in the Decay view.
The cursor is linked to the Frequency selectors on the Overview and Decay tabs.
Tap the Y-axis to select:
• Auto Zoom to adjust the range of the Y-axis for best fit of the measured spectrum
• Zoom In/Zoom Out to adjust the zoom
• Spectrum Table to display the spectrum in a table, see an example in Fig.14.9
CHAPTER 14
163
Fig.14.9
Spectrum table
Auxiliary Parameters
Below the graphics are two lines containing parameters for displaying the wide band reverberation
times for the current position, or the room average. You are also able to display the LCF and LAF
broadband values.
14.3.3 Decay
The Decay tab shows the reverberation time decay from a position or the room average – or both
(Fig.14.10).
Status Field
The Status Field on the Decay tab is the same as on the Overview and Spectrum tabs.
Decay Graph
The Decay graph shows the decay of one frequency band for the selected position and/or the
decay of the same frequency band for the room average (requires Ensemble Averaging ).
The Decay Parameter selectors above the graph select which decay to display: T20 at the
particular position (Pos), T30 at Pos or EDT at Pos. Each of these selections show the decay for the
measurement at the selected position together with the readout of T20 at Pos, T30 at Pos and EDT
at Pos, respectively. T20 , T30 and EDT show the decay for the Room Average together with the
readout of T20, T30 and EDT, respectively. If you only want one graph you can set the other
selector to Off .
Fig.14.10
Decay view
The main decay on the display (displayed as a continuous line) is selected using the parameter
selector in the second line of the two shown above the display (T30 at Pos 1 in Fig.14.10). The
parameter selector for the main decay is linked to the selector on the Overview tab and the
parameter selector for the main spectrum on the Spectrum tab.
The reference decay on the display (displayed as a dashed line) is selected using the parameter
selector in the first line of the two shown above the display (T20 at Pos 1 in Fig.14.10). The
parameter selector for the reference decay is linked to the parameter selector for the reference
spectrum on the Spectrum tab.
The Frequency selector (with decrement and increment buttons as well), determines the
frequency of the decay curves. The Frequency selector is linked to the spectrum cursor and the
Frequency selector on the Overview tab.
In the upper right corner of the View Area, the value of a single quality indicator is displayed:
• C: xx%. The Curvature indicator – if above 10%, then the quality indicator ‘%’, meaning ‘Decay
is bent’, is set
For more details of the quality indicators, see section 14.5.
Tap the Y-axis to select:
• Auto Zoom to adjust the range of the Y-axis for best fit of the measured spectrum
• Zoom In/Zoom Out to adjust the zoom
• Auto Scale to select the best scaling for viewing the spectra – without adjusting the zoom
• Scale Up/Scale Down to adjust the full scale value on the Y-axis
• Show/Hide Regression Line to show/hide the regression line and the evaluation range for the
main decay, together with the two quality indicators C and ξ
CHAPTER 14
165
14.4 Measurements with Graphical Position Management

The analyzer can keep track of the source and receiver positions in a graphical way together with
the measurements. To do this, make the following settings on the Setup screen:
1) Set Map Based Measurement = Yes in the Measurement Control setup – the reverberation
decays will then be placed graphically on the ‘map’ shown on the Overview tab, and
numbered as source-receiver relations (for example, S1R2 means the decay measurement
with noise from Source 1 and measured at Receiver position 2).
2) Set Meas. All Pos. for Each Source = Yes for measuring all combinations of source and
receiver positions. Set to No , if you want to measure at a specific number of receiver positions
per source.
3) Set No. of Positions per Source to the number of receiver positions you want to measure per
source.
4) Set Increment to Sources First , Receivers First or Manual. Typically Sources First is best for
Impulsive excitation (you can then walk between the source positions and generate the
impulses while the analyzer is placed on a tripod at one receiver position); Receivers First is
best for Interrupted Noise excitation (you can move the analyzer between the receiver positions,
while the sound source remains in the same place).
The Overview tab will then look like Fig.14.11:
Fig.14.11
Overview tab showing
one source and one
receiver position
Note the Add Source and Add Receiver icons on the headline for the map. Tap to add
new sources, and tap to add new receivers on the map.
Fig.14.12
Overview tab showing
two sources and three
receiver positions
You can move the sources or receivers on the map by tapping on the source/receiver (see
Fig.14.13), select Move from the drop-down menu that appears, then tap at the position where
you want the source/receiver (see Fig.14.14).
Fig.14.13
Tap a source to get a
drop-down with
options
CHAPTER 14
167
Fig.14.14
Sources and receivers
moved to places on the
map in accordance
with their physical
position in a room
The dark-green fields on the map indicate the selected Source-Receiver relation. The next
measurement will be saved at this position.
Results from the measurements at the receiver positions are displayed in the boxes at the receiver
positions – determined by the parameter and frequency selector in the headline of the map.
Fig.14.15
Example display
showing a
measurement in
progress
The example in Fig.14.15 shows the state when four measurements have been made and saved
and the position at S1R3 is selected, ready for the next measurement. Note the small smileys at
some of the receiver positions – you can tap them and get more detailed information.
You can attach text or commentaries at source or receiver positions by selecting View Annotations
(Fig.14.13) and add new annotations as described in Chapter 6. Note the two small paperclips at S1
and R2 – they indicate annotations at these positions.
Tap Map just above the Add Source and Add Receiver icons, and select Table to display the
measurements in a table (see Fig.14.16). The table contains the same information as the table
described in the previous section when measuring without position management (Fig.14.6).
Fig.14.16
Map-based
measurements
displayed in a table
✐Please note: You can move the data from one position to another: Tap a position you want to move and
select Cut from the drop-down, then tap the position where you want to paste it and select
Paste . This can be done on the map as well as in the table.
If you want to measure at a specific number of receiver positions per source, then the map for one
receiver position per source, for example, will look like Fig.14.17.
Fig.14.17
Map-based
measurement showing
one receiver per source
✐Please note: There is only an Add Source icon because the specified number of receivers is added
automatically when adding a source.
CHAPTER 14
169
The Spectrum and Decay tabs function in the same way as when measuring without position
managing. The only difference is the indication of the position in the Status Field – this is now a
Source-Receiver selector instead of a Position Number selector.
14.5 Quality Indicators

There are quality indicators for each frequency band in each reverberation time spectrum for
each reverberation time spectrum. These include letters, symbols or smileys, see Table 14.1 for an
overview. One of the quality indicators are recommended in ISO 3382-2 Annex B, as a measure
of how good the slope of the decay can be approximated to a straight line:
• C: xx%. The Curvature indicator – if above 10%, then the quality indicator ‘%’, meaning ‘Decay
is bent’, is set
Table 14.1 Overview of Quality Indicators and Smileys
Quality
Indicator
No decay end found The end of the decay cannot be

N determined because it doesn’t end in the
background noise
Background noise too high Background noise is above the upper

y
evaluation point
t No decay start found No decay start found
Background noise too high Background noise is above the lower

Y
evaluation point
Max. Decay Time too short The lower evaluation point is beyond the
T
decay time
No decay found The slope of the decay is positive, that is,

Z
the reverberation time is negative
P Reverberation time too short Less than 2 points in Evaluation Range
Excitation sound level too Overload

O
high
Reverberation time too short B×T below 16 (B = filter bandwidth and T =

F reverberation time of detector) – required
by ISO 3382
R T20 used (T30 unavailable) T20 used (T30 unavailable)

Quality
Indicator
High background noise Background noise too close to level at

n
lower evaluation point
p Short reverberation time Less than 4 points in Evaluation Range
Decay is bent The difference between T20 and T30 is

% greater than 10%. (Recommended quality
indicator from ISO 3382–2 Annex B)
Decay is non-linear Correlation coefficient in linear regression

k
is too low
The quality indicators (first column) are shown in the spectrum table only.
The smileys are shown on:
• all readouts of reverberation time results
• on the Position selector as the ‘sum’ of all quality indicators from each frequency band
• on the Room (project) as the ‘sum’ of all quality indicators from each frequency band in the
Room reverberation time spectrum
The explanation is shown if you tap a smiley (except on the small smileys below the frequency
bands in the spectrum – select the frequency band with the cursor and tap the smiley in the
cursor readout).
14.6 Saving and Recalling Results

Measurements are saved at position numbers (for example, Pos 1 ) or Source-Receiver relations
(for example, S1R1 ) within the project. This means there are more measurements stored in the
Reverberation Time projects than the Sound Level Meter, Frequency Analyzer or Logging
projects, which all contain only one measurement within each project.
To open a saved project, tap > Explorer and tap the project’s icon, then you can view all the
measured data, and even continue measuring at new positions.
171
Chapter 15
Tone Assessment Option BZ-7231 –
1/3-octave Method
Tone Assessment Option BZ-7231 includes tone assessment according to selected methods. The
software module includes an ‘FFT based’ as well as a ‘1/3-octave based’ method. It allows
assessment of tones on-site.
The result of the tone assessment is the adjustment to be added to the LAeq as described in the
relevant standards for calculating rating level.
BZ-7231, when used with Frequency Analysis Software BZ-7223, Logging Software BZ-7224, and
Enhanced Logging Software BZ-7225, allows you to:
• Assess tones in a measured 1/3-octave spectrum according to ISO 1996:2007, Annex D
• Assess tones in a measured 1/3-octave spectrum according to Italian Law, “Ministero
dell’ambiente, Decreto 16 marzo 1998”, hereafter referred to as “Italian Law”
BZ-7231, when used with FFT Analysis Software BZ-7230, allows you to:
• Assess tones in a measured FFT spectrum according to ISO 1996:2007, Annex C
• Use the “Generate tone at cursor” feature to generate a pure tone on the headphone output
of the Hand-held Analyzer, for comparison to the actual noise
This section will focus on tone assessment based on the 1/3-octave method. Please refer to User
Manual BE 1778: “FFT Analysis Software BZ-7230 and Tone Assessment Option BZ-7231, for use
with Hand-held Analyzers Types 2270 and 2250” for detailed information about tone assessment
based on FFT spectra.
Tone Assessment Option BZ-7231 brings results to the user on-site as well as preparing for post-
processing and reporting back at the office. Documentation can be completed using
Measurement Partner Suite BZ-5503, or the measured data can be exported for post-processing
by Evaluator Type 7820 or other post-processing software such as Microsoft® Excel®.
licenses.
If you have purchased Type 2250/2270 together with the software application(s), then the
relevant license(s) comes pre-installed on the analyzer.
If you purchased a separate software application for your Type 2250/2270, then you have to
install the license on the analyzer. This is done using BZ-5503, please consult the on-line help
included with the BZ-5503 software for instructions on how to install a license.
15.1 Tone Assessment According to ISO 1996-2, Annex D

When assessing noise, it is generally recognized that noise containing audible pure tones is more
annoying than noise with the same A-weighted broadband level that does not contain audible
tones. When assessing noise that contains tones or narrow bands of noise, an adjustment shall
be added to the A-weighted time averaged level, LAeq. The first evaluation of audible tones in
noise is most often carried out by the human ear. But for comparative analysis results, and
documentation, an objective analysis may be needed.
Tone Assessment can be performed using the ISO 1996-2:2007 standard “Determination of
environmental noise levels”, Annex D: “Objective method for assessing the audibility of tones in
noise – Simplified method”. This method uses 1/3-octave measurements.
The selection of method depends on local legislation which may refer to ISO 1996-2 or a
local method.
Find more information about rating level and assessment of environmental noise in ISO 1996-2
and in Brüel & Kjær’s Environmental Booklet.
15.1.1 ISO 1996-2, Annex D – Tone Assessment Calculations

The ISO method searches a measured, time averaged (Leq) spectrum, for level differences
between adjacent 1/3-octave bands. If the level difference between a 1/3-octave band and the
band either side of it are higher than a certain limit, an adjustment for audible tones may be added
to the LAeq level when calculating the rating level, Lr.
In ISO 1996-2, Annex D, the spectrum is divided into three frequency ranges: Low, Middle and
High. In each frequency range a specific limit for the level differences leading to an adjustment
is defined (Fig.15.1).
CHAPTER 15
173
Tone Assessment Option BZ-7231 – 1/3-octave Method
Fig.15.1 Definition of frequency ranges and level differences
16
dB Low
14
12
Level differences can be defined in Low, Middle
and High frequency range:
10
Proposed level Middle

difference limits 8
for adjacent
bands [dB]
6
High
0
25 Hz 125 160 400 500 10 kHz
1/3 - octave bands [Hz]
080160
The proposed frequency ranges and level differences between adjacent bands are:
• Low frequency range: includes the 1/3-octave bands from 25 Hz to 125 Hz with a level
difference for a detected tone greater than 15 dB
• Middle frequency range: includes the 1/3-octave bands from 160 Hz to 400 Hz with a level
• High frequency range: includes the 1/3-octave bands from 500 Hz to 10 kHz with a level
With BZ-7231 software, frequency ranges and the limit for the level differences in low, middle and
high range can be set by the user.
Tone assessment is carried out for all the measured frequency bands (including those below
25 Hz and above 10 kHz). The level difference limit is extrapolated from the low and high range
to cover the complete measurement range.
If tones are detected outside the range from 25 Hz to 10 kHz the quality indicator (yellow smiley)
indicates “Tone out of ISO range detected”.
ISO 1996–2, Annex D does not specify the size of the adjustment. In the default setting of the
BZ-7231, Brüel & Kjær has chosen to set the value to 5 dB.
Calculating the Level Difference Between One Band and the Adjacent Bands
BZ-7231 software calculates the level difference between a 1/3-octave band and two adjacent
1/3-octave bands with lower levels. The difference is calculated between the band in the middle
and the highest of the adjacent bands.
15.2 Tone Assessment According to Italian Law

Tone Assessment in Italy is performed on normal 1/3-octave spectra but with an option to use
narrow bands (such as FFT), in case of doubt.
The method described in the Italian “Decreto 16 marzo 1998” states that the 1/3-octave LZFmin
spectrum is used for evaluation of tones in noise. The analysis must be performed in the
frequency range from 20 Hz to 20 kHz and a tone is present if the level of a band is more than 5 dB
higher than the levels in the adjacent bands. The adjustment Kt, which should be added to the
measured LAeq, will only be applied if the band with the tone touches or exceeds a loudness level
contour touched by another frequency value of the spectrum. (Examples of loudness level
contours from Evaluator Type 7820 are shown in Fig.15.2.) The size of the adjustment Kt is defined
as 3 dB.
Fig.15.2
Example display from
Evaluator Type 7820
showing an LLFmin
spectrum and loudness
level contours
An equal loudness curve is a frequency response curve. Equal loudness curves are the
experimental results of presenting pure tones and levels at different frequencies to young people
with no hearing impairment. Along a contour line the young, average, normal listener will judge
tones presented with different combinations of frequency and dB to be equally loud.
Equal loudness level curves are defined by ISO 226 “Acoustics – Normal equal-loudness-level
contours”. The Italian “Decreto 16 marzo 1998” refers to ISO 226 (1987), but the ISO 226 standard
has been thoroughly revised in the latest version from 2003. Your analyzer, with BZ-7231 software
installed, uses by default the free-field curves from the 1987 version. But the diffuse-field
contours from the ISO 226 (1987), as well as the free-field curves from ISO 226(2003) have been
implemented and may be selected.
CHAPTER 15
175
15.3.1 Selecting the Tone Assessment Option

Tap > Setup > Tone Assessment and set Tone Assessment to On (Fig.15.3).
Fig.15.3
Set Tone Assessment
to On
Tap > Setup > Tone Assessment and set Tone Standard to ISO 1996:2-2007 or the Italian
Law DM 16-03-1998:
Fig.15.4
Setting the Tone
Assessment method
If you select the tone assessment method according to the ISO 1996–2, Annex D standard, you
can accept the default setup according to that standard. You can then change the various tone
parameters according to your needs (apart from the ISO 226 parameter which is greyed-out) and
proceed directly to the measurement.
If you select the tone assessment method according to Italian Law (that is, you select
DM 16-03-1998) , then you have accepted the default setup for that standard, and the only
parameter you can change is the ISO 226 parameter. Select one of the diffuse- or free-field
contour options available from the parameter drop-down (which appears when you tap the
parameter). For more details and for information on how to set up individual tone assessment
parameters, see the following section.
15.3.2 Setting up a Measurement Manually
ISO 1996–2, Annex D

When tone assessment according to ISO 1996-2, Annex D is selected, you can set the division
between the Low and Middle frequency range, the division between the Middle and High
frequency range, and also the limits for the level differences between adjacent bands – see
Fig.15.5. (You can also refer to Fig.15.1 for a definition of the frequency ranges and level
differences.)
Fig.15.5
Left: Setting the ‘Low
Freq. Last Band’
parameter
Right: Setting the
‘Level Difference Low’
parameter
You set the division between the Low/Middle frequency range by selecting the required value for
the Last (or highest) Band in the Low frequency range (from 12.5 Hz to 315 Hz), and set the division
between the Middle/High frequency range by selecting the required value for the Last (or
highest) Band in the Middle frequency range (from 160 Hz to 20 kHz).
The ISO method does not state which frequency weighting should be used, so in the default
setup, A-weighing is selected. However, this is not described in the ISO method, so no warnings
will be generated if you select other frequency weightings.
Italian Law
When tone assessment according to Italian Law is selected, the analyzed spectrum must be the
Z-weighted minimum level measured in each 1/3-octave band, LZFmin. The LZFmin parameter is
automatically selected on the measurement page when you select DM 16-03-1998.
CHAPTER 15
177
The test for loudness contours is set by default to the 1987 Free-field option of the ISO 226 contour
parameters. You can also select the 1987 Diffuse-field and 2003 Free-field options from the ISO 226
contour parameters, if required. See Fig.15.6.
Fig.15.6
Setting the loudness
contour options
15.3.3 Setting up the Measurement using the Default Setup

Select the Tone parameter above the spectrum and start the measurement by pressing the
Start/Pause pushbutton . If the selected setup parameters do not comply with the selected
tone assessment method, the following pop-up window will be displayed:
Fig.15.7
Pop-up window for
tone measurement
setup check
The pop-up window can be de-activated for the rest of the measurement session. To activate it
again, you will have to reload the template or restart your analyzer. This automatic check is
deactivated when > Setup > Tone Assessment > Tone Assessment is set to Off .
To reset all the relevant parameters to the default setup, tap the OK button. (The default setup
includes preset parameters that comply with the selected standard. These are described in Table
15.1.) To measure with the settings you set up manually, tap the Cancel button.
Table 15.1
Setup Parameter Default Value
Default parameters used by
the automatic measurement Selected standard: ISO 1996-2, Annex D
setup check Adjustment 3 dB
Last band in low frequency range 125 Hz
Last band in middle frequency range 400 Hz
Level difference low 15 dB
Level difference middle 8 dB
Level difference high 5 dB
Selected standard: Italian Law (DM 16-03-1998)
ISO 226 1987 Free-field
✐Please note: Even if you have set the Tone Assessment to On (Setup screen), the calculation is not
carried out until the Tone parameter is selected above the spectrum.
💡Hint: You may find the Template Explorer (accessed from Main Menu ) useful to save your
own measurement setup.
15.3.4 Signal Recording

If a valid license for the Signal Recording Option BZ-7226 is present, it is possible to record the
sound while measuring. (Refer to Chapter 13 for information about the Signal Recording Option.)
✐Please note: When analyzer recordings are to be used for re-analysis on a PC, be sure to set Automatic
Gain Control parameter to Off , under the Signal Recording parameters, and set the
Recording Quality parameter to High .
CHAPTER 15
179
15.4 Measuring
15.4.1 Result Display

Tone assessment is not performed until the Tone parameter is selected above the spectrum. (This
is done by tapping one of the parameter fields in the two lines above the Spectrum display and
choosing Tone from the drop-down menu.) Once selected, tone assessment is carried out on the
selected spectrum. The results are updated during the measurement.
Fig.15.8
Selecting the Tone
parameter above the
spectrum display
On the Results display, a blue marker is set at the top of each detected band with a tone.
Differences to the left and right of the frequency band selected by the main cursor are shown (on
the left and right) in the tone parameter panel above the spectrum (Fig.15.9). The main cursor is
moved using either the hard keys or the stylus.
Fig.15.9
The differences to the
left and right of the
selected frequency
band are shown in the
tone parameter
panel – in this example,
there is a 11.4 dB
difference to the left
and a 3.9 dB difference
to the right
The information shown in the value panel can be changed by tapping in the field. From the tone
parameters, the adjustment and the selected tone standard can be selected. See Fig.15.10.
Results from the tone assessment can also be found by tapping on the Broadband tab and
browsing in a similar way.
Fig.15.10
Changing the
information shown in
the value panel
15.5 Logging Software BZ-7224 Template

The results from the tone assessment can be found in the Spectrum tab of the Logging template.
Tone assessment is performed for each logging period, as well as for the total measurement time
(Fig.15.11).
Fig.15.11
Viewing results on the
logging template
See Chapter 11 for more information about setting up a Logging measurement.

CHAPTER 15
181
15.6 Enhanced Logging Software BZ-7225 Template

The tone parameter can be shown, for both the logging and the report periods, in the Spectrum
tab of the Enhanced Logging template (Fig.15.12).
Fig.15.12
Viewing results on the
enhanced logging
template
See Chapter 12 for more information about setting up a Logging measurement.
15.7 Status Codes (Smileys)

When Tone is selected on the tone parameter panel, the list of status codes is updated. Tap a
smiley to get an explanation of the status code, and for a tip on how to remedy or improve the
settings on the analyzer, see an example in Fig.15.13.
Fig.15.13
Example of a status
code explanation
If you have selected 1/1-octave , an Accelerometer as transducer, or a Direct input, tone assessment
will be performed, but a smiley will be displayed. When you tap the smiley it will advise you to use
a Microphone .
For an overview of all the remedies associated to the various smileys, please refer to Table 15.2
Table 15.2 Overview of smileys and associated remedies
Smiley Colour Explanation Remedy – Tip for Solution
Red No tone assessment on 1/1 There is no method for assessing tones when
octaves the spectrum is analysed in 1/1-octave bands,
select 1/3-octave instead
Red Analysis on ‘Accelerometer’ The analysis is carried out on an accelerometer

input, select a microphone
Red Spectrum must be LZFmin When Italian Law is selected the analysed
spectrum must be LZFmin
Red No tone assessment on inst. It is not possible to make tone assessments on

parameters instantaneous parameters (‘Fast’ or ‘Slow’)
Yellow Analysis on ‘Direct’ The analysis is carried out on a ‘Direct’ input,

select a microphone
Yellow Setup different from ISO The ISO is selected and the measurement
standard setup deviates from the proposals in the ISO
standard
Yellow Min or Max spectrum When the ISO standard is selected the
analyzed spectrum should be Leq
Yellow Tone freq outside proposed In the ISO standard the defined frequency
ISO range range for tone assessment is from 25 Hz to
10 kHz. A tone is detected outside this
frequency range
Yellow Tone freq out of proposed In the standard according to Italian Law the
DM range tone assessment must be performed in the
range from 20 Hz to 20 kHz. A tone is detected
outside this frequency range
✐Please note: The ISO method does not specify the weighting filter to be used. The A-weighting filter is
selected by default, but all selectable broadband filters may be applied without warnings.
CHAPTER 15
183
15.8 Recalling Saved Measurements

Saved measurements using the Frequency Analyzer, Logging and Enhanced Logging templates
can be opened and the Tone Assessment can be applied. Please refer to section 3.3 and section
6.3 for information on how to save and recall measurements, respectively.
185
Chapter 16
2-channel Option BZ-7229 enables 2-channel measurements with Hand-held Analyzer

Type 2270. This option adds an extra channel of measurement data. The two channels can have
inputs from the same type of transducer (for example, two microphones) or different transducers
(for example, one microphone and one accelerometer).
licenses.
The 2-channel Option works with the following applications:
• Sound Level Meter BZ-7222
• Frequency Analysis BZ-7223
• Logging BZ-7224
• Enhanced Logging BZ-7225
• Building Acoustics Software BZ-7228
and with these options:
• Signal Recording Option BZ-7226
• Enhanced Vibration and Low Frequency Option BZ-7234
✐Please note: • 2-channel Enhanced Logging is not available for G1 – 3 analyzers.
Please refer to Building Acoustics Software BZ-7228 User Manual BE-1799 for a
description of the Dual-channel Building Acoustics Software
• If you have purchased your analyzer together with the software application(s), then
the relevant license(s) comes pre-installed on the analyzer
• If you purchased a separate software application for your analyzer, you have to install
the license on the analyzer. This is done using BZ-5503, please consult the online help
included with the BZ-5503 software for instructions on how to install a license
16.1 Connecting Transducers

Please refer to section 2.5 for connecting two transducers to the instrument and to Chapter 5 for
creating the transducers in the transducer database and for calibrating.
Tap > Setup > Input you will see two columns for the individual settings of the two
channels. See Fig.16.1 for how to set up the two transducers. On the Setup screen, you can also
set up individual transducer correction filters like the windscreen correction.
Fig.16.1
Set up the transducers
To choose labels other than Ch.1 and Ch.2 (for example, In for Ch.1 and Out for Ch.2), tap the
Label parameter and enter the new label.
16.2 Range Setting

✐Please note: Pressing before a measurement institutes Auto Range, which automatically selects
High Range or Low Range, as appropriate.
Type 2270 hardware can be utilized in two ways:

1) As a single-channel, single-range sound level meter and frequency analyzer like Type 2250:
• Only one channel can be measured at a time
• The input is selectable between the two physical channels in the user interface
• The full level measuring range is covered in a single range without a level range control
CHAPTER 16
187
2) As a dual-channel, multi-range sound level meter and frequency analyzer

• Both channels can be measured simultaneously
• The full level measuring range is covered in two ranges with a level range control. These
ranges are called:
High Range for the least sensitive range with 0 dB gain that allows the highest possible input
Low Range for the most sensitive range with 30 dB gain
To set the range settings for 2-channel measurements, tap > Setup > Input > Range and
select the appropriate range (Fig.16.2).
Fig.16.2
Range setting
16.2.1 Underrange/Overload
In case of an Underrange indication in line 2 of the status panel (High Range only), change to Low
Range . In case of Overload indication (typically Low Range), change to High Range . (Or use
Autorange, which takes a few seconds.) The latched overload is indicated per channel using icons:
For Ch.1 , for Ch.2: and for both channels: .
16.3 Setting Up 2-channel Sound Level Meter

1) Select the 2-Ch. SOUND LEVEL METER project template.
The project template is displayed at the top of the screen, if it does not display the correct
template tap the Project Template Bar at the top of the screen and select the correct template
from the drop-down menu. (See section 3.2.1 for more details on templates.)
2) Tap > Setup > (Fig.16.3).

– Frequency Settings to set Broadband frequency weighting parameters, as required.
– Statistics to set statistics parameters, as required.
3) Tap to exit.
Fig.16.3
and statistics
parameters

The two channels are controlled and measured simultaneously, thus some of the housekeeping
parameters are common for the two channels, e.g., Start Time and Elapsed Time.
16.3.2 Displaying the Results

The results are displayed as bar graphs and measurement parameters can be displayed on the
Broadband tab or XL View (Extra Large) tab by selecting the appropriate tab (Fig.16.4).
CHAPTER 16
189
Fig.16.4
Displaying the results
16.3.3 Saving Results

Measurements are saved and can be opened later in the same way as described for the Sound
16.4 Setting Up 2-channel Frequency Analyzer

1) Select the 2-Ch. FREQUENCY ANALYZER project template.
2) Tap > Setup > (Fig.16.5).
The settings for Spectrum Weighting and base for Spectrum Statistics are available in this
template.
3) Tap to exit.
Fig.16.5
parameters

parameters are common for the two channels, e.g., Start Time and Elapsed Time.

The results are displayed as bar graphs and measurement parameters on the Measurement screen in
three tabs: Spectrum, Broadband or XL View (Extra Large), by selecting the appropriate tab
(Fig.16.6).
Fig.16.6 Displaying the results (Spectrum, Broadband and XL)

CHAPTER 16
191
When the same type of transducers are used by both channels (for example, two microphones or
two accelerometers) or if you only display data from one channel, then the spectrum display is the
standard spectrum display (Fig.16.7).
Fig.16.7
Single-channel
spectrum
When the transducers at the two channels are of different types (for example, a microphone and
an accelerometer), the scaling of the two spectra can be set individually for easy comparison. Ch.1
will use the standard Y-axis at the left of the spectrum and Ch.2 will have its own Y-axis to the right
of the spectrum (instead of the broadband values). Tapping on the Ch.2 Y-axis reveals the same
possibilities for zooming and scaling the spectrum as for Ch.1. See examples in Fig.16.8.
Fig.16.8 Displaying the results with different scaling for each channel

16.5 Setting Up 2-channel Logging and Enhanced Logging

1) Select:
– The 2-Ch. LOGGING SLM project template for logging broadband data only from the two
inputs
– The 2-Ch. LOGGING project template for logging both spectra and broadband data from
the two inputs
– The 2-Ch. ENH. LOGGING project template for logging both spectra and broadband data
from the two inputs, making reports and periodically saving the data on the memory
card.
✐Please note: 2-Ch. Enh. Logging is not available for G1–3.
2) Tap > Setup > (Fig.16.5).
3) Set the broadband parameters you want to log in Logging Broadband.
You can either log all parameters from both channels or select up to 10 parameters from the
two channels. The fewer parameters you select the less space will be needed for saving on the
memory card.
4) Set the spectrum parameters you want to log in Logged Spectrum.
You can either log all spectrum parameters from both channels or select up to four spectrum
parameters from the two channels.
5) Set the parameters you want to log every 10/100 ms in Logged (10/100 ms).
You can specify up to 4 broadband parameters and two spectra from the two channels.
6) Set the Level Trigger parameter(s) as required.
You can level trigger on a parameter from either Ch.1 or Ch.2.
7) Tap to exit.
CHAPTER 16
193
✐Please note: You should select the transducers before selecting the parameters to log and selecting the
level trigger parameter(s). Changing the transducer afterwards might correct the selected
parameter; for example, if you have selected to log Ch.1 LAeq and change the transducer
at channel 1 from a microphone to an accelerometer, then the Ch.1 LAeq will not be
available anymore and the parameter will be set to Off .

The measurement is controlled in the same way you would control a single-channel Logging or
Enh. Logging measurement. See Chapter 11 and Chapter 12 for more details.
parameters are common for the two channels, for example, Start Time and Elapsed Time.

The results are displayed as bar graphs and measurement parameters on the Measurement screen on
three tabs: Profile, Spectrum or Broadband, by selecting the appropriate tab.
See Chapter 11 for more details on Logging displays and Chapter 12 for more details on
controlling Enhanced Logging displays.

Measurements are saved and can be opened later in the same way as described for Logging in
Chapter 11 and Enhanced Logging in Chapter 12.
16.6 Setting Up 2-channel Signal Recording

Signal Recording in the 2-Ch. templates is set up in the same way as in the single channel
templates (Chapter 13), with the following additions and changes:
1) The Recording Channel parameter can be set to Ch.1, Ch.2 or Both .
Choose Both to record both channels simultaneously.
2) The Recorded Signal parameter is set to Input Z-weighted and cannot be changed.
The Recorded Signal parameter is not displayed in the setup.
3) If Automatic Gain Control set to Off , the Peak Recording Level is automatically set to
highest possible setting; for example, 145 dB for Range Setting set to High Range and 115 dB
for Range Setting set to Low Range when using Type 4189 microphones.
The Peak recording Level parameter is not displayed in the setup.
2-channel recordings are played back in the headphones as a stereo signal.
Use Measurement Partner Suite BZ-5503 to play back the 2-channel recordings either as a stereo
signal or as two mono signals, one for Ch.1 and one for Ch.2.
195
Chapter 17
Enhanced Vibration and
Low-frequency Option BZ-7234
Enhanced Vibration and Low-frequency Option BZ-7234 enables

• G-weighting parameters in accordance with the standards ISO 7196:1995 and
ANSI S1.42–2001 (R2011) using Brüel & Kjær low-frequency microphones
• Measurements of human vibration parameters using a Brüel & Kjær low-level accelerometer
in accordance with the standards ISO 8041:2005 and DIN 45669–1:2010–09
• High- and low-pass filters together with integration of the time domain signal
(accelerometer input) to produce:
– Broadband acceleration values within specific frequency ranges
– Broadband velocity values within specific frequency ranges
– Broadband displacement values within specific frequency ranges
– Acceleration spectra
– Velocity spectra
• Peak-Peak value
• 1/3-octave frequency analysis down to 0.8 Hz (1/1-octave down to 1 Hz)
This option can be used together with the following modules:
• Sound Level Meter Software BZ-7222
• Frequency Analyzer Software BZ-7223
• Logging Software BZ-7224
• Enhanced Logging Software BZ-7225
licenses.
✐Please note: • If you have purchased your analyzer together with any software applications, then the
relevant licenses come pre-installed on the analyzer.
• If you purchased a separate software application for your analyzer, then you have to
install the license on the analyzer. This is done using BZ-5503, please consult the
online help included with the BZ-5503 software for instructions on how to install a
license.
17.1 Sound Measurements and G-weighting

This section describes how to measure G-weighting parameters. See the G-weighted frequency
response in Fig.17.1.
Fig.17.1 G-weighted frequency response
20.00
10.00
0.00
–10.00
–20.00
Gain [dB]
–30.00
–40.00
–50.00
–60.00
–70.00
–80.00
0.1000 1.0000 10.0000 100.0000 10000.0000
Frequency [Hz]
130809
Enhanced Vibration and Low-frequency Option BZ-7234, together with BZ-7222, BZ-7223,
BZ-7224 or BZ-7225 and a low-frequency microphone, Type 4193 or Type 4964* measures the
following timed broadband parameters in addition to the standard measured parameters:
• LGeq : G-weighted equivalent continuous noise level
• LG10max : Maximum time-weighted sound level measured with G-weighting and 10 s
exponential time constant
• LG10min : Minimum time-weighted sound level measured with G-weighting and 10 s
• LGpeak : Maximum peak sound level with G-weighting
• TGpeak :Time when the G-weighted peak sound level occurred
The following instantaneous values are also available:

• LG10 : Instantaneous time-weighted sound level with G-weighting and 10 s exponential time
constant
• LGpeak,1s : Maximum peak sound level with G-weighting during the latest second
* Possibly with Low-frequency Adaptor UC-0211. Refer to Table C.5 note for Type 4193 and Type 4964.
CHAPTER 17
197
Enhanced Vibration and Low-frequency Option BZ-7234
17.1.1 Setting up the Analyzer for G-weighting

1) Mount your low-frequency microphone and low-frequency adaptor (if used) on the
preamplifier and connect it to the top socket (see section 2.5.2). The first time you use the
transducer, it will need to be created in the transducer database (section 5.5) and calibrated
(section 5.3).
2) Select the SOUND LEVEL METER, FREQUENCY ANALYZER, LOGGING, LOGGING SLM, ENH.
LOGGING OR ENH. LOGGING SLM project template.
3) Tap > Setup > Input > Transducer and select the appropriate microphone.
✐Please note: Installing the Enhanced Vibration and Low Frequency Option BZ-7234 licence enables
extra options for the Low Frequency parameter (Frequency Analyzer module only) and
for the frequency weighting parameters (Fig.17.2).
Fig.17.2
Example of additional
parameters after
installing the Enhanced
Vibration and Low-
frequency Option
BZ-7234 licence
4) Set Low Frequency to Extended .

5) Set:
– Broadband (excl. Peak) to A,G (simultaneous measurement with the two frequency
weightings A and G)
– Broadband Peak to G if you need to measure the G-weighted peak
6) (Frequency Analyzer module only) Set Spectrum Weighting to A , C , Z or G, as required.
7) Tap to exit.

✐Please note: • The low-frequency settings require much longer settling times of filters and detectors
for correct results. The instrument automatically takes care of this and waits (after you
press Start ) for the needed settling time for the individual detectors.
• You cannot start a measurement with G-weighting without using one of the low-
frequency microphones.

Tap on the broadband result readouts to select parameters from the Low Frequency or the
Lpeak group to select the G-weighted results (Fig.17.3).
Fig.17.3
Selection of Low
Frequency broadband-
readout results
✐Please note: If you use the FREQUENCY ANALYZER template, you will also have the parameter
LXeq(f1 – f2) , X =A /B /C /Z /G and F1 = bottom freq. and F2 = top freq. of the frequency
bands in the spectrum. By using G-weighting of the spectrum you would, for example, be
able to readout the parameter LGeq (5 Hz – 20 Hz) in cases where that needs to be
reported.
CHAPTER 17
199
17.2 General Vibration Measurements

This section describes how to measure the Enhanced General Vibration parameters. The
Enhanced Vibration parameters are measured when applying integration (to get the velocity
signal) or double integration (to get the displacement signal) as input to the broadband
detectors.
In addition to the integration for velocity you can chose between four bandpass filters:
1) 1 – 100 Hz
2) 10 – 1000 Hz
3) 0.3 – 1000 Hz
4) 3 – 20000 Hz
In addition to the double integration for displacement you can chose between three bandpass
filters:
1) 1 – 100 Hz
2) 3 – 300 Hz
3) 10 – 1000 Hz
The choice of integration and filter is handled by the weighting filter for the broadband detectors.
You have the following possibilities for two broadband detectors and the peak detector:
• Acc Linear – : Linear weighted acceleration signal in the full frequency range
• Acc 1 k – 20 kHz: Linear weighted acceleration signal in the frequency range 1 k – 20 kHz
• Vel 3 – 20000 Hz: Linear weighted velocity signal in the frequency range 3 – 20 000 Hz
• Vel 0.3 – 1000 Hz: Linear weighted velocity signal in the frequency range 0.3 – 1000 Hz
• Vel 10 – 1000 Hz: Linear weighted velocity signal in the frequency range 10 – 1000 Hz
• Dis 10 – 1000 Hz: Linear weighted displacement signal in the frequency range 10 – 1000 Hz
The weighting filter for the spectrum detector can be one of:
• Acc Linear: Linear weighted acceleration signal in the full frequency range
• Vel 0.3 – 1000 Hz: Linear weighted velocity signal in the frequency range 0.3 – 1000 Hz
BZ-7224 or BZ-7225 and an accelerometer, measures two sets of broadband parameters plus
Peak, Peak-Peak and Crest Factor parameters.
✐Please note: Peak-Peak is calculated on displacement measurements only.
The parameter naming conventions follow the format:

xpar(f1 – f2)
where
• x = a for acceleration, v for velocity, d for displacement
• par = the parameter
• (f1 – f2) = a possible frequency range
Examples are:
• aLinear: Linear acceleration
• vFast max: Fast max velocity
• dPeak(1 – 100 Hz): Peak displacement in frequency range 1 – 100 Hz
An exception to the rule is: Peak Particle Vel. – Peak velocity in frequency range 1 – 100 Hz
17.2.1 Setting up the Analyzer for General Vibration Measurements

1) Connect an accelerometer to the rear socket.
If this is the first time you use the accelerometer, you must create the accelerometer in the
transducer database (section 5.5) and calibrate it (section 5.8).
2) Select the VIBRATION METER, VIBRATION FREQ. ANALYZER, LOGGING, LOGGING SLM,
ENHANCED LOGGING OR ENHANCED LOGGING SLM project template.
See section 3.2.2 for more details on selecting templates.
3) Tap > Setup > Input:
a) Input and select Rear Socket.
b) Transducer and select the appropriate accelerometer.
4)✐Please note: Installing the Enhanced Vibration and Low Frequency Option BZ-7234 licence enables
CHAPTER 17
201
Fig.17.4
general vibration
parameters after
installing the Enhanced
Vibration and Low-
frequency Option
BZ-7234 licence
4) Set:
– Vibration Filters to General
– Broadband Detectors 1 and Broadband Detectors 2 to the required weighting filters
– Broadband Peak as required
Frequency Analyzer module only
– Spectrum Weighting as required.
5) Tap > Units > Engineering Unit and select No (for dB) or Yes (for m/s2).
✐Please note: If you want readouts in g instead of m/s2, tap > Preferences > Vibration Unit
and select US/UK .
6) Tap to exit.


Tap on the broadband result readouts to select parameters from the Linear, Peak, Max or Min
group to select the general vibration results (Fig.17.5).
Fig.17.5
Selection of Enhanced
Vibration results
Example 1: Vibration Severity

Mechanical vibration of rotating and reciprocating machinery is often measured in accordance
with the standards ISO 2954 and ISO 10816–1 to ISO 10816–6.
Accelerometers suitable for this are Type 4533/34 general purpose series and Type 8341
industrial.
The quantities to be measured are broadband acceleration, velocity and displacement in the
10 – 1000 Hz typical frequency range, for large machines the displacement to even lower
frequencies.
A suitable setup is (Fig.17.4):
• Broadband Detector 1 is set on velocity in the frequency range from 10 to 1000 Hz
(Vel 10-1000Hz )
• Broadband Detector 2 is set on displacement in the same frequency range (or even lower
if required).
• Broadband Peak Detector is set on displacement in order to measure Peak-Peak.
• Spectrum Weighting is set on the acceleration signal. Then the aLinear(f1-f2) parameter
can be used to calculate the acceleration value in the frequency range f1-f2. f1 and f2 are set
by the parameters Bottom F. for Special Leq and Top Freq. for Special Leq.
The parameters are displayed as shown in Fig.17.6.
CHAPTER 17
203
Fig.17.6
Displaying Peak-Peak
values together with
displacement, velocity
and acceleration in the
frequency range from
10 – 1000 Hz
Example 2: Vibration Criteria

Vibration Criteria is used for determining whether vibration-sensitive equipment can be installed
in a facility or not.
The low-level accelerometer Type 8344 is recommended for these measurements.
Measure the 1/3-octave velocity spectrum in the 1 – 100 Hz frequency range and compare the
spectrum with the Vibration Criteria curves VC-A to VC-E, as defined by Colin G. Gordon in 1999.
A suitable setup and measurement is shown in Fig.17.7.
Fig.17.7
Left: Parameter setup
Right: Display
parameter selection
17.3 Human Vibration Measurements

This section describes how to measure Human Vibration and Building Vibration parameters.
Human Vibration parameters are measured using one of the filters defined in ISO 8041:2005:
• Wb: For vertical whole-body vibration, z-axis, seated, standing or recumbent person, based
on ISO 2631–4
• Wc: For horizontal whole-body vibration, x-axis, seat back, seated person, based on
ISO 2631–1
• Wd: For horizontal whole-body vibration, x- or y-axis, seated, standing for recumbent
person, based on ISO 2631–1
• We: For rotational whole-body vibration, all directions, seated person, based on ISO 2631–1
• Wh: For hand-arm vibration, all directions, based on ISO 5349–1
• Wj: For vertical head vibration, x-axis recumbent person, based on ISO 2631–1
• Wk: For vertical whole-body vibration, z-axis seated, standing or recumbent person, based
on ISO 2631–1
• Wm: For whole-body vibration in buildings, all directions, based on ISO 2631–2
• Wxb: The band-limiting part of the Wb, Wc, Wd, We, Wj or Wk filter
• Whb: The band-limiting part of the Wh filter
• Wmb: The band-limiting part of the Wm filter
✐Please note: Wm weighting of the acceleration signal corresponds to using HKB weighting on the
velocity signal, as defined in DIN 45669–1
Fig.17.8 A Wm filter example
10.00
0.00
–10.00
–20.00
Gain [dB]
–30.00
–40.00
–50.00
–60.00
–70.00
–80.00
0.0100 0.1000 1.0000 10.0000 100.0000 1000.0000 10000.0000
Frequency [Hz]
W mb-Weighting W m-Weighting
130806
CHAPTER 17
205
BZ-7224 or BZ-7225 and accelerometer Type 8344 for low-level measurements, measures the
following timed broadband parameters in addition to the standard measured parameters:
• aWx : Time-averaged weighted acceleration value
• Peak ,Wx : Maximum peak of the weighted acceleration value
• Crest Factor , Wx : Crest factor, given by Peak, Wx/aWx
• MTVV : Maximum of the aWx,1s values
• KBFmax : Maximum of the KBF values
• KBFTm : Average of the values of KBFmaxi , where each KBFmaxi has been measured during
30 s
The following instantaneous values are also available:
• aWx,1s : Maximum time-weighted acceleration value during the latest second with
weightingWx) and 1 s exponential time constant
• KBF : Instantaneous time-averaged acceleration level with Wm weighting and with 125 ms
17.3.1 Setting up the Analyzer for Human Vibration Measurements

1) Connect the accelerometer to the rear socket. Accelerometer Type 8344 for low-level human
vibration measurements is recommended. The first time you use the transducer, it needs to
be created in the transducer database (section 5.5) and calibrated (section 5.3).
2) Select the SOUND LEVEL METER, FREQUENCY ANALYZER, LOGGING, LOGGING SLM, ENH.
LOGGING OR ENH. LOGGING SLM project template.
a) Input and select Rear Socket .
✐Please note: Installing the Enhanced Vibration and Low-frequency Option BZ-7234 licence enables
Fig.17.9
parameters with the
human vibration filters
4) Set Low Frequency to Extended .

5) Set:
– Vibration Filters to Human Vibration .
– Broadband Detector 1 and Broadband Detector 2 to the required weighting filters.
– Broadband Peak as required.
Frequency Analyzer module only:
– Spectrum Weighting to Acc Linear or Vel , as required.
6) Tap > Setup > Units > Engineering Unit and select No (in dB) or Yes (in m/s2).
✐Please note: If you want readouts in g instead of m/s2, tap the > Preferences > Vibration Unit
and select US/UK .
7) Tap to exit.


Tap on the broadband result readouts to select parameters from the Linear, peak, Max, Min or
Human Vibration group to select the human vibration results (Fig.17.10).
CHAPTER 17
207
Fig.17.10
Selection of Low
Frequency human
vibration results
17.4 Setting Up the Frequency Analyzer Module for Very Low

Frequencies
1) For:
– Sound measurements: Mount your low-frequency microphone (and low-frequency
adaptor) on the preamplifier and connect it to the top socket (section 2.5.2). The first time
you use the transducer, it needs to be created in the transducer database (section 5.5) and
calibrated (section 5.3)
– Vibration measurements: Connect the accelerometer to the rear socket. Brüel & Kjær
recommends accelerometer Type 8344 for low-level human vibration measurements. If
it is your first time to use the transducer, it needs to be created in the transducer database
(see section 5.5) and calibrated (see section 5.3)
2) Select the 2-Ch. FREQUENCY ANALYZER, LOGGING or ENH. LOGGING project template.
template tap the project template bar at the top of the screen and select the correct template
a) Input and select Rear Socket .
✐Please note: Installing the Enhanced Vibration and Low-frequency Option BZ-7234 licence enables
4) Set Low Frequency to Very Low .

✐Please note: Setting Low Frequency to Very Low for sound measurements requires use of the low-
frequency microphones, possibly together with Low-frequency Adaptor UC-0211. These
combinations ensure that the measurements fulfil the 1/1-octave and 1/3-octave filter
standards; however, please consult Table C.5 to see how the combinations influence the
dynamic range of your measurement.
5) Set Broadband (excl. Peak), Broadband Peak and Spectrum Weighting, as required.
6) Tap to exit.

✐Please note: The low-frequency settings require much longer settling times of filters and detectors for
correct results. The instrument automatically takes care of this and waits (after you press
Start ) for the needed settling time for the individual detectors.

The display frequency axis resolution may be adjusted by tapping the axis and selecting suitable
display frequency limits (Fig.17.11).
Fig.17.11
Spectrum view with
Low Frequency set to
‘Very Low’

209
Chapter 18
Specifications
This chapter comprises the specifications that are needed for evaluation of analyzer performance
characteristics and proper use of the analyzer. Some of the applicable sound level meter
standards require additional technical documentation, in particular for pattern evaluation (type
approval) purposes, but have no bearing on normal use. The additional technical documentation
is given in a separate Brüel & Kjær instruction manual (BE 1712).
Specifications – Hand-held Analyzer Type 2250/2270 Platform
Specifications apply to Type 2250/2270 fitted with SELF-GENERATED NOISE LEVEL

Microphone Type 4189 and Microphone Preamplifier Typical values at 23 °C for nominal microphone open-circuit
ZC-0032 sensitivity:
Transducer Weighting Microphone Electrical Total

“A” 14.6 dB 12.4 dB 16.6 dB
SUPPLIED TRANSDUCER
“B” 13.4 dB 11.5 dB 15.6 dB
One of the Following Microphones:
• Type 4189: Prepolarized Free-field ½″ Microphone “C” 13.5 dB 12.9 dB 16.2 dB
• Type 4190: Free-field ½″ Microphone “Z” 5 Hz–20 kHz 15.3 dB 18.3 dB 20.1 dB
• Type 4966: Free-field ½″ Microphone “Z” 3 Hz–20 kHz 15.3 dB 25.5 dB 25.9 dB
Nominal Open-circuit Sensitivity: 50 mV/Pa (corresponding
to −26 dB re 1 V/Pa) ±1.5 dB Hardware Interface
Capacitance: 14 pF (at 250 Hz)
PUSHBUTTONS
SUPPLIED MICROPHONE PREAMPLIFIER 11 buttons with backlight, optimized for measurement
Part No.: ZC-0032 control and screen navigation
Nominal Preamplifier Attenuation: 0.25 dB
ON-OFF BUTTON
Connector: 10-pin LEMO
Function: Press 1 s to turn on; press 1 s to enter standby;
Extension Cables: Up to 100 m in length between the
press for more than 5 s to switch off
microphone preamplifier and Type 2250/2270, without
degradation of the specifications STATUS INDICATORS
Accessory Detection: Windscreen UA-1650 can be LEDs: Red, yellow and green
automatically detected when fitted over ZC-0032
DISPLAY
MICROPHONE POLARIZATION VOLTAGE Type: Transflective back-lit colour touchscreen 240 × 320
Selectable between 0 V and 200 V dot matrix
Colour Schemes: Five different – optimized for different
usage scenarios (day, night, etc.)
Backlight: Adjustable level and time
USER INTERFACE
Measurement Control: Using pushbuttons
Set-up and Display of Results: Using stylus on touchscreen
or pushbuttons
Lock: Pushbuttons and touchscreen can be locked and Direct Input: Max. input voltage: ±14.14 Vpeak
unlocked CCLD Input: Max. input voltage: ±7.07 Vpeak
CCLD Current/voltage: 4 mA/25 V
USB INTERFACE
Hardware G1 – 3: USB 1.1 OTG Mini B socket TRIGGER SOCKET
Hardware G4: USB 2.0 OTG Micro AB and USB 2.0 Standard A Connector: Triaxial LEMO
sockets for Wireless USB-A Adapter UL-1050, printer or Max. Input Voltage: ±20 Vpeak
weather station Input Impedance: >47 kΩ
Precision: ±0.1 V
MODEM INTERFACE
Connection to Internet through GPRS/EDGE/HSPA modem OUTPUT SOCKET
connected through the CompactFlash slot (hardware G1 – 3) Connector: Triaxial LEMO
or the USB Standard A Socket (hardware G4). Max. Peak Output Level: ±4.46 V
Supports DynDNS for automatic update of IP address of host Output Impedance: 50 Ω
name
HEADPHONE SOCKET
PRINTER INTERFACE Connector: 3.5 mm Minijack stereo socket
PCL printers, Mobile Pro Spectrum thermal printer or Seiko Max. Peak Output Level: ±1.4 V
DPU S245/S445 thermal printers can be connected to USB Output Impedance: 32 Ω in each channel
socket
Storage
MICROPHONE FOR COMMENTARY
Microphone, which utilizes automatic gain control (AGC), is INTERNAL FLASH-RAM (NON-VOLATILE)
incorporated in underside of analyzer. Used to create voice For hardware G1 – 3: 20 MB or hardware G4: 512 MB for
annotations for attaching to measurements user set-ups and measurement data
CAMERA (TYPE 2270 ONLY) EXTERNAL MEMORY CARD
Camera with fixed focus and automatic exposure is SD and SDHC Card: For store/recall of measurement data
incorporated in underside of analyzer. CompactFlash (CF) Card: Hardware G1 – 3 only. For
Used to create image annotations for attaching to store/recall of measurement data
measurements USB MEMORY STICK (Hardware G4 only)
Image Size: Hardware G1 – 3: 640 × 480 pixels or hardware For store/recall of measurement data
G4: 2048 × 1536 pixels
Viewfinder Size: 212 × 160 pixels Power
Format: jpg with exif information
EXTERNAL DC POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS
COMPACTFLASH SOCKET (Hardware G1 – 3 only) Used to charge the battery pack in the analyzer
Connection of CF memory card, CF modem, CF to serial Voltage: 8 – 24 V DC, ripple voltage <20 mV
interface, CF Ethernet interface or CF WLAN interface Current Requirement: min. 1.5 A
SECURE DIGITAL SOCKET Power Consumption: <2.5 W, without battery charging,
1 × SD socket for hardware G1 – 3 or 2 × SD sockets for <10 W when charging
hardware G4 Cable Connector: LEMO Type FFA.00, positive at centre pin
Connect SD and SDHC memory cards EXTERNAL AC MAIN SUPPLY ADAPTOR
LAN INTERFACE SOCKET Part No.: ZG-0426
Hardware G1 – 3 (Type 2270 only): Supply Voltage: 100 – 120/200 – 240 V AC; 47 – 63 Hz
• Connector: RJ45 MDI Connector: 2-pin IEC 320
• Speed: 10 Mbps BATTERY PACK
• Protocol: TCP/IP Rechargeable Li-Ion battery
Hardware G4 (Types 2250 and 2270): Part No.: QB-0061
• Connector: RJ45 Auto-MDIX Voltage: 3.7 V
• Speed: 100 Mbps Capacity: 5200 mAh nominal
• Protocol: TCP/IP Typical Operating Time:
INPUT SOCKET Single-channel: >11 h (screen backlight dimmed); >10 h
One socket with Type 2250; two with Type 2270 (full screen backlight)
Connector: Triaxial LEMO Dual-channel: >10 h (full screen backlight)
Input Impedance: ≥1 MΩ
CHAPTER 18
211
Specifications
Use of external interfaces (LAN, USB, Wi-Fi) will decrease Software Interface
battery operating time. Connecting a weather station or a
GPS receiver can decrease battery operating with up to 20%. USERS
Connecting Wireless USB-A Adapter UL-1050 can decrease Multi-user concept with login. Users can have their own
battery operating time up to 35% settings with jobs and projects totally independent of other
Battery Cycle Life: >500 complete charge/discharge cycles users
Battery Aging: Approximately 20% loss in capacity per year PREFERENCES
Battery Indicator: Remaining battery capacity and expected Date, time and number formats can be specified per user
working time may be read out in % and in time
Battery Fuel Gauge: The battery is equipped with a built-in LANGUAGE
fuel gauge, which continuously measures and stores the User interface in Catalan, Chinese (People’s Republic of
actual battery capacity in the battery unit China), Chinese (Taiwan), Croatian, Czech, Danish, English,
Charge Time: In analyzer, typically 10 hours from empty at Flemish, French, German, Hungarian, Japanese, Italian,
ambient temperatures below 30 °C (86 °F). To protect the Korean, Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian,
battery, charging will be terminated completely at ambient Slovenian, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish and Ukrainian
temperatures above 40 °C (104 °F). At 30 to 40 °C, charging HELP
time will be prolonged. With External Charger ZG-0444 Concise context-sensitive help in Chinese (People’s Republic
(optional accessory), typically 5 hours of China), English, French, German, Italian, Japanese, Polish,
Note: It is not recommended to charge the battery at Romanian, Serbian, Slovenian, Spanish and Ukrainian
temperatures below 0 °C (32 °F) or over 50 °C (122 °F).
Doing this will reduce battery lifetime UPDATE OF SOFTWARE
Update to any version using BZ-5503 through USB or update
CLOCK via Internet
Back-up battery powered clock. Drift <0.45 s per 24-hour
period REMOTE ACCESS
Connect to the analyzer using:
Environmental • Measurement Partner Suite BZ-5503
• Measurement Partner Field App (iOS or Android
WARM-UP TIME smartphone app)
From Power Off: <2 min • the 2250/2270 SDK (software development kit)
From Standby: <10 s for prepolarized microphones • a REST interface through HTTP
WEIGHT AND DIMENSIONS • an Internet browser supporting JavaScript
650 g (23 oz) including rechargeable battery The connection is password protected with two levels of
300 × 93 × 50 mm (11.8 × 3.7 × 1.9″) including preamplifier protection:
and microphone • Guest level: for viewing only
• Administrator level: for viewing and full control of the
Wireless Connection to Mobile Device analyzer
Specifications apply to Wireless USB-A Adapter UL-1050 CLOUD
Operating Frequency: 2.4 GHz Connect to Measurement Partner Cloud on cloud.bksv.com
Data Rate: for transferring data to an archive in the cloud for storage or
• IEEE 802.11n: up to 150 Mbps easy synchronization with Measurement Partner Suite
• IEEE 802.11g: up to 54 Mbps BZ-5503
• IEEE 802.11b: up to 11 Mbps
Encryption/Authentication: Input
• 64/128-bit WEP
• WPA-PSK DUAL CHANNELS (Type 2270 only)
• WPA2-PSK All measurements are made from either Ch.1 or Ch.2
Range: The range is similar to a standard WLAN unit, typically TRANSDUCER DATABASE
from 10 to 50 m (33 to 164′), depending on the environment Transducers are described in a transducer database with
and the number of other WLAN transmitters in the area information on Serial Number, Nominal Sensitivity,
(smartphones, Wi-Fi, etc.) Polarization Voltage, Free-field Type, CCLD Required,
Power Requirements: Power Consumption: <1 W Capacitance, and additional information.
The analogue hardware is set up automatically in accordance
with the selected transducer
CORRECTION FILTERS Measurement Control

For Microphone Types 4189, 4190, 4191, 4192, 4193,
4193 + UC-0211, 4950, 4952, 4952+EH-2152, 4955-A, 4964, MANUAL
4964 + UC-0211, 4966 and 4184-A, BZ-7222 is able to correct Manually controlled single measurement
the frequency response to compensate for sound field and AUTOMATIC
accessories: Preset measurement time from 1 s to 24 h in 1 s steps
Sound Field: Free-field, diffuse-field or pressure-field (Type
4192 only). For Types 4952 and 4184-A only: 0° (Top) MANUAL CONTROLS
reference direction and 90° (Side) reference direction Reset, Start, Pause, Back-erase, Continue and Store the
Accessories: measurement manually
• Types 4189, 4190, 4964 and 4964 + UC-0211 only: None, AUTO-START
Windscreen UA-1650 or Outdoor Microphone Kit UA-1404 A total of 10 timers allow set up of measurement start times
• Types 4191, 4192, 4193, 4193 + UC-0211, 4966 and up to a month in advance. Each timer can be repeated.
4955-A only: None or Windscreen UA-1650 Measurements are automatically stored when completed
• Type 4950 only: None or Windscreen UA-0237
For Accelerometer Types 4397-A, 4513, 4513-001, BACK-ERASE
4513-002, 4514, 4514-001, 4514-002, 4533-B, 4533-B-001, The last 5 s of data can be erased without resetting the
4533-B-002, 4534-B, 4534-B-001, 4534-B-002, 8324, 8341, measurement
8344, 8347-C + 2647-D the lower frequency limit will be Measurement Status
optimized to match the specifications for the accelerometer
ON SCREEN
Calibration Information such as overload and running/paused are
Initial calibration is stored for comparison with later displayed on screen as icons
calibrations TRAFFIC LIGHTS
ACOUSTIC Red, yellow and green LEDs show measurement status and
instantaneous overload as follows:
Using Sound Calibrator Type 4231 or custom calibrator. The • Yellow LED flashing every 5 s = stopped, ready to measure
calibration process automatically detects the calibration • Green LED flashing slowly = awaiting trigger or calibration
level when Sound Calibrator Type 4231 is usedELECTRICAL signal
Uses internally generated electrical signal combined with a • Green LED on constantly = measuring
typed-in value of microphone sensitivity • Yellow LED flashing slowly = paused, measurement not
CALIBRATION HISTORY stored
Up to 20 of the last calibrations made are listed and can be • Red LED flashing quickly = intermittent overload,
viewed on the analyzer calibration failed
Data Management NOTIFICATIONS

Sends an SMS or email daily at a specified time or if an alarm
METADATA condition is fulfilled
Up to 30 metadata annotations can be set per project (text Alarm Conditions:
from keyboard or text from pick list, number from keyboard • Disk Space below set value
or auto-generated number) • Trig. Input Voltage below set value
PROJECT TEMPLATE • Internal Battery enters set state
Defines the display and measurement set-ups. Set-ups can • Change in Measurement State
be locked and password-protected • Reboot of analyzer
PROJECT Annotations
Measurement data stored with the project template VOICE ANNOTATIONS
JOB Voice annotations can be attached to measurements so that
Projects are organized in jobs. verbal comments can be stored together with the
Explorer facilities for easy management of data (copy, cut, measurement
paste, delete, rename, open project, create job, set default Playback: Playback of voice annotations can be listened to
project name) using an earphone/headphones connected to the
headphone socket
Gain Adjustment: –60 dB to +60 dB
CHAPTER 18
213
Specifications
TEXT ANNOTATIONS IMAGE ANNOTATIONS (TYPE 2270 ONLY)

Text annotations can be attached to measurements so that Image annotations can be attached to measurements.
written comments can be stored with the measurement Images can be viewed on the screen
GPS ANNOTATIONS
A text annotation with GPS information can be attached
(Latitude, Longitude, Altitude and position error). Requires
connection to a GPS receiver
Software Specifications – Sound Level Meter Software BZ-7222
Standards N = number between 0.1 and 99.9

Conforms with the following national and international For Display and Storage:
standards: Start Time Stop Time Overload %
• IEC 61672–1 (2013) Class 1
Elapsed Time LXeq LYeq
• IEC 60651 (1979) plus Amendment 1 (1993–02) and
Amendment 2 (2000–10), Type 1 LXE LYE LCeq–LAeq
• IEC 60804 (2000–10), Type 1 LXSmax LXFmax LXImax
• DIN 45657 (1997– 07) LYSmax LYFmax LYImax
• ANSI S1.4 –1983 plus ANSI S1.4A–1985 Amendment, Type 1 LXSmin LXFmin LXImin
• ANSI/ASA S1.4–2014, Class 1
LYSmin LYFmin LYImin
• ANSI S1.43–1997, Type 1
Note: The international IEC standards are adopted as LXIeq LYIeq LAIeq–LAeq
European standards by CENELEC. When this happens, the LAFTeq LAFTeq–LAeq Time Remaining
letters IEC are replaced with EN and the number is retained. Lep,d Lep,dv E
Type 2250/2270 also conforms to these EN standards Dose Proj. Dose Lvpeak
Input #VPeaks #VPeaks #VPeaks
(>NNNdB) (>137dB) (>135dB)
CHANNELS (Type 2270 only) TVpeak LavUQ TWA
All measurements are made from either Ch.1 or Ch.2
TWAv DoseUQ Proj. DoseUQ
Analysis LAeq,T1,mov,max LAeq,T2,mov,max LCeq,T1,mov,max
DETECTORS LCeq,T2,mov,max ΔLeq,T1,mov,max ΔLeq,T2,mov,max
Parallel detectors on every measurement: Avg. RPM
• A- or B-weighted (switchable): Broadband detector Weather Data (requires weather station):
channel with three exponential time weightings (Fast,
Slow, Impulse), one linearly averaging detector and one Wind Dir. avg. Wind Dir. min. Wind Dir. max.
peak detector Wind Speed avg. Wind Speed min. Wind Speed max.
• C- or Z-weighted (switchable): As for A- or B-weighted Amb. Temp. Amb. Humidity Amb. Pressure
• Overload Detector: Monitors the overload outputs of all Rainfall
the frequency weighted channels
Only for Display as Numbers or Quasi-analog Bars:
MEASUREMENTS FOR SOUND INPUT LXS LXF LXI
X = frequency weightings A or B
Y = frequency weightings C or Z LYS LYF LYI
V = frequency weightings A, B, C or Z LXS(SPL) LXF(SPL) LXI(SPL)
U = time weightings F or S LYS(SPL) LYF(SPL) LYI(SPL)
Q = exchange rate 4, 5 or 6 dB LXN1 or LXUN1 LXN2 or LXUN2 LXN3 or LXUN3
LXN4 or LXUN4 LXN5 or LXUN5 LXN6 or LXUN6
LXN7 or LXUN7 LVpeak,1s Trig. Input Voltage
Std.Dev. LAeq,T1,mov LAeq,T2,mov
LCeq,T1,mov LCeq,T2,mov ΔLeq,T1,mov Linearity Range: In accordance with IEC 60804: A-weighted:
ΔLeq,T2,mov Inst. RPM 21.4 dB to 140.8 dB
Linear Operating Range: In accordance with IEC 61672:
Instantaneous Weather Data: • A-weighted: 1 kHz: 24.8 dB to 139.7 dB
Wind Dir. Wind Speed • C-weighted: 25.5 dB to 139.7 dB
• Z-weighted: 30.6 dB to 139.7 dB
Instantaneous GPS Data: Peak C Range: In accordance with IEC 61672: 1 kHz: 42.3 dB
Latitude Longitude to 142.7 dB
MEASUREMENTS FOR VIBRATION INPUT SAMPLING FOR STATISTICS
For Display and Storage: The Statistics can be based on either LXF, LXS or LXeq:
Start Time Stop Time Overload % • Statistics LXFN1 – 7 or LXSN1 – 7 are based on sampling LXF or
LXS, resp., every 10 ms into 0.2 dB wide classes over 130 dB
Elapsed Time Time Remaining • Statistics LXN1 – 7 are based on sampling LXeq every second
aLinear aLin(1k–20kHz) into 0.2 dB wide classes over 130 dB
aFast max aF max(1k–20kHz) Full distribution saved with measurement
aSlow max aS max(1k–20kHz) The Std.Dev. (Standard Deviation) parameter is calculated
aFast min aF min(1k–20kHz) from the statistics
aPeak aTPeak RPM MEASUREMENT
Crest Factor Avg. RPM RPM is measured on the signal connected to Trigger input
when Tacho is set to On
Only for Display as Numbers or Quasi-analog Bars: Range: 1 to 6 000 000 RPM
aFast Inst aF Inst(1k–20kHz) Gear Ratio: 10–5 to 1038. The displayed RPM is the measured
aSlow Inst aS Inst(1k–20kHz) RPM divided by the RPM gear ratio
Inst RPM Trig. Input Voltage Displays
Instantaneous GPS Data: MEASUREMENT DISPLAYS
Latitude Longitude SLM: Measurement data displayed as numbers of various
MEASUREMENTS FOR DIRECT INPUT sizes and one quasi-analog bar
Measured sound data are displayed as dB values, vibration
For Display and Storage: data as dB values or in physical units (SI units (m/s2) or US/UK
Start Time Stop Time Overload % units (g)), direct data as voltage in dB or V, housekeeping data
Elapsed Time Time Remaining as numbers in relevant format.
Linear Fast max Slow max Instantaneous measurement LXF or Fast Inst is displayed as a
quasi-analog bar
Fast min Slow min Peak
TPeak Crest Factor Avg. RPM Signal Monitoring
Only for Display as Numbers or Quasi-analog Bars: The input signal can be monitored using an
earphone/headphones connected to the headphone socket,
Fast Inst Slow Inst
or it can be fed to the output socket
Inst RPM Trig. Input Voltage
OUTPUT SIGNAL
Instantaneous GPS Data: Input Conditioned: A-, B-, C- or Z-weighted
Latitude Longitude Gain Adjustment: –60 dB to 60 dB
LXF output (every ms) as a DC voltage between 0 V and 4 V
MEASURING RANGES
DC output for calibration purposes: 0 dB ∼ 0 V and
When using Microphone Type 4189:
200 dB ∼ 4 V
Dynamic Range: From typical noise floor to max. level for a
1 kHz pure tone signal, A-weighted: 16.6 to 140 dB HEADPHONE SIGNAL
Primary Indicator Range: In accordance with IEC 60651: Input signal can be monitored using this socket with
A-weighted: 23.5 dB to 122.3 dB headphones/earphones
Gain Adjustment: –60 dB to 60 dB
CHAPTER 18
215
Specifications
Software Specifications – Frequency Analysis Software BZ-7223
The specifications for BZ-7223 also include the specifications MEASUREMENTS FOR VIBRATION AND DIRECT INPUT
for Sound Level Meter Software BZ-7222. Spectra for Display and Storage:
Standards Linear Fast max Slow max
Conforms with the following national and international Fast min Slow min
standards: Spectra for Display Only:
• IEC 61260–1 (2014), 1/1-octave Bands and 1/3-octave
Fast Inst Slow Inst
Bands, Class 1
• IEC 61260 (1995 –07) plus Amendment 1 (2001–09), 1/1- Single Values:
octave Bands and 1/3-octave Bands, Class 0 Linear (f1 – f2)*
• ANSI S1.11–1986, 1/1-octave Bands and 1/3-octave * where f1 and f2 are frequency bands in the spectrum
Bands, Order 3, Type 0 –C
• ANSI S1.11–2004, 1/1-octave Bands and 1/3-octave
Bands, Class 0 MEASURING RANGES
• ANSI/ASA S1.11–2014 Part 1, 1/1-octave Bands and 1/3- When using Microphone Type 4189:
octave Bands, Class 1 Dynamic Range: From typical noise floor to max. level for a
pure tone signal at 1 kHz 1/3-octave: 1.1 to 140 dB
Input Linear Operating Range: In accordance with IEC 61260, 1/3-
octave: ≤20.5 to 140 dB
CHANNELS (TYPE 2270 ONLY)
All measurements are made from either Ch.1 or Ch.2 SAMPLING FOR OCTAVE OR 1/3-OCTAVE STATISTICS
X = frequency weightings A or B
Frequency Analysis The Statistics can be based on either LXF or LXS: Statistics
CENTRE FREQUENCIES LXFN1 – 7 or LXSN1 – 7 are based on sampling LXF or LXS,
1/1-oct. Band Centre Frequencies: 8 Hz to 16 kHz respectively, every 100 ms into 1 dB wide classes over
1/3-oct. Band Centre Frequencies: 6.3 Hz to 20 kHz 150 dB.
Full distribution can be saved with measurement
MEASUREMENTS FOR SOUND INPUT
X = frequency weightings A, B, C or Z, Y = time weightings F or Displays
S
MEASUREMENT DISPLAYS
Data for Storage
Spectrum: One or two spectra superimposed + A/B and C/Z
Full Spectral Statistics
broadband bars
Spectra for Display and Storage: Table: One or two spectra in tabular form
LXeq LXSmax LXFmax Y-axis: Range: 5, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 140, 160 or
LXSmin LXFmin 200 dB. Auto zoom or auto scale available. Sound data are
displayed as dB values, vibration data as dB values or in
Spectra for Display Only: physical units (SI units (m/s2) or US/UK units (g)), direct data
LXS LXF LXYN1 as voltage in dB or V
LXYN2 LXYN3 LXYN4 Cursor: Readout of selected band
LXYN5 LXYN6 LXYN7 Generator
Single Values: INTERNAL GENERATOR
SIL PSIL SIL3 Built-in pseudo-random noise generator
LXeq(f1-f2)* Spectrum: Selectable between Pink and White
NR NR Decisive Band Crest Factor:
RC RC Classification • Pink Noise: 4.4 (13 dB)
• White Noise: 3.6 (11 dB)
NCB NCB Classification Bandwidth: Selectable:
NC NC Decisive Band • Lower Limit: 50 Hz (1/3-oct.) or 63 Hz (oct.)
Loudness Loudness Level • Upper Limit: 10 kHz (1/3-oct.) or 8 kHz (oct.)
* where f1 and f2 are frequency bands in the spectrum
Output Level: Independent of bandwidth EXTERNAL GENERATOR

• Max.: 1 Vrms (0 dB) Selectable as alternative to internal generator (for
• Gain Adjustment: –60 to 0 dB microphone input only)
When bandwidth is changed, the level for all bands is To control external noise generator, set:
automatically adjusted to comply with the set output level • Levels: 0 V (generator off), 4.5 V (generator on)
Correction Filters: For Sound Sources Type 4292, Type 4295 • Rise-time and Fall-time: 10 μs
and Type 4296: Flat or Optimum The noise generator is turned on and off automatically
Repetition Period: 175 s during the measurement
Output Connector: Output socket Escape Time: 0 to 60 s
Build-up Time: 1 to 10 s
The generator can be turned on and off manually for
checking equipment and sound levels
Software Specifications – Logging Software BZ-7224
The specifications for BZ-7224 include the specifications for Events can be set manually
Sound Level Meter Software BZ-7222. BZ-7224 adds:
TRIGGERS
Logging Markers can be set and signal recordings can be started
(license for BZ-7226 required) when a broadband level is
MEASUREMENTS above or below a specified level
Logging: Measurement data logged at preset periods into
files on: ANNOTATIONS
• SD Card: All hardware versions On-line annotations with spoken comments, written notes
• CF Card: G1 – 3 or images (Type 2270 only)
• USB Memory Stick: G4
Logging Period: From 1 s to 24 hr with 1 s resolution
Calibration
Fast Logging: LAF, LAS and LAeq (sound input) or Fast Inst, Slow CHARGE INJECTION CALIBRATION (CIC)
Inst and Linear (vibration and Direct input) can be logged Injects an internally generated electrical signal in parallel
every 100 ms, irrespective of logging period. For sound input with the microphone diaphragm. A manual CIC can be
you can also log LAF every 10 ms. One spectrum (Leq, LF or performed whenever there is no measurement in progress
LS) can be logged every 100 ms. The 10 ms LAF and the An automatic CIC can be performed at the start and end of a
100 ms spectrum can only be stored and not displayed on the logging measurement
analyzer; it can be displayed on Measurement Partner Suite
BZ-5503 Measurement Displays
Broadband Data Stored at each Logging Interval: All, or up Profile: Graphical display of selectable measurement data
to 10 selectable broadband sound data incl. Trig. Input versus time. Fast display of next or previous marker, profile
Voltage, Avg. RPM, Weather data, and LAeq,T,mov (for overview of entire measurement
vibration and direct input: up to 5 parameters) Y-axis: Range: 5, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 140, 160 or
Broadband Statistics Stored at each Logging Interval: Full 200 dB. Auto zoom or auto scale available. Sound data are
distribution, or none (sound input only) displayed as dB values, vibration data as dB values or in
Spectrum Data Stored at each Logging Interval: All, or up to physical units (SI units (m/s2) or US/UK units (g)), direct data
three selectable spectra (license for BZ-7223 required) as voltage in dB or V.
Spectral Statistics Stored at each Logging Interval: Full X-axis: Scroll facilities
distribution, or none (sound input only, license for BZ-7223 Cursor: Readout of measurement data at selected time
required)
Logging Time: From 1 s to 31 days with 1 s resolution Notifications
Measurement Total: For the logging time, in parallel with Alarm Conditions (in addition to those specified for
logging: All broadband data, statistics and spectra (license BZ-7222):
for BZ-7223 required) • CIC failed
• Trigger Level exceeded
MARKERS
One data exclusion marker and four user-definable markers
for on-line marking of sound categories heard during the
measurement
CHAPTER 18
217
Specifications
Software Specifications – Enhanced Logging Software BZ-7225
The specifications for BZ-7225 include the specifications for TRIGGERS

Logging Software BZ-7224. BZ-7225 adds: Signal Recording Timer
For periodically starting a signal recording (license for
Logging BZ-7226 required)
For Display and Storage Level Triggers
Ldn, Lden, Lday, Levening and Lnight Markers can be set and signal recordings can be started
Selectable Day, Evening and Night periods and penalties (license for BZ-7226 required) when a broadband or
(sound input only) frequency band level is above or below a specified level. Hold
Periodic Reports: Measurement data logged at a preset off time between triggers can be set. You can specify up to
report period into files on: four independent Level Triggers to be active at four different
• SD Card: All hardware versions times during the day
• CF Card: G1 – 3
• USB Memory Stick: G4 Calibration
Report Period: From 1 min to 24 h with 1 min resolution CHARGE INJECTION CALIBRATION (CIC)
Broadband Data and Statistics Stored at each Reporting Injects an internally generated electrical signal in parallel
Interval: All including Weather data with the microphone diaphragm. A manual CIC can be
Spectrum Data Stored at each Reporting Interval: All performed whenever there is no measurement in progress
(license for BZ-7223 required) An automatic CIC can be performed at the start and end of a
Spectral Statistics Stored at each Reporting Interval: Full logging measurement. The CIC can be set to occur up to 4
distribution, or none (sound input only, license for BZ-7223 times in each 24 hour period
required) CIC Duration: 10 s
Logging Time: From 1 s to 31 days with 1 s resolution or
Continuous Notifications
Data are saved in separate projects for every 24 hr of logging Alarm Conditions (in addition to those specified for
– at a user-defined time of day BZ-7224): LAeq for the latest Report Period exceeds a set
Automatic reboot and resume of operation in case of power threshold
failure
Software Specifications – Signal Recording Option BZ-7226
Signal Recording Option BZ-7226 is enabled with a separate SAMPLING RATE AND PRE-RECORDING
license. It works with all analyzer software: Sound Level The signal is buffered for the pre-recording of the signal. This
Meter, Frequency Analysis, and Logging Software, Enhanced allows the beginning of events to be recorded even if they are
Logging Software and Reverberation Time Software. It works only detected later.
with all analyzer software: Sound Level Meter, Frequency
Sampling Rate (kHz) 8 16 24 48
and Logging Software.
For data storage, signal recording requires: Maximum G1 – 3 110 50 30 10
• SD Card: All hardware versions Pre-recording (s)
• CF Card: Hardware G1 – 3 G4 470 230 150 70
16-bit
• USB Memory Stick: Hardware G4
Maximum Pre-recording (s) 470 230 150 70
RECORDED SIGNAL 16-bit
A-, B-, C- or Z-weighted signal from the measurement Maximum G1 – 3 70 30 16 3
transducer Pre-recording (s)
G4 310 150 96 43
AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL 24-bit
The average level of the signal is kept within a 40 dB range, or Maximum Pre-recording (s) 310 150 96 43
the gain can be fixed 24-bit
Memory (KB/s) 16-bit 16 32 48 96
Memory (KB/s) 24-bit 24 48 72 144
PLAYBACK Playback: Playback of signal recordings can be listened to

Playback of signal recordings can be listened to using the using earphone/headphones connected to the headphone
earphone/headphones connected to the headphone socket socket
Gain Adjustment: –60 to 60 dB
RECORDING FORMAT
The recording format is either 24- or 16-bit wave files Functions with BZ-7222 and BZ-7223
(extension .wav) attached to the data in the project, easily
Manual Control of Recording: Recording can be manually
played back afterwards on a PC using BZ-5503, Type 7820 or
started and stopped during a measurement using a
7825. Calibration information and possible tacho trigger
pushbutton or an external signal
information are stored in the .wav file allowing BZ-5503 and
Automatic Control of Recording: Start of recording when
PULSE to analyse the recordings
measurement is started. Minimum and Maximum recording
Functions with BZ-7130 and BZ-7131 time can be preset
Manual Control of Recording: Recording can be manually Functions with BZ-7224 and BZ-7225
started and stopped during a measurement using a
Manual Control of Recording (using Manual Event or Back-
pushbutton or an external signal
erase pushbutton, or an external signal): Recording during
all of the event, or for preset minimum and maximum
measurement is started. Minimum and Maximum recording
duration. A Sound marker is set while recording. Selectable
time can be preset
pre- and post-recording time
Functions with BZ-7133 Manual Control of Recording (using touch screen):
Recording for the selected time period (subject to the
Manual Control of Recording (using Manual Event or Back-
limitations of the pre-recording buffer). A Sound marker is
erase pushbutton, or an external signal): Recording during
set for the selected time period
all of the event, or for preset minimum and maximum
Automatic Control of Recording: An event can be triggered
duration. A Sound marker is set while recording. Selectable
when a broadband level is above or below a specified level.
pre- and post-recording time
Recording during all of the event or for preset minimum and
Manual Control of Recording (using touch screen):
maximum duration. Selectable pre- and post-recording time
Recording for the selected time period (subject to the
limitations of the pre-recording buffer). A Sound marker is Functions with BZ-7227
set for the selected time period
Automatic Control of Recording: Recording during all of the
measurement is started. 16-bit recording format only
event or for preset minimum and maximum duration.
Selectable pre- and post-recording time
Software Specifications – Reverberation Time Software BZ-7227
Standards 1/3-octave Bands, Class 1

Conforms with the relevant parts of the following: • ISO 140
• IEC 61672–1 (2013) Class 1 • ISO 3382
• IEC 60651 (1979) plus Amendment 1 (1993–02) and • ISO 354
Amendment 2 (2000–10), Type 1 CORRECTION FILTERS
• IEC 61260–1 (2014), 1/1-octave Bands and 1/3-octave For Microphone Types 4189, 4190, 4191, 4192, 4193, 4950,
Bands, Class 1 4952, 4952+EH-2152, 4955-A, 4964, 4966 and 4184-A,
• ANSI S1.4–1983 plus ANSI S1.4A–1985 Amendment, BZ-7227 is able to correct the frequency response to
Type 1 compensate for sound field and accessories
• ANSI/ASA S1.4–2014, Class 1
• IEC 61260 (1995–07) plus Amendment 1 (2001–09), 1/1- Broadband Measurements
octave Bands and 1/3-octave Bands, Class 0
DETECTORS
• ANSI S1.11–1986, 1/1-octave Bands and 1/3-octave Bands,
A- and C-weighted broadband detectors with F exponential
Order 3, Type 0–C
time weighting
• ANSI S1.11– 2004, 1/1-octave Bands and 1/3-octave
Overload Detector: Monitors the overload outputs of all the
Bands, Class 0
frequency weighted channels
• ANSI/ASA S1.11–2014 Part 1, 1/1-octave Bands and
CHAPTER 18
219
Specifications
MEASUREMENTS Control: See Measurement Control

LAF and LCF for display as numbers or quasi-analogue bars
Reverberation Time
MEASURING RANGES
EDT, T20 and T30 in octave or 1/3-octave bands
Decays: Measured and stored using averaging time of 5 ms
Evaluation Range: 0 to –10 dB for EDT, –5 to –25 dB for T20
1 kHz pure tone signal, A-weighted: 16.6 to 140 dB
and –5 to –35 dB for T30
Primary Indicator Range: In accordance with IEC 60651, A-
Measurement Time: Automatic selection of measurement
weighted: 23.5 dB to 122.3 dB
time for the decays based on the actual reverberation time of
the room
• A-weighted: 23.5 dB to 122.3 dB
Maximum Measurement Time: from 2 to 30 s
• C-weighted: 25.5 dB to 139.7 dB
Averaging: EDT, T20 and T30 measurements can be averaged
• Z-weighted: 30.6 dB to 139.7 dB
(arithmetic averaging or ensemble averaging)
Frequency Analysis EDT, T20 and T30 Calculation: From slope in evaluation
range
CENTRE FREQUENCIES Slope Estimation: Least squares approximation
1/1-oct. Band Centre Frequencies: 63 Hz to 8 kHz Quality Indicators: Quality Indicators with status
1/3-oct. Band Centre Frequencies: 50 Hz to 10 kHz information like Overload, Curvature in %, etc.; extensive list
MEASUREMENTS of status information.
LZF spectrum for display only Quality indicators are available on reverberation time
LZeq spectra sampled at 5 ms intervals spectra for each frequency band, and as overall quality
indicators for each measurement position and for the total
MEASURING RANGES project (room)
When using Microphone Type 4189: Reverberation Time Range: Max. 50 s, min. 0.1 – 0.7 s,
Dynamic Range: From typical noise floor to max. level for a depending on bandwidth and centre frequency
pure tone signal at 1 kHz 1/3-octave: 1.1 to 140 dB Wide Band Reverberation Time: The arithmetic average of
Linear Operating Range: In accordance with IEC 61260, the Reverberation Time within a selectable frequency range
1/3-octave: ≤20.5 dB to 140 dB is calculated
Internal Generator Measurement Display and Control
Built-in pseudo-random noise generator
OVERVIEW MAP
Spectrum: Selectable Pink or White
Map of Source and Receiver positions with reverberation
Crest Factor:
time readout for a selectable frequency band on each
• Pink noise: 4.4 (13 dB)
measurement position together with quality indicator
• White noise: 3.6 (11 dB)
Organization of Source and Receiver Positions: measure at
Bandwidth: Follows measurement frequency range
all receiver positions for each source or measure in a number
• Lower Limit: 50 Hz (1/3-oct.) or 63 Hz (oct.)
of positions (1 to 10) for each source
• Upper Limit: 10 kHz (1/3-oct.) or 8 kHz (oct.)
Source and Receiver positions can be added, moved or
Output Level: Independent of bandwidth
deleted
• Max.: 1 Vrms (0 dB)
• Gain Adjustment: –60 to 0 dB OVERVIEW TABLE
When bandwidth is changed, the level for all bands is Table of measurement positions with reverberation time
automatically adjusted to comply with the set output level readout for selectable frequency band on each position
Correction Filters for Sound Sources Type 4292, Type 4295 together with quality indicator
and Type 4296: Flat or Optimum Positions can be included/excluded from Room average
Turn-on Time and Turn-off Time: Equivalent to RT = 70 ms
SOUND LEVEL SPECTRUM
Repetition Period: 175 s
LZF spectrum plus A and C broadband bars
Output Connector: Output Socket
Y-axis: Range: 5, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 140 or 160 dB.
Control: See Measurement Control
Auto zoom or auto scale available
External Generator Cursor: Readout of selected band
Quality indicator for each frequency band
Selectable as alternative to internal generator
For controlling external noise generator REVERBERATION TIME SPECTRUM
Levels: 0 V (Generator off), 4.5 V (Generator on) One or two spectra can be displayed
Rise-time and Fall-time: 10 μs Y-axis: Range: 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10 or 20 s. Auto zoom available
Cursor: Readout of selected band Measurement Status

Quality Indicator for each frequency band
ON SCREEN
REVERBERATION TIME SPECTRUM TABLE Information such as overload, awaiting trigger and
One or two spectra can be displayed in tabular form running/paused are displayed on screen as icons
DECAY TRAFFIC LIGHT
Decay curve for a position or the room average available for Red, yellow and green LEDs show measurement status and
each frequency band instantaneous overload as follows:
Display of evaluation range and regression line • Yellow LED flashing every 5 s = stopped, ready to measure
Readout of Curvature in % • Green LED flashing slowly = awaiting trigger or calibration
Y-axis: Range: 5, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 140 or 160 dB. signal
Auto zoom or auto scale available • Green LED on constantly = measuring
MEASUREMENT CONTROL • Yellow LED flashing slowly = paused, measurement not
Measurement Sequence: Supports measuring: stored
• at all receiver positions before using another source • Red LED flashing quickly = intermittent overload,
• at a receiver position for all sources before measuring at a calibration failed
new position Calibration
• at subsequent receiver positions without source
information, or Initial calibration is stored for comparison with later
• at manually selected source and receiver positions calibrations
During measurement, the instantaneous sound level ACOUSTIC
spectrum is displayed. After measurement, the Using Sound Calibrator Type 4231 or custom calibrator. The
reverberation time is displayed calibration process automatically detects the calibration
Interrupted Noise Excitation: Measurements are started level when Sound Calibrator Type 4231 is used
manually and can be automatically stored on completion of
measurement ELECTRICAL
The noise generator is turned on and off automatically Uses internally generated electrical signal combined with a
Escape Time: 0 to 60 s typed-in value of microphone sensitivity
Build-up Time: 1 to 10 s CALIBRATION HISTORY
Number of Decays per Measurement: 1 to 100, ensemble Up to 20 of the last calibrations made are listed and can be
averaged into one decay viewed on the analyzer
The generator can be turned on and off manually for
checking equipment and sound levels Signal Monitoring
Serial Measurements: Selected frequency bands can be Input signal A-, C- or Z-weighted can be monitored using an
measured serially, that is, one by one in an automatic earphone/headphones connected to the headphone socket
sequence. This can be done automatically in combination Headphone Signal: Input signal can be monitored using this
with the parallel measurement socket with headphones/earphones
Impulse Excitation: Manual start of first measurement. Gain Adjustment: –60 dB to 60 dB
When level (say from starter pistol) exceeds the user-
selected trigger level, the decay is recorded and backwards Annotations
integration performed (Schroeder method). The trigger can VOICE ANNOTATIONS
then be armed automatically for measuring at the next Voice annotations can be attached to the Reverberation
position Time Project, to Sources, to Receivers and to measurements
Signal Recording: (requires license for Signal Recording at each Position
Option BZ-7226) Recording of the Z-weighted measured Playback: Playback of voice annotations or signal recordings
signal can be done at each position. For data storage, Signal can be listened to using earphone/headphones connected to
Recording requires: the headphone socket
• SD Card: All hardware versions Gain Adjustment: –60 dB to +60 dB
• CF Card: G1 – 3
• USB Memory Stick: G4 TEXT AND IMAGE ANNOTATIONS
Text and image (Type 2270 only) annotations can be
attached to the Reverberation Time Project, to Sources, to
Receivers and to measurements at each Position
CHAPTER 18
221
Specifications
GPS ANNOTATIONS Project: Measurement data for all positions defined in a

A text annotation with GPS information can be attached to room are stored with the Project Template
the project (Latitude, Longitude, Altitude and position Job: Projects are organized in Jobs
error). Requires connection to a GPS receiver Explorer facilities for easy management of data (copy, cut,
paste, delete, rename, open project, create job, set default
Data Management project name)
Project Template: Defines the display and measurement For specifications and details on documenting results in
setups Qualifier Type 7830 and Qualifier Light Type 7831, please
refer to Product Data BP 1691
Software Specifications – 2-channel Option BZ-7229
2-channel Option BZ-7229 is a standard application included Broadband Analysis

with all new Type 2270 analyzers. It adds 2-channel Dynamic Range: From typical noise floor to max. level for a
functionality to Sound Level Meter, Frequency Analysis, 1 kHz pure tone signal, A-weighted:
Logging, Enhanced Logging and Building Acoustics Software • High Range: 28.5 to 140 dB
and to Signal Recording Option on Type 2270 • Low Range: 16.6 to 110 dB
Note: 2-channel Enhanced Logging is not available for Primary Indicator Range: In accordance with IEC 60651, A-
hardware versions 1 – 3. weighted:
Please refer to Product Data BP 2190 for 2-channel Building • High Range: 41.7 dB to 122.3 dB
Acoustics Software specifications • Low Range: 23.5 dB to 92.3 dB
In general the 2-channel option adds an extra channel of Linearity Range: In accordance with IEC 60804, A-weighted:
measurement data. The two channels can have input from • High Range: 39.6 to 140.8 dB
same type of transducers (such as two microphones) or two • Low Range: 21.4 to 110.8 dB
different transducers (such as one microphone and one Linear Operating Range: In accordance with IEC 61672:
accelerometer) • A-weighted: 1 kHz
– High Range: 43.0 dB to 139.7 dB
SELF-GENERATED NOISE LEVEL
Typical values at 23 °C for nominal microphone open-circuit – Low Range: 24.8 dB to 109.7 dB
sensitivity: • C-weighted: 1 kHz
High Range: – Low Range: 25.5 dB to 109.7 dB
Weighting Microphone Electrical Total • Z-weighted: 1 kHz
“A” 14.6 dB 28.3 dB 28.5 dB
– Low Range: 30.6 dB to 109.7 dB
“B” 13.4 dB 26.9 dB 27.1 dB
Peak C Range: In accordance with IEC 61672, 1 kHz:
“C” 13.5 dB 27.0 dB 27.2 dB • High Range: 58.5 dB to 142.7 dB
“Z” 5 Hz–20 kHz 15.3 dB 31.2 dB 31.3 dB • Low Range: 42.3 dB to 112.7 dB
“Z” 3 Hz–20 kHz 15.3 dB 32.1 dB 32.2 dB Frequency Analysis
Low Range: pure tone signal at 1 kHz 1/3-octave:
Weighting Microphone Electrical Total • High Range: 18.5 to 140 dB
“A” 14.6 dB 12.4 dB 16.6 dB • Low Range: 1.3 to 110 dB
“B” 13.4 dB 11.5 dB 15.6 dB • High Range: ≤39.3 to 140 dB
“C” 13.5 dB 12.9 dB 16.2 dB • Low Range: ≤20.6 to 110 dB
“Z” 5 Hz–20 kHz 15.3 dB 18.3 dB 20.1 dB
“Z” 3 Hz–20 kHz 15.3 dB 25.5 dB 25.9 dB Measurements with BZ-7222 and BZ-7223
Two channels, each with all the data from the single channel
MEASURING RANGES measurement, except for common housekeeping
The full level measuring range is covered in two range parameters like Start Time, Elapsed Time, etc. and weather
settings: High Range for the least sensitive range and Low and GPS data.
Range for the most sensitive range
Underrange Detector: Monitors the underrange of all the Broadband Data Stored at Each Logging Interval:
frequency-weighted detectors. Underrange is set if level is All, or up to 10 selectable broadband values from the two
below lower limit of Linear Operating Range. Detectors channels
available for both Ch. 1 and Ch. 2 Spectrum Data Stored at each Logging Interval: All, or up to
four selectable spectra from the two channels (license for
AUTORANGE
BZ-7223 required)
Manual and automatic range controls are provided
2-channel Signal Recording (license for BZ-7226 required):
Spectrum Display (for BZ-7223)
2-channel Signal Recording is available in Sound Level Meter,
Spectra from both channels can be superimposed. Data from
Frequency Analysis, Logging and Enhanced Logging
different transducer types are displayed with individual Y-
Software
axis
The signals from the two channels can be recorded into a
Spectra for Display (microphone input):
“stereo” wave file of either 2 × 24-bit or 2 × 16-bit
• Ch.1 – Ch.2 LXeq
Note: 2 × 24-bit at 48 kHz is not available for hardware
• Ch.2 – Ch.1 LXeq
versions 1 – 3
X = A, B, C or Z
Spectra for Display (accelerometer or direct input): SAMPLING RATE AND PRE-RECORDING FOR 2-CHANNEL
• Ch.1 – Ch.2 Linear RECORDING
• Ch.2 – Ch.1 Linear
Sampling Rate (kHz) 8 16 24 48
Single Values for Display (microphone input):
• Ch.1 – Ch.2 LXeq Maximum G1 – 3 50 20 10 0
• Ch.2 – Ch.1 LXeq Pre-recording (s)
• Ch.1 – Ch.2 LYeq G4 230 110 70 30
16-bit
• Ch.2 – Ch.1 LYeq
Maximum Pre-recording (s) 230 110 70 30
X = A or B. Y = C or Z
16-bit
Single Values for Display (accelerometer or direct input):
• Ch.1 – Ch.2 Linear Maximum G1 – 3 30 10 3 NA
• Ch.2 – Ch.1 Linear Pre-recording (s)
G4 150 70 43 16
• Ch.1 – Ch.2 Linear detector 2 (Acc. input only) 24-bit
• Ch.2 – Ch.1 Linear detector 2 (Acc. input only) Maximum Pre-recording (s) 150 70 43 16
24-bit
Measurements with BZ-7224 and BZ-7225
Fast Logging: Up to a total of four of the 100 ms broadband Memory (KB/s) 16-bit 32 64 96 192
parameters from the two channels can be logged (incl. the Memory (KB/s) 24-bit 48 96 144 288
10 ms parameter for sound input). Up to two 100 ms spectra
from the two channels
Software Specifications – Tone Assessment Option BZ-7231
LICENSE 2: Determination of environmental noise levels. Annex CD

Tone Assessment Option BZ-7231 is a standard application (informative) Objective method for assessing the audibility
included with all new Type 2250/2270 analyzers. The option of tones in noise – ReferenceSimplified method
can be used with the FFT template (BZ-7230) or with 1/3-
SPECTRA ASSESSED
octave and logging template (BZ-7223, BZ-7224 or
Any displayed sound FFT1/3-octave spectrum (FFT, Ref or
BZ-7225)1/3-octave and logging template (BZ-7132 and
MaxLeq) may be assessed
BZ-7133)
Assessment is made as post-processing, that is, when
FFT-based Tone Assessment (with BZ-7230 Only) measurement is paused or stopped
STANDARD SETUP ACCORDING TO STANDARD

Tone assessment is based on the measured FFT spectrum in Setups in violation of the standard are indicated as such on
accordance with ISO 1996:2007 Acoustics – Description, the display, you may then accept to apply the default setup
assessment and measurement of environmental noise – part Tone assessment will be made if possible, in spite of standard
violations. For tone assessment according to ISO 1996–2,
Annex D, you can set the division between the low and
CHAPTER 18
223
Specifications
middle frequency range, the division between the middle 1/3-octave-based Tone Assessment (with
and high frequency range, and the limits for the level BZ-7223/24/25 Only)
differences between adjacent bands Tone assessment is based on the measured 1/3-octave
Tone Seek Criterion: 0.1 to 4.0 dB in 0.1 dB steps spectrum in accordance with either the international
TONE AT CURSOR ‘ISO 1996:2007 Acoustics – Description, assessment and
A sinusoidal tone is available at the headphone output, to measurement of environmental noise – part 2:
help confirm identified tones Determination of environmental noise levels. Annex D
Frequency: The frequency is selected by the main cursor (informative) Objective method for assessing the audibility
Gain: –70 dB to +10 dB of tones in noise – Simplified method’ or the Italian law ‘DM
Options: The generated tone can be mixed with the input 16-03-1998: Ministero dell'ambiente, Decreto 16 marzo
signal 1998’
TONE ASSESSMENT CURSOR SPECTRA ASSESSED
All tones found are indicated in the display. The displayed 1/3-octave spectrum (Leq, Lmax or Lmin) may be
The tone cursor is initially placed at the most prominent assessed. Assessment is made as post-processing, that is,
tone, and can then be stepped through the tones found. when measurement is paused or stopped
You can also use the main cursor to step through the tones SETUP ACCORDING TO STANDARD
RESULTS Setups in violation of the standard are indicated as such on
Results are displayed in the Tone panel and in the Value panel the display. You can then accept to apply the default setup.
They are not saved with the measurement Tone assessment will be made if possible, in spite of standard
All Tones: Frequency, Tone level Lpti, Masking noise level Lpn, violations. For tone assessment according to ISO 1996-2,
Audibility ΔLta, Critical Band CB, Tone vs Noise Level Annex D, you can set the division between the Low and
difference ΔLts, Audibility criterion ΔLts,krit Middle frequency range, the division between the Middle
Most Prominent Tone: Tone Level Lpt, Adjustment Kt and High frequency range, and the limits for the level
differences between adjacent bands.
QUALITY INDICATORS For tone assessment according to DM 16-03-1998, the tones
On the display, a quality indicator (smiley) will indicate that a are tested against loudness contours. Select between
hint is available for tone assessment quality. Click on the ISO 226: 1987 Free-field, 1987 Diffuse-field and 2003 Free-
indicator to see the hint field
RESULTS
Tones are indicated above the spectrum when Tone is
selected as spectrum parameter. The resulting adjustment
can be viewed on the Value panel. It is not saved with the
measurement
Software Specifications – Enhanced Vibration and Low Frequency Option BZ-7234
Enhanced Vibration and Low Frequency Option BZ-7234 is enabled with a separate license. It adds G-weighting and
human vibration parameters, and integration and double integration of the acceleration signal for vibration and
displacement parameters to Sound Level Meter, Frequency Analysis, Logging and Enhanced Logging Software and adds
low frequency 1/1- and 1/3-octave analysis to Frequency Analysis, Logging and Enhanced Logging Software
G-weighting
Specifications for G-weighting apply to Type 2250/2270 Standards
fitted with one of the Microphone Types 4193 or 4964 (both Conforms with the following national and international
with or without the Low-frequency Adaptor UC-0211) and standards:
Microphone Preamplifier ZC-0032 • ISO 7196:1995
• ANSI S1.42–2001 (R2011)
Analysis
Single Range:
DETECTORS
G-weighted (replacing C/Z-weighted) broadband detectors Microphone Low (dB) High (dB)
with one 10 s exponential time weighting, one linearly 4193 41.0 161.0
averaging detector and one peak detector. 4194 + UC-0211 44.1 151.4
MEASUREMENTS 4964 29.6 149.0
Y = time weightings F or S 4964 + UC-0211 32.6 139.3
Spectra for Display and Storage (BZ-7223 required):
LGeq LGSmax LGFmax High Range:
LGSmin LGFmin Microphone Low (dB) High (dB)
4193 41.6 161.0
Spectra for Display Only (BZ-7223 required):
4194 + UC-0211 51.8 151.4
LGS LGF LGYN1
4964 30.3 149.0
LGYN2 LGYN3 LGYN4
4964 + UC-0211 41.7 139.3
LGYN5 LGYN6 LGYN7
Single Values for Display and Storage: Low Range:
LGeq LG10max LG10min Microphone Low (dB) High (dB)
LGpeak TGpeak 4193 41.0 131.0
Single Values for Display Only: 4194 + UC-0211 44.1 147.4
LG10 LGpeak,1s 4964 29.6 119.0
MEASURING RANGES 4964 + UC-0211 32.6 137.3
G-weighted Linear Operating Range at G-filter reference
frequency 10 Hz
General Vibration
Specifications for general vibration parameters apply to Analysis
Type 2250/2270 fitted with an accelerometer
DETECTORS
Analysis Addition to the Acc Linear and Acc 1k – 20 kHz settings for
Conforms with the following International standards: the two broadband detectors:
• ISO 2954 Vel 3 – 20 000 Hz Vel 0.3 – 1000 Hz Vel 10 – 1000 Hz
• ISO 10816 series Vel 1 – 100 Hz Dis 10 – 1000 Hz Dis 30 – 300 Hz
Dis 1 – 100 Hz
The weighting for the peak detector can be set to one of the
settings chosen for the broadband detectors or Acc Linear
The weighting for the spectrum detectors can be set to Acc
Linear or Vel 3 – 20000 Hz, Vel 0.3 – 1000 Hz, Vel
10 – 1000 Hz or Vel 1 – 100 Hz
Single Values for Display and Storage: Peak-Peak for
displacement
Human Vibration
Specifications for Human Vibration parameters apply to
Type 2250/2270 fitted with an accelerometer.
CHAPTER 18
225
Specifications
Standards Wmb is the band limiting part of Wm. Whb is the band limiting
Conforms with the following International Standards: part of Wh and Wxb is the band limiting part of Wb, Wc, Wd,
• ISO 8041:2005 We, Wj and Wk
• ISO 5349–1 The weighting for the peak detector can be set to one of the
• ISO 2631 series settings chosen for the broadband detectors or Acc Linear.
• DIN 45669-1:2010–09 The weighting for the spectrum detectors can be set to Acc
Linear or Vel 0.3 – 1000 Hz or Vel 1 – 100 Hz
Analysis MEASUREMENTS
DETECTORS Single Values for Display and Storage:
Two broadband detectors can each be set to one of the
MTVV KBFmax KBFTm
weightings:
Peak-Peak
Acc Linear Vel 0.3 – 1000 Hz Vel 1 – 100 Hz
Wb Wc Wd Single Values for Display Only:
We Wj Wh aW,1s KBF
Wk Wm Wxb
Whb Wmb
Low Frequency 1/1- and 1/3-octave Analysis

Frequency Analysis Sound Measurements
CENTRE FREQUENCIES Low-frequency sound measurements require use of a low-
1/1-oct. Band Centre Frequencies: 1 Hz to 16 kHz frequency microphone. This can be Type 4193 or Type 4964,
1/3-oct. Band Centre Frequencies: 0.8 Hz to 20 kHz both together with Low-frequency Adapter UC-0211
Standards Vibration Measurements

Conforms with the following National and International Brüel & Kjær recommends Low-level Accelerometer
Standards: Type 8344 for low-frequency vibration measurements
• IEC 61260–1 (2014), 1/1-octave Bands and 1/3-octave
Bands, Class 1
• IEC 61260 (1995–07) plus Amendment 1 (2001–09),
1/1-octave Bands and 1/3-octave Bands, Class 0
Bands, Order 3, Type 0–C
Bands, Class 0
• ANSI/ASA S1.11–2014 Part 1, 1/1-octave Bands and
1/3-octave Bands, Class 1
Specifications – Measurement Partner Suite BZ-5503
BZ-5503 is included with Types 2250 and 2270 for easy Recommended PC:
synchronization of setups and data between the PC and • Intel® Core™ i3
hand-held analyzer. BZ-5503 is supplied on ENV DVD BZ-5298 • Microsoft®.NET 4.5
• 2 GB of memory
PC REQUIREMENTS
• Sound card
Operating System: Windows® 7, 8.1 or 10 (all in 32-bit or 64-
• DVD drive
bit versions)
• At least one available USB port
• Solid State Drive
ONLINE DISPLAY OF TYPE 2250/2270 DATA PC and displayed online with the PC, using the same user
Measurements on the analyzer can be controlled from the interface on the PC as on the analyzer
Display: 1024 × 768 (1280 × 800 recommended) POST-PROCESSING

Measurement Partner Suite is a suite of modules, including
DATA MANAGEMENT
post-processing tools for data acquired with Type2250/2270.
Explorer: Facilities for easy management of analyzers, users,
The following post-processing modules are available:
jobs, projects and project templates (copy, cut, paste, delete,
• Logging Module BZ-5503-A
rename, create)
• Spectrum Module BZ-5503-B
Data Viewer: View measurement data (content of projects)
• WAV File Analysis Module BZ-5503-C
Synchronization: Project templates and projects for a
These modules help to assess logging data and measured
specific user can be synchronized between PC and analyzer
spectra, such as calculating contribution from markers on a
and between local and cloud archives. Measurement
logging profile or correcting spectra for background noise
Partner Suite BZ-5503 merges Measurement Partner Field
App annotations with the corresponding analyzer project HAND-HELD ANALYZER SOFTWARE UPGRADES AND
LICENSES
USERS
The software controls analyzer software upgrades and
Users of Type 2250/2270 can be created or deleted
licensing of the analyzer applications
EXPORT FACILITIES
INTERFACE TO HAND-HELD ANALYZER
Excel®: Projects (or user-specified parts) can be exported to
USB, LAN or Internet connection
Microsoft® Excel® (Excel 2003 – 2016 supported)
Brüel & Kjær Software: Projects can be exported* to LICENSE MOVER
Predictor-LimA Type 7810, Acoustic Determinator To move a license from one analyzer to another use BZ-5503
Type 7816, Protector Type 7825, Qualifier (Light) Type 7830 together with License Mover VP-0647
(7831), PULSE Mapping for Hand-held Sound Intensity
LANGUAGE
Type 7962/7752/7761 or PULSE Reflex
User Interface in Chinese (People’s Republic of China),
Chinese (Taiwan), Croatian, Czech, Danish, English, Flemish,
French, German, Hungarian, Japanese, Italian, Korean,
Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Slovenian,
Spanish, Swedish, Turkish and Ukrainian
* Not all data are available in all exports. The data exported are HELP
dependent on the type and target of the export. Concise context-sensitive help in English
Ordering Information
Type 2250-S Hand-held analyzer INCLUDED ACCESSORIES

Type 2270-S 2-channel hand-held analyzer • FB-0679: Hinged Cover (Type 2250 only)
Type 2250-S-C Hand-held analyzer with Sound • FB-0699: Hinged Cover (Type 2270 only)
Calibrator Type 4231 • QB-0061: Battery Pack
Type 2270-S-C 2-channel hand-held analyzer with • ZG-0426: Mains Power Supply
Sound Calibrator Type 4231 • UA-1650: 90 mm dia. Windscreen with AutoDetect
which include the following as standard: • Compulsory Accessory Kit UA-1710-D01 including:
– KE-0441: Protective Cover, for hand-held analyzer
INCLUDED SOFTWARE
• BZ-7222: Sound Level Meter Software – UL-1050: Wireless USB-A (M) Adapter
• BZ-7223: Frequency Analysis Software – UA-1651: Tripod Extension, for hand-held analyzer
• BZ-7231: Tone Assessment Option – UA-1654: 5 Extra Styli
• BZ-7232: Noise Monitoring Software – UA-1673: Adaptor for Standard Tripod Mount
• BZ-7229: 2-channel Option (Type 2270 only) – DH-0696: Wrist Strap
INCLUDED MICROPHONE AND PREAMPLIFIER – DD-0594: Protection Plug, for hand-held analyzer
• Type 4189: ½″ Prepolarized Free-field Microphone without Preamplifier
or – AO-1494: Cable, USB 2.0, USB-A (M) to USB-micro-B
• Type 4190: ½″ Free-field Microphone (M) black, 1.8 m (5.9′), max. +70 °C (158 °F)
or – BZ-5298: Environmental Software DVD
• Type 4966: ½″ Free-field Microphone Note: These accessories are also available separately
• ZC-0032: Microphone Preamplifier
CHAPTER 18
227
Specifications
Analyzer Alone UL-1019 CF WLAN Card for hand-held analyzers

To purchase a hand-held analyzer without microphone or for hardware versions 1 – 3
preamplifier order: UL-0250 USB to RS–232 Converter for hardware
Type 2250-W Hand-held Analyzer for vibration version 4
measurements CALIBRATION
Type 2270-W 2-channel Hand-held Analyzer for Type 4231 Sound Calibrator (fits in KE-0440)
vibration measurements Type 4226 Multifunction Acoustic Calibrator
Type 4228 Pistonphone
Software and Accessories Available Separately Type 4294 Calibration Exciter
SOFTWARE MODULES Type 4294-002 Calibration Exciter for Type 8344
BZ-7224 Logging Software (including memory TRANSDUCERS
card) Type 4964 Low-frequency Microphone
BZ-7225 Enhanced Logging Software (including Type 8344 Low-level Accelerometer
memory card)
BZ-7225-UPG Upgrade from Logging Software CABLES
BZ-7224 to Enhanced Logging Software AO-0440-D-015 Signal Cable, LEMO to BNC Male, 1.5 m
BZ-7225 (does not include memory (5′)
card) AO-0646 Sound Cable, LEMO to Minijack, 1.5 m
BZ-7226 Signal Recording Option (5′)
BZ-7227 Reverberation Time Software AO-0697-D-030 Microphone Extension Cable, 10-pin
BZ-7228 Building Acoustics Software LEMO, 3 m (10′)
BZ-7230 FFT Software AO-0697-D-100 Microphone Extension Cable, 10-pin
BZ-7233 Sound Intensity Software (Type 2270 LEMO, 10 m (33′)
only) AO-0701-D-030 Accelerometer Cable, LEMO to M3, 3 m
BZ-7234 Enhanced Vibration and Low (10′)
Frequency Option AO-0702-D-030 Accelerometer Cable, LEMO to 10 – 32
UNF, 3 m (10′)
PC SOFTWARE AO-0722-D-050 Accelerometer cable, LEMO to
BZ-5503-A Measurement Partner, Logging Module MIL-C-5015, 5 m (16′)
(see product data BP 2430) AO-0726-D-030 Signal Cable, LEMO to SMB (for Tacho
BZ-5503-B Measurement Partner, Spectrum Probe MM-0360/2981), 3 m (10′)
Module (see product data BP 2430) AO-0727-D-010 Signal Cable, LEMO to BNC Female, 1 m
BZ-5503-C Measurement Partner, WAV File (3.3′)
Analysis Module (see product data AO-0727-D-015 Signal Cable, LEMO to BNC Female,
BP 2430) 1.5 m (5′)
BZ-5503-D Measurement Partner Field App for iOS
and Android (free download at App MISCELLANEOUS
Store® and Google Play™) Type 3535-A All-weather Case (see product data
BZ-5503-E Measurement Partner Cloud Entry BP 2251)
Level, free cloud storage JP-1041 Dual 10-pole Adapter
BZ-5503-F-012 Measurement Partner Cloud Basic, KE-0440 Travel Bag
basic cloud storage subscription for UA-0587 Tripod
one year UA-0801 Small Tripod
BZ-5503-G-012 Measurement Partner Cloud UA-0588 Tripod Adaptor for ½″ microphone/
Professional, enterprise cloud storage preamplifier assemblies
subscription for one year UA-1317 Microphone Holder
Type 7825 Protector™ – software for calculation UA-1404 Outdoor Microphone Kit
of personal noise exposure UA-1672 AutoDetect Insert for UA-1650
Type 7831 Qualifier Light (post-processing) UC-0211 Low-frequency Adapter
Type 7830 Qualifier (post-processing) UL-1009 SD Memory Card for hand-held
analyzers
INTERFACING UL-1013 CF Memory Card for hand-held
UL-1016 10/100 Ethernet CF Card for hardware analyzers, for hardware versions 1 – 3
versions 1 – 3 UL-1017 SDHC Memory Card for hand-held
analyzers
ZG-0444 Charger for QB-0061 Battery Pack AO-0523-D-100 Cable, from Type 2250/2270 to power
MM-0256-A Weather Station Kit amplifier, 10 m (33 ft)
MM-0316-A Weather Station Kit AO-0524-D-100 Cable from Type 2250/2270 to
Included with MM-0256-A or MM-0316-A: Type 4224, 10 m (33 ft)
• MM-0256-002: Six-parameter Weather Station (and AQ-0673 Cable, from power amplifier to sound
mounting kit) source, 10 m (33 ft)
• MM-0316-002: Two-parameter Weather Station (and UA-1476 Wireless Remote Control
mounting kit) For more information on these accessories, see product data
• AO-0657: USB Cable BP 2190
• AO-0659: Cable M12 8-pin (F) to LEMO 1-B 8-pin (M), 10 m
(33.3′) Service Products
• BR 1779: Weather Station Field Guide MAINTENANCE
• DB-4364: Weather Station Pole Adapter 2250-EW1 Extended Warranty, one year extension
• KE-4334: Weather Station Carrying Case 2270-EW1 Extended Warranty, one year extension
• QX-0016: Screwdriver
• QX-1171: 2.5 mm Hex Wrench ACCREDITED CALIBRATION
• UA-1707-A: Weather Station Tripod Adaptor 2250-CAI Accredited Initial Calibration of
• ZH-0689: Weather Station USB Adaptor Type 2250
2250-CAF Accredited Calibration of Type 2250
BUILDING ACOUSTICS AND REVERBERATION TIME 2250-CTF Traceable Calibration of Type 2250
ACCESSORIES 2250-TCF Conformance Test of Type 2250, with
Type 2734-A Power Amplifier certificate
Type 2734-B Power Amplifier with built-in UL-0256 2270-CAI Accredited Initial Calibration of
Wireless Audio System Type 2270
UL-0256 Wireless Audio System 2270-CAF Accredited Calibration of Type 2270
Type 4292-L OmniPower Sound Source 2270-CTF Traceable Calibration of Type 2270
KE-0449 Flight Case for Type 4292-L 2270-TCF Conformance Test of Type 2270, with
KE-0364 Tripod Carrying Case for Type 4292-L certificate
Type 4295 Omnidirectional Sound Source
KE-0392 Carrying Case for Type 4295
CHAPTER 18
229
Specifications
Compliance with Environmental Standards
The CE marking is the manufacturer's declaration that the product meets the requirements of the
applicable EU directives
RCM mark indicates compliance with applicable ACMA technical standards – that is, for
telecommunications, radio communications, EMC and EME
China RoHS mark indicates compliance with administrative measures on the control of pollution caused by
electronic information products according to the Ministry of Information Industries of the People’s
Republic of China
WEEE mark indicates compliance with the EU WEEE Directive
Safety EN/IEC 61010– 1, ANSI/UL 61010–1 and CSA C22.2 No.1010.1: Safety requirements for electrical
equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use
EMC Emission EN/IEC 61000–6–3: Generic emission standard for residential, commercial and light industrial
environments
EN/IEC 61326: Electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use – EMC requirements
CISPR 22: Radio disturbance characteristics of information technology equipment. Class B Limits
IEC 61672–1, IEC 61260, IEC 60651 and IEC 60804: Instrumentation standards
Note: The above is only guaranteed using accessories listed in this document
EMC Immunity EN/IEC 61000–6–2: Generic standard – Immunity for industrial environments
EN/IEC 61326: Electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use – EMC requirements
IEC 61672–1, IEC 61260, IEC 60651 and IEC 60804: Instrumentation standards
Note: The above is only guaranteed using accessories listed in this document
Temperature IEC 60068–2–1 & IEC 60068–2–2: Environmental Testing.
Cold and Dry Heat
Operating Temperature: –10 to +50 °C (14 to 122 °F)
Storage Temperature: –25 to +70 °C (–13 to 158 °F)
Humidity IEC 60068–2–78: Damp Heat: 93% RH (non-condensing at +40 °C (104 °F)). Recovery time 2 ∼ 4 hours
Mechanical Non-operating:
IEC 60068–2–6: Vibration: 0.3 mm, 20 m/s2, 10 – 500 Hz
IEC 60068–2–27: Bump: 1000 bumps at 400 m/s2
IEC 60068–2–27: Shock: 1000 m/s2, 6 directions
Enclosure IEC 60529 (1989): Protection provided by enclosures: IP 44*
* With preamplifier, extension cable or protection plug connected to the top socket and the hinged cover protecting the bottom connectors.
ADDITIONAL STANDARDS FOR MICRO USB WIRELESS FCC GRANT OF EQUIPMENT AUTHORIZATION FOR
ADAPTOR UL-1050* MICRO USB WIRELESS ADAPTOR UL-1050*
Safety EN 60950–1:2006+A11:2009+A1:2010 FCC Identifier KA2WA121A1
+A12:2011 FCC Rule Parts 15c
EMC Emission EN 301 489–1 V1.9.2 Frequency 2412.0 – 2462.0
EN 301 489–17 V2.2.1 Range (MHz)
EN 55022: 2010+AC:2011 Output Watts 0.269
Spectrum & EN 300 328 V1.7.1 EC Declaration 1Tx1R 802.11bgn USB adapter
Health EN 62311:2008 of Conformity
Restriction of EN 50581:2012 C-Tick AS/NZS 4268: 2008+A1:2010
Hazardous Authorization
Substances
* From the D-Link Corporation declaration of conformance for Wireless N 150 Micro USB Adaptor DWA-121.
231
Appendix A
Setup Parameters
This appendix describes all the setup parameters included in a template.

For 2-channel setup, some parameters are doubled – one for Ch.1 and one for Ch.2 (Type 2270
only).
A.1 Input
Table A.1 Input parameters
Parameter Values Comment
Input Channel Ch. 1 Determines whether Input Ch. 1 or Input Ch. 2 is used for the
measurement.
Ch. 2 (Available in Type 2270 1-channel templates only)
Loudness* Free-field Determines whether Loudness and Loudness Level are

calculated based on Free-field or Diffuse-field conditions.
Diffuse-field Set to Auto to follow the setting of Sound Field Correction.
For an unknown microphone type, you can set Loudness to
Auto the condition matching your request.
Available for microphone input only
Trigger Input† None This parameter should be set to match the equipment
connected to the Trigger Input socket on the connector
MATRON panel of the analyzer.
Handswitch
Set it to None , if not used.
Voltage Level
Set Trigger Input to MATRON Handswitch if the analyzer is
Voltage for being used in the MATRON system. This setting should also
Monitoring be used if you want to use the Handswitch ZH-0680 for
manually triggering signal recordings.
✐Please note: This can only be used together with

analyzers with serial numbers above 2479652.
Set Trigger Input to Voltage Level if you want to control

signal recording by a voltage level generated by external
equipment. The Voltage Level should generate at least 2 V
for On and less than 1 V for Off. The duration of the steady
level should be at least 1 s, so it can be recognized by the
analyzer
Set Trigger Input to Voltage for Monitoring if you want to

monitor the voltage at this input. This setting can be used
together with Notifications – see section 8.4. This setting
cannot be combined with MATRON Handswitch or Voltage
Level
APPENDIX A
233
Setup Parameters
Table A.1 (Cont.) Input parameters
Label Up to four Labels for the channels:

characters Leftmost is for Channel 1 (default set to Ch.1 )
Rightmost for Channel 2 (default set to Ch.2 ).
(Available in Type 2270 2-channel templates only)
Input Top Socket Determines whether the input is taken from the Top socket
or the Rear socket ('Input' on connector panel). Connect
Rear Socket your transducer to this socket
✐Please note: Sound Field and Windscreen corrections

can be added to both the Top Socket and the Rear Socket
(Input parameters). However, be careful that you do not add
a 'double' correction – for instance, if you have recorded the
signal from the Output socket on a tape recorder, and later
want to re-analyse the recording via the Rear socket. In this
case you should set Microphone Type to Unknown on the
Transducer menu for the used transducer, when using Rear
Socket Input
Sound Field Correction Free-field Select a correction matching the sound field of your
measurements, that is, you can make correct measurements
Diffuse-field in a diffuse-field using a Type 4189 or 4190 free-field
microphone, by selecting Diffuse-field correction. Even
Pressure-field Free-field correction of a free-field microphone will enhance
the overall frequency response of the system. Generally, ISO
requires free-field conditions and ANSI requires diffuse-
field conditions. Check your local standards for the setting
you require. Pressure-field is available for Type 4192 only.
No correction is made for unknown transducers.
Available for Microphone input only.
Windscreen Auto Detect On Automatic detection of Windscreen UA-1650 when

mounted on Microphone Preamplifier ZC-0032. The
Off preamplifier should be connected to the top socket, if
necessary using a microphone extension cable. This
parameter is available for microphone types using ZC-0032
only
Windscreen Correction None If Windscreen Auto Detect is set to Off , you can manually
select a windscreen correction suitable for the windscreen in
UA-1650 use. Correction is automatically made for the windscreen on
Types 4952 and 4184-A. No correction is made for unknown
UA-1404 transducers.
Available for Microphone input only.
Table A.1 (Cont.) Input parameters
Range Setting Low Range Select Low Range or High Range for input channels.
High Range
✐Please note: High Range will select a range with 0 dB
gain, which allows the highest possible input.
Low Range will select a range with 30 dB gain.
(available in Type 2270 2-channel templates only)

† Not available in Reverberation Time Software BZ-7227
APPENDIX A
235
Setup Parameters
A.2 Frequency Settings

Table A.2 Frequency setting parameters*
Vibration Filters General (Accelerometer input only) Set to General for general
vibration measurements. When Enhanced Vibration and
Human Vibration Low Frequency Option BZ-7234 is present you can select
Velocity and Displacement filters for the broadband
detectors.
Set to Human Vibration (requires Enhanced Vibration and

Low Frequency Option BZ-7234) for selecting human
vibration filters for the broadband detectors.
Low Frequency* Normal Use this parameter to extend the low frequency of the
broadband measurements and the frequency analysis.
Extended However, be aware that the measurements will be more
sensitive to very low frequency noise such as wind noise.
Very Low
Low Frequency = Normal :

Frequency analysis*:
1/1-octave: 16 Hz – 16 kHz
1/3-octave: 12.5 Hz – 20 kHz
Low Frequency = Extended :

Frequency analysis†:
1/3-octave: 6.3 Hz – 20 kHz
Low Frequency = Very Low :

Frequency analysis*:
1/3-octave: 0.8 Hz – 20 kHz
(Requires Enhanced Vibration and Low-frequency Option
BZ-7234)
For microphone input, this setting is only possible for
microphone Types 4193 and 4964 possibly with Low-
frequency Adaptor UC-0211
Table A.2 (Cont.) Frequency setting parameters*
Broadband (excl. Peak) Microphone: All broadband parameters (except Lpeak) are measured
A,Z simultaneously with two different frequency weightings –
A,C select the weightings for Microphone and Direct Input here
B,Z
B,C
The G setting is available for Low Frequency = Extended or
A,G
Very Low
Requires Enhanced Vibration and Low-frequency Option
Direct:
Linear BZ-7234
Broadband Peak Microphone: One broadband peak parameter Lpeak is measured.

X
C Select the frequency weighting for Microphone or Direct
Z input here.
G
Accelerometer:
✐Please note: X = frequency weighting A or B. ‘A’ requires
that the Broadband (excl. Peak) parameter is set to AC or
General Vibration:
AZ. ‘ B’ requires that the Broadband (excl. Peak) parameter
Acc Linear
Acc 1 – 20 kHz is set to BC or BZ .
Vel 3 – 20000 Hz
Vel 0.3 – 1000 Hz The G setting is available for Low Frequency = Extended or
Vel 10 – 1000 Hz Very Low.
Vel 1 – 100 Hz Requires Enhanced Vibration and Low-frequency Option
Dis 10 – 1000 Hz BZ-7234
Dis 3 – 300 Hz
Dis 1 – 100 Hz
Accelerometer:
All settings, except Acc Linear and Acc 1k – 20kHz , requires
Human Vibration:
Acc Linear Enhanced Vibration and Low-frequency Option BZ-7234.
Vel 0.3 – 1000 Hz
Vel 1 – 100 Hz The setting must be one of the chosen settings for
Wm Broadband Detector 1 or Broadband Detector 2 – or the
Wb setting Acc Linear
Wc
Wd
We
Wj
Wk
Wh
Wmb
Wxb
Whb
Direct:
Linear
APPENDIX A
237
Setup Parameters
Broadband Detector 1 General Vibration: All broadband parameters (except Peak , Peak-Peak and
Acc Linear Crest Factor ) are measured simultaneously with two
Acc 1 – 20 kHz different frequency weightings – select the weighting for
Vel 3 – 20000 Hz the first detector here (Accelerometer input only)
Vel 0.3 – 1000 Hz
Vel 10 – 1000 Hz
Vel 1 – 100 Hz
Human Vibration: All settings, except Acc Linear and Acc 1k – 20kHz , require
Acc Linear Enhanced Vibration and Low-frequency Option BZ-7234
Vel 0.3 – 1000 Hz
Vel 1 – 100 Hz
Wmb
Wxb
Whb
Wm
Broadband Detector 2 General Vibration: All broadband parameters (except Peak , Peak-Peak and
Acc Linear Crest Factor ) are measured simultaneously with two
Acc 1 – 20 kHz different frequency weightings – select the weighting for
Vel 3 – 20000 Hz the second detector here (Accelerometer input only)
Vel 0.3 – 1000 Hz
Vel 10 – 1000 Hz
Vel 1 – 100 Hz All settings, except Acc Linear and Acc 1k – 20kHz , require
Dis 10 – 1000 Hz Enhanced Vibration and Low-frequency Option BZ-7234
Dis 3 – 300 Hz
Dis 1 – 100 Hz
Human Vibration:
Acc Linear
Vel 0.3 – 1000 Hz
Vel 1 – 100 Hz
Wm
Wb
Wc
Wd
We
Wj
Wk
Wh

†
Spectrum Microphone: The frequency analysis (1/1-octave or 1/3-octave) will be
X frequency weighted in accordance with this parameter
C Note: X = frequency weighting A or B. ‘A’ requires that the
Z Broadband (excl. Peak) parameter is set to AC or AZ. ‘B’
G
requires that the Broadband (excl. Peak) parameter is set
to BC or BZ .
Accelerometer:
Acc Linear
Vel 3 – 20000 Hz The G setting is available for Low Frequency = Extended or
Vel 0.3 – 1000 Hz Very Low
Vel 10 – 1000 Hz Requires Enhanced Vibration and Low-frequency Option
Vel 1 – 100 Hz BZ-7234
Direct:
Linear
Bandwidth‡ 1/1-octave Bandwidth of frequency analysis
1/3-octave
Bottom F. for Special 0.8 Hz to 1/1-octave: 1 Hz – 16 kHz

Leq**,†† Top Frequency 1/3-octave: 0.8 Hz – 20 kHz
✐Please note: The lower limit of the parameter depends

on Low Frequency
Top Freq. for Special Bottom Frequency 1/1-octave: 1 Hz – 16 kHz

Leq†,‡‡ to 20 kHz 1/3-octave: 0.8 Hz – 20 kHz
* Not available in Reverberation Time Software BZ-7227.

† Requires Frequency Analysis Software BZ-7223.
‡ Requires Frequency Analysis Software BZ-7223 or Reverberation Time Software BZ-7227.
** For BZ-7223, BZ-7224 and BZ-7225 only.
†† Bottom F. for Special Leq is f1 in the parameter LXeq(f1 – f2)
‡‡ Top F. for Special Leq is f2 in the parameter LXeq(f1 – f2)
APPENDIX A
239
Setup Parameters
A.3 Statistics
Table A.3 Statistics parameters (available for microphone input only)*
Broadband Statistics L Xeq The broadband statistics are based on sampling the
based on broadband parameter LXF or LXS each 10 ms or LXeq each
L XF second.
L XS
✐Please note: X = frequency weighting A or B. ‘A’ requires
that the Broadband (excl. Peak) parameter is set to AC or
AZ. ‘B’ requires that the Broadband (excl. Peak) parameter
is set to BC or BZ
Spectral Statistics based LXF The statistics are based on sampling the instantaneous
on† spectrum every 100 ms (200 ms for Low Frequency set to
LXS On). The time weighting for the spectrum is either F or S. The
frequency weighting X is determined by Frequency
Settings > Spectrum Weighting
Percentile N1 0.1 to 99.9 User-defined percentile level where the value of LXN1 is
exceeded for N1% of the elapsed time
* Not available in Reverberation Time Software BZ-7227.

† Requires Frequency Analysis Software BZ-7223.
The Percentile levels N1 to N7 are common to broadband and spectral statistics, and can be
changed after the measurement has been done.
A.4 Measurement Control – for BZ-7222 to BZ-7225

Table A.4 Measurement Control parameters – for BZ-7222 to BZ-7225
Measurement Mode * Manual Determines whether the measurement is under Manual

control (fully controlled by the Reset and Start/Pause
Automatic pushbuttons), or Automatic control (start of measurement
controlled by the Reset and Start/Pause pushbuttons, end
of measurement automatically controlled by the analyzer
when preset time has elapsed)
Preset Time * 00:00:01 to Fixes the duration of a measurement from start to automatic
24:00:00 stop (in hours, minutes and seconds). Any pauses made
during the measurement via the Start/Pause pushbutton
are not counted in the preset time
Save Project Data at † 00:00:00 to Determines the time for automatic save of the project and
23:59:59 start of a new project
Continuous Logging † On Determines whether the logging will run continuously, or

for a time set by Preset Logging Time
Off
‡
Preset Logging Time 0.00:00:01 to Fixes the duration of a measurement from start to automatic
31.00:00:00 stop (in days, hours, minutes and seconds)
Logging Period ‡ 00:00:01 to Sets the period of the logging (in hours, minutes and
24:00:00 seconds)
Report Period † 00:01:00 to Sets the period of the reports (in hours and minutes)
24:00:00
Full Spectral Stat. for Yes Determines whether the full spectral statistics are logged in
Reports † the report or not.
No Available for microphone input only
APPENDIX A
241
Setup Parameters
Table A.4 (Cont.) Measurement Control parameters – for BZ-7222 to BZ-7225

‡
Synchronize with Clock Yes Select Yes to synchronize the logging and reporting
intervals with whole minutes or hours, for example, if
No Logging Period is set to 00:01:00 (1 minute) and Report
Period is set to 01:00:00 and you start the measurement at
8:12:33, then the first logging interval will be from 8:12:33 to
8:12:59 (27 seconds), the second will be from 8:13:00 to
8:13:59 (60 seconds), etc., and the first Report interval will be
from 8:12:33 to 8:59:59 (48 min and 27 seconds), the second
will be from 9:00:00 to 9:59:59 (1 hour), etc.
Select No if you want every logging and reporting interval to

be exactly the specified Logging Period
T for LXeq,T,mov 00:01:00 to Sets the averaging time T (in minutes) of the moving LAeq
01:00:00 and moving LCeq. When the averaging time T has elapsed
the LAeq,T,mov and LCeq,T,mov parameters will contain the
LAeq and LCeq of the latest T minutes – updated every
second. in addition, you also have ΔLeq,T,mov = LCeq,T,mov –
LAeq,T,mov. The LXeq,T,mov is not stored with the total data,
but can be logged (BZ-7224 and BZ-7225). The
LAeq,T,mov,max, LCeq,T,mov,max and the difference between the
C- and A-weighted values for the complete measurement
period are stored.
✐Please note: There are two sets of these parameters,

allowing two simultaneous moving averages: for example,
one with 15 min averaging time and one with 1 hour
averaging time
Charge Injection On Set to On for making a CIC at the start and end of Logging.
Calibration ‡ An Exclude marker is set on the profile and Total parameters
Off are not updated during the CIC.
Daily CIC † None Determines whether CID is performed one to four times a
day or not at all. An Exclude marker is set on the profile and
Once Periodic Reports and Total parameters are not updated
during the calibration. The results are saved together with
Twice
the Total parameters.
Three times Available for microphone input only
Four times
Table A.4 (Cont.) Measurement Control parameters – for BZ-7222 to BZ-7225

†
First Check 00:00:00 to Set time of day for first CIC check.
23:59:59
✐Please note: The Check times must be separated from
each other by at least one minute. They should also differ by
at least one minute from the time set in the Save Project
Data at parameter.
Second Check † 00:00:00 to Set time of day for second CIC check.
23:59:59 Available for microphone input only.
Third Check † 00:00:00 to Set time of day for third CIC check.
Fourth Check † 00:00:00 to Set time of day for fourth CIC check.
* For Sound Level Meter BZ-7222 and Frequency Analyzer BZ-7223 templates only.
† For Enhanced Logging BZ-7225 templates only.
‡ For Logging BZ-7224 and Enhanced Logging BZ-7225 templates only.
APPENDIX A
243
Setup Parameters
A.5 Measurement Control – for Reverberation Time Software BZ-7227

Table A.5 Measurement Control parameters – for Reverberation Time Software BZ-7227
Map Based No If Map Based Measurement = Yes you can define the
Measurement source positions and receiver positions graphically on a
Yes map – otherwise the measurements are just numbered
from position number one (Pos 1) onwards
Meas. All Pos. for Each No Parameter only available if Map Based Measurement =
Source Yes.
Yes
Set to Yes for measuring all positions for each source
position.
Set to No for measuring a specific number of receiver

positions per source position
No. of Positions per 1 to 10 Parameter only available if Meas. All Pos. for Each Source
Source = No
Set number of receiver positions you want to measure per
source
Increment Sources First Parameter only available if Map Based Measurement =

Yes.
Receivers First Allows you to select the quickest method of measurement,
when positioning your analyzer in relation to source and
Manual
receiver positions. (Typically, Sources First is best for
Impulsive Excitation and Receivers First is best for
Interrupted Noise excitation)
Automatic Save No Set to Yes to automatically save the decay after each
measurement
Yes
Max. Decay Time 1 to 30 s Sets the maximum duration of the decay measurement. If
the decay finishes in a shorter time, decay measurement
stops automatically.
✐Please note: If you set Max. Decay Time above 20 s, then

the measurement will not stop before this time has elapsed
Table A.5 (Cont.) Measurement Control parameters – for Reverberation Time Software BZ-7227
Excitation Impulsive Select Impulsive to excite the room with an impulse. The
analyzer triggers on the impulse, measures the impulse as a
Interrupted Noise sequence of spectra with 5 ms intervals, and finally
backwardly integrates the measurements to decay curves.
Select Interrupted Noise to excite the room with noise,

interrupt the noise and measure the decays – all controlled
by the analyzer
Number of Decays 1 to 99 Parameter only available if Excitation = Interrupted Noise.

Specify the number of decays to be measured automatically
and averaged together per position
Trigger Level 0 to 200 dB Parameter only available if Excitation = Impulsive.

Specify the trigger level for the sound level in any frequency
band – the measurement starts as soon as this level is
exceeded. The measurement has a pre-trigger of 1 s
Trigger Repeat Off Set to On to start a new measurement automatically, after

saving the previous measurement (and after fulfilling the
On trigger conditions).
Parameter only available if Excitation = Impulsive and =
Yes
Measurement Mode Parallel Parallel measures all bands in the spectrum simultaneously,
Serial measures selected bands, and Combined first
Serial measures Parallel and then Serial in an automated sequence
Combined
APPENDIX A
245
Setup Parameters
A.6 Logged (10/100 ms)

Table A.6 Logged (10/100 ms) parameters*
BB Parameter 1 to Broadband: The selected parameter(s) will be logged every 100 ms,
BB Parameter 3 LAeq, except LAF(10ms) , which will be logged every 10 ms. LAeq
Spectrum Parameter LAF, or Linear will have an averaging time of 100 ms.
LAF(10ms)
LAS,
Off
✐Please note: LAF(10 ms) and the spectrum parameter
cannot be displayed by the instrument – use BZ-5503 MPS
to display this parameter
Accelerometer or
Direct:
Linear, ✐Please note: For single-channel templates: three
Fast Inst, broadband parameters and one spectrum parameter will be
Slow Inst, available; for 2-channel templates: four broadband
Off parameters and two spectrum parameters will be available
Spectrum:
LXeq,
LXF,
LXS,
Off
* For Logging (BZ-7224) and Enhanced Logging (BZ-7225) templates only.
A.7 Logged Broadband

Table A.7 Logged Broadband parameters*
Full Statistics Yes Determines whether the full broadband statistics are
logged or not
No Available for microphone input only
Broadband Parameters All Determines whether All broadband parameters are

logged or a Selected part is logged (up to 10
Selected parameters for microphone input, otherwise up to 5
parameters)
Table A.7 (Cont.) Logged Broadband parameters*
Parameter 1 to Microphone: This parameter can be set if Broadband Parameters

Parameter 10 LXeq = Selected
LYeq
LCeq–LAeq X = frequency weightings A or B (controlled by
LAeq,T1,mov Setup > Frequency Settings > BB (ex. peak)
LAeq,T2,mov parameter)
LCeq,T1,mov
LCeq,T2,mov
Y = frequency weightings C or Z (controlled by
DLeq,T1,mov
DLeq,T2,mov Setup > Frequency Settings > BB (ex. peak)
LGeq parameter)
LG10max
LG10min V = frequency weightings A, B, C or Z (controlled by
LXE Setup > Frequency Settings > BB Peak parameter)
LYE
LVpeak
U = time weightings F or S (controlled by
LXFmax
LXSmax Setup > Occupational Health > Time Weighting
LXImax for Lav parameter)
LYFmax
LYSmax Q = exchange rate 4, 5 or 6 dB (controlled by
LYImax Setup > Occupational Health > Exchange Rate for
LXFmin Lav parameter)
LXSmin
LXImin
LYFmin W = frequency weightings A, B, C or Z (controlled by
LYSmin Setup > Frequency Settings > Spectrum
LYImin parameter)
LXIeq
LYIeq f1 = Bottom frequency band (controlled by
LAIeq–LAeq Setup > Frequency Settings > Bottom F. for
LAFTeq
Special Leq parameter)
LAFTeq–LAeq
LavUQ
SIL f2 = Top frequency band (controlled by
PSIL Setup > Frequency Settings > Top Freq. for
SIL3 Special Leq parameter).
LWeq(f1–f2)
Overload ✐Please note: The parameter values shown are for
Avg. RPM
single-channel templates. For 2-channel templates
(Type 2270 only) most of the values are available for
(Values continue on next
page) both Ch.1 and Ch.2
APPENDIX A
247
Setup Parameters
Table A.7 (Cont.) Logged Broadband parameters*
(Cont.) Parameter 1 to Trig. Input Voltage ✐Please note: For Accelerometer and Direct Input,
Parameter 10 Wind Dir. avg. you can only select 5 parameters
Wind Dir. min.
Wind Dir. max.
Wind Speed avg.
Wind Speed min.
Wind Speed max.
Amb. Temperature
Amb. Humidity
Amb. Pressure
Rainfall
Accelerometer:
Linear (Detector 1)
Fast max (Detector 1)
Slow max (Detector 1)
Fast min (Detector 1)
Slow min (Detector 1)
Linear (Detector 2)
Fast max (Detector 2)
Slow max (Detector 2)
Fast min (Detector 2)
Slow min (Detector 2)
Peak
Peak-Peak
Crest Factor
Linear(f1-f2)
Overload
Trig. Input Voltage
Avg. RPM
MTVV
KBFmax
KBFTm
Linear:
Linear
Peak
Fast max
Slow max
Fast min
Slow min
Linear(f1–f2)
Overload
Trig. Input Voltage
Crest Factor
Avg. RPM
* For Logging BZ-7224 and Enhanced Logging BZ-7225 templates only.
A.8 Logged Spectrum

Table A.8 Logged Spectrum parameters*
Full Spectral Statistics Yes Determines whether the full spectral

statistics are logged or not
No
Spectrum Parameters All Determines whether All spectrum parameters are logged, a
Selected part of the parameters are logged (up to 3
Selected parameters) or None are logged
None
Spectrum 1 to Microphone: These parameters can be set if Spectrum Parameters =

Spectrum 3 LXeq Selected
LXFmax
LXSmax X = frequency weightings A, B, C, Z or G (controlled by
LXFmin
Setup > Frequency Settings > Spectrum parameter)
LXSmin
Off
✐Please note: The parameter values shown are for single-
Accelerometer: channel templates. For 2-channel templates (Type 2270
Linear only) the values are available for both Ch.1 and Ch.2
Fast max
Slow max
Fast min
Slow min
Off
Direct:
Linear
Fast max
Slow max
Fast min
Slow min
Off
* For Logging BZ-7224 and Enhanced Logging BZ-7225 templates only, requires Frequency Analysis Software BZ-7223.
APPENDIX A
249
Setup Parameters
A.9 Markers
Table A.9 Markers*
Marker 1 Text string Default set to Exclude. This marker can be set using the
stylus in the profile or the Back-erase pushbutton
during a measurement
Marker 2 Text string Default set to Manual. This marker can be set using the stylus
in the profile or the Manual Event pushbutton during a
measurement
Marker 3 Text string Default set to Level. This marker can be set using the stylus
in the profile, or if the conditions for the level trigger are met
during a measurement
Marker 4 and Marker 5 Text string These markers can be set using the stylus in the profile
display
Marker 6 Text string Default set to Sound. This marker is set if a signal recording
is made during a measurement
Pre-marker Time 0 to 5 s Specifies number of seconds marker 1, marker 2 or marker

3 will be set ahead of the point where the Back-erase or the
Manual Event pushbuttons are pressed or the level trigger
conditions are fulfilled
* For Logging BZ-7224 and Enhanced Logging BZ-7225 templates only

A.10 Level Trigger

Table A.10 Level Trigger parameters*
Trigger On Set to On for setting Marker 3 (Level) when the Parameter

fulfils the level trigger conditions (see below). The conditions
Off are checked every second.
Signal Recording† can also be controlled by these settings,
see Setup > Signal Recording > Recording Control
parameter
Start Slope Rising Set to Rising to start when level goes above Start Level (and
then stop when level goes below Stop Level).
Falling
Set to Falling to start when level goes below Start Level (and
stop when level goes above Stop Level)
Start Level – 100 to 200 dB Start trigger conditions are fulfilled, when level crosses Start
Level (in accordance with Start Slope) for at least Start
Duration seconds – set Start Level here
Start Duration 0 to 420 s Start trigger conditions are fulfilled, when level crosses Start
Duration seconds – set Start Duration here. The Start
Duration will be limited by the internal recording buffer size
and the Recording Quality and Resolution (Table A.13).
Stop Level –100 to 200 dB Stop trigger conditions are fulfilled, when level crosses Stop
Level (in accordance with Start Slope) for at least Stop
Duration seconds – set Stop Level here
Stop Duration 0 to 420 s Stop trigger conditions are fulfilled, when level crosses Stop
Duration seconds – set Stop Duration here
APPENDIX A
251
Setup Parameters
Table A.10 (Cont.) Level Trigger parameters*
Parameter Microphone: Select which parameter to monitor for the level trigger. The
LXeq parameter is based on 1 second measurements and checked
LYeq every second regardless of the logging period and logged
LAeq,T1,mov parameters.
LAeq,T2,mov
LCeq,T1,mov
LCeq,T2,mov X = frequency weightings A or B (controlled by
LGeq Setup > Frequency Settings > BB (ex. peak) parameter).
LG10max
LG10min Y = frequency weightings C or Z (controlled by
LVpeak Setup > Frequency Settings > BB (ex. peak) parameter).
LXFmax
LXSmax
V = frequency weightings A, B, C or Z (controlled by
LXImax
LYFmax Setup > Frequency Settings > BB Peak parameter)
LYSmax
LYImax ✐Please note: The parameter values shown are for single-
LXFmin channel templates. For 2-channel templates (Type 2270
LXSmin only) the values are available for both Ch.1 and Ch.2
LXImin
LYFmin
LYSmin
LYImin
LXF(SPL)
LXS(SPL)
LXI(SPL)
LYF(SPL)
LYS(SPL)
LYI(SPL)
(Values continue on
next page)
Table A.10 (Cont.) Level Trigger parameters*
(Cont.) Parameter Accelerometer:

Linear (Detector 1)
Fast max (Detector
1)
Slow max (Detector
1)
Fast min (Detector
1)
Slow min (Detector
1)
Linear (Detector 2)
Fast max (Detector
2)
Slow max (Detector
2)
Fast min (Detector
2)
Slow min (Detector
2)
Peak
Peak-Peak
KBFmax
Direct:
Linear
Peak
Fast max
Slow max
Fast min
Slow min
* For Logging BZ-7224 templates only.
† Requires license for Signal Recording BZ-7226.
APPENDIX A
253
Setup Parameters
A.11 Triggers
Table A.11 Trigger parameters*
Signal Recording Timer
Timer On Set to On to periodically generate a Timer Event.
Off ✐Please note: Set Signal Recording > Recording

Control to Timer Event or All Events
Timer Period 00:01:00 to The signal recording is triggered with Timer Period intervals
48:00:00
Synchronize with Clock Yes Select Yes to synch. the start of signal recordings with whole
minutes or hours.
No
Select No if you want the first signal recording Timer Period
after start
Duration 00:00:01 to Specifies the duration of the timer for the signal recording.
24:00:00
✐Please note: The total time of the signal recording will be
Pre-recording Time + Duration + Post-recording Time
Table A.11 (Cont.) Trigger parameters*

†‡
Level Trigger 1
Trigger On Set to On for setting Marker 3 (Level) when the Trigger

parameter fulfils the Level Trigger conditions (see below).
Off The conditions are checked every second.
Signal Recording can also be controlled by these settings, see
Setup > Signal Recording > Recording Control
Start Time 00:00:00 to Start Time defines when the level trigger is enabled.
23:59:59 Triggering is limited to the enabled time
Stop Time 00:00:00 to Stop Time defines when the level trigger is disabled.
23:59:59 Triggering is limited to the enabled time
Hold Off 00:00:00 to Hold Off specifies a time after a level trigger, where level
01:00:00 triggering is disabled. Can be useful in reducing the number
of triggers
Start Slope Rising Set to Rising to start when level goes above Start Level (and
then stop when level goes below Stop Level).
Falling Set to Falling to start when level goes below Start Level (and
stop when level goes above Stop Level)
Start Level –100 to 200 dB Start trigger conditions are fulfilled, when level crosses Start
Duration seconds – set Start Level here
Start Duration 0 to 420 s Start trigger conditions are fulfilled, when level crosses Start
Duration seconds – set Start Duration here. The Start
and the Recording Quality and Resolution (Table A.13).
Stop Level –100 to 200 dB Stop trigger conditions are fulfilled, when level crosses Stop
Duration seconds – set Stop Level here
Stop Duration 0 to 420 s Stop trigger conditions are fulfilled, when level crosses Stop
Duration seconds – set Stop Duration here. The Stop
and the Recording Quality and Resolution (Table A.13)
APPENDIX A
255
Setup Parameters
Trigger Parameter Microphone: Select which parameter to monitor for the level trigger. The
LXeq parameter is based on 1 second measurements and checked
LYeq every second regardless of the logging period and logged
LAeq,T1,mov parameters.
LAeq,T2,mov
LCeq,T1,mov
LCeq,T2,mov X = frequency weightings A or B (controlled by
LGeq Setup > Frequency Settings > BB (ex. peak)).
LG10max
LG10min Y = frequency weightings C or Z (controlled by
LVpeak Setup > Frequency Settings > BB (ex. peak)).
LXFmax
LXSmax
V = frequency weightings A, B, C or Z (controlled by
LXImax
LYFmax Setup > Frequency Settings > BB Peak)
LYSmax
LYImax W = frequency weightings A, B, C or Z (controlled by
LXFmin Setup > Frequency Settings > Spectrum)
LXSmin
LXImin (Comments continue on next page)
LYFmin
LYSmin
LYImin
LXF(SPL)
LXS(SPL)
LXI(SPL)
LYF(SPL)
LYS(SPL)
LYI(SPL
LWeq(f1–f2)
(Values continue on
next page)
(Cont.) Trigger Parameter Accelerometer: f1 = Lower freq. range (controlled by Setup > Frequency
Linear (Detector 1) Settings > Bottom F. for Special Leq)
Fast max (Detector
1) f2 = Upper freq. range (controlled by Setup > Frequency
Slow max (Detector
Settings > Top Freq. for Special Leq)
1)
Fast min (Detector
1) ✐Please note: The parameter values shown are for single-
Slow min (Detector channel templates. For 2-channel templates (Type 2270
1) only) the values are available for both Ch.1 and Ch.2
Linear (Detector 2)
Fast max (Detector
2)
Slow max (Detector
2)
Fast min (Detector
2)
Slow min (Detector
2)
Peak
Peak-Peak
Linear(f1 – f2)
KBFmax
Direct:
Linear
Peak
Fast max
Slow max
Fast min
Slow min
Linear(f1 – f2)
Level Trigger 2: Exactly the same parameters as Level Trigger 1
* For Enhanced Logging BZ-7225 templates only.

† Up to four individual trigger settings can be set for non-overlapping time periods of the day.
‡ Requires license for Signal Recording BZ-7226.
A.12 Units
APPENDIX A
257
Setup Parameters
Table A.12 Unit parameters (available for Accelerometer or Direct input only)
Engineering Unit No Select No to display values in dB
Yes Select Yes to display values in m/s2 (Accelerometer input) or

V (Direct input).
✐Please note: Use Preferences > Regional to select

whether the Vibration unit should be m/s2 (SI) or g (US/UK)
A.13 Signal Recording

Table A.13 Signal Recording parameters*
Recording Control Off Determines how recording of the measured signal is

controlled.
Automatic
Set to Automatic to start the recording when the
Manual Event
measurement is started and record throughout the
Exclude Event† measurement, only limited by the Maximum Duration.
External Event Set to Manual Event to start recording manually while

measuring when the Manual Event pushbutton is pressed,
Level Trigger and record until pressing the pushbutton again, however,
Event† take Maximum and Minimum Duration into account.
Timer Event‡ Set to Exclude Event to start recording manually while

measuring when the Back-erase pushbutton is pressed,
All Events† and record until pressing the pushbutton again, however,
take Maximum and Minimum Duration into account.
Image Event
Set to External Event to start recording using external
equipment connected to the Trigger Input Socket.
Set to Level Trigger Event to record while the level trigger

conditions are fulfilled, however, take Maximum and
Minimum Duration into account.
Set to Timer Event (BZ-7225 only) to record while the timer

trigger conditions are fulfilled, however, take Maximum
and Minimum Duration into account.
(Comments continue on next page)

APPENDIX A
259
Setup Parameters
Table A.13 (Cont.) Signal Recording parameters*
(Cont.) Recording Control Set to All Events to record while any of the events above are
active, however, take Maximum and Minimum Duration
into account.
If you do not want to record the input signal, then set

Recording Control to Off, to economize on power.
Set to Image Event (Type 2270 only) to make a recording of

1 s + Pre-recording Time + Post-recording Time.
✐Please note: For Reverberation Time Software BZ-7227,

the values are limited to Off and Automatic. Set to Automatic
to make signal recordings during the measurements
Recorded Channel Ch.1 Select Ch.1 or Ch.2 to record that channel or select Both to
record both channels simultaneously
Ch.2
Both
Recording Quality Low This setup determines the quality of the recording by
adjusting the sampling rate.
Fair The amount of space required for the recording will depend
on the selected quality (see details in the Specifications
Medium
chapter)
High
✐Please note: Recording Quality needs to be High
(20 kHz) if you want trigger or tacho trigger encoded in the
wav-file for later analysis in PULSE
Recorded Signal † Microphone: Use this parameter to select the frequency weighting of the
Input X-weighted recorded signal.
Input C-weighted ✐Please note:

• The frequency weighting of the recorded signal can be
Input Z-weighted selected independently of the frequency weighting of the
measurement, the signal at the output socket and the
Accelerometer signal at the earphone socket
and Direct: • X = frequency weighting A or B. ‘A’ requires that the BB
(excl. Peak) parameter is set to AC or AZ. ‘B’ requires that
Input Linear
the BB (excl. Peak) parameter is set to BC or BZ
• Recording in 2-channel templates will only record Input Z-
weighted for Microphone input
Automatic Gain On To ease identification of sound sources, the gain can be

Control † automatically adjusted to keep the average level within a
Off 40 dB range. When playing back the recorded signal, you
will then hear clearly the whole signal content, whether the
level has been 20 dB or 140 dB.
Set Automatic Gain Control to On to convert the recorded

signal. The recorded signal is stored as a 16-bit WAV file.
Set Automatic Gain Control to Off for recording the signal

with a fixed gain – then set Resolution = 24 bit
(recommended) to cover the full 120 dB dynamic range
(from max. input level and down) or select Resolution = 16
bit and specify the Peak Recording Level to fit the signal.
✐Please note: If the sound contains very high levels at low

frequency, then a fixed gain is recommended
Resolution 24 bit Set Resolution to 24 bit to cover the full dynamic range. Set
16 bit Resolution to 16 bit to cover up to 96 dB from Peak
Recording Level and down.
✐Please note:
• You will only be warned about overload in the recorded
signal if Automatic Gain Control is On or if Resolution is
24 bit or if Peak Recording Level is set to its maximum
value
• 24-bit recording not possible in BZ-7227
APPENDIX A
261
Setup Parameters
Peak Recording Level 145 dB For Automatic Gain Control = Off and Resolution = 16 bit
135 dB the recorded wave file has a dynamic range of up to 96 dB.
125 dB When playing back on the analyzer, the dynamic range of
115 dB
the output is approx. 75 dB. When playing back on a PC it
105 dB
95 dB might be even lower. Set Peak Recording Level to fit the
85 dB signal.
75 dB The values for Peak Recording Level take the sensitivity of
the attached transducer into account. The values shown in
the list here are nominal values for a Type 4189 or 4190
microphone.
💡Hint: Monitor the Lpeak value during a trial measurement

before selecting the Peak Recording Level.
✐Please note: For recording in 2-channel templates the

Peak Recording Level will automatically be set in
accordance with Input > Range Setting (that is, High
Range or Low Range)
Pre-recording Time † 0 to 470 s Recording is started the Pre-recording Time before the
trigger conditions are fulfilled (for example, 5 s means the
recording will be started 5 s before you hit the Manual
Event pushbutton). This is possible because the recording is
done continuously in an internal buffer, ready to be saved as
a wave file. The Pre-recording Time is limited by this buffer
size and the Recording Quality and Resolution (see details
in the Specifications chapter)
Post-recording Time † 0 to 1:00:00:00 Use this parameter to specify how much extra you want to be
recorded after the trigger conditions are no longer fulfilled
Duration Limit † On Use this parameter to enable the Minimum Duration and
Maximum Duration parameters for overruling the
Off duration of the signal recording determined by the trigger
condition parameters
Minimum Duration † 00:00:00 to When Duration Limit is On, then Minimum Duration will
1:00:00:00 determine the minimum recording time regardless of the
trigger conditions.
The total record length will then (as a minimum) be the sum
of Minimum Duration, Pre-recording Time and Post-
recording Time
Maximum Duration † 00:00:00 to When Duration Limit is set to On, then Maximum
7:00:00:00 Duration will determine the maximum recording time
regardless of the trigger conditions.
The total record length will then (as a maximum) be the sum
of Maximum Duration, Pre-recording Time and Post-
recording Time.
✐Please note: If Maximum Duration = 00:00:00, then it

is disabled and does not limit the duration
* Requires license for Signal Recording Option BZ-7226.

† For Logging BZ-7224 and Enhanced Logging BZ-7225 templates only.
‡ For Enhanced Logging BZ-7225 templates only.
APPENDIX A
263
Setup Parameters
A.14 Output Socket Signal

Table A.14 Output Socket Signal parameters*
Source Microphone: Output to the Output socket on the connector panel. Select
between Off and the input signal for monitoring purposes.
Off The LAF setting will output the X-weighted sound level as a
voltage between 0 V and 4 V. Use DC Voltage to calibrate the
Input X-weighted connected equipment by setting the DC Output.
Use Generator to output the signal specified by the
Input C-weighted
Generator settings.
Input Z-weighted
💡Hint: If you do not want to output the signal, then select
LXF Off to economize the power.
DC Voltage ✐Please note:

• X = frequency weighting A or B. ‘A’ requires that
Generator
Broadband (excl. Peak) is set to AC or AZ. ‘B’ requires that
the Broadband (excl. Peak) parameter is set to BC or BZ
Accelerometer • The Generator setting is only available for Frequency
and Direct: Analysis templates
Off
Input Linear
DC Output (20 mV/dB) 0.0 to 200.0 dB Source = DC Voltage will output:

0 V for DC Output = 0 dB and
4 V for DC Output = 200 dB
Output Gain Input – 60.0 to 60.0 dB Output gain of the input signal. Key in a gain value (0.1 dB
resolution) for the input signal. Use ‘@’ to assign the new
value for immediate response at the output – or use the up/
down navigation keys to increment/decrement the value in
steps of 1 dB.
✐Please note: 0 dB means 1 V output for 1 V input

* Not available for Reverberation Time Software BZ-7227.
A.15 Lden Periods

Table A.15 Lden Periods parameters*
Day Start 00:00:00 to Determines the start of the day period for the L day
23:59:59 calculation
Evening Start 00:00:00 to Determines the start of the evening period for the L evening
Night Start 00:00:00 to Determines the start of the night period for the L night
Evening Penalty 0 to 20 dB The Evening Penalty will be added to L evening when

calculating L den
Night Penalty 0 to 20 dB The Night Penalty will be added to L night when calculating
L den
* For Enhanced Logging BZ-7225 templates and microphone input only.
✐Please note: If Evening Start is set between Night Start and Day Start, then the L evening parameter will
be undefined.
APPENDIX A
265
Setup Parameters
A.16 Occupational Health

Table A.16 Occupational Health parameters*
Exposure Time 00:01:00 to Set the Exposure Time to the actual time that you are
1.00:00:00 exposed to noise during a workday.
Used for calculation of Lep,d and Lep,d,v.
✐Please note: Exposure Time can be changed after the

measurement has been done
Reference Time 00:01:00 to Set the Reference Time as required for calculation of Sound
5.00:00:00 Exposure Level or Time Weighed Average with a reference
time other than 8 hours.
Used for calculation of Lep,d,v and TWAv
Threshold Level 0 to 140 dB Any sound levels below the threshold value do not
contribute to the Dose measurement data. The time
resolution for this calculation is 1 s for calculation of Dose
and ProjDose – and 10 ms for calculation of TWA, TWAv,
DoseUQ and ProjDoseUQ.
Used for calculation of Dose, ProjDose, TWA, TWAv,
DoseUQ, ProjDoseUQ.
U = Time Weighting for Lav: F or S
Q = Exchange Rate for Lav: 4, 5 or 6 dB
Criterion Level 0 to 140 dB Criterion Level is the sound level allowed for an 8-hour
period and would yield a 100% dose.
The criterion level must be set according to the legislation
with which you will have to comply.
Used for calculation of Dose, ProjDose, DoseUQ,
ProjDoseUQ.
PeaksOver Level 0 to 200 dB Any peak levels that exceed the level set here will be
counted.
Used for calculation of #XPeaks(>NNNdB)
X = A, B, C, Z or G, set by Setup > Frequency Settings > BB
Peak, NNN is the PeaksOver Level
✐Please note: Two other peak counters are preset to

count peaks over 135 dB and 137 dB, respectively
Table A.16 Occupational Health parameters*
Exchange Rate for Lav 4 dB The increase in noise level that corresponds to a doubling of
the noise level is determined by Exchange Rate for Lav.
5 dB Set Exchange Rate for Lav as required by your local
standards.
6 dB
Used for calculation of LavUQ, TWA, TWAv DoseUQ,
ProjDoseUQ.
✐Please note: TWA and TWAv require U = S and Q = 5

Time Weighting for Lav F Lav will be time weighted in accordance with this parameter.
Used for calculation of LavUQ, TWA, TWAv DoseUQ,
S ProjDoseUQ.
✐Please note: TWA and TWAv require U = S and Q = 5

* Not available for Reverberation Time Software BZ-7227.
A.17 Generator
Table A.17 Generator parameters*
Generator Type Internal Set to Internal to use the internal noise generator as
specified below.
External
Set to External to switch an external generator on/off using
a logic signal:
On = 4.5 V; Off = 0 V.
The generator signal appears at the Output Socket.
✐Please note:
• For Reverberation Time Software BZ-7227, set
Measurement Control > Excitation = Interrupted
Noise to enable the generator parameters.
• For Frequency Analysis Software BZ-7223, set Output
Socket Signal > Source = Generator to enable the
generator parameters
APPENDIX A
267
Setup Parameters
Table A.17 (Cont.) Generator parameters*
Noise Type Pink The type of noise from the internal generator. The
bandwidth of the noise will be adjusted to the frequency
White range from Bottom Frequency to Top Frequency
Level [re. 1 V] – 60.0 to 0.0 dB This sets the internal noise generator attenuation in dB,
referenced to 1 V. This level stays at the set level irrespective
of the frequency range
Sound Source Unknown This setting optimizes the frequency response of the
internal generator output to the connected sound source.
Type 4292 The ‘Flat’ setting optimizes the output for a flat power
Optimum
response, the ‘Optimum’ setting optimizes the power
Type 4295 difference between adjacent 1/1- or 1/3-octave bands,
Optimum while maintaining a ‘boost’ at low frequencies.
Type 4296 Select a type matching your sound source: OmniPower

Optimum Sound Source Type 4292 or 4296 or OmniSource Sound
Source Type 4295.
Type 4292 Flat
Type 4295 Flat Select Unknown if you are using another sound source, or
don't want to correct the frequency response
Type 4296 Flat
Escape Time 0 to 60 s Set the Escape Time to allow the operator to leave the room
before the generator is turned on and the measurement
starts
Build-up Time 1 to 20 s Set the Build-up Time to allow the sound pressure in the
room to settle after the sound source is switched on
Bottom Frequency† 50 Hz to Top 1/1-octave: 63 Hz – 8 kHz

Frequency 1/3-octave: 50 Hz – 10 kHz
✐Please note: The settings of Bottom and Top

Frequency control the bandwidth of the noise from the
internal noise generator
Top Frequency† Bottom Frequency 1/1-octave: 63 Hz – 8 kHz

to 10 kHz 1/3-octave: 50 Hz – 10 kHz
* Available for Frequency Analysis Software BZ-7223, single channel, and Reverberation Time Software BZ-7227 and
microphone input only.
† Available for Frequency Analysis Software BZ-7223 only.
A.18 Post-processing
Table A.18 Post-processing parameters
Ensemble Averaging No Set to Yes to average each of the position decays into an
average decay (called the ensemble average or room
Yes average). The averaged decays of the room can then be
displayed in the Decay View. T30 Room, T20 Room and EDT
Room will be calculated from the room average.
Set to No for no ensemble averaging. There will be no

decays available for the room. T30 Room, T20 Room and
EDT Room will be calculated as averages of the T30, T20 and
EDT, respectively, for all the positions
Wide Band RT Bottom 50 Hz to Wide 1/1-octave: 63 Hz – 8 kHz

Band 1/3-octave: 50 Hz – 10 kHz
The settings of Wide Band RT Bottom and Wide Band RT
RT Top Top control the range of frequency bands used in the
averaging of the wide band parameters available below the
Spectrum and Decay graphs.
Example: Set Wide Band RT Bottom to 100 Hz and Top to
2 kHz, then the average of the frequency bands from 100 Hz
to 2 kHz will be calculated for the current position as:
T30 (100 Hz – 2 kHz)
T20 (100 Hz – 2 kHz)
EDT (100 Hz – 2 kHz)
and for the Room as:
T30 Room (100 Hz – 2 kHz)
T20 Room (100 Hz – 2 kHz)
EDT Room (100 Hz – 2 kHz)
Wide Band RT Top Wide Band RT 1/1-octave: 63 Hz – 8 kHz

Bottom to 10 kHz 1/3-octave: 50 Hz – 10 kHz
APPENDIX A
269
Setup Parameters
A.19 Tone Assessment

Table A.19 Tone assessment parameters
Tone Assessment On Set Tone Assessment to On to enable tone assessment

functionality, then select the Tone parameter above the
Off spectrum to display the results
Tone Standard ISO 1996:2-2007 Set the Tone Standard in accordance with your
requirements:
DM 16-03-1998 • ISO 1996:2-2007, Annex D is the objective method for
assessing the audibility of tones in noise – simplified
method. This method uses 1/3-octave spectra
• DM 16-03-1998 assesses tone using 1/3-octave spectra
according to Italian Law: Ministero dell’Ambiente,
Decreto 16 marzo 1998
Adjustment 0.0 to 20 dB This is the adjustment you should add to LAeq if audible
tones are found in the spectrum. The resulting adjustment
can be read below the spectrum.
✐Please note: The adjustment is fixed to 5 dB in the

DM 16-03-1998 standard
Low Freq. Last Band 12.5 to 315 Hz Set the frequency for the last band of the low frequency
range of the assessment. Default is 125 Hz.
The low frequency range is from the lowest measured
frequency band to the value of the Low Freq. Last Band
parameter.
✐Please note: Only available if Tone Standard is set to

ISO 1996:2-2007
Middle Freq. Last Band 160 Hz to 20 kHz Set the frequency for the last band of the middle frequency
range of the assessment. Default is 400 Hz.
The middle frequency range is from one band higher than
the Low Freq. Last Band parameter to the value of the
Middle Freq. Last Band parameter.

ISO 1996:2-2007
Table A.19 Tone assessment parameters
Level Difference Low 0.1 to 100.0 dB Set the required level difference for detecting a tone in the
low frequency range.
Default is 15 dB .

ISO 1996:2-2007
Level Difference Middle 0.1 to 100.0 dB Set the required level difference for detecting a tone in the
middle frequency range.
Default is 8 dB .

ISO 1996:2-2007
Level Difference High 0.1 to 100.0 dB Set the required level difference for detecting a tone in the
high frequency range.
Default is 5 dB .

ISO 1996:2-2007
ISO 226 1987 Free-field The tone is checked against levels in other frequency bands
using normal equal loudness level contours defined by
1987 Diffuse-field ISO 226.
Select here which version of the standard to use.
2003 Free-field

DM 16-03-1998
APPENDIX A
271
Setup Parameters
A.20 RPM Measurements

Table A.20 RPM and tacho parameters for RPM measurements
Tacho On When Tacho is On , RPM measurements are done on the

Off signal connected to Trigger input. The parameters for
External Level, Hysteresis, Slope and CCLD/Pull Up are
used for finding the tacho pulses – these are used to
measure the RPM.
When Tacho is Off , no RPM is measured
RPM Gear Ratio 10 –5 to 10 38 The displayed RPM are the measured RPM divided by the
RPM Gear Ratio
External Level – 20 to 20 V Determines the level of the signal applied on the trigger
input that will cause a trigger. This parameter is enabled
when Trigger Type is set to None/Tacho and Tacho is set to
On .
When setting the trigger level, please take a small offset at
the trigger input into account. Typical values for the offset
are between – 70 mV and 200 mV
Hysteresis 0 to 10 V Determines the hysteresis on the external trigger. This

parameter is enabled when Trigger Type is set to None/
Tacho and Tacho is set to On
Slope Rising Determines the trigger slope on the external trigger. This
Falling parameter is enabled when Trigger Type is set to None/
Tacho and Tacho is set to On
CCLD/Pull Up On For instruments with serial number 2630266 and above, this
Off parameter is named CCLD. Use this parameter to switch on
or off a CCLD power supply, depending on the requirements
of the equipment you connect to the Trigger Input.
✐Please note: Laser Tachometer Probe MM-0360

requires CCLD set to On .
For instruments with serial number below 2630266, the

parameter is named Pull Up. Use this parameter to ‘pull up’
the trigger input to +5 V (via a 7.5 kΩ resistor). The CCLD/
Pull Up parameter is enabled when Trigger Type is set to
External or Tacho is set to On
273
Appendix B
Measurement Parameters
This appendix describes the measurement parameters. They are measured in accordance with
the setup parameters.
• Please refer to the Glossary in Appendix E for a description of the parameters
• The following letters are substituted in the parameters that follow to represent the wide
range of frequency weightings, time weightings and percentile levels available:
V = frequency weightings A, B, C or Z (controlled by Setup > Frequency Settings > BB
Peak parameter)
X = frequency weightings A or B (controlled by Setup > Frequency Settings > BB (excl.
peak) parameter)
Y = frequency weightings C or Z (controlled by Setup > Frequency Settings > BB (excl.
peak) parameter)
W = frequency weightings A, B, C, Z or G (controlled by Setup > Frequency
Settings > Spectrum parameter)
U = time weightings F or S (controlled by Setup > Statistics > Spectral Statistics based
on parameter)
R = time weightings F or S (controlled by Setup > Occupational Health > Time
Weighting for Lav parameter)
Q = exchange rate 4, 5 or 6 dB (controlled by Setup > Occupational
Health > Exchange Rate for Lav parameter)
N = number between 0.1 and 99.9 (controlled by Setup > Statistics > Percentile N
parameter)
✐Please note: • All parameters will be per channel in 2-channel templates unless stated otherwise
(Type 2270 only).
• For accelerometer input please refer to section A.2 for the weightings of the two
broadband detectors and the peak detector.
B.1 Total Measurement (Microphone Input)
B.1.1 For Sound Level Meter Software BZ-7222, Frequency Analysis Software
BZ-7223, Logging Software BZ-7224 and Enhanced Logging Software BZ-7225
The following parameters are measured within the Elapsed Time:
Equivalent continuous sound levels:
• L Xeq
• LYeq
• LCeq – LAeq
• LAeq,T1,mov (not saved with data)
• LAeq,T1,mov,max
• LAeq,T2,mov (not saved with data)
• LAeq,T2,mov,max
• LCeq,T1,mov (not saved with data)
• LCeq,T1,mov,max
• LCeq,T2,mov (not saved with data)
• LCeq,T2,mov,max
• ΔL eq,T1,mov (not saved with data)
• ΔL eq,T1,mov,max
• ΔL eq,T2,mov (not saved with data)
• ΔL eq,T2,mov,max
Sound exposure level:
• L XE
• LYE
Peak sound level:
• LVpeak
• T Vpeak
Maximum time-weighted sound levels:
• L XFmax
• L XSmax
• L XImax
• LYFmax
• LYSmax
• LYImax
APPENDIX B
275
Minimum time-weighted sound levels:

• L XFmin
• L XSmin
• L XImin
• LYFmin
• LYSmin
• LYImin
ISO/EU occupational health parameters:
• E
• Dose
• ProjDose
• #VPeaks (>xxx dB)
• #VPeaks (>137 dB)
US occupational health parameters:
• L avRQ
• TWA
• TWAv
• DoseRQ
• ProjDoseRQ
General parameters:
• Overload in %
• Start time (common to both channels in 2-channel templates)
• Stop Time (common to both channels in 2-channel templates)
• Elapsed Time (excl. pauses; common to both channels in 2-channel templates)
• Serial Number (of analyzer)
• Version Number (of software used to measure the data)
• Avg. RPM
Special parameters:
• L XIeq (also called L XIm)
• LYIeq
• LAIeq – LAeq
• LAFTeq (also called LAFTm5)
• LAFTeq – LAeq
• SIL (average of L Zeq octave band levels: 500 Hz, 1000 Hz, 2000 Hz and 4000 Hz)*
• PSIL (average of L Zeq octave band levels: 500 Hz, 1000 Hz and 2000 Hz)*
• SIL3 (average of L Zeq octave band levels: 1000 Hz, 2000 Hz and 4000 Hz)*
• LWeq (f1 – f2) (sum of power values for LWeq frequency bands from f1 Hz to f2 Hz)*
Noise indicators†:
• L day
• L evening
• L night
• L den
• L dn
Statistics to calculate percentile levels and std.dev.
Low-frequency parameters (requires Enhanced Vibration and Low-frequency Option
BZ-7234):
• L Geq
• L G10max
• L G10min
• L Gpeak
• T Gpeak
• #GPeaks (>xxx dB)
• #GPeaks (>137 dB)
*
These parameters require license for BZ-7223 and measurement of spectra.
†
These parameters are available for Enhanced Logging BZ-7225 only.
APPENDIX B
277
Weather data (requires connection to a weather station; common to both channels in

2-channel templates):
• Wind Dir. avg.
• Wind Dir. min.
• Wind Dir. max.
• Wind Speed avg.
• Wind Speed min.
• Wind Speed max.
• Amb. Temperature
• Amb. Humidity
• Amb. Pressure
• Rainfall
Spectrum parameters*:
• LWeq
• LWFmax
• LWSmax
• LWFmin
• LWSmin
Statistics to calculate percentile levels as spectra*
CIC results*:
• CIC 1 Result
• CIC 1 Dev. from Reference
• CIC 2 Result
• CIC 2 Dev. from Reference
• CIC 3 Result †
• CIC 3 Dev. f rom Reference †
• CIC 4 Result †
• CIC 4 Dev. f rom Reference †
In addition to the parameters saved within the data (listed above), the following can be
inserted in a project annotation as a GPS note:
• Position as latitude and longitude
• Altitude
• Position error (dependant on type of GPS unit)
*
These parameters are available for Logging BZ-7224 only.
†
These parameters are available for Enhanced Logging BZ-7225 only.
B.2 Periodic Reports (Microphone Input)
B.2.1 For Enhanced Logging Software BZ-7225

Parameters measured within a Periodic Report interval:
• L Xeq
• LYeq
• LCeq – LAeq
• LAeq,T1,mov,max
• LAeq,T2,mov,max
• LCeq,T1,mov ,max
• LCeq,T2,mov ,max
• ΔL eq,T,mov ,max
• ΔL eq,T,mov ,max
• L XE
• LYE
Peak sound level:
• LVpeak
• T Vpeak
• L XFmax
• L XSmax
• L XImax
• LYFmax
• LYSmax
• LYImax
• L XFmin
• L XSmin
• L XImin
• LYFmin
• LYSmin
• LYImin
APPENDIX B
279
ISO/EU occupational health parameters:

• E
• Dose
• ProjDose
• #VPeaks (>xxx dB)
• L avRQ
• TWA
• TWA v
• DoseRQ
• ProjDoseRQ
General parameters:
• Overload in %
• Avg. RPM
Special parameters:
• LYIeq
• LAIeq – LAeq
• LAFTeq (also called LAFTm5 )
• LAFTeq – LAeq
• LWeq(f1 – f2) (sum of power values for LWeq frequency bands from f1 Hz to f2 Hz)*
Statistics to calculate percentile levels and std.dev.
*

BZ-7234):
• L Geq
• L G10max
• L G10min
• L Gpeak
• T Gpeak
• #GPeaks (>xxx dB)
• #GPeaks (> 135 dB)
• Wind Dir. avg.
• Wind Dir. min.
• Wind Dir. max.
• Wind Speed avg.
• Wind Speed min.
• Wind Speed max.
• Amb. Humidity
• Amb. Pressure
• Rainfall
• LWeq
• LWFmax
• LWSmax
• LWFmin
• LWSmin
The statistics can be logged in periodic reports to calculate percentile levels as spectra.*
*
APPENDIX B
281
B.3 Logged Measurement (Microphone Input)
B.3.1 For Logging Software BZ-7224 and Enhanced Logging Software BZ-7225
Parameters measured within a logging interval – up to ten (or all) of the following parameters can
be logged:
• L Xeq
• LYeq
• LCeq – LAeq
• LAeq,T1,mov
• LAeq,T2,mov
• LCeq,T1,mov
• LCeq,T2,mov
• ΔL eq,T,mov
• ΔL eq,T,mov
• L XE
• LYE
Peak sound level:
• LVpeak
• L XFmax
• L XSmax
• L XImax
• LYFmax
• LYSmax
• LYImax

• L XFmin
• L XSmin
• L XImin
• LYFmin
• LYSmin
• LYImin

• L avRQ
Special parameters:
• LYIeq
• LAIeq – LAeq
• LAFTeq (also called LAFTm5 )
• LAFTeq – LAeq
• LWeq (f1 – f2) (sum of power values for LWeq frequency bands from f1 Hz to f2 Hz)*
• Avg. RPM
Voltage updated at approx. 5 s intervals and logged with logging period intervals:
• Trig. Input Voltage (requires Trigger Input is set to Voltage for Monitoring )
The following parameters are available per set of logged parameters:
• Overload in %
The Statistics can be logged to calculate percentile levels and std.dev. per logging interval.
BZ-7234):
• L Geq
• L G10max
• L G10min
• L Gpeak
*
APPENDIX B
283

• Wind Dir. avg.
• Wind Dir. min.
• Wind Dir. max.
• Wind Speed avg.
• Wind Speed min.
• Wind Speed max.
• Amb. Humidity
• Amb. Pressure
• Rainfall
Up to three (or all) of the following spectrum parameters can be logged and displayed on the
spectrum display*:
• LWeq
• LWFmax
• LWSmax
• LWFmin
• LWSmin
The statistics can be logged in periodic reports to calculate percentile Levels as spectra.*
B.4 Logged (10/100 ms) Measurement (Microphone Input)
B.4.1 For Logging Software BZ-7224 and Enhanced Logging Software BZ-7225
The following broadband parameters can be logged every 100 ms:
• LAeq
• LAF
• LAS
The following broadband parameters can be logged every 10 ms:

• LAF
One of the following spectra can be logged every 100 ms:

• LWeq
• LWF
• LWS
*
✐Please note: For 2-channel templates up to four of the six broadband parameters and two spectra from
the two channels can be logged (Type 2270 only).
B.5 Instantaneous Measured Parameters (available at any time;

Microphone Input)
Instantaneous time-weighted sound levels:
• L XF
• L XS
• L XI
• LYF
• LYS
• LYI
Sound pressure levels (maximum time-weighted sound levels once per second):
• L XF(SPL)
• L XS(SPL)
• L XI(SPL)
• LYF(SPL)
• LYS(SPL)
• LYI(SPL)
Peak sound levels (maximum peak sound level once per second):
• LVpeak,1s
Low-frequency parameters (requires Enhanced Vibration and Low-frequency Option BZ-7234):

• L G10
• L Gpeak,1s
Voltage updated at approx. 5 s intervals (common to both channels in 2-channel templates):

• Trig. Input Voltage (requires Trigger Input is set to Voltage for Monitoring)
Instantaneous RPM:
• Inst. RPM
Instantaneous weather data (common to both channels in 2-channel templates):

• Wind Dir.
• Wind Speed
Instantaneous GPS data (common to both channels in 2-channel templates):

• Latitude
• Longitude
APPENDIX B
285
Instantaneous measured spectra*:

• LWF
• LWS
B.5.1 Processed Parameters for Display Only (Microphone Input)

The following general parameter is available for display for Total data: Time Remaining (for the
current measurement, taking available disk space into account).
The following ISO/EU occupational health parameters are calculated and displayed for Total,
Periodic Reports and Logged data:
• L ep,d
• L ep,d,v
If statistics are available, then Std.Dev. and 7 percentile levels can be calculated and displayed:
LXN1 or LXUN1 to LXN7 or LXUN7 .
If spectral statistics are available, then 7 percentile levels as spectra can be calculated and
displayed: LWUN1 to LWUN7 .
If LWeq spectrum is available, then NC , NC Decisive Band , NR , NR Decisive Band , RC , RC Classification ,
NCB , and NCB Classification can be calculated and displayed.
If LWeq 1/3-octave spectrum is available, then Loudness and Loudness Level can be calculated and
displayed.
For 2-channel templates:
• Single values for display:
– Ch.1 – Ch.2 LXeq
– Ch.2 – Ch.1 LXeq
– Ch.1 – Ch.2 LYeq
– Ch.2 – Ch.1 LYeq
• Spectra for display:
– Ch.1 – Ch.2 LWeq
– Ch.2 – Ch.1 LWeq
*
B.6 Total Measurement (Accelerometer and Direct Input)
B.6.1 For Sound Level Meter Software BZ-7222, Frequency Analysis Software
BZ-7223, Logging Software BZ-7224 and Enhanced Logging Software BZ-7225
The following parameters are measured within the elapsed time:
Linear averaged levels:
• Linear
• Linear det. 2 (accelerometer input only)
Peak levels:
• Peak
• T Peak
• Peak-Peak (requires BZ-7234, accelerometer input only)
Maximum time-weighted levels:
• Fast max
• Slow max
• Fast max det. 2 (accelerometer input only)
• Slow max det. 2 (accelerometer input only)
Minimum time-weighted levels:
• Fast min
• Slow min
• Fast min det. 2 (accelerometer input only)
• Slow min det. 2 (accelerometer input only)
General parameters:
• Overload in %
• Crest Factor
• Avg. RPM
Special parameters:
• Linear(f1 – f2) (sum of power values for Linear frequency bands from f1 Hz to f2 Hz)*
*
These parameters require a license for BZ-7223 and spectra measurement.
APPENDIX B
287

BZ-7234 and accelerometer input):
• MTVV
• KBF max
• KBF Tm
• Linear
• Fast max
• Slow max
• Fast min
• Slow min
In addition to the parameters saved within the data (listed above), the following can be
inserted in a project annotation as a GPS note (common to both channels in 2-channel
templates):
• Position as Latitude and Longitude
• Altitude
• Position error (dependent on type of GPS unit)
B.6.2 Periodic Reports (Accelerometer or Direct input)
For Enhanced Logging Software BZ-7225

Parameters measured within a periodic report interval:
• Linear
Peak levels:
• Peak
• T Peak
• Peak-Peak (requires BZ-7234, accelerometer only)
• Fast max
• Slow max
*

• Fast min
• Slow min
General parameters:
• Overload in %
• Crest Factor
• Avg. RPM
Special parameters:
• MTVV
• KBF max
• KBF Tm
• Linear
• Fast max
• Slow max
• Fast min
• Slow min
B.6.3 Logged Measurement (Accelerometer or Direct input)
For Logging Software BZ-7224 and Enhanced Logging Software BZ-7225

Parameters measured within a logging interval - up to five (or all) of the following parameters can
be logged:
• Linear
*
APPENDIX B
289
Peak levels:
• Peak
• Peak-Peak (requires BZ-7234, accelerometer only)
• Fast max
• Slow max
• Fast min
• Slow min
General parameters:
• Overload in %
• Crest Factor
• Avg. RPM
Special parameters:
• MTVV
• KBF max
• KBF Tm
• Linear
• Fast max
• Slow max
• Fast min
• Slow min
*
B.6.4 Logged (100 ms) Measurement (Accelerometer or Direct input)
For Logging Software BZ-7224 and Enhanced Logging Software BZ-7225

The following Broadband parameters can be logged every 100 ms:
• Linear
• Fast Inst
• Slow Inst
One of the following spectra can be logged every 100 ms:

• Linear
• Fast Inst
• Slow Inst
✐Please note: For 2-channel templates, up to four of the six broadband parameters and up to two
spectra from the two channels can be logged (Type 2270 only)
B.6.5 Instantaneous Measured Parameters (Available at Any Time; Accelerometer or

Direct input)
Instantaneous time-weighted levels:
• Fast Inst
• Slow Inst
Low-frequency parameters (requires Enhanced Vibration and Low-frequency Option BZ-7234

and accelerometer input):
• a W,1s
• KBF
Voltage updated at approx. 5 s intervals (common to both channels in 2-channel templates):

• Trig. Input Voltage (requires Trigger Input is set to Voltage for Monitoring)
Instantaneous RPM:
• Inst. RPM
Instantaneous GPS data (common to both channels in 2-Ch. templates):

• Latitude
• Longitude
Instantaneous measured spectra*:

• Fast Inst
• Slow Inst
*
APPENDIX B
291
Processed Parameters for Display Only (Accelerometer or Direct input)

The following general parameter is available for display for total data:
• Time Remaining (for the current measurement, taking available disk space into account)
For 2-channel templates:

• Single values for display:
– Ch.1 – Ch.2 Linear
– Ch.1 – Ch.2 Linear det. 2 (accelerometer input only)
– Ch.2 – Ch.1 Linear det. 2 (accelerometer input only)
• Spectra for display:
B.6.6 Relationship Between Setup and Measurement Parameters

The measurement parameters are measured in accordance with the setup parameters. The
following tables describe the relationship between the setup and measurement parameters.
Table B.1 General parameters
Parameter LXeq LXE LXIeq LAFTeq LVpeak TVpeak LXYmax LXYmin

Sound Field
• • • • • • • •
Correction
Windscreen
• • • • • • • •
Correction
Low Frequency • • • • • • • •
Broadband
• • • Α • •
(excl. Peak)
Broadband Peak • •
Table B.2 Noise indicators and statistics
Parameter Lday Levening Lnight Lden Ldn LXYN

Sound Field
• • • • • •
Correction
Windscreen
• • • • • •
Correction
Low Frequency • • • • • •
Broadband
A A A A A •
(excl. Peak)
Broadband Statistics
•
based on
Percentile N% •
Day Start • • •
Evening Start • • •
Night Start • • •
Evening Penalty •
Night Penalty •
APPENDIX B
293
Table B.3 Occupational health parameters
Proj- #VPeaks Lav- Dose- Proj-

Parameter Lep,d Lep,d,v E Dose TWA TWAv
Dose (>NNNdB) RQ RQ DoseRQ
Sound Field
• • • • • • • • • • •
Correction
Wind-
screen • • • • • • • • • • •
Correction
Low
• • • • • • • • • • •
Frequency
Broadband
A A A A A A A A A A
(excl. Peak)
Broadband
•
Peak
Exposure
• •
Time
Reference
• •
Time
Threshold
• • • • • •
Level
Criterion
• • • •
Level
Peaks-
•
Over Level
Exchange
• 5 5 • •
Rate for Lav
Time
Weighting • S S • •
for Lav
B.7 Reverberation Time Measurement
B.7.1 For Reverberation Time Software BZ-7227

The following parameters are measured or calculated at each position:
Decays
• Reverberation Decays (for each frequency band from Bottom Frequency to Top Frequency)
based on sampling LZeq spectra at 5 ms intervals
Spectra
• T30 Spectrum
• T20 Spectrum
• EDT Spectrum
Single Number Values

• T30 (Wide Band RT Bottom – Wide Band RT Top)
• EDT (Wide Band RT Bottom – Wide Band RT Top)
The following parameters are calculated for the room as an average of all positions:
Decays
• Ensemble Averaged Reverberation Decays (for each frequency band from Bottom Frequency to
Top Frequency)
Spectra
• T30 Spectrum
• T20 Spectrum
• EDT Spectrum
Single Number Values

• EDT (Wide Band RT Bottom – Wide Band RT Top)
Quality indicators are given for each frequency band, in each reverberation time spectrum, and
for each reverberation time spectrum.
Instantaneous Measured Parameters (available at any time)

Instantaneous time-weighted sound levels:
• LAF
• L CF
Instantaneous measured spectra:

• L ZF
295
Appendix C
Analyzer Parameters
This appendix describes the parameters that are common to all users of the analyzer.
C.1 Current Transducer

Table C.1 Current transducer parameters
Transducer Name and serial This parameter selects which transducer is connected to the
(that is, connected to Top number of Top Socket (displayed in Setup > Input (Type 2250) or
Socket) (Ch. 1 for transducer Setup > Input under Ch.1 (Type 2270) and at the top of
Type 2270) Transducers Database)
Transducer Name and serial Type 2270 only.

(that is, connected to Top number of This parameter selects which transducer is connected to the
Socket or Ch. 2 for transducer Top Socket or Ch. 2 (displayed in Setup > Input under Ch.2
Type 2270) and at the top of Transducers Database)
Transducer Name and serial Type 2270 only.

(that is, connected to the number of This parameter selects which transducer is connected to the
Rear Socket/Ch. 1 of transducer Ch. 1 Rear Socket (displayed in Setup > Input under Ch.1
Type 2270) and at the top of Transducers Database)
Transducer Name and serial This parameter selects which transducer is used in the Rear
(that is connected to Rear number of Socket (displayed in Setup > Input (Type 2250) or
Socket or Ch. 2 of transducer Setup > Input under Ch.2 (Type 2270) and at the top of
Type 2270) Transducers Database)
Input (no text is Top Socket Determines whether the input is taken from the Top Socket,
displayed) or the Rear Socket (‘Input’ on connector panel).
Rear Socket Connect your transducer to this socket. This parameter is
displayed in Setup > Input and on the second line of the
Transducers Database
297
Analyzer Parameters
C.2 Transducer Database

The Transducer Database consists of a Transducer Setup and a Calibration History – one set per
transducer.
C.2.1 Transducer Setup

Table C.2 Transducer setup parameters
Serial No. Text string Insert unique ID for transducer
Name Text string Insert name of transducer to display together with serial
number
Description Text string Insert description of transducer
Preamplifier ID No. Text string Document the preamplifier here
Microphone Type 4189 Microphone only: If the microphone is a known type, then
4190 the rest of the parameters of the transducer are set
4191 automatically. Sound Field Correction and Windscreen
4192
Correction are possible for known microphone types only.
4950
4966
4955-A ✐Please note: Microphone Types 4952 and 4184-A can
4193 be used with 0° reference direction or 90° reference
4193, UC-0211 direction.
4964
4964, UC-0211 For unknown microphone types, set the rest of the
4952 0°
parameters – no corrections can be made for unknown
4952 90°
4184-A 0° types.
4184-A 90°
EH-2152 0° ✐Please note: If you are unsure which microphone to use,
EH-2152 90° please refer to Table C.5, which gives an overview of the
Unknown microphones, where they can be used and their
specifications
Table C.2 (Cont.) Transducer setup parameters
Accelerometer Type 4397-A Accelerometer only: If accelerometer is a known type, then

4513 the rest of the parameters of the transducer are set
4513-001 automatically.
4513-002
For unknown accelerometer types, set the
4514
4514-001 rest of the parameters.
4514-002
4533-B
4533-B-001
4533-B-002
4534-B
4534-B-001
4534-B-002
6233-C-10
8324
8341
8343
8347-C, 2647-D
Unknown
Nominal Sensitivity Double Set automatically for known type.
Otherwise set the nominal sensitivity in mV/Pa for

microphones; in mV/(m/s2) for accelerometers; and in V/V
for Direct input
Polarization Voltage Yes Microphone only: Set to No if microphone is prepolarized,

otherwise set to Yes for polarization voltage of 200 V (Top
No Socket only).
Set automatically for known Microphone Type
Free-field Type Yes Microphone only: Set to Yes for Free-field types, otherwise
set to No.
No Set automatically for known Microphone Type
Capacitance Double Microphone only: Insert capacitance of microphone in pF.

Set automatically for known Microphone Type
CCLD Yes Set to Yes for CCLD (Constant Current Line Drive)
transducers, otherwise set to No.
No
Set automatically for known Microphone or
Accelerometer Type.
✐Please note: Set Input to Rear Socket. The CCLD input at

the Rear socket will automatically be enabled when
selecting a transducer requiring CCLD input
299
Analyzer Parameters
Table C.2 (Cont.) Transducer setup parameters
Calibration Check CIC Microphone only: For microphone Type 4184-A you can
select to check the calibration of the system using CIC or
Actuator Actuator – for all other microphone types the setting is
preset to CIC.
Weight Double Accelerometer only: Insert weight of the accelerometer in g.

Set automatically for known Accelerometer type
C.2.2 Calibration History

Table C.3 Calibration history parameters
1. Calibration date & YYYY-MM-DD Initial

Time hh:mm:ss
1. Sensitivity Double Initial mV/Pa
1. Preamplifier ID No. Text string Initial
1. User Text string Initial
1. Input Top Socket, Rear Initial

Socket
1. Calibration Type External,Internal Initial
1. Calibrator Serial No. Text string Initial
1. Comment Text string Initial
1. Analyzer Serial No. Text string Initial
2. Calibration date & YYYY-MM-DD

Time hh:mm:ss
2. Sensitivity Double
2. Preamplifier ID No. Text string
2. User Text string
2. Input Top Socket, Rear

Socket
2. Calibration Type External,Internal
2. Calibrator Serial No. Text string

Table C.3 (Cont.) Calibration history parameters
2. Comment Text string
2. Analyzer Serial No. Text string
: : :
N. Calibration date & YYYY-MM-DD Current

Time hh:mm:ss
N. Sensitivity Double Current
N. Preamplifier ID No. Text string Current
N. User Text string Current
N. Input Top Socket, Rear Current

Socket
N. Calibration Type External,Internal Current
N. Calibrator Serial No. Text string Current
N. Comment Text string Current
N. Analyzer Serial No. Text string Current

301
Analyzer Parameters
C.3 Calibration Setup

Table C.4 Calibration setup parameters
(Sound Level) Calibrator 4231 Select which calibrator to use
Custom
Calibration Level (for 0.00 to 200.00 dB Set calibration level for custom calibrator
Custom Sound Level re 20 µPa
Calibrator)
Serial No. for 4231 Text string Serial number will be documented in calibration history
Serial No. for Custom Text string Serial number will be documented in calibration history
Sound Level Calibrator
(Acceleration) Calibrator 4294 Select which calibrator to use

4924--002
Custom
Calibration Level (for 0 to 1000 m/s2 Set calibration level for custom calibrator.
custom Acceleration
Calibrator) ✐Please note: When displaying acceleration levels as dB
the reference will be 1 µm/s2
Serial No. for 4294 Text string Serial number will be documented in calibration history
Serial No. for Custom Text string Serial number will be documented in calibration history
Acceleration Calibrator
Calibration Level (for 0 to 1000 V Set calibration level for Direct Input.
Direct Input)
✐Please note: When displaying voltage levels as dB the
reference will be 1 µV
Serial No. for Direct Text string Serial number will be documented in calibration history
Input Calibrator
C.4 Type 2250/2270 Microphones

Table C.5 Overview of Type 2250/70 microphones
Optimized Free-field ±1 dB Free-field ±2 dB

Microphone Application Dynamic Range*
For Frequency Range Frequency Range
Weatherproof Free Field 0° or 3.6 Hz – 15.0 kHz† 2.5 Hz – 16.5 kHz†
4184-A 28.8 – 150 dB(A)
200 V 90° Diffuse Field 6.6 Hz – 15.0 kHz 5.6 Hz – 16.5 kHz
Standard Free Field 6.8 Hz – 22.4 kHz† 4.2 Hz – 22.4 kHz†
4189 16.6 – 140 dB(A)
Prepolarized Diffuse Field 7.8 Hz – 22.4 kHz 6.3 Hz – 22.4 kHz
4190 16.5 – 140 dB(A)
200 V Diffuse Field 6.7 Hz – 22.4 kHz 5.7 Hz – 22.4 kHz
High Levels Free Field 3.6 Hz – 22.4 kHz† 2.5 Hz – 22.4 kHz†
4191 25.6 – 152 dB(A)
Free Field
Pressure 3.6 Hz – 22.4 kHz† 2.5 Hz – 22.4 kHz†
4192 Diffuse Field 23.2 – 152 dB(A)
200 V 6.6 Hz – 22.4 kHz 5.6 Hz – 22.4 kHz
Pressure Field
Low Low Frequencies,
38.4 – 152 dB(Z)† 0.56 Hz – 22.4 kHz† 0.45 Hz – 22.4 kHz†
4193 Frequencies Free Field,
23.2 – 152 dB(A) 6.3 Hz – 22.4 kHz 5.5 Hz – 22.4 kHz
200 V Diffuse Field
4193 + 39.1 – 142 dB(Z)† 0.38 Hz – 22.4 kHz† 0.28 Hz – 22.4 kHz†
Frequencies Free Field,
UC-0211 37.8 – 142 dB(A) 5.9 Hz – 22.4 kHz 5.3 Hz – 22.4 kHz
200 V Diffuse Field
Standard Free Field, 4.3 Hz – 19.0 kHz† 3.2 Hz – 20.0 kHz†
4950 16.4 –140 dB(A)
Outdoor Free Field 0° or 4.3 Hz – 14.0 kHz† 3.2 Hz – 14.5 kHz†
4952 20.0 – 141 dB(A)
Prepolarized 90° Diffuse Field 6.3 Hz – 14.0 kHz 5.6 Hz – 14.5 kHz
4952 + Outdoor Free Field 0° or 4.3 Hz – 12.7 kHz† 3.2 Hz – 13.2 kHz†
21.2 – 141 dB(A)
EH-2152 Prepolarized 90° Diffuse Field 6.3 Hz – 12.7 kHz 5.6 Hz – 13.2 kHz
Low Noise Free Field 9.2 Hz – 19.0 kHz† 6.0 Hz – 20.0 kHz†
4955-A 4.2 – 95 dB(A)
27.3 – 140 db(Z)† 0.6 Hz – 22.4 kHz† 0.47 Hz – 22.4 kHz†
4964 Frequencies Free Field,
16.6 – 140 dB(A) 6.0 Hz – 22.4 kHz 5.3 Hz – 22.4 kHz
Prepolarized Diffuse Field
4964 + 34.7 – 130 db(Z)† 0.35 Hz – 22.4 kHz† 0.28 Hz – 22.4 kHz†
Frequencies Free Field,
UC-0211 30.0 – 130 dB(A) 5.9 Hz – 22.4 kHz 5.3 Hz – 22.4 kHz
Prepolarized Diffuse Field
4966 16.8 – 140 dB(A)
* From the typical total inherent noise level for the microphone and Type 2250/2270, to the overload limit for a sinusoidal signal
at 1 kHz.
† Type 2250/2270 Low Frequency set to Extended or Very Low.
303
Analyzer Parameters
Detailed specifications for the analyzer together with the different microphones are available.
Please contact your local Brüel & Kjær representative if you need more information.
The analyzer has correction filters to optimize the frequency response of each microphone. The
relevant filter is automatically applied when you select the microphone for input, be it via the top
socket, or the rear input socket.
Note for Microphone Type 4193 and Type 4964

Microphone Type 4193 is delivered with the Adaptor UC-0211; for Microphone Type 4964 it is
ordered separately.
Adaptor UC-0211 should only be used when measurements are made on signals that contain
components at frequencies below 1 Hz that should be included in the measurement. This is only
for Low Frequency set to Very Low.
It is not recommended to use the adaptor for other signals or settings because it reduces the
dynamic range significantly.
305
Appendix D
Preferences
This appendix describes the unique set of parameters that can be set for each user on the analyzer.
D.1 Display Settings

For each colour scheme select the optimum choice of brightness for the traffic light and whether
the backlight for the pushbuttons should be on or off. In addition, you can also change the
number of decimal places on your dB results readout
Table D.1 Display settings
Colour Scheme Arcade Select between five colour schemes, one optimized for
Alhambra outdoor use in bright conditions and one optimized for very
Indoor dark conditions
Outdoor
Night
Traffic Light Brightness Off

Low
Normal
High
Key Backlight Off

On
Backlight Brightness Minimum Select backlight brightness using the backlight icon at
Level 2 the bottom of the screen. Maximum level uses the most
Level 3 power
Level 4
Level 5
Maximum
Resolution of Readings Normal dB: Number of decimal places for values displayed:
Normal: 1; Extended: 2.
Extended Engineering: Number of digits for values displayed: Normal:
3; Extended: 4.
✐Please note: This setting is for display only and has no

effect on the measurement precision or resolution
D.2 Power Settings

Table D.2 Power settings
Backlight Dim After 30 sec. Select optimum value for full backlight on (brightness
After 1 min. determined by Backlight Brightness) before the backlight
After 2 min. is dimmed (if analyzer is left untouched)
After 5 min.
After 10 min
Never
Turn off Backlight After 1 min. G1 – 3 analyzers only: Select optimum value for how long
After 2 min. the backlight is dimmed before it is switched off
After 5 min.
After 10 min.
After 30 min.
Never
Standby After 1 min. Select optimum value for ‘on’ period before the analyzer is
After 2 min. set automatically to standby
After 5 min.
After 10 min.
After 30 min.
Never
Ext. Power Charge battery G4 analyzers only: Determines whether the analyzer
only automatically switches on and charges the battery when
Switch on and connected to external power or only charges.
charge
G1 – 3 analyzers: This is determined by a small, switch at the
back of the analyzer. Remove the internal battery pack to
access the switch
✐Please note: If the analyzer is externally powered, then the settings will be ignored.
APPENDIX D
307
Preferences
D.3 Regional Settings

Table D.3 Regional settings
Decimal Point . Select your preferred decimal point

,
Date separator – Select your preferred date separator

/
.
Date Format yyyy-MM-dd Select your preferred date format: HH = 24 hour, hh = 12

HH:mm:ss hour, XX = AM or PM
dd-MM-yyyy
HH:mm:ss
MM-dd-yyyy
HH:mm:ss
yy-MM-dd
hh:mm:ss XX
dd-MM-yy
hh:mm:ss XX
MM-dd-yy
hh:mm:ss XX
Time Zone GMT– 12 Select the time zone of your region

GMT
GMT+13
Language English, ... A number of different languages are available for the
analyzer.
G1 – 3 analyzers: Select your preferred language – if it is not

on the list, then it might be available for installation using
BZ-5503
G4 analyzers: All languages are installed
Keyboard United Kingdom, 33 different keyboards. Select your preferred keyboard

...
Wind Speed Unit SI or US/UK Select SI for m/s or US/UK for mph
Temperature Unit SI or US/UK Select SI for °C or US/UK for °F
Dimension Unit SI or US/UK Select SI for m or US/UK for ft
Vibration Unit SI or US/UK Select SI for m/s2 or US/UK for g

D.4 Users and Projects Settings

Table D.4 Users and projects settings
Multi-user Enabled Set to Enabled to enable the Multi-user facility
Disabled Set to Disabled if you are the only user
Auto-naming of Yes Select Yes for automatically naming projects from the start
Projects No date of the project as Year, Month, Date in the format
YYMMDD, (for example, 051112 as 2005, November 12th)
Select No for using the name defined in the Project Name

Prefix parameter
Project Name Prefix Text string Prefix for automatically generated project name. Maximum
8 characters
D.5 Headphone Settings

Table D.5 Headphone settings
Listen to signal No In addition to the commentary annotations,

Input X-weighted you can listen to the input signal for
Input C-weighted monitoring purposes.
Input Z-weighted
Select one of the A-weighted, B-weighted,
C-weighted or Z-weighted signals.
✐Please note:
• The frequency weighting of the signal you
listen to can be selected independently of
the frequency weighting of the
measurement, the signal at the output
socket and the signal used for signal
recording
• X = frequency weighting A or B. ‘A’
requires that Broadband (excl. Peak) is
set to AC or AZ. ‘B’ requires that
Broadband (excl. Peak) is set to BC or BZ
APPENDIX D
309
Preferences
Table D.5 (Cont.) Headphone settings
Automatic Gain Control On To ease identification of sound sources, the

Off gain can be automatically adjusted to keep
the average level within a 40 dB range.
When playing back the recorded signal, you
will then hear clearly the whole signal
content, whether the level has been 20 dB or
140 dB.
Set Automatic Gain Control to On to
convert the signal at the headphone output.
Set Automatic Gain Control to Off for
listening to the signal with a fixed gain
Gain for Meas.Signal – 80.0 dB to 60.0 dB for Key in a gain value (0.1 dB resolution) for the
Automatic Gain Control set measurement input signal. Use ‘@’ to assign
to Off the new value for immediate response at the
output – or use the up/down navigation
– 60.0 dB to 0.0 dB for keys to increment/decrement the value in
Automatic Gain Control set steps of 1 dB.
to On
✐Please note: 0 dB means 1 V output for
1 V input (Automatic Gain Control set to
Off)
Gain for Annotations – 60 dB to 60.0 dB Key in a gain value (1.5 dB resolution) for the
commentary annotations. Use ‘@’ to assign
the new value for immediate response at the
output – or use the up/down navigation
keys to increment/decrement the value in
steps of 1.5 dB.
✐Please note: Maximum gain is limited to

0 dB for 16-bit wav-files
D.6 Printer Settings

Table D.6 Printer settings
Printer Used None Select None if you do not have a printer connected to the
analyzer.
MPS
Select MPS for a Mobile Pro Spectrum thermal printer from
AM-TECH.
PCL
Select PCL for a printer accepting PCL printer language.
PCL Inkjet Select PCL Inkjet for an inkjet printer accepting PCL
language.
PCL Laser
Select PCL Laser for a laser printer accepting PCL language.
Seiko DPU Select Seiko DPU for the DPU-S245 or DPU-S445 thermal
printer model from Seiko Instruments.
See Chapter 8 for more details
Top Margin 0.0 to 20.0 cm Use Top Margin to position the print on the paper
Left Margin 0.0 to 20.0 cm Use Left Margin to position the print on the paper
Width 1.0 to 15.0 cm Use Width to set the size of the print
Height 1.4 to 20.0 cm Use Height to set the size of the print
D.7 Modem/DynDNS Settings

Table D.7 ModemDynDNS settings
Modem Disabled Set to Disabled if you do not have a modem

connected; if you have connected a modem, but
GPRS/EDGE/HSPA Dialup only want to use the SMS facility of the modem; or,
when you physically connect or disconnect the
modem.
Set to GPRS/EDGE/HSPA Dialup if you have a GPRS/

EDGE/HSPA modem connected and you want the
analyzer to be connected to the Internet.
See Chapter 7 and Chapter 8 for more details

APPENDIX D
311
Preferences
Table D.7 (Cont.) ModemDynDNS settings
Dialup Networking
APN Character string APN is an identifier required by the network

(Access Point Name) operator. Examples are ‘Internet’, ‘public’ and
‘www.vodaphone.de’. Please consult your network
operator
User Name Character string Set User Name as required by your network
operator. Typically this can be left empty
Password Character string Set Password as required by your network

operator. Typically this can be left empty
Domain Character string Set Domain as required by your network operator.

Typically this can be left empty
DynDNS
Active No Set to Yes to make the update of the IP address at

DynDNS.com active.
Yes
Set to No if you do not use this service
Hostname Character string Set the Hostname defined in your account at

DynDNS.com
User Name Character string Set the User Name for your account at
DynDNS.com
Password Character string Set the Password for your account at DynDNS.com.
The password will be displayed until you press
Enter, then it will be replaced by ‘***’
D.8 Network Settings

Table D.8 Network settings
Location Up to 20 Use Location to specify a text identifying the analyzer or

characters location of the analyzer. The Location will be displayed on
the PC together with the serial number of the analyzer when
browsing for analyzers in BZ-5503, and when connected
using the online display
Table D.8 (Cont.) Network settings
Network Connection None Set to None if no Ethernet CF Card is present in CF Socket

(Type 2250 only).
CF Socket
Set to CF Socket if Ethernet CF Card is present in CF Socket.
LAN Socket
Set to LAN Socket if you want to use the built-in LAN Socket
(Type 2270 only)
Set IP Address Automatically Set to Automatically to obtain an IP address from a DHCP

server. If no server is available, then a Link-local address will
Manually be set.
Set to Manually to set the IP address, Subnet Mask, Default

Gateway, Preferred DNS and Alternate DNS manually
IP Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx The IP address of the analyzer.
Subnet Mask xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx The Subnet Mask combined with the IP address identifies
the network segment the analyzer is on.
Default Gateway xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Address to a gateway for routing to another network.
Preferred DNS xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx The IP address of the primary DNS server
Alternate DNS xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx The IP address of the secondary DNS server
Name Up to 32 Name (SSID) of network you want to connect to. Update the
characters name either by entering a name directly, or by tapping on
the Available Networks and selecting a name from the list
APPENDIX D
313
Preferences
Table D.8 (Cont.) Network settings
Security Open Select security as required by the network.
Shared Open and Shared are for WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy)
Infrastructure mode.
WPA PSK
WPA2 PSK WPA PSK is for WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) with Pre-
shared Key (also called Personal mode).
WPA2 PSK – WPA2 is an enhanced version of WPA.
✐Please note: G1–3 only; automatically set for G4

Encryption None Select Encryption as required by the network.
WEP Enabled None is for Open security.

AES Enabled
WEP Enabled is for Open and Shared security.
TKIP Enabled
AES Enabled and TKIP Enabled are for WPA PSK and
WPA2 PSK.

Encryption Key Up to 32 Insert the encryption key required by the network. The key
characters will be displayed until you press Enter, then it will be
replaced by ‘***’.

D.9 Measurement Partner Cloud Settings

Table D.9 MP Cloud settings
Account Logged in Select Logged in to log in to your cloud account. The

analyzer will stay logged in even if it loses Internet access.
Logged out
Select Logged out to log out from your MP Cloud account
and remove MP Cloud account information from the
analyzer. No more data will be uploaded to the MP Cloud
account. You must pair the analyzer with an account to log
in again
Archive Cloud folder Projects saved in your Cloud folder will be uploaded to this
archive in your MP Cloud account. The archive will be
created if it does not exist already
Action after upload Delete project Use this setting to control whether projects will be deleted
from the memory device or moved to an "uploaded" folder
Move project on the memory device when securely uploaded to MP
Cloud. If you select Move project , you will need to maintain
the memory device manually to prevent it from filling up
APPENDIX D
315
Preferences
D.10 Notification Settings

Table D.10 Notification settings
Notification Disabled Set to Disabled to disable notifications.

E-mail
SMS Set to E-mail to send notifications as email when an alarm
occurs.
Set to SMS to send notifications as SMS when an alarm

occurs.
See section 8.4 for the list of alarm types
Daily Status Enable Set to Enable to send a notification once per day
Disable
Send at 00:00:00 to Determines the time of day to send the daily status
23:59:59 notification
Alarm Settings
Internal Battery High A notification is sent, if internal battery enters the set state
Low
Critical
Trigger Input Voltage –20.0 to +20.0 V A notification is sent, if voltage level at trigger input drops to
or below this setting.
✐Please note:This alarm requires Setup > Input >

Trigger Input is set to Voltage for Monitoring
Disk Space 0% to 100% A notification is sent, if free disk space drops to or below this
setting
Level Trigger Events Disabled A notification is sent, if Level Trigger (specified in

Enabled Setup > Level Trigger in Logging Software or in
Setup > Triggers in Enhanced Logging Software) is
exceeded
Report Level Disable Set to Enable to send a notification when the measured LAeq
Notifications Enable for the latest Report Period exceeds Report Threshold
Level (the functionality is only available when running the
Enhanced Logging template)
Table D.10 (Cont.) Notification settings
Report Threshold Level –100.0 dB to A notification is sent when the measured LAeq (for
200.0 dB Microphone input) or Linear (for Acceleration and Direct
input) for the latest Report Period exceeds the set Report
Threshold Level.
✐Please note:
• If you specify a very low Report Threshold Level you will
receive a notification at the end of each Report Period
• For 2-channel Enhanced Logging, the Report Threshold
Level is for Ch.1
Report Threshold –100.0 dB to A notification is sent when the measured Ch.2 LAeq (for
Level 2 200.0 dB Microphone input) or Linear (for Acceleration and Direct
input) for the latest Report Period exceeds the set Report
Threshold Level 2. Only used in 2-ch Enhanced Logging.
Email
To Character string The email address of the recipient of the email.

Example: recipient@gmail.com
SMTP Character string Name of SMTP (simple mail transfer protocol) server.*
Examples:
gmail: smtp.gmail.com
hotmail: smtp.live.com
SMTP Port 0 to 65 535 Port used by SMTP server.*

Typically this is 25, but for Gmail™/Google™ Mail and
Microsoft® Hotmail® it is 587
SSL/TLS No Secure Socket Layer/Transport Layer Security.

Yes Set to Yes if required by email provider*, otherwise No. SSL/
TLS is required by Gmail and Hotmail
Account Character string The Account is typically the email address used for sending
the email.*
Examples:
myaddress@gmail.com
myaddress@hotmail.com
APPENDIX D
317
Preferences
Table D.10 (Cont.) Notification settings
User Name Character string The User Name is typically the email address used for
sending the email.*
Examples:
myaddress@gmail.com
myaddress@hotmail.com
If the email account is part of a domain, then it might be

necessary to specify the domain as part of the user name.
Example: Domain\UserName
Password Character string Insert the password required for the account.* The password
will be displayed until you press Enter, then it will be
replaced by ‘***’
SMS
Active No Set to Yes to activate the first phone number, otherwise set
Yes to No
Name Character string Name identifying first phone number
Phone Number Number The number of the first SMS recipient
Active No Set to Yes to activate the second phone number, otherwise

Yes set to No
Name Character string Name identifying second phone number
Phone Number Number The number of the second SMS recipient

* Please consult your email provider
D.11 Remote Access Settings

Table D.11 Remote access settings
Web Server Disabled Set Web Server to Enabled to enable display and control of
the analyzer on a web page – see section 7.4.
Enabled
Set to Disabled to disable the Web server functionality
BZ-5503 Login Required Yes Set to Yes to require user name and password for access to
the instrument from BZ-5503 MPS or from the Type 2250/
No 2270 SDK. Set to No for free access to the instrument.
✐Please note: If set to Yes, then you require BZ-5503

version 4.1 or higher to access the instrument
User Name Character string Define the user name required for full access to the web
page, that is, view and control of the analyzer, and for access
from BZ-5503 MPS and Type 2250/2270 SDK.
Default: admin
Password Character string Define the password required for full access to the web
page, and for access from BZ-5503 MPS and Type 2250/
2270 SDK. The password will be displayed until you press
Enter, then it will be replaced by ‘***’.
Default: admin
Guest Login Required Yes Set to Yes to require user name and password for login to
the guest Web page.
No
Set to No for free access to the guest Web page
Guest User Name Character string Define the user name required for limited access to the Web
page, that is view of the analyzer only.
Default: guest
Guest Password Character string Define the password required for limited access to the Web
page. The password will be displayed until you press Enter,
then it will be replaced by ‘***’.
Default: guest
✐Please note: The remote access parameters are common to all users of the analyzer.
APPENDIX D
319
Preferences
D.12 Image Settings (Type 2270 only)

Table D.12 Image settings
Image Control View Finder Set to View Finder to use the Viewfinder together with the
Manual Event pushbutton to capture an image. The image
Manual Event can then be saved or rejected after capture.
Set to Manual Event to capture and save the image each time
you press the Manual Event pushbutton
D.13 NMT Server Settings (Hardware Version 4 only)

For setup of NMT Server communication used by Noise Monitoring Software BZ-7232, see User
Manual for Noise Monitoring Terminal Types 3639-A, B and C, BE 1818.
321
Appendix E
Glossary
A-weighting filter: Frequency weighting corresponding approximately to the 40 dB equal loudness

curve, that is to say, the human ear’s response at low to medium sound levels. It is by
far the most commonly applied frequency weighting and is used for all levels of
sound.
Avg. RPM The average RPM over the total averaging time.
aWx: Time-averaged (RMS) weighted acceleration value, averaged over the entire
measurement period with frequency weighting Wx.
aWx,1s Maximum time-weighted acceleration value during the latest second with frequency
weighting Wx and 1 s exponential time constant.
B-weighting filter: Frequency weighting corresponding approximately to the 70 dB equal loudness

curve, that is to say, the human ear’s response at medium sound levels.
C-weighting filter: Frequency weighting corresponding to the 100 dB equal loudness curve, that is to
say, the human ear’s response at fairly high sound levels. Mainly used when assessing
peak values of high sound pressure levels.
Crest Factor Crest factor given by Peak/Linear (based on absolute acceleration values) over the
entire measurement period, calculated for acceleration (or direct) signals only.
Criterion Level: Criterion Level is the maximum averaged sound level allowed for an 8-hour period.
Used for calculation of Dose, ProjDose, DoseUQ and ProjDoseUQ, where U = F or S
and Q = 4, 5 or 6 dB.
Decibel (dB): The measurement unit for expressing the relative intensity of sound. A direct
application of linear scales (in Pa) to the measurement of sound pressure leads to
large and unwieldy numbers. As the ear responds logarithmically rather than linearly
to stimuli, it is more practical to express acoustic parameters as a logarithmic ratio of
the measured value to a reference value. This logarithmic ratio is called a decibel or
dB. The advantage of using dB can be clearly seen in the below illustration. Here, the
linear scale with its large numbers is converted into a manageable scale from 0 dB at
the threshold of hearing (20 µPa) to 130 dB at the threshold of pain (∼100 Pa).
Our hearing covers a surprisingly wide range of sound pressures – a ratio of over a
million to one. The dB scale makes the numbers manageable.
323
Glossary
Dose, ProjDose: The Noise Dose is the equivalent averaged A-weighted Noise Level (taking the
Threshold Level into account) using Exchange Rate = 3 for an 8 hour period
(reference duration) relative to the maximum allowed (the Criterion
Level) – expressed in percentage.
Example: If the Criterion Level is 85 dB and a person is exposed to a constant sound

pressure level of 85 dB for 8 hours, then the Dose is 100%. A constant level 88 dB
results in a Dose of 200% and a constant level of 82 dB results in a dose of 50%.
The Projected Dose is the Noise Dose based on measurement duration less than 8
hours, assuming the sound level for the remaining time stays the same.
DoseUQ, ProjDoseUQ: The Noise Dose is the averaged A-weighted Noise Level (taking the Threshold Level
into account) with Time Weighting U = F or S and Exchange Rate Q = 4, 5 or 6 for an
8 hour period (reference duration) relative to the maximum allowed (the Criterion
Level) – expressed in percentage.
Example: If the Criterion Level is 90 dB and a person is exposed to a constant average

sound level of 90 dB for 8 hours with Time Weighting S and Exchange Rate 5, then the
DoseS5 is 100%. A constant level 95 dB results in a DoseS5 of 200% and a constant
level of 85 dB results in a doseS5 of 50%.
The Projected DoseS5 is the Noise DoseS5 based on measurement duration less than
8 hours, assuming the sound level for the remaining time stays the same.
E: Sound Exposure is the energy of the A-weighted sound calculated over the
measurement time. The unit is Pa2h.
Exchange Rate: Exchange Rate is the increase in noise level that corresponds to a doubling of the
noise level. The Exchange Rate is used for calculation of LavUQ, TWA, TWAv, DoseUQ
and ProjDoseUQ, where U = F or S and Q = Exchange Rate: 4, 5 or 6 dB.
✐Please note: LAeq is always based on an Exchange Rate = 3.
Exposure Time: Exposure Time is the actual time that a person is exposed to noise during a workday.
Used for calculation of Lep,d and Lep,d,v.
Fast Max: Maximum time-weighted acceleration, velocity, displacement or voltage level

measured with Linear frequency weighting and Fast time weighting. It is the highest
level occurring during the measurement time.
Fast Min: Minimum time-weighted acceleration, velocity, displacement or voltage level

measured with Linear frequency weighting and Fast time weighting. It is the lowest
‘F’, ‘S’ or ‘I’ time A time weighting (sometimes called a ‘time constant’) defines how the exponential
weighting: averaging in root-mean-square (RMS) measurement is done. It defines how heavily
fluctuating sound pressure variations are smoothed or averaged to allow useful
readings. The standards define three time weightings: F (Fast), S (Slow) and I
(Impulse). Most measurements are carried out using the F time weighting, which uses
a 125 ms time constant.
Frequency: The number of pressure variations per second. Frequency is measured in hertz (Hz).
The normal hearing for a healthy young person ranges from approximately 20 Hz to
20000 Hz (20 kHz).
Frequency weighting: Our hearing is less sensitive at very low and very high frequencies. In order to account
for this, weighting filters can be applied when measuring sound. The most commonly
used weighting is the ‘A-weighting’, which approximates the human ear’s response
to low – medium noise levels.
A ‘C-weighting’ curve is also used, particularly when evaluating very loud or low-
frequency sounds.
Lp (dB)
0
A
C
–20
–40
–60
Frequency
10 20 50 100 200 500 1k 2k 5k 10k 20k (Hz)
000055
G-weighting: Frequency weighting used for infrasound measurements.
Inst. RPM The current RPM value.

325
Glossary
KBF: Instantaneous time-averaged acceleration level with Wm weighting and with 125 ms
exponential time constant.
✐Please note: Wm weighting of the acceleration signal corresponds to using HKB

weighting on the velocity signal, as defined in DIN 45669–1.
KBFmax: Maximum of the KBF values.
KBFTm: Average of the values of KBFmaxi, where each KBFmaxi has been measured during 30 s.
LAE: Sound Exposure Level – sometimes abbreviated SEL and sometimes called Single
Event Level, is the Sound Exposure expressed as a level. The letter ‘A’ denotes that the
A-weighting has been included.
LAeq: A widely used noise parameter that calculates a constant level of noise with the same
energy content as the varying acoustic noise signal being measured. The letter ‘A’
denotes that the A-weighting has been included and ‘eq’ indicates that an equivalent
level has been calculated. Hence, LAeq is the A-weighted equivalent continuous noise
level.
LXeq,T,mov and Moving (or sliding) X-weighted average (equivalent continuous noise level) for the
ΔLeq,T,mov: latest T minutes. Updated every second during measurement. The parameter can be
used to monitor the average noise level within T minutes, for example, to monitor
that the noise level during a music event doesn't exceed a certain limit at any 15
minutes of observation time during the event.
The value is equal to LXeq at the start of the measurement as long as the elapsed time
less than or equal to T. Two values with frequency weighting X = A and C are
measured simultaneously. ΔLeq,T,mov is calculated as the difference between
LCeq,T,mov and LAeq,T,mov.
LXeq,T,mov,max and The maximum of the LXeq,T,mov values during the measurement, only taking values
ΔLeq,T,mov,max: into account where elapsed time is greater than or equal to T. Two values with
frequency weighting X = A and C are measured simultaneously. ΔLeq,T,mov,max is
calculated as the difference between LCeq,T,mov,max and LAeq,T,mov,max.
LAF: The instantaneous time-weighted sound level, Lp, is available at any time. ‘A’ denotes
that the A-frequency weighting is used. ‘F’ denotes that the Fast time-weighting is
used.
LAFmax: Maximum time-weighted sound level measured with A-frequency weighting and
Fast time weighting. It is the highest level of environmental noise occurring during
the measurement time. It is often used in conjunction with another noise parameter
(for example LAeq) to ensure a single noise event does not exceed a limit.
LAFmin: Minimum time-weighted sound level measured with A-frequency weighting and
Fast time weighting. It is the lowest level of environmental noise occurring during the
measurement time (time resolution is 1 s).
LAF90.0: The noise level exceeded for 90% of the measurement period with A-frequency
weighting and Fast time weighting. The level is based on statistical analysis of a
parameter (LAF or LAS) sampled at 10 ms intervals into 0.2 dB wide classes. The
percentage is user-definable.
An analysis of the statistical distributions of sound levels is a useful tool when
assessing noise. The analysis not only provides useful information about the
variability of noise levels, but is also prominent in many standards as the basis for
assessing background noise. For example, LAF90 is used as an indicator of
background noise levels while LAF10 or LAF5 are sometimes used to indicate the level
of noise events.
LA90.0: The noise level exceeded for 90% of the measurement period with A-frequency
weighting. The level is based on statistical analysis of LAeq sampled at 1 s intervals
into 0.2 dB wide classes. The percentage is user-definable.
LAF(SPL): The Sound Pressure Level (maximum time-weighted sound level during the latest
second) is available at any time. 'A' denotes that the A frequency weighting is used.
‘F’ denotes that the Fast time-weighting is used.
LAFTeq: Taktmaximal Mittelungspegel as defined by DIN 45641. LAFTeq has also been called
LAFTm5 or LATm5F.
LavUQ: Average Sound Level with Time Weighting U = F or S and Exchange Rate Q = 4, 5 or
6. This is a widely used occupational health noise parameter in the USA,
corresponding to the LAeq used otherwise.
327
Glossary
LCpeak: Maximum peak sound level during a measurement. ‘C’ denotes that the C frequency
weighting is used. Used for assessing possible damages to human hearing caused by
very high short-duration noise levels.
LCpeak,1s: Maximum peak sound level during the latest second – is available at any time. ‘C’
denotes that the C frequency weighting is used. Used for monitoring the peak levels.
Lden, Lday, Levening, Noise Indicators for describing the annoyance due to exposure to environmental
Lnight, Ln: noise.
Lden (day-evening-night noise indicator), Lday (day-noise indicator), Levening
(evening-noise indicator) and Lnight (night-noise indicator) are defined by the
European Union. They are based on LAeq over different periods: Lday over the day
period from 7:00 to 19:00, Levening over the evening period from 19:00 to 23:00, Lnight
over the night period from 23:00 to 7:00 and Lden over the whole day with a penalty
of 5 dB(A) for the evening period and a penalty of 10 dB(A) for the night period.
Ldn (day-night level) is defined by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) in the
USA as a descriptor of noise level based on LAeq over the whole day with a penalty of
10 dB(A) for night time noise (from 22:00 to 7.00).
Lep,d: The Daily Noise Exposure Level is the average A-weighted noise exposure level for a
nominal 8-hour working day. Lep,d is also known as LEX,8h. Lep,d is calculated from the
measured LAE, the setting of Exposure Time and a Reference time of 8 h. Used for
assessing the noise exposed to a worker during a working day – in accordance with
ISO standards.
The European Noise at Work Directive 2003/10/EC defines the following limit and
action values:
Exposure Limit Value: 87 dB
Upper Exposure Action Value: 85 dB
Lower Exposure Action Value: 80 dB
Lep,d,v: The Daily Noise Exposure Level for a user-defined reference period. Lep,d,v is
calculated from the measured LAE and the settings of Exposure Time and Reference
Time. Used, for example, for calculating a Weekly Noise Exposure Level, by setting the
Reference Time to 40 h.
Loudness, Loudness Loudness is the subjective judgement of intensity of a sound by humans. Loudness
Level: depends upon the sound pressure and frequency of the stimulus and whether the
sound field is diffuse- or free-field. The unit is the Sone.
Loudness Level = 10*log2(Loudness) + 40. The unit is the Phone.
The Zwicker method of calculation of stationary loudness based on 1/3-octave
measurements is described in ISO 532 -1975, Method B.
Linear Weighting: ‘Linear’ frequency weighting is without any frequency weighting, that is, equivalent
to LIN, Z or FLAT.
Linear: Time-averaged (RMS) weighted acceleration (or voltage) value, averaged over the
entire measurement period with frequency weighting Linear.
LGeq: The G-weighted equivalent continuous noise level – used to assess infrasound.
LGpeak: Maximum peak sound level with G-weighting.
LG10: Instantaneous time-weighted sound level with G-weighting and 10 s exponential

time constant.
LG10max: Maximum time-weighted sound level measured with G-weighting and 10 s

LG10min: Minimum time-weighted sound level measured with G-weighting and 10 s

LW: aW expressed in dB with reference 10–6 m/s2.
MTVV Maximum of the aW,1s values.

329
Glossary
#CPeaks(>140dB): The number of 1 s peak sound levels over 140 dB. ‘C’ denotes that the C frequency
weighting is used.
Three peak counters are available – one with a user-definable value (set to 140 dB by
default), one with 137 dB and one with 135 dB value. Used for assessing possible
damage to human hearing caused by very high, short-duration, noise levels.
The European Noise at Work Directive 2003/10/EC defines the following limit and
action values:
Limit Value: 140 dB corresponding to 200 Pa
Upper Action Value: 137 dB corresponding to 140 Pa
Lower Action Value: 135 dB corresponding to 112 Pa.
NC, NC Decisive Band: Noise Criteria is used to rate steady-state continuous noise in a room from all types
of equipment, including fans, mixing boxes, diffusers, etc.
The rating is determined from 1/1-octave LZeq spectra compared with NC curves
(based on equal loudness curves). The NC rating is the value of the rating curve that
falls entirely above the measured data. The Decisive Band is the frequency band
‘touching’ the NC curve.
Defined in ANSI 12.2–2008
NCB, NCB Balanced Noise Criteria is a refinement of NC.

Classification, The rating is determined by the SIL value and gets the Classification (R) for Rumble,
Rumble, Hiss, RV: if the spectrum is rich in low frequency sound (16 Hz to 500 Hz), the Classification (H)
for Hiss, if the spectrum is rich in high frequency sound (1 kHz to 8 kHz), or the
Classification (RV) for Vibration and Rattle if the spectrum at low frequencies (16 Hz
to 63 Hz) is likely to produce audible rattling in lightweight building elements.
The details of the NCB rating are defined in ANSI S12.2-1995.
NR, NR Decisive Band: Noise Rating rates noise levels at public or private indoor areas.
The rating is determined from 1/1-octave LZeq spectra compared with NR curves
(based on equal loudness curves). The NR rating is the value of the highest NR curve
‘touched’ by the measured spectrum. The Decisive Band is the frequency band
‘touching’ the NR curve.
Defined in ISO R1996(1971).
Occupational Health Typical Setup Parameter settings for Occupational Health measurements in
Standards: accordance with various standards:
OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health Administration) – 29 CFR 1910.95
MSHA (Mine Safety and Health Administration) – 30 CFR 62.0 UMHRPEL
DOD (Department of Defence) – DoD Instruction 6055.12
ACGIH (American Conference of Government Industrial
Hygienists) – DHHS Pub 98-126
ISO – UK Noise at Work Regulations SI 1989/1790 amended by SI 1992/2966 and
SI 1996/341
See the table below, but please also check your local legislation.
Setup Parameters OSHA MSHA DOD ACGIH ISO

Broadband (excl. Peak) A A A A A
Broadband Peak Z Z Z Z C
Exposure Time N/A N/A N/A 8:00:00 8:00:00
Ref. Time (preset) 8:00:00 8:00:00 8:00:00 8:00:00 8:00:00
Ref. Time (user-definable) 40:00:00 40:00:00 40:00:00 40:00:00 40:00:00
Threshold Level 80 80 80 80 70
Criterion Level 90 90 85 85 85, 90
PeaksOver Level* 140 140 140 140 140
Exchange Rate for Lav 5 5 4 N/A N/A
Weighting for Lav S S S N/A N/A
* This is user-definable – the two other ‘PeaksOver Level’ parameters are preset to 137 and 135 dB respectively
Peak Maximum peak of the acceleration, velocity, displacement signal or voltage input
with frequency weighting Linear.
Peak-Peak The real peak-to-peak value (difference between the most positive value of the signal
and the most negative value of the signal). Available for Displacement only.
PeakWx Maximum peak of the acceleration value with frequency weighting Wx.
Reference Time: Reference Time is used for calculation of Sound Exposure Level Lep,d,v or Time
Weighed Average TWAv with a reference time other than 8 hours.
331
Glossary
RC, RC Classification: The Room Criterion Mark II is primarily a diagnostic tool for HVAC noise in spaces.
The RC curve is chosen as the value of the PSIL, rounded to the nearest integer, in the
range 25 ≤ RC ≤ 50.
The RC classification is the combination of the Sound Quality Descriptor and the
Probable Occupant Evaluation.
The sound quality descriptor can display the values (N) for neutral, where no
frequency range is dominant; (LF) for rumble, where the low-frequency range
(16 – 63 Hz) is dominant; (MF) for roar, where the mid-frequency range
(125 – 500 Hz) is dominant; and (HF) for hiss, where the high-frequency range
(1000 – 4000 Hz) is dominant. Furthermore, there are two variations of (LF) if the
spectrum in the low-frequency range is likely to introduce vibrations: (LFVA), where
there are clearly perceptible vibrations and (LFVB), where there are moderately
perceptible vibrations.
The probable occupant evaluation describes how an occupant responds to a
spectrum and can have the values Acceptable, Marginal or Objectionable.
Described in the ASHRAE Handbook – HVAC 2011 and ANSI 12.2–2008. Room
Criteria is for rating room noise.
SIL, PSIL, SIL3: SIL (Speech Interference Level) is the arithmetic average of the 500 Hz, 1 kHz, 2 kHz
and 4 kHz octave band levels.
PSIL (Preferred Speech Interference Level) is the arithmetic average of the 500 Hz,
1 kHz and 2 kHz octave band levels.
Used for evaluating the interference of noise upon speech communication.
SIL3 (Speech Interference Level based on highest 3 octaves) is the arithmetic average
of the 1 kHz, 2 kHz and 4 kHz octave band levels.
✐Please note: Though SIL, PSIL and SIL3 are defined for octave band levels they are
also calculated for 1/3-octave band levels by summing the power values in the three
bands within each octave before doing the averaging.
Slow Max Maximum time-weighted acceleration, velocity, displacement or voltage level

measured with Linear frequency weighting and Slow time weighting. It is the highest
Slow Min Minimum time-weighted acceleration, velocity, displacement or voltage level

measured with Linear frequency weighting and Slow time weighting. It is the lowest
Sound: Any pressure variation that the human ear can detect. Just like dominoes, a wave
motion is set off when an element sets the nearest particle of air into motion. This
motion gradually spreads to adjacent air particles further away from the source.
Depending on the medium, sound extends and affects a greater area (propagates) at
different speeds. In air, sound propagates at a speed of approximately 340 m/s. In
liquids and solids, the propagation velocity is greater – 1500 m/s in water and
5000 m/s in steel.
Sound level The level in decibels of the pressure variation of a sound. See also decibel.
or sound pressure
level:
Std.Dev. The Std.Dev. is calculated as the Standard Deviation of the noise samples used for
statistics. This is either LAF or LAS sampled every 10 ms, or LAeq sampled every second.
TCpeak: The time when the peak sound level occurred. ‘C’ denotes that the C frequency
weighting is used.
Threshold Level: Any sound levels below the threshold level do not contribute to the Dose
measurement data. For example, if you set the threshold level to 80, any sound levels
below 80 dB are not taking into consideration by the analyzer, when it calculates
doses and time weighted averages.
Used for calculation of Dose, ProjDose, TWA, TWAv DoseSQ, ProjDoseSQ.
TWA: The Time Weighted Average is the average A-weighted sound level for a nominal 8-
hour working day with Time Weighting S and Exchange Rate 5. TWA is calculated
from the measured LavS5 (taking Threshold Level into account) and a Reference time
of 8 h. Mainly used in the USA for assessing the noise exposure for a worker during
a working day.
TWAv: The Time Weighted Average for a user-defined reference period. TWAv is calculated
from the measured LavS5 (taking Threshold Level into account) and the Reference
Time. Used, for example, for calculating a Weekly Time Averaged Level by setting the
Reference Time to 40 h.
333
Glossary
Underrange Immediate underrange indicates that the broadband sound level is below
the lower limit of the Linear Operating Range and is indicated separately for the two
selectable frequency weightings and for the two channels (Type 2270 only).
Immediate underrange is only indicated on the screen. No underrange information
is saved with the final result of the measurement.
In case of an underrange indication (2-channel measurements, High Range only),
change to Low Range.
The underrange indication is implemented as required by ISO 61672–1:2013 and
does not account for the influence of self-generated noise from the microphone
because the specifications for the lower limit of the Linear Operating Range apply for
measurements of electrical signal inserted into the preamplifier through the
applicable input device. This makes the underrange indication a dubious indicator of
the quality of the measurement, especially on the more sensitive ranges.
Example 1: Und. A – Immediate underrange for the A-weighted levels
Example 2: U1 AC – Immediate underrange in channel 1 for the A- and C-weighted
levels
Wx Frequency weighting as defined in ISO 8041:2005:

Wb: For vertical whole-body vibration, z-axis, seated, standing or recumbent person,
based on ISO 2631–4
Wc: For horizontal whole-body vibration, x-axis, seat back, seated person, based on
ISO 2631–1
Wd: For horizontal whole-body vibration, x- or y-axis, seated, standing for
recumbent person, based on ISO 2631–1
We: For rotational whole-body vibration, all directions, seated person, based on
ISO 2631–1
Wh: For hand-arm vibration, all directions, based on ISO 5349–1
Wj: For vertical head vibration, x-axis recumbent person, based on ISO 2631–1
Wk: For vertical whole-body vibration, z-axis seated, standing or recumbent person,
based on ISO 2631–1
Wm: For whole-body vibration in buildings, all directions, based on ISO 2631–2
Wxb: The band-limiting part of the Wb, Wc, Wd, We, Wj or Wk filter
Whb: The band-limiting part of the Wh filter
Wmb: The band-limiting part of the Wm filter
Z-weighting: ‘Zero’ frequency weighting is without any frequency weighting, that is, equivalent to
Linear, LIN or FLAT.
335
Index
Symbols A
#CPeaks(>140dB).................................................. 327 About Icon.............................................................103
About Menu..............................................................3
Numerics Accelerometer Icon.................................................41
1/1- or 1/3-octave Frequency Analysis ................. 115 Accept Pushbutton....................................................5
1/3-octave Method ............................................... 171 Accredited Calibration ..........................................113
2647-D .................................................................. 296 Accredited/Traceable Calibration............................58
2-channel Option BZ-7229.................................... 185 Acoustic Calibration ................................................51
2-channel Option BZ-7229 (Type 2270 Only).......... 35 Adaptor AO-0657 ....................................................86
4184-A .........................................212, 218, 295, 300 Adaptor for Standard Tripod .....................................6
4189.............................................212, 218, 295, 300 Adaptor UC-0211 ..................................................301
4190.............................................212, 218, 295, 300 Add Image to Current Measurement............... 28, 39
4191.............................................212, 218, 295, 300 Add New Timer Icon..............................................102
4192.............................................212, 218, 295, 300 Add Note to Current Measurement........................39
4193.............................................212, 218, 295, 300 Adding Comments on Profiles...............................133
4231........................................................................ 53 Adding Notes on Profiles.......................................133
4397-A .................................................................. 296 Adjust Gain of Annotation ......................................85
4513...................................................................... 296 Advanced use of the Analyzer
4514...................................................................... 296 Tips and Tricks ..................................................79
4533-B .................................................................. 296 Alarm Settings.........................................................93
4534-B .................................................................. 296 Alhambra Colour Scheme .......................................80
4950.............................................212, 218, 295, 300 Alternative Measurement Method .........................15
4952.............................................212, 218, 295, 300 Analyzer
4952+EH-2152 ..............................................212, 218 Assembling .......................................................14
4955..............................................................212, 218 Basic Principles.................................................37
4955-A ..........................................................295, 300 Cleaning..........................................................112
4964.............................................212, 218, 295, 300 Components.......................................................4
4966.............................................212, 218, 295, 300 Display................................................................5
6233-C .................................................................. 296 Get to Know .....................................................31
7820..................................................................36, 71 Handling Instructions .....................................112
7825........................................................................ 71 Screen.................................................................5
7831........................................................................ 71 Storing ............................................................112
7841...................................................................... 157 Analyzer Parameters .............................................293
8324...................................................................... 296 Analyzer Reset............................................8, 12, 109
8341...................................................................... 296 Annotating
8343...................................................................... 296 a Project .........................................................127
8347-C .................................................................. 296 the Profile during Measurement....................127
336
Annotations............................................................ 64 Troubleshooting ............................................. 108

Editing ........................................................... 134 Battery/power Status Icon............................... 11, 42
Gain Adjustment ............................................. 85 Bottom F. for Special Leq Parameter .................... 236
In Reverberation Time ................................... 159 Broadband Frequency Weighting ........................... 23
Inserting Annotations Using Explorer.............. 65 Broadband View ..................................................... 22
Inserting Using Explorer .................................. 65 Built-in Help ............................................................ 36
Paperclip Icon .................................................. 41 B-weighting........................................................... 319
Profile ............................................................ 127 BZ-5298................................................................... 36
Sound Categories .......................................... 133 BZ-5503..28, 36, 50, 65, 70, 87, 89, 103, 106, 111,
Viewing or Listening to.................................... 64 123, .................................................... 141, 149, 171
Annotations Icon.................................................... 41 BZ-5503-A Logging Module .................................... 71
AO-0440 ................................................................... 7 BZ-5503-B Spectrum Module ................................. 71
AO-0657 ................................................................. 86 BZ-7222................................................................. 212
AO-0697 ................................................................. 16 BZ-7222 Sound Level Meter Software ............... 1, 32
AO-0697 Microphone Extension Cable .................... 9 BZ-7223 Frequency Analysis Software....... 1, 34, 115
AO-0697-D-100 ...................................................... 16 BZ-7224 Logging Software ......................... 1, 34, 123
AO-1476 ................................................................... 7 BZ-7225 Enhanced Logging Software ........ 1, 34, 135
Applications BZ-7226 Signal Recording Option .............. 1, 34, 141
How to Update/Upgrade Them ..................... 103 BZ-7227 Reverberation Time Software ...... 1, 35, 151
Installing, Updating and Upgrading ............... 103 BZ-7229 2-channel Option .............. 1, 103, 185, 220
Optional......................................................... 103 BZ-7229 2-channel Option (Type 2270 Only) .......... 35
Pre-installed .................................................. 103 BZ-7230 FFT Analysis Software ............................. 171
Temporarily Un-install ................................... 106 BZ-7231 Tone Assessment Option ................. 35, 171
Arcade Colour Scheme ........................................... 80
Assembling your Analyzer ........................................ 3 C
Asterisk Calculating the Level Difference Between
Next to Template ............................................. 24 One Band and the Adjacent Bands ................ 173
Automatic Measurements ................................... 101 Calibration .............................................................. 51
Automatic Update of Software ............................ 104 Accredited...................................................... 113
Auxiliary Parameters Acoustic ........................................................... 51
in Reverberation Time Software.................... 163 Charge Injection............................................... 52
Average .................................................................. 33 Electrical .......................................................... 51
Averaging Time....................................................... 41 Filter............................................................... 113
A-weighting .................................................... 31, 319 History.............................................................. 55
History Parameter.......................................... 297
B Initial .............................................................. 113
Back-erase Pushbutton ...................................... 5, 43 Manual............................................................. 52
Backlight Dim ......................................................... 81 Regular Recalibration..................................... 113
Backlight Icon ................................................. 42, 108 Screen .............................................................. 39
Bandwidth Parameters......................................... 237 Settings ............................................................ 54
Basic Principles when using the Analyzer .............. 37 Standard........................................................... 52
Battery Charge Indicator .................................... 7, 12 Vibration .......................................................... 52
Recalibration ................................................. 108 Calibration History.................................................. 55
Battery Icon.......................................................... 108 Calibration Interval ................................................. 58
Battery Pack QB-0061 ............................................ 14 Calibration Reminder.............................................. 57
337
Calibration Reminder Tab ....................................... 57 Card Slot ...........................................................12

Calibration Setup .................................................. 299 CF Cards............................................................12
Calibration Types .................................................... 51 Modems ...........................................................88
Calibrator Compliance
Sound Level...................................................... 52 Type 2250/2270 Platform ...............................228
Camera ..................................................................... 6 Conformance Test Certificate................................114
Camera Icon............................................................ 29 Connect RS–232 Modem
Card Slot G4 Hardware ....................................................88
SD...................................................................8, 9 Hardware 1–3...................................................88
Card Slot CF .............................................................. 8 Connect to
Care, Cleaning and Storage................................... 112 a Printer............................................................10
CCLD ..................................................................... 269 Analyzer............................................................90
CF Card Slot .............................................................. 8 Analyzer via Internet Browser ..........................97
CF Cards.................................................................. 12 GPS Receivers ...................................................97
Recommended............................................... 107 Mobile Phone...................................................69
Troubleshooting............................................. 106 PC .....................................................................69
Character Keyboard................................................ 46 Weather Stations..............................................97
Charge Injection Calibration ............52, 58, 127, 138 Connecting
CIC.................................................................. 125 Microphone Extension Cable ...........................16
Charge Injection Calibration (Figure)...................... 59 Preamplifier and Measurement Microphone ..15
Charge Injection Calibration Parameter ............... 239 Connector
Charging the Battery for the First Time .................. 14 Triaxial LEMO....................................................10
CIC ......................................................... 58, 127, 138 Connector Panel
Theory.............................................................. 58 G 1 – 3 ................................................................7
With Active Level Trigger ............................... 138 G 4 ......................................................................8
CIC Ratio ...........................................................58, 59 Continuous Logging Parameter.............................137
CIC Ref. Date ........................................................... 59 Controlling
CIC Reference Ratio ................................................ 59 Measurements .................................................43
CIC Result the Frequency Analysis Measurement...........116
Parameters..................................................... 275 the Reverberation Time Measurement ..........157
CIC Result 1...................................................127, 138 Controlling the Measurement
CIC Result 2........................................................... 127 Using the 2-channel Option...........188, 190, 193
CIC Result 4........................................................... 138 Conventions Used in this Manual .............................1
CIC Tab.................................................................... 60 Copying Jobs/Projects .............................................63
Cleaning the Analyzer........................................... 112 Cover
Clock Display........................................................... 42 Hinged ................................................................6
Cloud ................................................................61, 65 Crest Factor ...........................................................319
Cloud Icon............................................................... 42 Criterion Level.......................................................319
Cold Start................................................................ 20 Crossover Cable ......................................................90
Colour Schemes...................................................... 80 Current Transducer Parameter..............................294
Commentary Icon .............................................41, 64 C-weighting .................................................... 31, 319
Commentary Pushbutton ...................................5, 26
Comments .............................................................. 64 D
Adding on Profiles.......................................... 133 Daily CIC Parameter ..............................................239
Microphone ....................................................... 5 Daily Noise Exposure Levels (Lep,d) or (LEX,8h) ........33
Compact Flash
338
Data Management ................................................. 61 Dual 10-pole Adaptor JP-1041........................... 9, 17

Date Format ........................................................... 82 Duration Parameter .............................................. 251
Date Separator ....................................................... 82 Dynamic Domain Name System ............................. 89
DDNS ...................................................................... 89 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol .................... 89
Decay Graphs in Reverberation Time Software.... 163 DynDNS................................................................... 88
Decay Tab in Reverberation Time Software ......... 163 DynDNS Settings ..................................................... 86
Decay Time ........................................................... 151
Decibel (dB).......................................................... 320 E
Decimal Places Earphone Socket................................................ 7, 10
Number of ..................................................... 303 Economizing On Power. .......................................... 85
Decimal Point ......................................................... 82 Edit Mode ........................................................ 47, 49
Default Editing Annotations on Profiles ............................ 134
Measurement Job/Path................................... 63 EH-2152 ................................................................ 295
Tone Assessment Measurement ................... 177 Elapsed Time........................................................... 41
Definition of Frequency Ranges ........................... 173 Electrical Calibration............................................... 51
Definition of Reverberation Time......................... 151 E-mail Notifications ................................................ 96
Delete Timer Icon ................................................. 102 Email Notifications ................................................. 93
Delete/Reconfigure Templates and Users ............ 111 Enhanced Logging
Deleting Jobs/Projects ........................................... 63 Display Results ............................................... 138
Description of Inputs/Outputs ................................. 7 Options .......................................................... 136
Description of Jobs and Projects ............................ 61 Set Up............................................................. 136
DHCP ...................................................................... 89 With Tone Assessment................................... 181
Diffuse-field Icon .................................................... 41 Enhanced Logging Measurement Screen ............. 138
DIRAC Room Acoustics Software Type 7841 ........ 157 Enhanced Logging Software BZ-7225 .... 34, 106, 135
Direct Input Icon .................................................... 41 Enhanced Vibration and
Disconnecting Low Frequency Option BZ-7234..................... 195
Preamplifier and Measurement Microphone.. 15 Equivalent Continuous Sound Level ................ 32, 33
Display Parameters..................................................... 276
Enhanced Logging Results ............................. 138 Ethernet Cable........................................................ 90
Frequency Analysis Results . 116, 188, 190, 193, Ethernet Interface .................................................. 89
198, ...................................................... 206, 208 Evaluator Type 7820 ........................................ 36, 71
Locking ............................................................ 50 Event Marker ........................................................ 131
Logging Results.............................................. 127 Exchange Rate ...................................................... 321
Reverberation Time Results........................... 159 Exclude Marker............................................ 131, 138
Tone Assessment Results............................... 179 Explorer Screen....................................................... 38
Display Colour Schemes ......................................... 80 Exposure Time ...................................................... 321
Display Screen .................................................... 5, 40 Ext. Power............................................................... 81
Display Settings ...................................................... 79 Ext. Power Setting................................................... 82
Displaying Noise Indicators .................................. 139 Extended Microphone ............................................ 15
DNS ........................................................................ 88 External Event....................................................... 142
Document your Measurement............................... 26 External Level ....................................................... 269
Domain Name System............................................ 88 External Power Socket ................................. 7, 11, 14
Dose ..................................................................... 321
DoseUQ ................................................................ 321
F
Downgrade to an Earlier Version ......................... 105
DSL Modem/Router ............................................... 88 f1 Parameter......................................................... 254
339
f2 Parameter......................................................... 254 H
Factory Default Resetting ...................................8, 12 Hand-held Analyzer.................................................32
Fast Time Weighting ............................................... 31 Handling the Analyzer...........................................112
FB-0679 Hinged Cover .............................................. 6 Hardware Maintenance ........................................114
FB-0699 Hinged Cover .............................................. 6 Hardware Overview ................................................13
FFT Analysis Software BZ-7230............................. 171 Hardware Setup ......................................................13
File Format ........................................................... 106 Hardware Version .............................................. 3, 36
File Speed ............................................................. 106 1 – 3....................................................................7
Filter Calibration................................................... 113 4 ................................................................3, 6, 8
First Check Parameter .......................................... 240 Headphone Settings................................................85
Formatting a Memory Card .................................. 107 Help.........................................................................36
Fourth Check Parameter....................................... 240 Help Icon .......................................................... 36, 42
Free-field Icon......................................................... 41 High Frequency Range ..........................................173
Frequency............................................................. 322 High Speed USB and LAN Interfaces .........................6
Frequency Analysis Hinged Cover FB-0679...............................................6
1/1- or 1/3-octave .......................................... 115 Hinged Cover FB-0699 ..............................................6
Display Results ....116, 188, 190, 193, 198, 206, Hiss........................................................................327
208 Hold Off Parameter ...................................... 137, 252
Set up............................................................. 115 How Do We Measure Reverberation Time?..........152
Frequency Analysis Software BZ-7223............34, 115 How to Change Parameter Values...........................45
Frequency Weighting............................... 23, 31, 322 How to Install New Applications ...........................103
Frequency Weighting Parameters ........................ 233 How to Manage the Project Templates...................48
Full Spectral Stat. for Reports Parameter ............. 238 How to Move a License.........................................106
Full View ................................................................. 47 How to Update/Upgrade Applications ..................103
How to Use this Manual............................................1
G Beginners ...........................................................2
G 4 ........................................................................3, 6 Experienced Users ..............................................2
Connector Panel ................................................ 8 HT-0015.....................................................................7
Gear Ratio............................................................. 269 Hysteresis..............................................................269
General Parameters......................................273, 293
Generator I
Parameters..................................................... 264 Icon
Set Up ............................................................ 116 Annotations......................................................41
Glossary ................................................................ 319 Backlight...........................................................42
Good Measurements.............................................. 14 Battery/power Status .......................................42
GPS Data................................................................. 33 Cloud ................................................................42
Instantaneous ..........................................33, 282 Commentary ....................................................41
GPS data ................................................................. 33 Help ........................................................... 36, 42
GPS Note ................................................. 27, 99, 275 Input Microphone Parameter ..........................41
GPS Receiver........................................................... 27 Loudspeaker .....................................................26
GPS Receivers Main Menu.......................................................42
Connection ...................................................... 97 No Windscreen Fitted ......................................41
Types................................................................ 98 Overload...........................................................41
G-weighting .......................................................... 197 Pause ................................................................41
PC .....................................................................41
340
Power Supply Connected ................................ 42 Sound Pressure Level ..................................... 282

Running ........................................................... 41 Instantaneous RPM .............................................. 282
Stopped ........................................................... 41 Instantaneous Time-weighted parameters............. 34
Text .................................................................. 27 Instantaneous Time-weighted Sound Level
Transducers ..................................................... 41 Parameters ........................................................... 282
Windscreen Fitted/Diffuse Field ..................... 41 Internal Battery Pack ................................................ 6
IEC 61672–1 standard............................................. 14 Internet Browsers
Image Connection via ................................................. 97
Adding ............................................................. 28 Supported ........................................................ 97
Adding to Current Measurement .................... 39 Interrupted Noise Method ................................... 156
View ................................................................ 29 Reverberation Time........................................ 152
Image Event.......................................................... 142 Introduction.............................................................. 1
Image Icon.............................................................. 65 ISO 1996-2, Annex D
Impulse Time Weighting......................................... 31 Tone Assessment Calculations ....................... 172
Impulse Trigger Parameter................................... 243 ISO/EU Occupational Health Parameters..... 273, 277
Impulsive Method ................................................ 156
Reverberation Time ....................................... 154 J
Indicator, Status ....................................................... 5 Javascript Support .................................................. 97
Indoor Colour Scheme ........................................... 80 Jobs......................................................................... 61
Initial Calibration.................................................. 113 JP-1041 ..................................................................... 9
Input................................................................... 7, 11
Input 1.................................................................... 11
L
Input Ch. 1 for Type 2270..................................... 230
Input Ch. 2 for Type 2270....................................... 11 LA90.0 ..................................................................... 324
Input for Microphone............................................... 9 LAE .................................................................. 33, 323
Input Microphone LAeq .......................................................... 32, 33, 323
Parameter Icon ................................................ 41 LAeq,T,mov........................................................ 33, 323
Input Parameters LAeq,T,mov,max.................................................. 33, 323
Channel 1 for Type 2270................................ 230 LAF .................................................................. 33, 324
For Type 2250................................................ 230 LAF(SPL) .................................................................. 324
For Type 2270 ................................................ 230 LAF90.0 ................................................................... 324
Inserting Annotations Using Explorer .................... 65 LAFmax ............................................................ 33, 324
Install LAFmin .................................................................... 324
Applications................................................... 103 LAFTeq .................................................................... 324
Language ......................................................... 83 LAN ......................................................................... 41
Install Language ................................................... 103 LAN Connection ...................................................... 89
Instantaneous LAN Interface ............................................................ 6
GPS Data.................................................. 33, 282 LAN Socket......................................................... 8, 12
Measured Spectra ......................................... 283 Languages ............................................................... 83
Peak Sound Levels ........................................... 33 Install ............................................................. 103
Time-weighted Sound Levels........................... 33 Last Calibration Date .............................................. 58
Weather Data .......................................... 33, 282 Latitude................................................................... 28
Instantaneous GPS data ......................................... 34 LavS5 ........................................................................ 33
Instantaneous Measured Parameters ..... 33, 34, 282 LavUQ ..................................................................... 324
Instantaneous Time-weighted Sound Levels . 282 LCpeak ............................................................. 33, 325
Peak Sound Level........................................... 282 LCpeak,1s .......................................................... 33, 325
341
Lday ....................................................................... 325 Logging..................................................................123

Lden ....................................................................... 325 Display Results................................................127
Lden Periods ......................................................... 262 Options...........................................................123
Lep,d ...................................................................... 325 Set Up .............................................................124
Lep,d,v .................................................................... 325 With Signal Recording ....................................144
Leq ........................................................................... 32 With Tone Assessment ...................................180
Level Average Without Frequency Analysis Software ...........124
with Exchange Rates 4, 5 or 6 .......................... 33 Logging Module BZ-5503-A.....................................71
Level Event Marker ............................................... 131 Logging Period Parameter.....................................238
Level Trigger 1 Parameters ................................... 252 Logging Software BZ-7224 .....................34, 106, 123
Level Trigger 2 Parameters ................................... 254 Longitude ................................................................28
Level Trigger 3 Parameters ................................... 254 Loudness ...................................................... 120, 326
Level Trigger 4 Parameters ................................... 254 Loudness Level ............................................. 120, 326
Level Trigger Parameters ...................................... 248 Loudness Parameter .............................................230
Level Triggers........................................................ 137 Loudspeaker Icon ........................................... 26, 156
Levening .................................................................. 325 Low Frequency............................ 274, 278, 280, 282
License Mover VP-0647 ........................................ 106 Low Frequency Option BZ-7234 ............................195
Licenses ................................................................ 103 Low Frequency Range ...........................................173
How to Move Them ....................................... 106 Low-frequency .....................................278, 280, 282
Link-local................................................................. 89 Low-frequency Parameters ...................................274
Listening to Annotations ........................................ 64 LWeq .......................................................................283
Ln .......................................................................... 325 LWeq(f1-f2).................................................... 244, 280
Lnight ..................................................................... 325 LWUN1 Parameter ................................................283
Locking LWUN7 Parameter ................................................283
Pushbuttons and Display ................................. 50 LXE .........................................................................244
the Template.................................................... 47 LXeq(f1-f2)..................................................... 120, 137
Logged (100 ms) Parameters ................................ 243 LXN1 Parameter ....................................................283
Logged Broadband Parameters ............................ 243 LXN7 Parameter ....................................................283
Logged Measurement Parameters LXUN1 Parameter..................................................283
Broadband Parameters .................................. 281 LXUN7 Parameter..................................................283
Equivalent Continuous Sound Levels .....276, 279 LYE ..........................................................................244
For Enhanced Logging Software ............279, 281 LZeq ........................................................................120
For Logging Software .............................279, 281
Maximum Time-weighted M
Sound Levels .....................................276, 279 Main Menu Icon................................................. 5, 42
Minimum Time-weighted Main Spectrum Icon..............................................117
Sound Levels .....................................276, 279 Mains Power Supply........................................... 7, 14
Parameters Available Per Logging Interval .... 280 Making a Measurement..........................................20
Parameters to be Logged and Displayed on Making your First Measurement.............................19
Spectrum Display ........................................... 281 Manual Calibration .................................................52
Sound Exposure Level............................276, 279 Manual Event ........................................................142
Special....................................................277, 280 Manual Event Marker ...........................................131
Spectrum Parameters .................................... 281 Manual Event Pushbutton ........................................5
Statistics to Calculate..................................... 280 Manual Ext. Power Switch ......................................82
US Occupational Health .........................277, 280 Map Based Measurement Parameter ...................241
Logged Spectrum Parameters .............................. 246
342
Maps in Reverberation Time Software................. 165 Memory Devices

Markers .............................. 125, 130, 131, 247, 256 Formatting ..................................................... 106
Editing ........................................................... 132 Metadata ......................... 64, 65, 99, 100, 101, 214
Event.............................................................. 131 Metadata Tab.......................................................... 65
Exclude .......................................................... 131 Micro USB ................................................................. 8
Level Event .................................................... 131 Microphone .............................................................. 9
Sound ............................................................ 131 Extension Cable ................................................. 9
Use of Pushbuttons ....................................... 131 Measurement .................................................... 5
With Types 7820 and 7825............................ 131 Mounting ......................................................... 17
Marking Sound Categories ................................... 131 Secondary .......................................................... 5
Maximum Time-weighted Type 4193 ...................................................... 301
Sound Levels Microphone Extension Cable
Parameters........................................ 276, 279 Connecting....................................................... 16
Maximum Time-weighted parameters................... 33 Microphone for Commentary................................... 5
Maximum Time-weighted Sound Levels ........ 33, 272 Microphone Holder UA-1317 ................................. 17
Measurement Microphone Input..................................................... 9
Making a.......................................................... 20 Microphone Type Parameter................................ 295
Measurement Control Parameters Microphones
for BZ-7222 to BZ-7225.................................. 238 Connecting Two Microphones ......................... 17
for Reverberation Time Software BZ-7227 .... 241 Overview for Type 2250/2270........................ 300
Measurement Feedback in the Status Field........... 22 Mid Frequency Range........................................... 173
Measurement Microphone ...................................... 5 Mini USB ................................................................... 7
Connecting ...................................................... 15 Minijack Earphone Socket ...................................... 10
Disconnecting.................................................. 15 Minimum Time-weighted
Mounting the .................................................. 14 Sound Level Parameters ............... 273, 276, 279
Placing the....................................................... 14 Minimum Time-weighted parameters .................... 33
Measurement Mode Parameter .................... 23, 238 Minimum Time-weighted Sound Levels
Measurement Parameters ................................... 271 (LAFmin)............................................................. 33
Measurement Partner Cloud ........................... 61, 65 MM-0256................................................................ 97
Measurement Partner Suite............................. 31, 65 MM-0316................................................................ 97
BZ-5503 ..... 28, 36, 50, 70, 103, 106, 111, 123, Mobile Phone Connection...................................... 69
141, .............................................................. 171 Modem Settings ..................................................... 86
Measurements Modems
Alternative Method ......................................... 15 RS–232 Interface.............................................. 88
Convenient ...................................................... 17 Settings ............................................................ 86
Default Job/Path.............................................. 63 Tested............................................................... 86
Documenting................................................... 26 USB Interface ................................................... 88
Making your First ............................................ 19 Mounting
Organizing ....................................................... 61 Analyzer ........................................................... 15
Preparing ......................................................... 99 Measurement Microphone.............................. 14
Recalling .......................................................... 64 Microphone ..................................................... 17
Reset............................................................ 5, 43 Outdoor Microphone Kit.................................. 16
Saving .............................................................. 24 Windscreen...................................................... 15
Serial.............................................................. 157 Mounting Thread
Tone Assessment ........................................... 179 For Wrist Strap ................................................... 6
with Graphical Position Management........... 165 Tripod................................................................. 6
343
Moving Equivalent Continuous Sound Level ..33, 323 NR Parameter............................................... 120, 283
Moving Jobs/Projects ............................................. 63 Definition .......................................................327
MP Cloud ..........................................................61, 65 Number Keyboard...................................................45
MPS ........................................................................ 86 Number of Decimal Places ....................................303
See also Measurement Partner Suite .............. 28 Number of Peaks (#CPeaks(>140 dB)).....................33
Multi-user Facility................................................... 83
O
N Occupational Health Parameters ..........................263
Navigating in Jobs ................................................... 62 Occupational Health Standards.............................328
Navigation Principles On-screen Feedback................................................44
Star Navigation Concept .................................. 37 Ordering Information ............................................225
Navigation Pushbuttons .....................................5, 44 Organizing Measurements ......................................61
NC Decisive Band Parameter ................................ 283 Outdoor Colour Scheme .........................................80
Definition ....................................................... 327 Outdoor Microphone Kit.........................................15
NC Parameter ...............................................120, 283 Mounting..........................................................16
Definition ....................................................... 327 Output.......................................................................7
NCB Classification Parameter ............................... 283 Output of Headphone Socket .................................85
Definition ....................................................... 327 Output Socket .........................................................10
NCB Parameter .............................................120, 283 Output Socket Signal Parameters..........................261
Definition ....................................................... 327 Overload Icon..........................................................41
Network Connection .............................................. 69 Overload Parameter..............................................244
Network Settings .................................................... 89 Overview
Parameters....................................................... 91 of Smileys .......................................................121
New Applications of Type 2250/2270 Microphones....................300
How to Install Them....................................... 103 Overview Tab in Reverberation Time Software.....159
New User Set Up..................................................... 84 Overwriting a Locked Template ..............................48
Next Calibration Date ............................................. 58
Night Colour Scheme.............................................. 80 P
NMT Server Settings............................................. 317 Padlock Icon ............................................................47
No Windscreen Fitted/Diffuse Field Icon ............... 41 Paperclip .................................................................41
No Windscreen Fitted/Free-field Icon.................... 41 Parallel Measurements
No Windscreen Icon ............................................... 41 Automated Sequence.....................................158
Noise Curve .......................................................... 120 Parameters
Noise Dose (Dose, DoseS5) .................................... 33 Analyzer..........................................................293
Noise Indicators.................................................... 274 General...........................................................293
Noise Parameters ................................................. 120 Password .......................................................... 47, 97
Notes ...................................................................... 65 Pasting Jobs/Projects ..............................................63
Add Note to Current Measurement................. 27 Pattern Evaluation.................................................209
Adding on Profiles.......................................... 133 Pause Icon ...............................................................41
Adding to Current Measurement..................... 39 PC Connection.........................................................69
Notes Screen .......................................................... 99 PC Icon ....................................................................41
Notifications ........................................................... 93 PCL ..........................................................................86
Content ............................................................ 95 Peak.........................................................................33
NR Decisive Band Parameter ................................ 283 Peak Sound Level ......................................... 276, 279
Definition ....................................................... 327 Peak Sound Level Parameters ...................... 272, 282
344
Peak Sound Levels.................................................. 33 Commentary ............................................... 5, 26

Percentile Levels (LAF90.0) ...................................... 33 Locking ............................................................. 50
Performing a Manual CIC Calibration..................... 59 Manual Event..................................................... 5
Periodic Report Parameters Navigation.......................................................... 5
General Parameters....................................... 277 Power-on............................................................ 5
Spectrum Parameters.................................... 278 Reset Measurement.................................... 5, 43
Periodic Reports........................................... 135, 276 Save....................................................... 5 , 24, 43
Placing the Measurement Microphone ................. 14 Start/Pause ........................................... 5, 21, 43
Point and Shoot...................................................... 19 Use of............................................................... 45
Polarization Voltage Parameter............................ 296
Position .................................................................. 28 Q
Post-processing and Reporting............................... 71 Qualifier Light Type 7831........................................ 71
Post-processing Parameters ......................... 266, 267 Quality Indicators
Power Consumption............................................... 81 In Frequency Analysis Software ..................... 121
Power Off ............................................................... 30 In Reverberation Time Software .................... 169
Power Settings ................................................. 80, 82 In Tone Assessment Software ........................ 181
Power Settings Screen............................................ 81 Quick Start Guide.................................................... 19
Power Supply Connected Icon ......................... 11, 42 Quick View.............................................................. 47
Power-on Pushbutton .............................................. 5
Preamplifier ....................................................... 5, 15
R
Connecting ...................................................... 15
Disconnecting.................................................. 15 Range Setting........................................................ 186
Preferences .......................................................... 303 RC Classification.................................................... 329
Preferences Screen........................................... 38, 79 RC Classification Parameter .................................. 283
Prepare Measurements.......................................... 99 RC Parameter............................................... 120, 283
Profile View......................................... 128, 129, 139 Definition ....................................................... 329
Status Field.................................................... 128 Rear Socket ..................................... 11, 57, 106, 294
ProjDose............................................................... 321 Recalibration of Battery Charge Indicator ............ 108
ProjDoseUQ.......................................................... 321 Recalling
Project Name ......................................................... 61 Measurements................................................. 64
Project Template .................................................... 24 Saved Measurements..................................... 183
Edit Mode........................................................ 49 Recording Icon ...................................................... 143
Enhanced Logging ........................................... 24 Recording Signals......................................... 127, 141
Frequency Analysis.......................................... 24 Re-create Deleted Template ................................... 50
Logging ............................................................ 24 Reference Spectrum Icon ..................................... 117
Re-create ......................................................... 50 Reference Time ..................................................... 328
Sound Level Meter .................................... 21, 24 Regional Settings .................................................... 82
Project Template Bar.............................................. 40 Regional Settings Screen ........................................ 82
Projects .................................................................. 61 Regular Recalibration............................................ 113
Protector Type 7825............................................... 71 Re-installing Software........................................... 111
PSIL...................................................... 120 , 244, 329 Reminder Pop-up.................................................... 58
Pull Up .................................................................. 269 Rental.................................................................... 114
PULSE Multi-analyzer ............................................. 71 Repair ................................................................... 113
Pushbuttons Report Period Parameter............................. 137, 238
Accept ............................................................... 5 Reset
Back-erase ................................................... 5, 43 Analyzer .............................................. 8, 12, 109
345
Button at Bottom................................ 8, 12, 109 Save Project Data at Parameter ............................137

Measurement ..............................................5, 43 Save Pushbutton ................................... 5, 24, 43, 63
Options .......................................................... 109 Saved Measurement
Pushbutton ..................................................5, 43 Viewing ............................................................25
to Factory Default ............................... 8, 12, 109 Screen ................................................................ 5, 40
Resolution of Readings ........................................... 80 SD Card Slot...............................................................8
Result Selector...................................................... 138 SD Cards
Results Recommended ...............................................107
Display in Enhanced Logging Software .......... 138 Slot .............................................................. 9, 12
Display in Frequency Analysis Software ....... 116, Troubleshooting .............................................106
188, ............................ 190, 193, 198, 206, 208 SDHC Memory Cards...............................................12
Display in Logging Software........................... 127 Second Check Parameter ......................................240
Display in Reverberation Time Software........ 159 Secondary Microphone.............................................5
Display in Tone Assessment Software............ 179 Secure Digital
Re-using Setups from Projects................................ 64 Card Slot ...........................................................12
Reverberation Time ................................................ 24 High Capacity Memory Cards...........................12
Annotations ................................................... 159 SD Cards ...........................................................12
Decay Tab....................................................... 163 SDHC.................................................................12
Definition ....................................................... 151 Selecting
Display Results ............................................... 159 Default Measurement Job/Path .......................63
Impulsive Excitation Method ......................... 154 Tone Assessment Option................................175
Interrupted Noise Method............................. 152 Serial Measurements ............................................157
Overview Tab ................................................. 159 Automated Sequence.....................................158
Serial Measurements..................................... 157 Server Settings
Set Up ............................................................ 155 NMT................................................................317
Spectrum Tab................................................. 161 Services
Typical Measurement Setup .......................... 153 Calibration......................................................113
Reverberation Time Software BZ-7227 ...........35, 151 Filter Calibration.............................................113
RPM Gear Ratio .................................................... 269 Hardware Maintenance .................................114
Rumble .........................................................327, 329 Initial Calibration ............................................113
Running Icon........................................................... 41 Regular Recalibration .....................................113
RV Parameter Rental .............................................................114
Noise Criteria ................................................. 327 Repair .............................................................113
Service Agreement .........................................113
S Training...........................................................114
Save Set Up
Enhanced Logging Results.............................. 140 Enhanced Logging ..........................................136
Frequency Analysis Results............................ 121 Frequency Analyzer........................................115
Logging Results .............................................. 134 Generator .......................................................116
Measurement ............................................24, 63 Logging ...........................................................124
Periodically with Logging ............................... 123 New Users ........................................................84
Reverberation Time Results ........................... 170 Reverberation Time ........................................155
Settings ............................................................ 49 Sound Level Meter Project Template ...............20
Save As Icon............................................................ 49 Tone Assessment............................................175
Save Icon................................................................. 49 Transducer......................................................295
Setting up a Tone Assessment Measurement
346
Default Setup................................................. 177 Sound Category .................................................... 131

Manually using ISO 1996–2, Annex D............ 176 Sound Definition................................................... 330
Manually using Italian Law ............................ 176 Sound Exposure (E)................................................. 33
Setting up the Analyzer Sound Exposure Level............................................. 33
Human Vibration........................................... 205 Sound Exposure Level Parameters....... 272, 276, 279
Settings Sound Level .......................................................... 330
Alarm............................................................... 93 Sound Level Calibration .......................................... 52
DynDNS ........................................................... 86 Sound Level Meter
Modem............................................................ 86 Definition ......................................................... 31
Setup Project Template....................................... 19, 20
Edit Mode.................................................. 47, 49 Set up............................................................... 20
G-weighting ................................................... 197 Standards ....................................................... 209
Parameters .................................................... 229 Sound Level Meter Software
Setup Screen .......................................................... 38 Start-up ............................................................ 20
Shortcut Bar ..................................................... 40, 42 Sound Level Meter Software BZ-7222 .................... 32
Signal Recording.................................. 116, 138, 141 Sound Marker .............................................. 131, 145
Import ............................................................. 71 Sound Pressure Level..................................... 33, 330
Parameters .................................................... 256 Parameters..................................................... 282
Playback ........................................................ 130 Special Parameters .............................. 274, 277, 280
Setting ........................................................... 126 Specifications........................................................ 209
Size ................................................................ 131 1/3-octave Based Tone Assessment ............... 222
With PULSE Multi-analyzer ........................... 149 2250 Enhanced Logging Software BZ-7225.... 217
With Reverberation Time .............................. 157 2250 Frequency Analysis Software BZ-7223 .. 215
With Tone Assessment .................................. 178 2250 Logging Software BZ-7224 .................... 216
Signal Recording Option BZ-7226.......... 34, 106, 141 2250 Reverberation Time Software BZ-7227 . 218
Signal Recording Timer......................................... 137 2250 Sound Level Meter Software BZ-7222... 211
SIL........................................................ 120 , 244, 329 Sound Recording Option BZ-7226 .................. 217
SIL3...................................................... 120 , 244, 329 Tone Assessment Option BZ-7231.................. 221
SLM (Sound Level Meter)....................................... 31 Type 2250/2270 Platform............................... 209
Slope of Trigger .................................................... 269 Spectrum Graph
Slot in Reverberation Time Software .................... 161
for Compact Flash (CF) Cards .......................... 12 Spectrum Module BZ-5503-B ................................. 71
for Secure Digital (SD) Cards............................ 12 Spectrum Parameters ........................................... 275
Slow Time Weighting.............................................. 31 Spectrum Statistics ............................................... 189
Small Tripod ..................................................... 15, 17 Spectrum Tab
Smileys in Frequency Analysis Software ..................... 117
Codes and Remedies in Tone Assessment..... 182 in Reverberation Time Software .................... 161
In Frequency Analysis Software .................... 121 Spectrum Weighting ............................................. 189
In Reverberation Time Software.................... 169 SPL .......................................................................... 33
In Tone Assessment Software........................ 181 Standard Calibration............................................... 52
SMS Notifications............................................. 93, 95 Standards................................................................ 14
while Online .................................................... 96 Standby Mode ........................................... 20, 81, 82
Sockets Star
Trigger Input ...................................................... 9 Next to Template ............................................. 24
Software Version .................................................... 36 Star Navigation Concept ......................................... 37
Sound Calibrator .............................................. 52, 53 Start Duration Parameter ..................................... 252
347
Start Level Parameter ........................................... 252 Time for Peak ..........................................................33

Start Slope Parameter .......................................... 252 Time for Peak Sound Levels (TCpeak)........................33
Start Time Parameter ........................................... 252 Time Remaining.....................................................108
Start/Pause Pushbutton .............................. 5, 21, 43 Time Weighted Average (TWA) ...............................33
Start-up Time Weightings............................................. 31, 322
Initial Sound Level Meter Screen ..................... 20 Time Zone................................................................82
Statistics Parameter......................................237, 243 Timed Measured Parameters ..................................33
Statistics to Calculate ........................................... 280 Timer Event Parameter .........................................256
Statistics to Calculate Percentile Levels........274, 277 Timer Period Parameter ........................................251
Status Codes Timer Setup Screen ...............................................102
In Tone Assessment Software ........................ 181 Timers....................................................................101
Status Field .......................................................40, 41 Delete.............................................................102
in Logging Profile ........................................... 128 Setup ................................................................40
in Reverberation Time Software .................... 160 When Analyzer On .........................................101
Status Indicator ........................................................ 5 with Switch-on Time.......................................101
Stop Duration Parameter...................................... 252 Tone Assessment...................................................116
Stop Level Parameter ........................................... 252 According to ISO 1996-2, Annex D .................172
Stop Time Parameter ............................................ 252 According to Italian Law .................................174
Stopped Icon........................................................... 41 Default Setup .................................................177
Storage Settings Screen .......................................... 85 Display Results................................................179
Storing the Analyzer ............................................. 112 Manual Measurement....................................176
Stylus ..................................................................5, 44 Measuring ......................................................179
Usage ............................................................... 45 Set Up .............................................................175
Switch On and Charge Setting ................................ 82 Smileys and Remedies....................................182
Switching Off .......................................................... 30 Using Enhanced Logging Template.................181
Switching On........................................................... 20 Using Logging Template..................................180
Synchronize with Clock Parameter ....................... 251 With Signal Recording ....................................178
Tone Assessment Option BZ-7231.................. 35, 171
T Top Freq. for Special Leq Parameter .....................236
Table Format Icon ................................................. 119 Top Socket ............................................................ 6, 9
Tables in Reverberation Time Software ................ 160 Total Measurement Parameters
Tacho .................................................................... 269 CIC Results......................................................275
Tacho Input............................................................. 10 Equivalent Continuous Sound Level ...............272
Tacho Probe Connection .......................................... 7 For BZ-7222 ....................................................272
TCpeak .................................................................... 330 For BZ-7223 ....................................................272
Template Explorer .................................................. 39 For BZ-7224 ....................................................272
Templates ............................................................... 24 For BZ-7225 ....................................................272
Asterisks........................................................... 24 General...........................................................273
Delete or Reconfigure.................................... 111 ISO/EU Occupational Health ..........................273
Temporarily Un-install Applications...................... 106 Low-frequency Parameters .. 274, 278, 280, 282
Text Icon ...........................................................27, 65 Maximum Time-weighted Sound Levels.........272
Text Messages...................................................93, 95 Minimum Time-weighted
Theory of CIC .......................................................... 58 Sound Level................................................273
Third Check Parameter ......................................... 240 Peak Sound Level............................................272
Threshold Level .................................................... 330 Sound Exposure Level ....................................272
Special ............................................................274
348
Spectrum ....................................................... 275 Type 2250/2270 Microphones .............................. 300

Statistics to Calculate Percentile Type 2270
Levels as spectra ....................................... 275 Camera............................................................... 6
US Occupational Health................................. 273 Channel 1 ......................................................... 11
Weather Data Parameters............................. 275 Channel 2 ......................................................... 11
Total Parameter............................................ 127, 138 Connecting Two Microphones ......................... 17
Touch Screen ...................................................... 5, 40 High Speed USB and LAN Interfaces .................. 6
Troubleshooting ............................................ 108 Input Parameters ........................................... 230
Touch-sensitive Screen........................................... 40 Input Parameters Channel 1 .......................... 230
Traffic Light............................................................. 44 Type 4964 ............................................................. 301
Training ................................................................ 114 Type Approval....................................................... 209
Transducer Types of Calibration ................................................ 51
Connecting .................................................... 186
Icons ................................................................ 41 U
Setup ............................................................. 295 UA-0587.................................................................. 15
Transducer Database.............................................. 55 UA-0801........................................................... 15, 17
Transducer Parameters ........................................ 295 UA-1317.................................................................. 17
Transducers Screen ................................................ 39 UA-1404.................................................................. 15
Transfer UA-1650.................................................................. 15
Data ................................................................. 69 UA-1651.................................................................. 15
Templates ........................................................ 50 UA-1673.................................................................... 6
Triaxial LEMO connector ........................................ 10 UC-0211 ............................................... 212 , 295, 300
Trigger Input........................................................... 10 UL-1019 .................................................................. 90
Socket ................................................................ 9 Unlock.............................................................. 48, 50
Trigger Parameters ............................................... 251 Update or Upgrade ............................................... 104
Triggers Parameter ............................................... 137 Updating Applications .......................................... 103
Tripod ..................................................................... 15 Upgrading Applications......................................... 103
Adaptor ............................................................. 6 Upload to MP Cloud................................................ 67
Extension Stem................................................ 15 US Occupational Health Parameters.... 273, 277, 280
Mounting Thread............................................... 6 USB Connection ...................................................... 69
Small.......................................................... 15, 17 USB Interface ....................................................... 6, 9
Troubleshooting ................................................... 106 USB Stick
Battery Charge Indicator ............................... 108 Troubleshooting ............................................. 106
Battery Pack .................................................. 108 USB Type A.............................................................. 88
Reset Options ................................................ 109 Socket ................................................................ 9
SD and CF Cards............................................. 106 Use of
Touch Screen ................................................. 108 Navigation Pushbuttons................................... 44
USB Stick........................................................ 106 Pushbuttons for Controlling Measurements.... 43
When Selecting an Interval for Storing ......... 147 Stylus................................................................ 44
When Setting a Marker ................................. 147 Users
Turn off Backlight ................................................... 81 Delete or Reconfigure .................................... 111
TWA...................................................................... 330 New.................................................................. 84
TWAv .................................................................... 330 Users and Projects ................................................ 306
Type 2250 Users and Projects Parameter ................................ 83
Input Parameters........................................... 230
349
V Web Page for Veiwing and Control .........................77

Versions .................................................................. 36 What is the Hand-held Analyzer? ...........................32
Vibration Calibration ........................................52, 60 Wi-Fi........................................................................41
View and Control Instrument Web Page ................ 77 Parameters .......................................................92
View Area ............................................................... 42 Wi-Fi Connection ....................................................90
View Instrument Web Page.................................... 76 Wind Parameters ....................................................98
Viewing Windscreen
Annotations ..................................................... 64 Mounting..........................................................15
Data ................................................................. 64 Windscreen Fitted Icon...........................................41
Saved Measurement ........................................ 25 Windscreen Fitted/Diffuse Field Icon .....................41
Viewing Data .......................................................... 64 Wired LAN Connection............................................90
Views ...................................................................... 40 Wireless LAN
Voltage.................................................................. 282 Connection .......................................................89
VP-0647 ................................................................ 106 WLAN ......................................................................89
Wrist Strap
W Mounting Thread ...............................................6
Warm Start ............................................................. 20
Weather.................................................................. 98
X
Weather Data ................................33, 275, 278, 281 XL View ...................................................................22
Instantaneous ..........................................33, 282
Weather Station MM-0256 .................................... 97 Z
Weather Station MM-0316 .................................... 97 ZC-0032 ............................................................ 15, 55
Weather Stations ZG-0426.............................................................. 7, 14
Connection ...................................................... 97 Z-weighting .............................................................31
Types................................................................ 97
350
USER MANUAL
Hand-held Analyzer
Types 2250 and 2270
With Sound Level Meter Software BZ-7222,
Enhanced Logging Software BZ -7225,
BE 1713 – 34
English
BE 1713 – 34
ËBE-1713---|Î
www.bksv.com © Brüel & Kjær. All rights reserved.

BK 2250 2270 Uputstvo

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BK 2250 2270 Uputstvo

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BK 2250 2270 Uputstvo

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

USER MANUAL

www.bksv.com © Brüel & Kjær. All rights reserved.

Risks and Hazards

Description of Jobs and Projects............................................................................................. 61

GPS Receivers ......................................................................................................................... 98

Annotating a Project ............................................................................................................. 127

Annotating Projects and Positions ....................................................................................... 159

D.10 Notification Settings ............................................................................................................. 313

1.1 How to Use this Manual

1.1.1 Conventions Used in this Manual

Icons, Buttons and Tabs Used on the Screen

Parameter Values, Text and Variables

Menu, Parameters and Screen Navigation

1.1.3 Experienced Users of Acoustic Measurement Equipment

2.1 Determining Your Hardware Version

2.1.1 What is Different with G4 Hardware?

2.2 Analyzer Components

Fig.2.1 Analyzer components

1) Measurement Microphone: A Brüel & Kjær Prepolarized Free-field ½″ Microphone. A

2.3 Analyzer Inputs/Outputs

2.3.1 Hardware Versions 1 – 3 (G1 – 3):

8) Reset Button: Press to reset the analyzer if you have problems.

2.3.2 Hardware Version 4 (G4):

2.3.3 Description of Inputs and Outputs

Connect to a Wi-Fi Network via USB (G4 Only)

Connect to a Printer via USB

Trigger and Tacho Input

Input 1 or Rear Socket Channel 1 (Type 2270 only)

Input (Input Ch.2 or Rear Socket Channel 2 for Type 2270)

Battery Charge Indicator

Slot for CompactFlash (CF) Cards (Hardware versions 1 – 3 only)

Slot for Secure Digital (SD) Cards

2.4 Hardware Setup

2.5 Assembling the Analyzer

2.5.1 Charging the Battery for the First Time

2.5.2 Making Good Measurements

Placing the Measurement Microphone

Mounting the Measurement Microphone

Mounting the Windscreen

You are ready to start measuring, see Chapter 3.

2.5.3 Alternative Measurement Method (Extended Microphone)

Mounting the Outdoor Microphone Kit

Connecting a Microphone Extension Cable

To connect a microphone using an extension cable:

Connecting Two Microphones (Type 2270 only)

Mounting the Measurement Microphone on the Microphone Holder and Tripod

2.5.4 Measuring for Convenience

2.5.5 Measuring Using Accelerometers

This chapter describes:

3.1 Point and Shoot

3.2 Making a Measurement

3.2.2 Select Template and Measure

3) Press the Start/Pause pushbutton to start the measurement.

The indicators are:

5) Toggle between different display parameters, as required, by tapping on each parameter

Change the broadband weighting parameters by tapping on the next to Frequency

What is a Project Template?

3.3 Save your Measurement

3.3.1 Viewing the Saved Measurement

3.4 Document your Measurement